JP2022093603A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having an appropriate reaction force in operation.

SOLUTION: An energization device 362 is configured in a mode for suppressing an increase in burden that a player performing input operation receives in one portion of a movement range of at least an inclination device 310 and in a movement range separated from an initial position by a predetermined distance, thus reducing a burden that the player receives and preventing the player from getting tired.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an operated means for a player to perform a pushing operation, and is controlled in an manner of switching inputs according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine (Patent Document 1).

2010-252949 Publication No.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the reaction force generated when the operating member is operated. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a good reaction force generated when operating an operating member.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a gaming machine including an input means for a player to perform an input operation, wherein the input means is an operated means to be input-operated by the player and a subject thereof. The operating means is provided with a load changing means that applies a load in the opposite direction of the input operation and is configured to be able to change the load, and the load changing means is a first urging that transmits an urging force to the operated means. Between the means and the second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the opposite side of the operated means with respect to the first urging means, and between the first urging means and the second urging means. The urging force changing means, which is arranged in the above-mentioned and is formed so as to be able to change the urging force generated by the first urging means and the second urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. The means includes telescopic means that expand and contract along the direction in which the first urging means and the second urging means are arranged in series.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the telescopic means is formed so as to be able to expand and contract to one side of the first urging means side or the second urging means side.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the expanding / contracting means expands / contracts by the driving force of a single driving means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the reaction force at the time of operating the operating member can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, a plurality of types of reaction force changing modes can be provided.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the number of arranged drive means can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a top view exploded perspective view of the operation device. It is a top view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a bottom view disassembled perspective view of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the upper cover, (b) is a side view of the upper cover in the arrow XIIb of FIG. 12 (a), and (c) is a top view of the upper cover. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the upper cover in line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 12A, and FIG. 12B is a perspective view of the bottom surface of the upper cover. (A) is a front view of the lower cover, (b) is a side view of the lower cover in the arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), (c) is a top view of the lower cover, and (d). ) Is a cross-sectional view of the lower cover in the XIVd-XIVd line of FIG. 14 (a). (A) to (d) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIVd-XIVd line of FIG. 14 (a). (A) is a top view of the shaft cover, (b) is a front view of the shaft cover, and (c) is a side view of the shaft cover in the arrow XVIc of FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view exploded perspective view of the lower case. It is a bottom view disassembled perspective view of the lower case. (A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a graph which shows the load applied to the tilting device with respect to the tilting angle from the ascending position of the tilting device. It is a top view exploded perspective view of the tilting device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of a tilting device and a lower case. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of a tilting device and a lower case. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a graph which shows the load applied to the tilting device with respect to the tilting angle from the ascending position of the tilting device. (A) is a front perspective view of the rotary piston member according to the third embodiment, (b) is a partial front perspective view of the lower case, and (c) is a partial front perspective view of the shaft cover. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in 4th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a graph which shows the load applied to the tilting device with respect to the tilting angle from the ascending position of the tilting device. It is a side view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the upper case, and (b) and (c) are sectional views of the upper case and the third urging device in the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) is a side view of the rotary roller, and (b) is a front view of the rotary roller in the arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36. It is a side view of the operation device in 6th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial side views of the operating device. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to 7th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the eighth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the tilting apparatus in the 9th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operation device in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timed change of the drive solenoid in the 1st operation pattern. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of the operating device. It is a figure which showed the change of the arrangement of the moving end member at the end of an operation corresponding to the change of the time required to operate a pedal from an ascending position to a descending position of a tilting device. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the drive solenoid in the 2nd operation pattern. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operation device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timed change of the drive solenoid in the 3rd operation pattern. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a figure which showed the change of the kind of reaction force given to a player corresponding to the change of the time required to operate a pedal from an ascending position to a descending position of a tilting device. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the drive solenoid in the 4th operation pattern. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). It is an exploded perspective view of a drive motor and a transmission device. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device according to the thirteenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device according to the fourteenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operation device in the 16th embodiment. (A) and FIG. 74 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of the operating device. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of FIG. 19A of the operation device according to the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 19B is a partial perspective view of a deformed rotating member. It is a developed view of the outer peripheral surface of a deformed rotating member. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 22, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or an off symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric motor is operated once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor M1.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and the tilting device 310 is a storage recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The area composed of is made movable. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can easily enter. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by inserting his / her finger into the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310.

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a) is shown. Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in an ascending position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in a descending position (pushing end in the present embodiment). The state is illustrated, and an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "pushing the pedal") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Before the specific display appears, the player stands by with his / her hand placed on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 6 (b)). At this time, by placing a hand on the upper part of the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, the player can operate the tilting device 310 immediately when a specific display appears while keeping the tilting device 310 in the raised position. So you can easily wait.

From the state shown in FIG. 6B, the tilting device 310 is operated by moving the tilting device 310 from the ascending position to the descending position by tilting the hand around the base of the hand (FIG. 7B). reference). In the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to be able to detect the tilting angle from the ascending position.

The accommodating recess 17a of the upper plate 17 is arranged sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the player grips the left and right side surfaces of the tilting device 310, it is possible to easily insert a finger between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a.

As shown in FIG. 7, the player moves (tilts) the tilting device 310 by applying a force in the direction of the arrow F1 that draws a curve along an arc from the state shown in FIG. That is, since the direction of the force for moving the tilting device 310 draws a curved line instead of a straight line, even if the player applies a large linear force to the tilting device 310 at the ascending position (see FIG. 6), the tilting device 310 As it moves, the angle between the direction of the force and the direction of movement of the tilting device 310 (tangential direction of the rotation locus) increases. Therefore, the load applied to the tilting device 310 in the descending position can be reduced (the linear force given by the player can be partially released).

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 of the operating device 300 is arranged in the ascending position (see FIG. 6). As shown in FIG. 8, the operation device 300 is configured such that the tilting device 310 having a fan-shaped cross section is pivotally supported at the front end and tilted with respect to the pushing operation (see FIGS. 6 and 7).

FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the upper surface of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 9, the operation device 300 is a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the front side end portion (the front end portion on the paper in FIG. 9), and the tilting device 310. A lower case 360 that has a concave bearing portion 361a that supports the ring member BR1 from below and forms a push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower case 360 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and faces the lower case 360. It has a recessed portion to be arranged, and the tilting member 310 is placed between the tilting member 310 and the lower case 360. The upper case 370 (where the tilting device 310 is abutted against the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame) is mainly provided.

The lower case 360 is a member that supports the tilting device 310 when it is pushed in. Therefore, before and after the operation, the tilting device 310 and the lower case 360 repeatedly abut and separate from each other. If the harness or the like housed inside the lower case 360 is pinched when the tilting device 310 and the lower case 360 come into contact with each other, the wire may be broken and cause a failure.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positioning plate 363e formed in a plate shape is arranged on the front side of the power acting device 363. By arranging the wiring of the harness etc. in the space behind the positioning plate 363e, the harness etc. protrudes between the tilting device 310 and the receiving surface 361e and between the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332, and at the time of operation. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched.

FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the top surface of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom surface of the tilting device 310. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the tilting device 310 is arranged at the uppermost portion and has a role as a decorative portion having the highest degree of attention from the player, and is a portion that is pushed in by the player and has a light-shielding property. On the upper cover 311 formed of a high material, the lower cover 320 formed of a light-transmitting material, which is vertically overlapped with the upper cover 311 and fastened and fixed to the upper cover 311, and the upper cover 311. A shaft cover 330 that is fastened and fixed and sandwiches the lower cover 320 between the upper cover 311 and the working claw portion 332, a pair of shaft members 340 that are internally fitted between the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330, and the upper A curved curved member 350 disposed between the inside of the rear end of the cover 311 and the outside of the rear end of the lower cover 320 and having a comb-shaped comb-shaped portion 352, and the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320. It mainly includes a drive motor M1 sandwiched between them, and a ring-shaped ring member BR1 in which the extended size shaft portion 313c of the upper cover 311 and the extended half shaft portion 331c of the shaft cover 330 are internally fitted.

The shaft members 340 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and have a cylindrical tubular portion 341 that is internally fitted into the recessed portions 313b, 331b and the extended semi-shaft portions 313c, 331c of the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330, and the cylindrical portion 341 thereof. A disk portion 342 formed in a disk shape having a diameter larger than that of the tubular portion 341 in the middle of the tubular portion 341, and the disk portion 342 are locked to move in the axial direction, and the tubular portion 341 is located in the twisted portion. It mainly includes a torsion spring 343 that is arranged in a inserted state.

By arranging a pair of left and right shaft members 340, the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330 can be fastened and fixed by passing a fastening screw near the center of the shaft center. As a result, even if a large load is applied by the player near the center of the shaft center (even if the player makes an erroneous operation), the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330 are placed on the shaft center due to the strength of the fastening screw. It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the central portion from being damaged.

The outer diameter of the tubular portion 341 is set as a diameter that defines the allowable reduction limit of the torsion spring 343. By setting this diameter, it is possible to adjust the reaction force generated from the torsion spring 343 during operation. That is, the torsional spring can increase the elastic force by reducing the diameter of the circular portion, but in the range where the torsional spring 343 can be reduced in diameter due to deformation, it reverses as the operating angle of the tilting device 310 increases. While the force can be increased, if the diameter reduction limit is reached during the operation of the tilting device 310, the lower arm 343a or the upper arm 343b will be deformed with respect to the circular portion even if the operating angle of the tilting device 310 is increased. Since it stays, the amount of increase in the reaction force can be significantly reduced.

Therefore, the setting mode of the reaction force of the torsion spring 343 with respect to the operation angle of the tilting device 310 is the mode in which the elastic force increases in a proportional relationship with the change of the tilting angle of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 is tilted halfway. It can be selected from the mode in which the elastic force increases in a proportional relationship with the change in the angle, but the change in the elastic force is suppressed from a predetermined angle. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the reaction force of the torsion spring 343 with respect to the operating angle of the tilting device 310.

The torsion spring 343 includes a lower arm 343a extending downward on the inner side of the tilting member 310 in the axial direction and an upper arm 343b extending upward on the outer side in the axial direction, and the lower arm 343a is inserted into the through hole 331f of the shaft cover 330. The upper arm 343b is locked to the notch 314a of the upper cover 311 and the notch 323a of the lower cover 320.

In the torsion spring 343, the diameter reduction limit is restricted to the outer shape of the tubular portion 341, and the diameter expansion limit is restricted to the inner shape of the accommodating portions 313a and 331a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 343 from being excessively reduced in diameter or expanded in diameter due to deterioration over time, quality of parts, or operation of the tilting device 310 in an unexpected operation mode. be able to. As a result, the torsion spring 343 can be prevented from being suddenly deformed, so that the elastic modulus can be easily maintained for a long period of time (several years).

The size of the diameter of the torsion spring 343 can be arbitrarily set. For example, when the outer diameter of the torsion spring 343 is set to be about the same as the inner peripheral diameter of the accommodating portion 313a, the outer peripheral portion of the torsion spring 343 comes into contact with the accommodating portion 313a in the assembled state.

Therefore, when the player operates in a manner of hitting the vicinity of the upper half of the cylinder 313, the elastic force (force generated when expanding and contracting in the radial direction) of the torsion spring 343 is deformed (crushed downward) of the upper half of the cylinder. It can be used as a resistance against such deformation). As a result, the upper half of the cylinder 313 can be supported from below, so that it is possible to prevent the upper half of the cylinder 313 from being damaged. That is, the torsion spring 343 has both an effect of generating a reaction force for returning the tilting device 310 to the ascending position and an effect of preventing damage to the cylindrical upper half portion 313 of the upper cover 311.

The curved member 350 includes a main body portion 351 having an I-shaped cross section that curves along the shapes of the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 and the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320, and the front end portion of the main body portion 351 (FIG. It mainly includes a comb-shaped portion 352 extending to the right in a shape along the shape of (10 paper surface front side) and a switching extending portion 353 extending in the opposite direction of the comb-shaped portion 352.

The main body portion 351 has a plate-shaped pinched portion 351a extending in the left-right direction from the back end portion (the back side of the paper in FIG. 10), and a portion adjacent to the pinched portion 351a at the lower end portion, which is recessed upward. A fitting recess 351b is provided, and the sandwiched portion 351a is provided between the inside of the rear end portion (curved wall portion 316) of the upper cover 311 and the outside of the rear end portion (curved wall portion 322) of the lower cover 320. Be pinched.

The sandwiched portion 351a is a plate portion that curves along the shape of the curved wall portion 322, and is a portion that is sandwiched between the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 and the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320. ..

The comb-shaped portion 352 includes a convex portion 352a projecting to the right from the main body portion 351 and a concave portion 352b sandwiched between adjacent convex portions 352a and recessed toward the main body portion 351. In the present embodiment, they are arranged at equal intervals (intervals that are switched every time the tilting device 310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° in the assembled state).

The switching extension portion 353 includes a convex portion 353a projecting to the left from the main body portion 351 and a recessed portion 353b adjacent to the lower end portion of the convex portion 353a and recessed toward the main body portion 351. , Equipped with. In the present embodiment, the boundary positions of the convex portion 353a and the concave portion 353b are configured to coincide with the intermediate position (half position) of the convex portion 352a at the lower end of the comb-shaped portion 352.

The drive motors M1 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and include a fan-shaped weight member M1a that is eccentrically supported by a rotary shaft that is driven to rotate. When the drive motor M1 is rotationally driven, the center of gravity of the weight member M1a moves, and the tilting member 310 can be vibrated by the movement of the center of gravity, which raises the expectation of the player who operates the tilting device 310. can.

Wiring such as a harness that supplies electric power to the drive motor M1 hangs down from the left and right ends of the motor support portion 325 to the lower side of the tilting device 310. After that, it penetrates into the inside of the main body member 363a through the lower surface of the decorative plate 363d via the lower side of the positioning plate 363e (see FIG. 17). The details will be described later.

Next, the upper cover 311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. 12 (a) is a front view of the upper cover 311, FIG. 12 (b) is a side view of the upper cover 311 in the arrow XIIb of FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 12 (c) is a side view of the upper cover. It is a top view of 311. 13 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper cover 311 in the line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 13 (b) is a bottom perspective view of the upper cover 311.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the upper cover 311 is arranged at a plate-shaped pressing plate portion 312 that inclines upward from the front side to the back side and a front end portion of the pressing plate portion 312. The upper half of the cylinder 313, which has a half-pipe shape whose outer shape extends in the left-right direction, and the upper half of the cylinder 313 in the front side of the pressing plate portion 312 in the vertical direction toward the rear end (FIG. 13). (A) The front side wall portion 314 extending along the (vertical direction) and the rear side wall extending from the pressing plate portion 312 in parallel with the front side wall portion 314 at a predetermined interval behind the front side wall portion 314. A portion 315, a curved wall portion 316 extending downward from the rear end portion of the pressing plate portion 312, and an upper cover 311 extending along the same plane from the lower end portion of the curved wall portion 316. It mainly includes a bottom wall portion 317 forming a bottom surface.

The pressing plate portion 312 is configured so that the central portion in the left-right direction projects upward as compared with the outer portion in the left-right direction, and the opening 312a is provided in the portion opposite to the upper half portion 313 of the cylinder. The opening 312a is a portion where the overhanging portion 321a of the lower cover 320 overhangs, and the effect of light by the LED arranged on the decorative plate 363d (see FIG. 9) can be visually recognized through the lower cover 320.

The upper half of the cylinder 313 is a portion in which the central axis of the cylinder is the same as the rotation axis of the tilting device 310. It has a recessed portion 313b formed as a recessed portion having a semicircular cross section and an inner peripheral surface having substantially the same shape (slightly larger radius) as the recessed portion 313b, and faces outward from the tilting device 310. A fastening hole 313d, which is arranged on the center side of the tilting device 310 from the recessed portion 313b and the extended half-shaft portion 313c extended in the shape of a half pipe, and the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the shaft cover 330 is fixed. And, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the raised position, the overhanging contact portion 313e and the recessed portion 313b that are brought into contact with the overhanging contact portion 361 g (see FIG. 9) of the lower case 360 in the circumferential direction are provided. It mainly includes a flat wall-shaped alignment wall portion 313f formed along a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 on the opposite side of the accommodating portion 313a.

The accommodating portion 313a forms a space in which the torsion spring 343 of the shaft member 340 and the disc portion 342 are accommodated. Since the disk portion 342 is accommodated facing the extended half-axis portion 313c side, the disk portion 342 abuts on the inner wall of the accommodating portion 313a on the extended half-axis portion 313c side in the axial direction (FIG. 16 (a)). ) Left-right direction) misalignment is prevented.

The recessed portion 313b and the extended half shaft portion 313c are portions where the cylindrical portion 341 of the shaft member 340 is internally fitted together with the cylindrical lower half portion 331 of the shaft cover 330 in the assembled state of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 9). Yes, and the extended half-axis portion 313c is internally fitted in the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 11).

The fastening hole 313d is a screw hole into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the shaft cover 330 is fixed. In the assembled state of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 9), the strength of the fastening screw fixed to the fastening hole 313d can reinforce the upper half of the cylinder 313, so that the player can reinforce the upper half of the cylinder 313 (tilting device). Even if an operation such as hitting the front side portion of the 310 is performed, it is possible to prevent the tilting device 310 from being damaged.

The overhanging contact portion 313e has an effect of producing an effect by being visually recognized together with the decoration of the front end portion of the lower case 360 (see FIG. 9), and the tilting device 310 moves upward and rises. When it reaches the position, it comes into contact with the contact portion 361 g and functions as a detent.

The alignment wall portion 313f is a wall portion on which the end portion of the shaft member 340 opposite to the side on which the disk portion 342 is arranged can be abutted, and the abutment allows the shaft member 340 to abut in the axial direction. The misalignment of is prevented.

In the present embodiment, the length from the inner wall of the accommodating portion 313a on the extended half-shaft portion 313c side to the alignment wall portion 313f is a torsion spring 343 in the plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the disk portion 342 of the shaft member 340. Is equal to the length from the surface on the opposite side to the side on which the torsion spring is arranged to the end on the side where the torsion spring of the tubular portion 341 is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft member 340 from moving in the axial direction in the assembled state.

That is, the alignment wall portion 313f can have both an effect as a reinforcing rib for increasing the rigidity of the upper half portion 313 of the cylinder and an effect as a positioning portion for positioning the shaft member 340 in the axial direction.

The front side wall portion 314 is a plate-shaped portion connected to the rear end portion of the upper half portion 313 of the cylinder, and includes notches 314a arranged in pairs in the front-rear direction at both left and right end portions. Since the notch 314a is a notch in which the upper arm 343b (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is locked, the tilting device 310 has an urging force in the rotational (tilting) direction from the torsion spring 343 via the notch 314a. Receive.

The rear side wall portion 315 is a portion that comes into contact with the contact end surface 321b of the lower cover 320 on the surface, and is a plate-shaped reinforcing plate portion that is disposed between the front side wall portion 314 and connected to the front side wall portion 314. 315a is provided.

In the reinforcing plate portion 315a, a plurality of plate-shaped portions are arranged symmetrically, and the plate-shaped portions other than the plate-shaped portions arranged at the center are recessed supports which are recesses on the lower surface for receiving and supporting the drive motor M1. A unit 315b is provided. As a result, a plurality of small frame shapes are formed in the front side wall portion 314, the rear side wall portion 315, and the reinforcing plate portion 315a, so that the strength in the vicinity of the front side wall portion 314 and the rear side wall portion 315 of the pressing plate portion 312 can be improved. Can be done.

The curved wall portion 316 is configured such that the central portion in the left-right direction projects outward from the upper half portion 313 in the left-right direction as compared with the outer portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 13B), and the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 13B). That is, it is a plate-shaped portion curved vertically and horizontally formed in an arc shape centered on the center of the circle of the upper half of the cylinder), and is curved along the vertical direction on the inner side surface (side surface on the rotation axis side). A curved recess 316a to be recessed is provided. The width of the curved recess 316a is formed to be slightly larger than the width of the sandwiched portion 351a of the curved member 350.

The curved wall portion 316 includes a first peripheral surface 316b and a second peripheral surface 316c having different separation widths from the rotation axis O1 (see FIG. 19B) as the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The first peripheral surface 316b is arranged near the center position in the left-right direction of the tilting device 310, and has the longest separation width from the rotating shaft O1 (in the arc centered on the rotating shaft O1, the tilting device 310 has. It is formed as a peripheral surface (along the arc with the maximum diameter included).

The second peripheral surface 316c is arranged near both ends of the tilting device 310 in the left-right direction, and the width of separation from the rotation axis O1 is shorter than that of the first peripheral surface 316b (an arc centered on the rotation axis O1). Among them, it is formed as a peripheral surface (along an arc having a diameter shorter than the arc having the maximum diameter included in the tilting device 310).

Here, the reaction force applied when the player pushes the tilting device 310 into operation changes depending on how far the operating position of the player is from the rotation axis O1. That is, the farther the position where the pushing operation player touches the tilting device 310 is from the rotation axis O1, the smaller the reaction force applied to the player during the pushing operation (lever principle).

Therefore, compared to the case where the pressing plate portion 312 is touched and pushed in near the first peripheral surface 316b, the case where the pressing plate portion 312 is touched and pushed in near the second peripheral surface 316c is a game during operation. Since the reaction force given to the player can be increased, the player's different wishes can be fulfilled. That is, the player who wants to reduce the reaction force felt at the time of operation is urged to operate the vicinity of the first peripheral surface 316b, and the player who wants to secure a large reaction force felt at the time of operation is near the second peripheral surface 316c. By encouraging the player to operate, the same mechanism can fulfill the wishes of both players with different hopes, so that some of the dissatisfactions caused by the players can be resolved.

The upper cover 311 includes a side wall portion 318 that connects the pressing plate portion 312 and the curved wall portion 316 from the side surface. Since the lower side surface of the side wall portion 318 is formed from the same shape as the upper side surface of the side wall portion 323 of the lower cover 320 and is arranged at a position facing the side wall portion 323 in the vertical direction, the side wall portion 318 is disposed at the time of assembly. The side wall portion 323 of the lower cover 320 can be positioned by abutting the cover in the vertical direction.

Next, the lower cover 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a) is a front view of the lower cover 320, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the lower cover 320 in the arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a lower cover. It is a top view of 320, and FIG. 14 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the lower cover 320 in the XIVd-XIVd line of FIG. 14 (a).

As shown in FIG. 14, the lower cover 320 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a plate-shaped reinforcing plate portion 321 that inclines upward from the front side to the back side, and the rear of the reinforcing plate portion 321. A curved wall portion 322 that curves downward from the end portion and extends downward, and a pair of plate-shaped side wall portions that extend downward from the left-right end portion of the reinforcing plate portion 321 and are connected to the curved wall portion 322. A box connected to 323, a front contact wall portion 324 extending inward in the left-right direction from the front end of the side wall portion 323, and the front contact wall portion 324, and the front side and the upper side are open. It mainly includes a motor support portion 325 formed in a shape.

Since the upper surface of the reinforcing plate portion 321 has a shape (transferred shape) that can be in close contact with the lower surface of the pressing plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) of the upper cover 311, the reinforcing plate portion 321 is fastened to the upper cover 311 in the vertical direction. By being fixed, the strength of the upper cover 311 can be reinforced. This makes it possible to prevent the upper cover 311 from being damaged when the player gives a strong impact to the upper cover 311. Further, the reinforcing plate portion 321 has an overhanging portion 321a that overhangs upward in the central portion in the front-rear direction, an abutting end surface 321b formed on the end surface near the front left and right center position, and inside on both the left and right sides near the front end portion. It mainly includes a recessed portion 321c that is recessed from the wall toward the left and right outwards.

The overhanging portion 321a is a portion that can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 312a (see FIG. 10) of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). The overhanging portion 321a is formed of a light-transmitting resin. Therefore, the light emission of the LED arranged on the upper surface of the decorative plate 363d can be visually recognized by the player through the overhanging portion 321a.

The contact end surface 321b is arranged at a position where the contact end surface 321b abuts on the rear side wall portion 315 of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the lower cover 320 can be reinforced by utilizing the strength of the rear side wall portion 315.

When the drive motor M1 is fitted into the recessed support portion 325b1, the recessed portion 321c is recessed to a position where it does not interfere with the drive motor M1 in the top view (FIG. 14 (c) vertical view on the paper surface). That is, the drive motor M1 can be slid vertically with respect to the lower cover 320 to pass through the recessed portion 321c, and the drive motor M1 can be fitted into the recessed support portion 325b1.

As a result, when the drive motor M1 is fitted into the lower cover 320, the drive motor M! Since it is not necessary to move the motors in the left-right direction, the separation width in the left-right direction of the pair of left-right drive motors M1 can be minimized (the weight members M1a can be brought closer to each other in the left-right direction).

The curved wall portion 322 is formed from an arc shape centered on the same axis as the central axis of the curved shape of the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 (see FIG. 13A), and is formed at each position in the left-right direction. It is composed of a radius slightly smaller than that of the curved wall portion 316. As a result, the lower cover 320 can be accommodated in the upper cover 311 in a state where the curved wall portion 316 and the curved wall portion 322 are in close contact with each other.

Further, the curved wall portion 322 has a notch 322a cut in the vertical direction at the center position in the left-right direction, an enlarged opening 322b in which the notch width is expanded at the upper end portion of the notch 322a, and a lower end portion of the curved wall portion 322. 322c is mainly provided with a retaining portion 322c for closing the notch 322a.

The notch 322a is a gap through which the main body portion 351 of the curved member 350 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the dimension of the gap is slightly wider than the thickness of the main body portion 351. Further, the enlarged opening 322b is an opening through which the comb-shaped portion 352 and the switching extension portion 353 of the curved member 350 are inserted, and the width in the left-right direction is the width in the left-right direction of the comb-shaped portion 352 and the switching extension portion 353. It is made larger than the total width of the convex length).

The retaining portion 322c is a portion that prevents the curved member 350 (see FIG. 11) from coming off, and has a thickness slightly smaller than the fitting recess 351b so that it can be fitted with the fitting recess 351b of the curved member 350. Consists of shape.

The side wall portion 323 includes a notch 323a that is notched upward from the lower end on the front end surface. The notch 323a is arranged behind the notch 314a (see FIG. 11) of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), and the upper arm 343b (see FIG. 11) of the torsion spring 343 is arranged like the notch 314a. It is inserted and locked.

The side wall portion 323 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the light emission of the LED arranged on the decorative plate 363d can be visually recognized by the player through the side wall portion 323. The side wall portion 323 is emitted through the side wall portion 323 because the size of the range exposed to the upper side of the upper case 370 changes as the pushing angle of the tilting device 310 changes in the external view (see FIG. 8). The amount of light emitted can be changed by the angle of the tilting device 310. That is, the decorative plate 323d is arranged after the tilting device 310 is operated (from the rising position to reaching the descending position) as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position. Among the light emitted from the LEDs, the amount of light visually recognized by the player through the side wall portion 323 can be reduced.

The front cover wall portion 324 is formed in an arrangement in which the front side wall portion 314 (see FIG. 13 (b)) of the upper cover 311 is in contact with the front side wall portion 314 (see FIG. 13 (b)) in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the strength of the front side wall portion 314 can be utilized to reinforce the front contact wall portion 324.

The motor support portion 325 is a portion for arranging the drive motor M1 (see FIG. 10), and is a base of the drive motor M1 extending upward from the bottom plate portion 325a forming the bottom surface and the left and right ends of the bottom plate portion 325a. It mainly includes a side wall portion 325b having a recessed support portion 325b1 that supports the end portion from below, and a plate-shaped rear plate portion 325c that connects the bottom plate portion 325a and the side wall portion 325b.

By arranging the drive motor M1 (see FIG. 10) at a position close to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, which is the front end of the lower cover 320, the drive motor M1 becomes the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 10) when the tilting device 310 operates. The distance traveled relative to the lower case 360 (see FIG. 8) fixed to 1) can be kept short. Therefore, while the drive motor M1 is mounted on the moving tilting device 310, the degree to which the wiring for supplying electricity to the driving motor M1 is deformed by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be reduced. As a result, deterioration of the wiring of the drive motor M1 can be delayed, so that the maintenance period can be lengthened.

The bottom plate portion 325a includes an extension portion 325a1 extending vertically downward from the front end portion and a protruding rib 352a2 protruding downward from a position that divides the length in the left-right direction into four equal parts. Mainly prepare.

The extending portion 325a1 is a plate-shaped portion formed in the left-right direction, and is a front end portion of the acting claw portion 332 in the assembled state of the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 and the shaft cover 330. It engages with the front overhanging portion 332a1, which is a portion overhanging above the upper end of the portion 331a (see FIG. 19B). Therefore, even if a design error occurs so that the bottom plate portion 325 of the lower cover 320 is separated from the front side wall portion 314 of the upper cover 311 (with a gap) while the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 are fastened and fixed. When the working claw portion 332 is fastened and fixed to the upper cover 311, the extending portion 325a1 can be brought closer to the front side wall portion 314 side by engaging the front overhanging portion 332a1 of the working claw portion 332 with the extending portion 325a1. , The generated design error can be absorbed. Therefore, the allowable range of design error between the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 can be increased.

The protruding rib 325a2 is a rib-shaped portion formed in the front-rear direction arranged at an intermediate position of the adjacent acting claw portion 332 in the assembled state, and is a portion for ensuring the rigidity of the bottom plate portion 325a. Since the working claw portion 332 is arranged between the adjacent protruding ribs 325a2 in such a manner that the working claw portion 332 abuts on the bottom plate portion 325a in the assembled state, the working claw portion is arranged in the portion where the protruding rib 325a2 is not arranged. The rigidity of the bottom plate portion 325a can be ensured by substituting the portion 332 for the rib.

The side wall portion 325b faces the reinforcing plate portion 315a arranged on the outermost side of the plurality of reinforcing plate portions 315a (see FIG. 13B) of the upper cover 311 in the vertical direction, and faces the reinforcing plate portion 315a. The drive motor M1 can be sandwiched between the recessed support portion 315b and the recessed support portion 325b1.

The upper end surface of the rear plate portion 325c abuts on the rear side wall portion 315 of the upper cover 311 (see FIG. 13 (b)) in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). As a result, it is possible to secure a large resistance when the motor support portion 325 receives an upward load (from the piston member 362a (see FIG. 20A) described later in which the motor support portion 325 applies an upward load). It is possible to secure a large resistance when receiving it).

Next, a procedure for sandwiching the curved member 350 between the lower cover 320 and the upper cover 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a) to 15 (d) show a portion of the tilting device 310 in the line corresponding to the XIVd-XIVd line of FIG. 14 (a), which illustrates the procedure of covering the lower cover 320 with the upper cover 311 in chronological order. It is a cross-sectional view.

In addition, in FIG. 15A, a state in which the curved member 350 is inserted through the notch 322a of the lower cover 320 is shown, and in FIG. 15B, the upper cover 311 is a curved member from the state of FIG. 15A. The state in which the upper cover 311 is lowered to the position immediately before the contact with the 350 is shown, and in FIG. 15 (c), the state in which the upper cover 311 is lowered by a predetermined amount from the state in FIG. 15 (b) is shown. Then, the state in which the upper cover 311 is lowered from the state of FIG. 15C to the position where the upper cover 311 is fixed with respect to the lower cover 320 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 15, even if the fitting recess 351b of the curved member 350 is not firmly fitted to the retaining portion 322c in the assembly process (see FIG. 15A), the upper cover 311 is covered from that state. By lowering the curved member 350, the posture of the curved member 350 is changed in such a manner that the sandwiched portion 351a of the curved member 350 follows the shape of the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320 and the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 (FIG. 15 (b). ) And FIG. 15 (c)), by fully lowering the upper cover 311, it is possible to form a state in which the fitting recess 351b of the curved member 350 is fitted in the retaining portion 322c (see FIG. 15 (d)). .. As a result, the work of fixing the curved member 350 between the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 can be easily performed, and the work time can be shortened.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 15 (d), the main body portion 351 of the curved member 350 is configured such that the width direction is along the thickness direction of the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311. Even when the cover is thin, it can be prevented from being deformed in the thickness direction by the rigidity of the curved member 350. By contacting the upper end of the curved member 350 with the upper end surface of the curved recess 316a of the curved wall portion 316, the curved member 350 is prevented from moving in the vertical direction, and the curved member 350 is below the upper cover 311. It is fixed between the cover 320 and the cover 320.

When the upper cover 311 is further lowered from the state shown in FIG. 15 (d) (when it is partially destroyed by an excessive load, etc.), the curved member 350 is further pushed in, and the retaining portion of the lower cover 320 is removed. The curved member 350 may slide down by folding the 322c, but in the present embodiment, the reinforcing plate portion 321 of the lower cover 320 and the pressing plate portion 312 of the upper cover 311 come into contact with each other on the surface, so that the lower cover 320 is in contact with the lower cover 320. Since the strength for maintaining the position of the upper cover 311 is improved, it is possible to prevent the retaining portion 322c from breaking.

The shaft cover 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a top view of the shaft cover 330, FIG. 16 (b) is a front view of the shaft cover 330, and FIG. 16 (c) is a shaft cover in the arrow XVIc of FIG. 16 (a). It is a side view of 330.

As shown in FIG. 16, the shaft cover 330 extends rearward from the lower cylinder portion 331 having the same shape as the upper cylinder portion 313 (see FIG. 13 (b)) and the lower cylinder portion 331 thereof. It mainly comprises a plurality of working claw portions 332.

The lower half of the cylinder 331 is a portion in which the central axis of the cylinder is the same as the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, and the accommodating portion 331a accommodating the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and the accommodating portion 331a below the cylinder. It has a recessed portion 331b formed as a recessed portion having a semicircular cross section toward the center side in the left-right direction of the half portion 331, and an inner peripheral surface having substantially the same shape (slightly larger radius) as the recessed portion 331b. The extended half-shaft portion 331c extending in the shape of a half pipe toward the outside of the lower half portion 331 of the cylinder, and the fastening screw are arranged on the center side of the lower half portion 331 of the cylinder rather than the recessed portion 331b. The insertion hole 331d to be inserted, the overhanging contact portion 331e that comes into contact with the overhanging abutting portion 361g of the lower case 360 in the circumferential direction when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position, and the accommodating portion 331a. A plane wall-like alignment formed along a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 on the opposite side of the accommodating portion 331a with the recessed portion 331b sandwiched between the through hole 331f formed through the recessed portion 331b side. Mainly provided with a wall portion of 331 g. The accommodating portion 331a, the recessed portion 331b, the extended half-shaft portion 331c, the insertion hole 331d, and the overhanging contact portion 331e have the same configuration as the cylindrical upper half portion 313 (see FIG. 13B) having the same name. Since it is the part of, the description is omitted.

The accommodating portion 331a forms a space in which the torsion spring 343 of the shaft member 340 and the disc portion 342 are accommodated. Since the disk portion 342 is accommodated facing the extended half-axis portion 331c side, the disk portion 342 abuts on the inner wall of the accommodating portion 331a on the extended half-axis portion 331c side in the axial direction (FIG. 16 (a). ) Left-right direction) misalignment is prevented.

On the other hand, the end portion of the shaft member 340 on the side opposite to the side on which the disk portion 342 is arranged is in contact with the alignment wall portion 331g to prevent axial misalignment.

In the present embodiment, the length from the inner wall of the accommodating portion 331a on the extended half-shaft portion 331c side to the alignment wall portion 331g is the torsion spring 343 in the plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the disk portion 342 of the shaft member 340. Is equal to the length from the surface on the opposite side to the side on which the torsion spring is arranged to the end on the side where the torsion spring of the tubular portion 341 is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft member 340 from moving in the axial direction in the assembled state.

That is, the alignment wall portion 331g can have both an effect as a reinforcing rib for increasing the rigidity of the lower half portion 331 of the cylinder and an effect as a positioning portion for positioning the shaft member 340 in the axial direction.

The through hole 331f is a hole through which the lower arm 343a (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is inserted, and is formed over about 45 ° around the central axis of the circumference of the lower half of the cylinder 331. Therefore, the torsional spring 343 can be twisted and deformed by displacing the lower arm 343b of the torsional spring 343 inserted through the through hole 331f on the outside of the shaft cover 330.

The action claw portion 332 is a plate-shaped portion in which a plurality (four in the present embodiment) are continuously provided in the left-right direction, and has an upper end surface 332a having a planar shape and a lower end surface 332b having an arc shape. Mainly prepare.

The upper end surface 332a is in contact with the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 325a (see FIG. 11) of the lower cover 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). As a result, the resistance to bending deformation of the bottom plate portion 325a of the lower cover 320 can be improved.

The lower end surface 332b is a side surface that comes into contact with the piston member 362a of the lower case 360, and the switching point 332c, which is the lowest point in the state shown in FIG. 16 (c), is the posture (upper) shown in FIG. 16 (c). When the end surface 332a comes into contact with the piston member 362a in a horizontal posture), it is arranged on the central axis of the piston member 362a of the lower case 360 (see FIG. 20B). Further, the lower end surface 332b includes a front arc portion 332d arranged on the front side of the switching point 332c and a rear arc portion 332e arranged on the rear side of the switching point 332c, and the front arc portion 332d thereof. The shape is such that the rear arc portion 332e forms an arc having the same radius.

It should be noted that a plurality of (four in this embodiment) working claw portions 332 are continuously provided, and each of them is in contact with the piston member 362a (see FIG. 17) of the lower case 360, so that the piston is tilted when the tilting device 310 is tilted. Since the load given from the urging device 362 (see FIG. 17) can be doubled (four times in this embodiment) based on the urging force loaded from one member 362a, the operating amount of the tilting device 310 can be increased. Even when it is small, the amount of change in the load given by the urging device 362 can be increased.

Further, even if one of the plurality of acting claws 332 is broken due to the impact when operated by the player, the remaining acting claws 332 receive a load from the piston member 362a. As a result, the game can be continued as usual. Therefore, the maintenance period of the tilting device 310 can be set long.

Next, the lower case 360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the upper surface of the lower case 360, and FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom surface of the lower case 360. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the lower case 360 has a bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with an open upper portion and a bottom receiving member 361 that is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361. An urging device 362 having a piston member 362a configured to be movable in the thickness direction (vertical direction), and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged. , Mainly prepared.

The bottom support member 361 has a recessed bearing portion 361a recessed in a semicircular shape whose upper ends are open at the left and right ends of the front end portion, and a left-right direction in the rear lower portion of the central axis of the recessed bearing portion 361a. A strip-shaped convex portion 361b that is extended in a strip shape and is projected upward, and a tubular receiver that is vertically extended in the vertical direction and has a bottom bore behind the strip-shaped convex portion 361b. A notch 361d formed along the front-rear direction in a lid plate acting as a lid for blocking the movement of the piston member 362a at the upper end of the portion 361c and the cylindrical receiving portion 361c, and a recessed bearing portion 361a. A receiving surface 361e formed as an outer U-shaped flat surface that inclines diagonally downward from the rear, a base portion 361f on which the power acting device 363 is placed, and a tilting device at an ascending position (see FIG. 8) of the tilting device 310. It mainly includes an overhanging abutting portion 361g that abuts on the overhanging abutting portion 313e of the 310 in the circumferential direction, and a rubber plate GR1 placed near the rear end portion of the receiving surface 361e.

The recessed bearing portion 361a is a recessed portion that sandwiches and supports the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 9) of the tilting device 310 together with the upper case 370, and is configured in a semicircular shape having a radius slightly larger than that of the ring member BR1. The radius.

The band-shaped convex portion 361b is a protrusion to which the lower arm 343a (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is locked. As a result, when the tilting device 310 is operated from the ascending position to the descending position, the torsion spring 343 is wound and the urging force for moving the tilting device 310 toward the ascending position is increased.

The tubular receiving portion 361c is a tubular portion into which the piston member 362a of the urging device 362 is internally fitted, and is extended in the vertical direction and has a plurality of rows (4 in the present embodiment) on the left and right. Will be set up.

The cut portion 361d is formed with a width (slightly larger than the width of the acting claw portion 332) that can accept the acting claw portion 332 (see FIG. 10) of the tilting device 310, and the central portion thereof is the urging device 362. The piston member 362a is recessed with an outer shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the hemispherical portion. Therefore, the notch portion 361d can align (suppress the misalignment) of both the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332. As a result, when the pushing amount of the tilting device 310 becomes large, the piston member 362a of the urging device 362 and the acting claw portion 332 of the tilting device 310 are displaced in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the tilting device 310). It can be suppressed.

The receiving surface 361e is a portion that is arranged to face the bottom wall portion 317 (see FIG. 10) when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the descending position. In normal times, even if an impact occurs when the tilting device 310 is placed in the descending position (even if it is moved to the descending position at high speed), the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the rubber plate GR1. As a result, the impact is absorbed, so that damage to the tilting device 310 is suppressed (in this case, a gap is provided between the receiving surface 361e and the bottom wall portion 317). On the other hand, when the rubber plate GR1 is worn, even if sufficient shock absorption is not performed, the receiving surface 361e comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310 on the surface, so that the tilting device 310 is in the lowered position. It is possible to reduce the impact (pressure) that the tilting device receives when it reaches.

The base portion 361f mainly includes a rectangular opening 361f1 and a wall-shaped positioning wall portion 361f2 projecting upward from three sides excluding the front side among the four sides that partition the upper surface.

Through the opening 361f1, an electric wiring for supplying electric power to the electric power acting device 363 is inserted. In the assembled state, no opening is formed in the bottom receiving member 361 other than the opening 361f1 (the tubular receiving portion 361c, which is the main opening, is closed by the bottom lid member 362c).

Therefore, for example, even if the player accidentally pours the beverage into the operation device 300, the beverage can be temporarily stored in the portion (peripheral portion) other than the base portion 361f, so that the beverage is immediately lowered. It is possible to prevent the drink from dripping.

The positioning wall portion 361f2 is formed in an arrangement along the outer shape of the bottom surface of the main body member 363a in the assembled state. Therefore, when the main body member 363a is assembled to the base portion 361f, positioning can be performed by pressing the main body member 363a against the positioning wall portion 361f2, so that the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

The base portion 361f is formed as a base portion that rises upward from the bottom plate of the bottom receiving member 361. Further, in the assembled state, it is a portion covered from above by the tilting device 310. Therefore, even if the player accidentally pours the beverage into the operation device 300, the beverage travels along the upper surface of the tilting device 310 and penetrates into the (peripheral) bottom receiving member 361 except for the base portion 361f. It is possible to prevent it from falling directly on the upper surface of the base portion 361f. In this case, it is possible to prevent the beverage from being applied to the upper surface of the base portion 361f before the beverage is stored by the height of the raised portion of the base portion 361f. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the beverage enters the inside through the opening 361f1 and enters the inside of the pachinko machine 10 through the wiring such as the harness.

Further, in the assembled state, the positioning wall portion 361f2 and the three sides of the bottom surface of the main body member 363a are in close contact with each other, and the upper surface of the base portion 361f and the bottom surface of the main body member 363a are in close contact with each other. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the beverage will infiltrate between the upper surface of the base portion 361f and the lower surface of the power acting device 363.

In the present embodiment, the wiring such as a harness connecting the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 is configured in such a manner that it cannot communicate with the operation device 300 unless it passes through the opening 361f1. Therefore, when a wire or the like is inserted into the pachinko machine 10 or the like through a gap of the operation device 300, it is necessary to intrude a bent path in the same manner as the above-mentioned beverage path, which may increase the difficulty of fraudulent activity. Since it can be done, it is possible to easily prevent fraud.

The urging device 362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 10) through the acting claw portion 332, and the inside of the tubular receiving portion 361c is operably supported in the vertical direction and opened downward. A bottomed cylindrical piston member 362a, a coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a tubular receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 in a manner of covering the side opening, is mainly provided.

The piston member 362a has an upper tip portion having a hemispherical shape and an upper half portion having an outer shape that allows passage through the notch portion 361d, while the lower half portion has an outer shape larger than the notch portion 361d. The passage of the piston member 362a is prevented. Further, in the lower half portion, a rib having a semicircular cross section that is projected in the eight directions from the central axis and is extended in the vertical direction is formed, so that the piston member 362a is supported by the cylindrical receiving portion 361c. By reducing the contact area between the piston member 362a and the tubular receiving portion 361c, the frictional force applied to the piston member 362a from the tubular receiving portion 361c can be reduced while maintaining the action of maintaining the posture. ..

In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b is housed in the tubular receiving portion 361c in a state of being pre-contracted from the natural length in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Therefore, when no load is applied from the acting claw portion 322, the piston member 362a is arranged at the ascending end position (the position where the movement of the piston member 362a is dammed by the notch portion 361d) by the urging force of the coil spring 362b.

The power acting device 363 is a cup-shaped main body member 363a which is mounted on the base portion 361f of the bottom receiving member 361 and whose upper end surface is inclined upward from the front to the back, and the main body member 363a thereof. The right side sensor fixing plate 363b, which is an electronic board that is inserted into a notch formed in the rear wall from the upper end to the bottom and is fastened and fixed to a plate portion extending rearward of the main body member 363a, and its right side sensor. On the left side sensor fixing plate 363c, which is an electronic board to be fastened and fixed to the plate portion extending to the rear of the main body member 363a in the same manner as the right side sensor fixing plate 363b on the opposite side of the fixing plate 363b, and on the main body member 363a. It mainly includes a decorative plate 363d, which is an electronic substrate fixed to an end surface by a surface and an LED or other lighting device is arranged, and a positioning plate 363e formed in a plate shape on the front side of the power acting device 363. ..

The main body member 363a includes an opening 363a1 opened in the bottom plate, an upper ceiling portion 363a2 which is an upper surface portion of the front and rear wall surfaces, a lower ceiling portion 363a3 which is an upper surface portion of the left and right wall surfaces, and downward from the upper end of the rear wall surface. A pair of recessed portions 363a4 recessed in a groove shape, and a plane along the inner wall of the pair of recessed portions 363a4 on the side closer to the other recessed portion 363a4 and orthogonal to the rotation axis O1. A pair of plate-shaped fixing plates 363a5 extending in parallel to the back side, an alignment protrusion 363a6 projecting directly from the lower ceiling portion 363a3 at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the lower ceiling portion 363a3, and a main body member 363a. It mainly includes a wiring guide portion 363a7 formed from a cup shape in which the front and the upper side are opened on the left and right outer sides.

The opening 363a1 is a portion serving as a passage hole through which electrical wiring such as a harness is inserted from below the base portion 361f. By connecting the electrical wiring to the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c and the decorative plate 363d, it is possible to supply electric power to the LEDs arranged on the sensors S1 to S3 and the decorative plate 363d.

The lower ceiling portion 363a3 is formed slightly (about 1 mm) lower than the upper ceiling portion 363a2 (a step is formed between the upper ceiling portion 363a2 and the lower ceiling portion 363a3). Since the decorative plate 363d is fastened and fixed to the main body member 363a in an arrangement in which the decorative plate 363d is in contact with the upper ceiling portion 363a2 in the assembled state, a slight gap can be formed between the decorative plate 363d and the lower ceiling portion 363a3. This gap can be used as a passage for electrical wiring such as a harness or as a passage for air for suppressing heat generation of the decorative plate 363d.

The recessed portion 363a4 is formed with a width that allows the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c to be inserted in the assembled state, and the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c do not protrude from the upper ceiling portion 363a2 (with the decorative plate 363d). It is formed to a depth of about (not in contact).

The fixing plate 363a5 is a plate member that comes into contact with the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c inserted in the recessed portion 363a4 and is fastened and fixed to the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c.

The alignment protrusion 363a6 is a protrusion that is inserted into the alignment hole 363d1 of the decorative plate 363d and aligns the decorative plate 363d with respect to the main body member 363a.

The wiring guide portion 363a7 is a support portion that prevents wiring such as a harness from hanging down. Wiring such as a harness connected to the drive motor M1 extends from the lower side of the positioning plate 363e in the left-right direction, passes through the inside of the wiring guide portion 363a7, and goes to the main body member 363a or the decorative plate 363d.

For example, when heading to the main body member 363a, the decorative plate 363d passes through the gap between the decorative plate 363d and the lower ceiling portion 363a3 and is inserted into the main body member 363a. It is electrically connected to the ceiling by soldering or connecting a connector.

On the right side sensor fixing plate 363b, a photocoupler type first sensor S1 and a second sensor S2 are vertically arranged at the rear end portion. On the left side sensor fixing plate 363c, a photocoupler type third sensor S3 is arranged at a position facing the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2. Each of the sensors S1 to S3 is arranged outside the main body member 363a in the assembled state.

The first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are sensors that detect the direction and position of the tilting device 310 by detecting the passage of the convex portion 352a (see FIG. 10) of the curved member 350, and the third sensor S3 is , A sensor that detects the operating state of the tilting device 310 (pushing or continuous striking operation or pedal operation for detecting the pushing amount) by detecting the passage of the convex portion 353a (see FIG. 10) of the curved member 350. In the following, an operation such as a continuous striking operation in which there is no difference in detection depending on the pushing amount is referred to as a "push operation", and an operation for detecting the pushing amount is referred to as a "pedal operation". In particular, the push operation includes a case where the tilting device 310 returns before reaching the piston member 362a, and the pedal operation includes a case where the tilting device 310 tilts while pushing the piston member 362a.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and has a gap (slit) into which a detection portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The right side sensor fixing plate 363b includes a connector receiving portion 363b1 into which a connector such as a harness is inserted into the front end portion. Electricity is sent from the connector receiving portion 363b1 to each sensor S1 and S2 via the right side sensor fixing plate 363b. The connector receiving portion 363b1 is housed inside the main body member 363a in the assembled state. As a result, the harness or the like can be inserted into the connector receiving portion 363b1 without extending the harness or the like to the outside of the main body member 363a.

The left side sensor fixing plate 363c includes a connector receiving portion 363c1 into which a connector such as a harness is inserted into the front side end portion. Electricity is sent from the connector receiving portion 363c1 to the third sensor S3 via the left side sensor fixing plate 363c. The connector receiving portion 363c1 is housed inside the main body member 363a in the assembled state. As a result, the harness or the like can be inserted into the connector receiving portion 363c1 without extending the harness or the like to the outside of the main body member 363a.

The decorative plate 363d includes a pair of alignment holes 363d1, which are through holes through which the alignment protrusions 363a6 are inserted.

The positioning plate 363e is a plate-shaped portion formed in a manner of bending and hanging from the front side wall of the main body member 363a toward the front side. By gathering the wiring of the harness etc. in the space behind the positioning plate 363e, the harness etc. protrudes between the piston member 362a arranged on the opposite side via the positioning plate 363e and the working claw portion 332, and the operation is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched at times. This will be described in detail below.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 19), the drive motor M1 is arranged directly above the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332. Therefore, if the wiring of the harness or the like connected to the drive motor M1 is hung directly below, the gap between the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332 when the wiring of the harness or the like bends during the tilting operation of the tilting device 310. May invade.

On the other hand, if the wiring of the harness or the like is passed through the lower side of the positioning plate 363e to the left or right and then crawls toward the main body, the wiring of the harness or the like bends during the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 (the length of the wiring). The center position of the wire, the portion that hangs under the influence of gravity) can be arranged on the rear side of the positioning plate 363e. In this case, even if the wiring of the harness or the like is bent and deformed, the deformed portion is stopped by the positioning plate 363e, so that the deformed portion can be prevented from entering the gap between the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332. can.

This makes it possible to simplify the work of assembling the wiring such as the harness. That is, since the moving range of the wiring such as the harness can be regulated by the positioning plate 363e, the number of fixing members such as the binding band for fixing the wiring such as the harness to the lower case 360 can be minimized, and the assembly can be performed. It is possible to prevent the work from becoming complicated.

Further, when wiring such as a harness is hung vertically downward from the main body side of the drive motor M1, the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 322 are arranged so as to avoid a position where there is a possibility of interference when the wiring is bent. However, in the present embodiment, since the movement range of the wiring such as the harness can be restricted by the positioning plate 363e, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the working claw portion 322 can be improved (at the left and right ends). The action claw portion 322 can be arranged).

The lower side surface of the positioning plate 363e inclines as it approaches the left and right ends in the vicinity of the left and right ends. That is, the vicinity of the center position on the left and right is extended downward, and the extension length is short near the positions on both ends of the left and right. As a result, the volume of the material required for the positioning plate 363e can be reduced, so that the material cost can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring of the harness or the like is set so as to shift the vicinity of the left and right end positions from the center position of the wiring of the harness or the like. Even if it is not regulated, it is possible to prevent wiring such as a harness from entering the gap between the piston member 362a and the working claw portion 332. Therefore, by chamfering the positioning plate 363e near the left and right end positions as in the present embodiment, the wiring such as the harness is combined with the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion while suppressing an excessive load on the wiring. It is also possible to secure the effect of preventing the intrusion into the gap between the 332s.

Next, the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21. 19 (a) is a front view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 19 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). Note that FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b) show a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position. Further, the XIXb-XIXb line is shown as a line passing through the center of a predetermined piston member 362a of the lower case 360.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the lower arm 343a of the torsion spring 343 abuts on the strip-shaped convex portion 361b of the lower case 360 in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the raised position. And locked. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward (tilting operation) from the ascending position, the torsion spring 343 is wound, and the urging force of the torsion spring 343 increases in proportion to the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310. do.

In the relationship between the curved member 350 and the sensors S1 to S3, in the raised position, the recessed portions 352b and 353b (see FIG. 10) of the curved member 350 are arranged in the region between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. In all the sensors S1 to S3, the light emitted from the light projecting unit reaches the light receiving unit. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is tilted, the curved member 350 is configured so that any of the sensors S1 to S3 is shielded from light, so that all the sensors S1 to S3 are irradiated from the light projecting unit. When it is detected that the light reaches the light receiving portion, it can be detected that the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the tilting operation (rotational operation) of the tilting device 310 will be described. 20 (a), 20 (b), 21 (a) and 21 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a).

20 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 3 °) from the state shown in FIG. 19 (b), and FIG. 20 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 3 °). A state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 7 °, about 10 ° from the ascending position) from the state shown in a) is shown, and is shown in FIG. 20 (b) in FIG. 21 (a). A state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 10 °, about 20 ° from the ascending position) is shown in FIG. 21 (b), and in FIG. 21 (b), the tilting device 310 is tilted from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). The state in which the 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 4 °, about 24 ° from the ascending position) and is arranged in the descending position is shown in the figure. Further, for ease of understanding, the action claw portion 322 and the piston member 362a are partially enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position, the lower end surface of the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the piston member 362a. Therefore, the load felt by the player through the tilting device 310 is the sum of the urging force of the torsion spring 343 and the urging force of the coil spring 362b.

In the present embodiment, since the coil spring 362b is arranged on the tubular receiving portion 361c in a state of being contracted by a predetermined amount from the natural length, the load applied from the coil spring 362b to the acting claw portion 332 is applied from the start of contact. Since it is large, the rate of change in the load felt by the player increases sharply (see FIG. 22).

Therefore, the player can feel that the state of the operating device 300 has changed at the position where the load applied via the tilting device 310 changes abruptly. In the present embodiment, the state between FIGS. 19 (b) and 20 (a) is the push operation state, and the state between FIGS. 20 (a) and 21 (b) is the state for pedal operation. Is configured as.

That is, the push operation (pushing operation or repeated striking operation) can be performed with the target point up to the position where the load suddenly rises in the state shown in FIG. 20 (a), and further resists the sudden rise in the load. You can operate the pedal by pushing it in. Therefore, by a single operation of tilting the tilting device 310, separate operations of push operation and pedal operation can be performed, and each operation method can be switched using the load given to the player from the tilting device 310 as a mark. Therefore, it is possible to switch each operation method intuitively (using the feeling of pressing) instead of visually changing the operation method while looking at the scale.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is pulled from the rotation shaft O1 and is rearward from the straight line N1 passing through the contact point between the action claw portion 332 and the piston member 362a (FIG. 20 (a). ) It is composed of an upward slope toward the right).

Therefore, for example, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the lower end surface 332b of the working claw portion 332 is formed along the straight line N1, so that the tilting device can be reduced. When the pushing amount of the 310 is large (see FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b)), it is possible to prevent the amount of displacement of the torsion spring 343 from becoming excessively large.

Here, as the direction from FIG. 20A to FIG. 21B, the contact point of the acting claw portion 332 with respect to the piston member 362a moves away from the rotation axis O1. Therefore, for example, the lower end surface 332b of the acting claw portion 332 is a straight line N1. When formed along the above, the displacement of the contact point in the vertical direction when the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle increases, and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b increases. The load to be applied increases.

In this case, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in with a large displacement speed, the closer to the pushing end, the sharper the change in the load applied to the working claw portion 332 from the piston member 362a, and the acting claw portion 332 becomes larger. There is a risk of damage.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower end surface 332b of the acting claw portion 332 is inclined upward toward the rear (inclined in the direction away from the piston member 362a), so that the displacement speed of the tilting device 310 is large. Even when the pushing operation is performed, the speed at which the coil spring 362b is displaced can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of change in the load applied from the piston member 362a to the acting claw portion 322 to suddenly increase.

Further, since the lower end surface 332b of the acting claw portion 332 is formed of an arc shape and the tip of the piston member 362a is formed of a hemispherical shape, the contact mode can be maintained as a point contact, and the acting claw portion 332 and the piston member 362a can be maintained. The frictional force generated between the and the can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load that causes the piston member 362a to tilt sideways (tilt in the front-rear direction) when the acting claw portion 332 tilts.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the acting claw portion 332 is inserted into the notch portion 361d of the lower case 360 in a state where the tilting device 310 is tilted by 20 ° from the ascending position. Therefore, the tip of the piston member 362a is hemispherical, the working claw portion 332 is formed with a width thinner than the diameter of the piston member 362a, and the acting claw portion 332 is formed in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 21A). Even if it is easily displaced with respect to the piston member 362a, it can be suppressed by stopping the movement of the working claw portion 332 in the left-right direction at the notch portion 361d. As a result, the urging force generated according to the displacement of the coil spring 362b can be reliably applied to the acting claw portion 332 via the piston member 362.

In addition, the separation width of the notch portion 361d is made smaller than that of the present embodiment, or a cushioning member is arranged on the side surface of the notch portion 361d, and the action claw portion 332 is sandwiched between the notch portions 361d to apply a frictional force. You may do so. In this case, since the load received by the player when the acting claw portion 332 enters the notch portion 361d can be abruptly changed, the acting claw portion 332 and the piston member 362a shown in FIG. 20A are in contact with each other. It can be formed as a position that serves as a mark next to the position where contact starts (a plurality of load boundary positions can be provided).

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the descending position, the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the rubber plate GR1 to absorb the impact at the time of stopping and at the same time. , Can give a profound feeling.

Here, a method of detecting the posture, the operating direction, and the operating speed of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the sensors S1 to S3 (see FIG. 17), when the convex portions 352a and 353a of the curved member 350 are not interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensors S1 to S3 (not shielded from light). Is turned on, and is turned off when the convex portions 352a and 353a of the curved member 350 are interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensors S1 to S3 (light-shielded).

As described above, since the sensors S1 to S3 are turned on while the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position, the counter is corrected (zero) when each sensor S1 to S3 is turned on. It is controlled by the mode.

During the tilting device 310 from the ascending position to 3 °, the second sensor S2 is turned off, the third sensor S3 remains on, and the first sensor S1 is switched on and off. In the present embodiment, the state in which the third sensor S3 is on is controlled as a push operation section. Therefore, while the third sensor S3 remains on, the pushing operation and the continuous striking operation are detected by detecting the number of times and the speed at which the first sensor S1 switches between on and off.

When the tilting device 310 is tilted at an angle larger than 3 ° from the ascending position, the third sensor S3 is turned off. In the present embodiment, the state in which the third sensor S3 is off is controlled as a pedal operation section. After the third sensor S3 is turned off, the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is detected according to the switching time of the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2, and the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 The operating direction (in which direction) of the tilting device 310 is detected by the rising timing of the pulse signal, and further, the distance and the operating direction calculated from those operating speeds are counted to detect the tilting device 310. The current posture is detected. This makes it possible to relate the degree of tilting of the tilting device 310 to the staging.

With reference to FIG. 22, the load felt by the player when the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 8) is tilted will be described. FIG. 22 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 310 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 from the ascending position. In the graph shown in FIG. 22, the tilt angle is shown on the horizontal axis in a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position (with FIG. 19B as the left end and increasing to the right from there), and the vertical axis shows the tilting angle. Shows the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 22, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 20A) until the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. (See FIG. 10), the spring constant rises at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant.

When the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position, an urging force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b is applied to the tilting device 310 via the piston member 362a (see FIG. 20A). ..

Since the coil spring 362b is arranged in a state of being contracted from its natural length in advance in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), the load felt by the player is applied at the position where the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. It changes rapidly (the rate of change in load changes). In the present embodiment, the control is switched between the push operation and the pedal operation at this position as a boundary, so that the player can use the operation method as a mark with a sudden change in load (a sudden change in the rate of change in load). Switching can be done easily.

As described above, when the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is formed along the straight line N1 (see FIG. 20A), the displacement of the piston member 362a increases as the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 increases. The ratio (displacement amount of the piston member 362a with respect to the tilt angle of the tilt device 310) becomes large.

Therefore, the amount of increase added to the urging force of the torsion spring 343 of the load applied to the tilting device 310 increases along a predetermined quadratic function as the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 increases. As shown, the rate of change of the load with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 increases toward the side where the load applied to the tilting device 310 increases (on the right side of the graph in FIG. 22). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is tilted at a high speed, the load (impact) applied from the piston member 362a to the acting claw portion 332 increases as the tilting angle increases from the ascending position, and the durability of the acting claw portion 332 increases. There is a risk of diminished sex.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 has an arc shape that ascends and inclines toward the rear (see FIG. 20B), so that the displacement of the piston member 362a can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress the increase in load in the manner shown in the correction curve T1. As a result, the load (impact) applied to the acting claw portion 332 can be suppressed. The durability of the action claw portion 332 can be improved.

Further, since a plurality of working claws 332 (4 in this embodiment) are arranged (see FIG. 10), the load felt by the player via the tilting device 310 is kept large, and each of the acting claws 332 is arranged. The given load can be suppressed. Thereby, both the purpose of changing the operation feeling of the player and the purpose of improving the durability of the acting claw portion 332 can be achieved.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor M1 that vibrates the tilting device 310 is arranged directly above the urging device 362 with the tilting device 310 arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 21 (b)). As a result, the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1 can be weakened by the buffering action of the coil spring 362b before being transmitted to the bottom receiving member 361.

Therefore, the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the front frame of the pachinko machine 10 from vibrating. Therefore, even if the player touches the front frame, it is not possible to grasp the internal state of the operating device 300 (whether or not the drive motor M1 is operating), so that the operating device 300 is operated before the tilting device 310 is operated. It is possible to prevent the motivation for operation from diminishing by knowing the internal state of.

In the present embodiment, the rotation shaft O1 of the tilting device 310 is arranged on the front side. Therefore, when it is desired to increase the vibration effect of the tilting device 310 due to the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1, it is desirable to arrange the drive motor M1 in the vicinity of the rotating shaft O1. As a result, the drive sound can be easily heard by the player, and the player can easily notice the operation of the drive motor M1.

On the other hand, since the vicinity of the rotating shaft O1 is also a position where the amount of operation of the tilting device 310 is small, there is little space and it is difficult to arrange wiring such as a harness well. In particular, care must be taken when there is a member such as a harness that may pinch the wiring.

That is, when the drive motor M1 is arranged near the rotation shaft O1 of the tilting device 310, there is a problem that it is difficult to arrange the drive motor M1 so as not to pinch the wiring such as a harness. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, wiring such as a harness is once arranged in such a manner that the back surface side of the positioning plate 363e is passed (passed) to the left and right. As a result, the portion where the amount of bending of the wiring such as the harness is the largest due to the operation of the tilting device 310 and the contact portion between the piston member 362e and the acting claw portion 332 which may sandwich the wiring such as the harness are positioned. It can be partitioned by a plate 363e. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the wiring of the harness or the like from being sandwiched between the piston member 362e and the acting claw portion 332.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 28. In the first embodiment, the case where the load felt by the player is increased by operating the tilting device 310 with the pedal has been described, but the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment is predetermined when the tilting device 2310 is operated with the pedal. A case will be described in which the outer shapes of the acting claw portion 2332 and the piston member 2362a of the tilting device 2310 are formed in such a manner that the load felt by the player is constant with respect to the posture of the tilting device 2310. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the upper surface of the tilting device 2310 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the left drive motor M1 and the left switching operation member 2326 are attached to the lower cover 2320, and the right drive motor M1 and the right switching operation member 2326 are separated from the lower cover 2320. The state of the cover is shown, and the switching operation member 2326 is shown in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 2310 is switched between a through hole 2325a1 in which the bottom plate portion 2325a of the motor support portion 2325 of the lower cover 2320 is bored in the vertical direction and a through hole 2325a1 that is vertically movable. It includes an operating member 2326.

As shown in FIG. 23, the switching operation member 2326 is arranged in the gap between the adjacent acting claw portions 2332 and overhangs the main body member 2326a integrally molded from the resin material and the upper part of the main body member 2326a. It mainly includes a swing member 2326b that is pivotally supported so as to swing.

The main body member 2326a has a contact plate portion 2326a1 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction, and a thin plate shape that projects from the upper end portion of the contact plate portion 2326a1 while tilting back and forth while acting as a leaf spring. The leaf spring acting portion 2326a2, the accommodating recess 2326a3 which is a recess accommodating the swinging member 2326b tilting back and forth, and the abutting plate portion 2326a1 projecting outward from an intermediate position and having a thinness that allows bending and deformation. It mainly includes a retaining portion 2326a4 that is configured.

In the accommodating recess 2326a3, the wall portion on the front side (left side in FIG. 23) rises along the vertical direction, and the wall portion on the back side (right side in FIG. 23) is displaced toward the back (right side in FIG. 23) as it goes upward. Be tilted. As a result, the tilting of the swing member 2326b from the posture of standing along the vertical direction toward the front side is restricted, and the tilting toward the back is permitted.

The retaining portion 2326a4 is displaceable in a direction close to the contact plate portion 2326a1, and when pressed against the contact plate portion 2326a1, is accommodated inside the maximum width of the contact plate portion 2326a1. There is a recess on the side surface of the contact plate portion 2326a1 to receive the retaining portion 2326a4). As a result, if the width of the through hole 2325a1 is set to be slightly larger than the width of the contact plate portion 2326a1, the switching operation is caused by the retaining portion 2326a4 when the switching operation member 2326 is inserted into the through hole 2325a1 from above. It is possible to prevent the member 2326 from being clogged in the through hole 2325a1, and it is possible to prevent the switching operation member 2326 from coming out of the through hole 2325a1 by the retaining portion 2326a4 after the switching operation member 2326 is inserted and partitioned. can.

The swing member 2326b is a rod-shaped member having a rotation axis along the thickness direction of the main body member 2326a, and is urged by a spring member (not shown) toward the wall portion on the front side of the accommodating recess 2326a3. To. That is, the state shown in FIG. 23 is the initial position of the swing member 2326b (the position where no load is generated from the outside), and the overhang length from the main body member 2326a is maximized at the initial position.

The operation of the switching operation member 2326 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and 25 (a) to 25 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device 2310 and the lower case 2360. In addition, in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and 25 (a) to 25 (c), the state in which the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the descending position is illustrated.

In FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), the switching operation member 2326 is viewed in cross section on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the drive motor M1 and the tilting device 2310 is viewed in cross section. Is shown in the descending position (therefore, the vertical direction of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and 25 (a) to 25 (c) is a direction inclined from the vertical direction. Will be).

From FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c), a state in which the weight member M1a is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 24 by the driving force of the drive motor M1 is shown in chronological order. That is, in FIG. 24A, the state before the weight member M1a abuts on the swing member 2326b, and in FIG. 24B, the weight member M1a after the weight member M1a abuts on the swing member 2326b. In FIG. 24 (c), the state in which the weight member M1a is separated from the swing member 2326b and the swing member 2326b is returned to the initial position is shown in the state of being rotated by the maximum angle clockwise.

As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c), when the weight member M1a rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 24, the displacement of the swing member 2326b is within the range of the recess of the accommodating recess 2326a3. Therefore, the main body member 2326a does not move up and down, and the arrangement of the switching operation member 2326 is maintained.

From FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), a state in which the weight member M1a is rotated clockwise in FIG. 25 by the driving force of the drive motor M1 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, in FIG. 25 (a), the state before the weight member M1a abuts on the swing member 2326b, and in FIG. 25 (b), the weight member M1a after the weight member M1a abuts on the swing member 2326b. In FIG. 25 (c), a state in which a load is applied in a direction to rotate counterclockwise is shown, and a state in which the weight member M1a is separated from the swing member 2326b is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), when the weight member M1a rotates clockwise in FIG. 25, the swing member 2326b is pressed against the wall surface on the front side of the accommodating recess 2326a3 and rotates. Therefore, the interference between the weight member M1a and the swing member 2326b is avoided by moving the switching operation member 2326 downward. That is, the switching operation member 2326 vibrates in the vertical direction in accordance with the rotation of the weight member M1a.

In the present embodiment, when the switching operation member 2326 is arranged at the initial position, the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 does not abut on the bottom receiving member 361 of the lower case 2360 (see FIG. 25A), and the weight member. In a state where M1a pushes down the switching operation member 2326, the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 is in contact with the bottom receiving member 361 (see FIG. 25 (b)).

Here, in the present embodiment, the separation width between the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 in FIG. 25 (a) is the vertical movement width of the switching operation member 2326 (FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b). ), The shape of the main body member 2326a is designed to be shorter than the displacement) of the switching operation member 2326.

Therefore, when the state changes from FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (b), pressure is applied from the switching operation member 2326 to the bottom receiving member 361, and the reaction force is applied in the direction of pushing up the drive motor M1 upward. A load is applied to the upper cover 311 that presses the drive motor M1 from above.

Therefore, in a state where the tilting device 2310 is pushed down to the lowered position, the player can feel the load repeatedly generated due to the vibration of the switching operation member 2326. This repeatedly generated load can be felt by the player by pushing it down to the descending position. For example, the tilting device 2310 switches the separation width between the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361. When the posture is set to be longer than the vertical movement width of the member 2326, the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 do not come into contact with each other, so that the player is not repeatedly subjected to the load.

Therefore, the player can recognize that the tilting device 2310 can be pushed to the lowered position by feeling the repeatedly generated load. As a result, it is possible to prevent an operation error caused by insufficient pushing amount and excessive pushing (excessive pushing amount) caused by ambiguous target position.

Further, even if the tilting device 2310 is arranged at the descending position and the drive motor M1 is rotated, the switching operation member 2326 may or may not vibrate depending on the rotation direction.

Here, at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 requests the operation of the operation device 2300, another accessory (for example, arranged around the third symbol display device 81 and stretched inward as an effect) that starts the operation by the operation. The drive device of the moving accessory) may be driven to the operation start position (may be prepared for operation). Normally, if the lottery result is a hit, other characters will move violently, and if the lottery result is wrong, the other characters will remain stopped, but due to the motor drive sound and vibration during preparation for operation, There is a problem that the player knows the lottery result without waiting for the production of other characters, which reduces the interest of the player.

Therefore, even in the operation device 2300, the lottery result can be predicted by the drive sound and vibration of the drive motor M1, the significance of operating the tilting device 2310 is diminished, and there is a risk that the player will stop the operation. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor M1 is similarly rotated in both the states shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the same drive noise and vibration are generated, while the drive motor M1 is rotated. Whether or not the switching operation member 2326 abuts on the bottom receiving member 361 changes depending on the direction. The displacement of the tilting device 2310 caused by the switching operation member 2326 coming into contact with the bottom receiving member 361 is slight, and it is difficult to visually confirm whether or not the switching operation member 2326 is in contact with the bottom receiving member 361. Will be done.

Therefore, for example, when the lottery result is a hit, the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 can be brought together by increasing the probability that the switching operation member 2326 vibrates when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the descending position. Since the lottery result can be predicted by feeling the repetitive load generated by the contact as a change in the load applied to the hand, it is possible to increase the significance of the player pushing the tilting device 2310 to the descending position. As a result, the operation device 2300 can be effectively utilized (the player is made to push the tilting device 2310).

It will be described back to FIG. 23. In the shaft cover 2330, the working claw portion 2332 has a gentle inclination angle on the front side (left side in FIG. 23), while the inclination angle on the back side (right side in FIG. 23) is steep, so that the load applied to the player increases. Is configured to be suppressable.

With reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the vertical movement of the piston member 2362a due to the rotation (tilting) of the tilting device 2310 will be described. 26 (a) and 26 (b) and 27 (a) and 27 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device 2310 in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a).

In FIG. 26 (a), the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position and the action claw portion 2332 and the piston member 2362a start to come into contact with each other, which is the state shown in FIG. 26 (a) in FIG. 26 (b). The tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 ° from the tilting device 2310 and the action claw portion 2332 pushes down the piston member 2362a. In FIG. 27 (a), the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) to rotate the piston member 2362a. 27 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a) and the piston member 2362a is raised to the initial position.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the lower case 2360 includes a tubular receiving portion 2361c arranged below the tubular receiving portion 361c of the first embodiment, and operates inside the tubular receiving portion 2361c in the vertical direction. The upper end of the piston member 2362a is formed in a shape in which the front side is cut out by an arc.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the lower end surface 2332b of the action claw portion 2332 has the switching point 2332c and the piston member 2362a in the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) (rotated by 13 ° from the ascending position). Along with being abutted, the rear arc portion 2332e behind the switching point 2332c (on the right side in FIG. 26A) is configured such that the length from the rotation axis O1 becomes shorter as the distance from the switching point 2332c increases. .. An arc C1 having a radius of a distance from the rotation axis O1 to the switching point 2332c about the rotation axis O1 is shown by an imaginary line.

The load applied to the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is tilted will be described. The load applied from the piston member 2362a in the moving direction of the tilting device 2310 varies depending on the posture of the tilting device 2310 because the component ratio of the displacement amount of the tilting device 2310 along the moving direction of the piston member 2362a changes. Here, the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made on the assumption that all the loads proportional to the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b are applied against the moving direction of the tilting device 2310.

When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 ° based on the position where the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position (the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26A to the state shown in FIG. 26B). ), The front arc portion 2332d on the front side (left side of FIG. 26B) of the switching point 2332c of the acting claw portion 2332 pushes the piston member 2362a to the position P1, and the coil spring 362b of the urging device 2362 is displaced. As a result, the load applied from the piston member 2362a to the acting claw portion 2332 increases. When rotating the tilting device 2310, the player receives a load from both the torsion spring 343 and the urging device 2362, so that the tilting device 2310 is rotated from FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (b). Along with this, the load given to the player increases.

When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) (when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a)), the piston member 2362a Ascends to position P2. That is, when the rear arc portion 2332e is formed along the arc C1, the position of the piston member 2362a is maintained with respect to the rotation of the tilting device 2310, so that the radius is formed smaller than the arc C1. As a result, the piston member 2362a rises from the position P1 shown in FIG. 26B to the position P2.

Therefore, when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a), the player can increase the load due to the displacement of the torsion spring 343 and recover the displacement of the coil spring 362b. It receives the resultant force as the load with the decrease of the load due to.

In the present embodiment, the amount of change in the urging force generated when the torsion spring 343 is displaced by 5 ° and the amount of change in the urging force generated when the coil spring 362b is displaced by the distance between the positions P1 and P2. However, the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b are selected so as to be equivalent to each other. Therefore, the load received by the player in the state of FIG. 26 (b) and the state of FIG. 27 (a) is constant.

When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a) (when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (b)), the piston member 2362a Ascends to position P3. Here, the position P3 is a position that rises from the position P2 by the distance between the positions P1 and the position P2.

That is, when the tilting device 2310 rotates (tilts) from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (b), from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a). The torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b are displaced by the same amount as when the tilting device 2310 is rotated. Therefore, the load received by the player in the state of FIG. 27 (a) and the state of FIG. 27 (b) is constant. Therefore, the load received by the player can be kept constant during the period from FIG. 26 (b) to FIG. 27 (b) (the period during which the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 °).

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the load applied to the player by the tilting device 2310 when operating the tilting device 2310 will be described. FIG. 28 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 2310 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 2310 from the ascending position. In the graph shown in FIG. 28, the tilt angle is shown on the horizontal axis in a manner in which the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the ascending position as the left end and increases to the right from there, and the tilting device 2310 is shown on the vertical axis. The load applied to the player is shown through.

As shown in FIG. 28, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 2310 is a torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 26A) until the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. (See FIG. 10), the spring constant rises at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant.

When the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position, an urging force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b is applied to the tilting device 2310 via the piston member 2362a (see FIG. 26A). ..

Since the coil spring 362b is arranged in a state of being contracted from the natural length in advance in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), the load felt by the player is applied at the position where the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. It changes rapidly (the rate of change in load changes). In the present embodiment, since the control is switched between the push operation and the pedal operation with this position as a boundary, the player can easily switch the operation method with the sudden change in the load as a mark.

From the state in which the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position to the state in which it is tilted further by 10 °, the load given to the player increases at a rate larger than the rate of increase in the load by the torsion spring 343 (angle α1). ..

The load applied to the player is constant from the state in which the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 13 ° from the ascending position to the state in which the tilting device 2310 is further tilted by 10 °. As a result, the burden on the player when pedaling the tilting device 2310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the urging force is further increased even from the posture of the tilting device 2310 at an angle of 13 °, and the tilting device 2310 can be reduced. Can be facilitated to maintain a constant angle.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the piston member 362a of the urging device 362 is fixed has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is the case where the piston member 362a can tilt in the middle of vertical movement. To explain. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

29 (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary piston member 3364 in the third embodiment, FIG. 29 (b) is a partial front perspective view of the lower case 3360, and FIG. 29 (c) is a shaft cover. It is a partial front perspective view of 3330. In FIG. 29 (b), a part of the inner peripheral shape of the tubular receiving portion 3361c on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29 (c), the assembled structure of the rotary piston member 3364 is partially imagined. Illustrated by a line.

As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the rotary piston member 3364 includes a main body member 3364a in which a plate-shaped portion is extended in a spherical portion having a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular receiving portion 3361c. A notch 3364b that is cut out in a U-shaped cross section on the same plane as the plane extending from the lower part of the main body member 3364a and a plate-shaped portion, and the notch 3364b are inserted into the notch and displaceably arranged. It mainly includes a long rod-shaped rod member 3364c and a penetrating shaft member 3364d that pivotally supports and fixes the rod member 3364c inside the spherical portion of the main body member 3364a.

The rod member 3364c is provided with a shaft support hole through which the rod member 3364c is inserted at an end portion on the side accommodated in the main body member 3364a, and is convexly provided at the end portion on the opposite side in a direction parallel to the penetrating direction of the shaft support hole. The guide pin portion 3364c1 is provided.

The through shaft member 3364d is inserted and fixed in a support hole formed in the spherical portion of the main body member 3364a along the thickness direction of the plate-shaped portion, and the rod member 3364c is rotatably supported by the through shaft member 3364d. To.

As shown in FIG. 29 (b), the rotary piston member 3364 is supported by the cylindrical receiving portion 3361c of the lower case 3360. The tubular receiving portion 3361c is formed in a cylindrical shape whose inner circumference is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the spherical portion of the main body member 3364a of the rotating piston member 3364, and the upper surface thereof is covered with a lid, and the rotating piston is covered with the lid. A cut portion 3361d having a width slightly larger than the thickness of the plate-shaped portion of the main body member 3364a of the member 3364 is formed.

The rod member 3364c and the main body member 3364a are projected to the outside of the tubular receiving portion 3361c via the notch portion 3361d.

As shown in FIG. 29 (c), the shaft cover 3330 is provided along the same plane as the through hole 3331 g through which the rod member 3364c is inserted into the lower half of the cylinder 3331 and the plane on which the through hole 3331 g is formed. It is provided with an arcuate elongated hole having a notch on the upper surface thereof and a support elongated hole portion 3331h configured to be able to support the guide pin portion 3364c1. The long support hole portion 3331h is extended within a range of an angle of 30 ° about the rotation axis O1.

In the assembled state, the guide pin portion 3364c1 is inserted through the support elongated hole portion 3331h. In the assembly method, the tilting device 3310 is brought close to the lower case 3360 in a posture in which the acting claw portion 332 does not abut on the rotating piston member 3364, the rod member 3364c is inserted through the through hole 3331g, and then the tilting device 3310 is rotated and rotated. This is a method of pushing the piston member 3364 by a predetermined amount. As a result, the guide pin portion 3364c1 can be internally fitted into the support elongated hole portion 3331h through the notch in the support elongated hole portion 3331h, and the assembled state shown in FIG. 30 (a) can be configured.

Next, the operation of the rotary piston member 3364 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. 30 (a), FIG. 30 (b), FIG. 31 (a) and FIG. 31 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device 3310 in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). In addition, FIG. 30A shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 30B shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the ascending position. 31 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is rotated (tilted) by 10 ° from the ascending position, and FIG. 31 (b) shows the tilting device 3310 rotated (tilted) by 20 ° from the ascending position. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, when the tilting device 3310 is arranged in the raised position, the guide pin portion 3364c1 is on the front side of the support elongated hole portion 3331h (left side in FIG. 30A). The guide pin portion 3364c1 is arranged in the middle of the support elongated hole portion 3331h in a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position.

From FIG. 30A to FIG. 30B, the position of the rotary piston member 3364 does not change, and the shape of the support elongated hole portion 3331h is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis O1. No load is generated between the guide pin portion 3364c1 and the support elongated hole portion 3331h, and the load applied to the player is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 343.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), in a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 10 ° from the ascending position, the rotary piston member 3364 is pushed down by the working claw portion 332, and the guide pin portion 3364c1 is the support elongated hole portion 3331h. It is arranged at the end of the rear side (right side in FIG. 31 (a)). In this state, in addition to the load received from the torsion spring 343, the tilting device 3310 is loaded with the urging force generated from the coil spring 362b arranged below the rotary piston member 3364.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), in a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 20 ° from the ascending position, the support elongated hole portion 3331h is further rotated clockwise around the rotation axis O1 to cause the guide pin portion. The 3364c is pulled, whereby the rotary piston member 3364 rotates, so that the upper end portion of the plate-shaped portion of the main body member 3364a that comes into contact with the acting claw portion 332 moves in the direction of escaping from the acting claw portion 332. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotary piston member 3364 from moving further downward, so that it is possible to prevent the coil spring 362b from further contracting, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the load applied to the tilting device 3310. Can be done.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is urged by a spring member having spring elasticity has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment describes the case where the tilting device 4310 receives an urging force due to a magnetic force. do. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

32 (a), 32 (b), 33 (a) and 33 (b) are cross sections of the operating device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a figure. In addition, in FIG. 32 (a), the tilting device 4310 was arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 32 (b), the tilting device 4310 was rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the state shown in FIG. 32 (a). In FIG. 33 (a), the state in which the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 32 (b) (state in which the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 8 ° from the ascending position) is shown in FIG. 33. In (b), a state in which the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a) (a state in which the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 13 ° from the ascending position) is shown. In this embodiment, the coil spring 362b of the urging device 362 is arranged with a natural length in the state shown in FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the operation device 4300 is arranged to face the moving magnet Ma1 formed of a magnetic material and fixed to the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320 of the tilting device 4310, and the moving magnet Ma1. A fixed magnet Ma2, which is fixed to the rear end portion of the right side sensor fixing plate 363b of the lower case 360 and is formed of a magnetic material, is provided. The moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are formed in a shape along an arc centered on the rotation axis O1, the moving magnet Ma1 has an arc shape with a center angle of about 5 °, and the fixed magnet has a center angle of about 3. Each of them has an arc shape of °, and the magnetism is switched in the radial direction around the rotation axis O1, and the closer the magnetism is, the more the magnetic force in the suction direction works.

The operation of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged in the ascending position, the opposing surfaces of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 move to a position where they do not overlap in the radial direction about the rotation axis O1. A magnet Ma1 and a fixed magnet Ma2 are arranged. The attractive force of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 increases in proportion to the area of the surfaces that face each other and overlap, but when the facing surfaces do not overlap, the attractive force does not occur (it is negligibly small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the upper end position of the fixed magnet Ma2 and the lower end position of the moving magnet Ma1 coincide with each other in the radial direction about the rotation axis O1, so that the tilting device 4310 moves when the tilting device 4310 starts moving. A magnetic force in the attraction direction begins to act between the magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, the area where the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 overlap in the radial direction of the rotating shaft O1 becomes maximum. That is, each time the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) from the state of being arranged in the ascending position, the magnetic force generated between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 increases in proportion to the rotation angle, and FIG. 32 (b) ) Is the maximum. Further, since the upper end position of the moving magnet Ma1 is arranged 2 ° above the upper end position of the fixed magnet Ma2, the tilting device 4310 is further rotated by 2 ° from the state of FIG. 32B (from the ascending position). When the rotation angle is from 3 ° to 5 °), the maximum magnetic force is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 33A, when the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 8 ° from the ascending position, the lower end position of the fixed magnet Ma2 and the upper end position of the moving magnet Ma1 coincide with each other in the radial direction about the rotation axis O1. do. That is, since the facing surfaces of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 do not overlap each other, no magnetic force is generated between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 (it becomes negligibly small).

By the time the state shown in FIG. 33 (b) is reached, the tilting device 4310 is fixed to the moving magnet Ma1 as the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts) from the position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 5 ° from the ascending position. The area where the surfaces facing the magnet Ma2 overlap is reduced. Therefore, the moving magnet is proportional to the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 from the position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 5 ° from the ascending position (the position where the magnetic force is maximized) until the state shown in FIG. 33 (b) is reached. The magnetic force generated between Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 33B, when the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 13 ° from the ascending position, the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are separated from each other, and the load applied to the tilting device 4310 is the torsion spring 343 and the attachment. Only the urging force generated by the urging device 362. Therefore, as the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts), the load applied to the tilting device 4310 increases.

With reference to FIG. 34, the load applied to the player from the tilting device 4310 will be described. FIG. 34 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 4310 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 4310 from the ascending position. In the graph shown in FIG. 34, the tilt angle is shown on the horizontal axis in a manner in which the tilting device 4310 is arranged in the ascending position (see FIG. 32 (a)) as the left end and increases to the right from there. The vertical axis shows the load applied to the player via the tilting device 4310. In addition, in FIG. 34, for easy understanding, a graph assuming that the displacement of the coil spring 362b is proportional to the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is described (the shape of the action claw portion 332 described above in the first embodiment). The effect of is ignored).

As shown in FIG. 34, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 4310 is the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 32 (b)) until the tilting device 4310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. (See FIG. 10) Tilt in a manner in which a magnetic force MF1 generated as a component in the rotational direction of the tilting device 4310 is added between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 to a straight line that rises at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant. It increases in proportion to the rotation angle of the device 4310.

When the tilting device 4310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position, an urging force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b begins to be loaded on the tilting device 4310 via the piston member 362a (see FIG. 32 (b)). At the same time, the area where the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are opposed to each other in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 begins to be maximized.

Since the section having the largest area continues until the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 becomes 5 °, the magnetic force does not change in that section, and the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and the coil spring 362b (FIG. 32 (b)). As the urging force increases due to the displacement of (see), the load applied to the tilting device 4310 changes. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the coil spring 362b is arranged with a natural length, the load smoothly rises from the state where the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is 3 ° from the rising position.

When the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts) 3 ° (tilts) (rotates (tilts) from the ascending position to a position of 8 °) from a position where the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is 5 ° from the ascending position, the moving magnet Ma1 is used. The area of the surface facing the fixed magnet Ma2 that overlaps with the rotation axis O1 in the radial direction begins to decrease. This decrease is made larger than the increase in the urging force caused by the displacement of the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and the coil spring 362b (see FIG. 32 (b)), so that the rotation angle is from the position of 5 °. The load applied to the player is reduced up to the 8 ° position.

That is, while the tilting device 4310 is placed between the ascending position and the position where the rotation angle is 5 °, the load given to the player increases as the rotation angle increases, while the rotation angle is 5 °. From the position of to the position where the rotation angle is 8 °, the load given to the player decreases as the rotation angle increases, so the positive and negative of the load change rate is reversed at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the change rate of the load has changed at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °, and the amount at which the player operates the tilting device 4310 at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °. Since it can be used as a mark for grasping, this configuration can be useful for the game.

Further rotation from the position where the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is 8 ° from the ascending position eliminates the fluctuation of the load due to the magnetic force. Therefore, as the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is increased, the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and The displacement of the coil spring 362b (see FIG. 32 (b)) increases the urging force applied to the player. That is, the positive / negative of the load change rate is reversed again at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the change rate of the load has changed at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °, and the amount at which the player operates the tilting device 4310 at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °. It can be used as a mark for grasping.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, in the process of rotating the tilting device 4310, the load applied to the player with the position where the rotation angle is 8 ° as the valley bottom is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the tilting device 4310 in a posture in which the rotation angle is 8 °, as compared with the case where the load applied to the player increases as the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 increases. This makes it easy to maintain the posture of the tilting device 4310 at a position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° or more from the ascending position in the stage before the pedal operation.

In this embodiment, a return device for returning the tilting device 4310 from a position with a rotation angle of 8 ° to a position of 5 ° (a device for ejecting air from below along the circumferential direction of the tilting device 4310 is not shown). To prepare for. As a result, it is possible to assist the return operation of the tilting device 4310 from the descending position to the ascending position and prevent the tilting device 4310 from continuing to stop at the position of the rotation angle of 8 °.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the urging force for returning the tilting device 310 to the ascending position side changes only by the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310 has been described, but the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is the tilting device. A case where the urging force applied to the tilting device 5310 changes depending on the rotation (tilting) speed of the 5310 (when the urging force increases when the rotation speed is high) will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 is a side view of the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 35, the operation device 5300 is configured such that the upper cover 5311 of the tilting device 5310 includes a recessed portion 5316b in which the tilting device 5310 is recessed in a groove shape along the left-right direction of the curved wall portion 5316. A third urging device 5380 is provided on the rear upper portion of the upper case 5370. The third urging device 5380 is a device that applies a load to the tilting device 5310 by abutting on the curved wall portion 5316.

With reference to FIG. 36, an assembly structure with the upper case 5370 of the third urging device 5380 will be described. 36 (a) is a top view of the upper case 5370, and FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c) are the upper case 5370 and the third urging device 5380 in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 36 (c), the rotary roller 5381 of the third urging device 5380 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 36, the upper case 5370 extends as a long hole along the front-rear direction on the side surface of the box-shaped storage box portion 5371 that is opened toward the front side at the upper portion thereof. It mainly includes a relief hole 5372 to be provided, a pair of cylindrical portions 5373 that support the rotary roller 5381 at two points, and a locking portion 5374 to which the torsion spring 5383 is locked.

The third urging device 5380 rotatably supports a rotating roller 5381 that rotates with the rotation (tilting) of the tilting device 5310 by abutting on the tilting device 5310, and the rotary roller 5381 in a relief hole 5372. It mainly includes a shaft rod member 5382 to be inserted, and a torsion spring 5383 that is wound around the shaft rod member 5382 and gives an elastic urging force to the rotary roller 5381.

In the torsion spring 5383, one arm abuts from below the locking portion 5374, and the other arm abuts from below the convex pin 5381c of the rotary roller 5381, so that the rotary roller 5381 is wound downward. (FIG. 36 (b) counterclockwise), the urging force is increased when the rotation is performed. On the other hand, when the rotary roller 5381 rotates in the upward direction (clockwise in FIG. 36B), the convex pin 5381c of the rotary roller 5381 only separates from the other arm portion of the torsion spring 5383. There is no change in urging force.

The rotary roller 5381 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a side view of the rotary roller 5381, and FIG. 37 (b) is a front view of the rotary roller 5381 in the arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a).

As shown in FIG. 37, the rotary roller 5381 is formed in the center of the main body portion 5381a formed in a disk shape and the circle of the main body portion 5381a in a circular cross section in the thickness direction, and the shaft rod member 5382 ( A through hole 5381b through which (FIG. 36 (c)) is inserted, a convex pin 5381c projecting from an eccentric position of the main body 5381a along the thickness direction, and an outer peripheral surface to the center of the main body 5381a. It mainly includes a recessed portion 5381d that is recessed toward the center and extends in the axial direction.

The convex pin 5381c is a portion to which the torsion spring 5383 is locked, and abuts on the arm portion of the torsion spring 5383 from above (see FIG. 36 (b)). The recessed portion 5381d is a recessed portion for allowing the rotary roller 5381 to move rearward, and is recessed with a width larger than the diameter of the cylindrical portion 5373.

Next, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 5310 and the third urging device 5380 will be described. 38 (a), 38 (b), 39 (a), 39 (b), 40 (a) and 40 (b) correspond to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device 5300 in line.

FIG. 38 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 5310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 5310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the ascending position. In (a), a state in which the tilting device 5310 is further rotated (tilted) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 39 (b), the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 6 ° (tilted) from the ascending position. 40 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 5310 is quickly rotated (tilted) by 14 ° from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), and FIG. 40 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 40 (b). The state in which the tilting device 5310 is further rotated (tilted) from the state shown in a) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the curved wall portion 5316 of the upper cover 5311 includes a recessed portion 5316b and a contact portion 5316c which is a portion that abuts on the rotary roller 5381. That is, the same as the contact portion 5316c (formed at 3 ° centered on the rotating shaft O1) and the subsequent recessed portion 5316b (formed at 2.5 ° centered on the rotating shaft O1) that first abuts on the rotating roller 5381. Two sets of abutting portions 5316c and recessed portions 5316b are formed in the shape of. The final contact portion 5316c (the lower contact portion of the recessed portion 5361b arranged at the uppermost portion) is about half the width (centered on the rotation axis O1) as compared with the other contact portions 5361c. Is formed at about 1.5 °).

In FIG. 38 (a), since the recessed portion 5316b is arranged at a position facing the rotating roller 5381, even if the rotating roller 5381 and the curved wall portion 5316 do not come into contact with each other and the tilting device 5310 is rotated. The load applied to the tilting device 5310 from the rotary roller 5381 does not increase.

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), when the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, the contact portion 5316c and the rotary roller 5381 start to come into contact with each other. By further rotating the tilting device 5310 from here (see FIG. 39 (a)), urging force due to the displacement of the torsion spring 5383 from the rotating roller 5381 begins to be applied to the tilting device 5310.

As shown in FIG. 39 (b), when the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 6 ° from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), the rotary roller 5381 comes into contact with the upper end of the contact portion 5316c. When the tilting device 5310 is slightly rotated from this position, the rotating roller 5381 and the recessed portion 5381d face each other, and the contact between the rotating roller 5381 and the curved wall portion 5316 is released, so that the rotating roller 5381 is twisted. It tries to return to the initial position by the urging force of the spring 5383.

Therefore, when the speed at which the tilting device 5310 is rotated is slow, the next contact portion 5316c (in FIG. 39B, the contact portion 5316c above the contact portion 5316c with which the rotating roller 5381 is in contact). The rotary roller 5381 returns to the initial position (see FIG. 38 (a)) before the rotary roller 5381 comes into contact with the rotary roller 5381.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), when the tilting device 5310 is quickly rotated in such a manner that the next contact portion 5316c is brought into contact with the rotary roller 5381 before the rotary roller 5381 returns, the rotary roller 5381 is used. Each time the tilting device 5310 rotates (tilts) with the contact portion 5316c facing each other, the displacement of the rotating roller 5381 and the torsion spring 5383 increases (accumulates), and the load applied from the rotating roller 5381 to the tilting device 5310 increases. Become.

Therefore, the load applied to the player can be changed depending on the speed at which the tilting device 5310 rotates. In the present embodiment, the push operation and the pedal operation are switched with respect to the position where the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, but as described above in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b). Since the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 do not come into contact with each other at a position up to 3 ° from the ascending position corresponding to the push operation, the load is excessive no matter how quickly the player operates the tilting device 5310 at this position. Will never be. Therefore, the operating resistance of the tilting device 5310 does not change depending on the displacement speed of the tilting device 5310 when the player performs the push operation. It is possible to avoid the situation where the trouble occurs.

On the other hand, at the position after rotating at an angle larger than 3 ° from the ascending position, the contact portion 5316c begins to abut with the rotating roller 5381, and then the recessed portion 5316b passes through the position facing the rotating roller 5381. As a result, the state of the rotary roller 5381 when the contact portion 5316c and the rotary roller 5381 come into contact with each other changes again (the amount of rotation of the rotary roller 5381 from the initial position is changed, so that the tilting device is tilted from the rotary roller 5381. The load applied to 5310 changes).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operating resistance of the tilting device 5310 can be changed according to the displacement speed of the tilting device 5310 in the range where the pedal is operated, while the operating resistance of the tilting device 5310 is changed in the range where the push operation is performed. The operation performance can be improved without depending on the speed of displacement.

In FIG. 40 (a), the case where the rotary roller 5381 is rotated by the entire circumference of the contact portion 5316c is shown. In this state, the recessed portion 5381d of the rotary roller 5381 is in a state of approaching the cylindrical portion 5373.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the tilting device 5310 is further rotated from FIG. 40 (a), the recessed portion 5381d of the rotating roller 5381 is arranged to face the cylindrical portion 5373. Therefore, the rotary roller 5381 can move along the escape hole 5372 in the direction close to the cylindrical portion 5373.

As a result, even if the load applied from the rotary roller 5381 to the tilting device 5310 becomes excessive, the rotary roller 5381 can move in the direction away from the tilting device 5310. Therefore, when the tilting device 5310 is quickly operated, a game is played. It is possible to prevent the person from receiving an excessive load from the tilting device 5310.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, a case where the length of the contact portion 5316c is changed depending on the position will be described. 41 (a), 41 (b) and 42 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 5300b in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG.

The operation device 5300b differs from the operation device 5300 only in the formation pattern of the recessed portion 5316b and the contact portion 5316c of the curved wall portion 5316. That is, the width of the contact portion 5316c to which the tilting device 5310b first abuts from the ascending position shown in FIG. The contact portion 5316c that abuts on the rotating roller 5381 in a state of being rapidly rotated by 10 ° (see FIG. 41 (b)) has a long width (formed at 4 ° around the rotation axis O1) and is further tilted from the ascending position. The width of the contact portion 5316c that comes into contact with the rotating roller 5381 in a state where the device 5310b is quickly rotated by 20 ° (see FIG. 42) is further increased in width (formed at 7 ° around the rotation axis O1).

Therefore, not only the player who operates the tilting device 5310b quickly but also the player who operates the tilting device 5310b slowly can feel the change in the operation feeling that the load given from the tilting device 5310b changes. can.

That is, assuming a player who operates the tilting device 5310b slowly enough to completely return the rotary roller 5381 to the initial position in the section of each recessed portion 5381d, the rotary roller 5381 comes into contact with the rotary roller 5381 in FIG. 41 (b). From the start of contact with the contact portion 5316c to the end of contact, the urging force generated when the short contact portion 5316c arranged below the contact portion 5316c and the rotary roller 5381 come into contact with each other. Four times more encouraging power is given.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, when the short contact portion 5316c and the rotary roller 5381 are in contact with each other from the start of contact with the contact portion 5316c to be in contact with the rotary roller 5381 to the end of contact. It is given 7 times the urging force that is generated. Further, at the moment when the contact between the rotary roller 5381 and the contact portion 5316c is released, the load applied to the tilting device 5310b is sharply reduced. Therefore, the player pushes in the tilting device 5310b without visually observing the tilting device 5310b, using the change in the maximum value of the load given by the rotating roller 5381 and the sudden decrease in the load as a mark. Can be predicted.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. In the first embodiment, the case where the urging force for returning the tilting device 310 to the ascending position side changes only by the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310 has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment is the tilting device. A case where the urging force applied to the tilting device 6310 changes depending on the rotation (tilting) speed of the 6310 (when the urging force decreases when the rotation speed is high) will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a side view of the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG. 43 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 6310 is arranged in an ascending position, and a rear portion of the operating device 6300 is partially viewed in cross section. As shown in FIG. 43, the operation device 6300 has a contact point J1 in which the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 of the upper cover 6311 of the tilting device 6310 abuts on the rotating member 6381 when the tilting device 6310 is arranged in the raised position. As a reference, the arc C6 centered on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 6310 is used as a reference, and the shape becomes smaller than the diameter of the arc C6 as the distance from the contact point J1 increases. It is equipped with a force device 6380. The fourth urging device 6380 is a device that applies a load to the tilting device 6310 by abutting on the curved wall portion 6316.

In the upper case 6370, a box-shaped storage box portion 6371 that is opened toward the front side at the upper portion thereof, a shaft support hole 6372 formed in the side surface of the storage box portion 6371, and a torsion spring 6383 are engaged. A locking portion 6373 and a locking portion 6373 are mainly provided.

The fourth urging device 6380 rotatably supports a rotating member 6381 that applies a load to the tilting device 6310 by abutting on the tilting device 6310, and the rotating member 6381, and a shaft rod inserted into the shaft support hole 6372. It mainly includes a member 6382 and a torsion spring 6383 that is wound around the shaft rod member 6382 and gives an elastic urging force to the rotating member 6381.

The rotating member 6381 is provided with a through hole 6381b that is eccentrically bored in the gourd-shaped main body portion 6381a through which the shaft rod member 6382 is inserted, and the torsion spring 6383 can be locked in a direction parallel to the axial direction. A convex pin 6381c to be convex is provided.

In the torsion spring 6383, one arm abuts from below the locking portion 6373, and the other arm abuts from below the convex pin 6381c of the rotating member 6381, so that the rotating member 6381 is wound downward. (Fig. 43 counterclockwise), the urging force is increased when the rotation is performed. On the other hand, when the rotating member 6381 rotates in the upward direction (clockwise in FIG. 43), the convex pin 6381c of the rotating member 6381 only separates from the other arm portion of the torsion spring 5383, and the urging force is increased. No change occurs.

44 (a) and 44 (b) are partial side views of the operating device 6300. In FIG. 44 (a), the tilting device 6310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, and in FIG. 44 (b), the tilting device 6310 is quickly rotated by 17 ° from the state of FIG. 44 (a). (A state in which the tilting device 6310 is rotated by 20 ° from the ascending position) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the rear portion of the operating device 6300 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. ..

In FIG. 44A, the rotating member 6381 rotates clockwise due to the urging force of the torsion spring 6383 from the state shown in FIG. 43, and the contact between the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 is maintained. Here, assuming that the force generated by the contact between the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 is the same along the circumferential direction of the tilting device 6310, the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 are shown in FIG. 44 (a). Since the distance from the abutting position to the rotation axis O1 is shorter than the radius of the arc C6, the state shown in FIG. 44A is the load given by the rotating member 6381 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 43. As a result, the length of the arm of the moment generated in the tilting device 6310 is shortened.

Therefore, in a state where the rotating member 6381 is in contact with the curved wall portion 6316, the larger the angle at which the tilting device 6310 rotates (tilts) from the ascending position, the smaller the rotational resistance of the tilting device 6310 caused by the rotating member 6381. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the tilting device 6310 becomes large while ensuring the load given to the tilting device 6310 from the state where the tilting device 6310 is arranged in the ascending position and starts to rotate, the tilting device 6310 gives the player a load. It is possible to prevent the load from becoming excessively large.

In FIG. 44 (b), a state in which the tilting device 6310 is swiftly rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a) is shown, and in this state, the rotating member 6381 is separated from the curved wall portion 6316. That is, the state in which the rotating member 6381 is rotated by the urging force of the torsion spring 6383 and the tilting device 6310 is rotated at a higher speed than the case where the rotating member 6381 is attached to the curved wall portion 6316 is shown.

In this case, since the load applied to the tilting device 6310 from the rotating member 6381 is eliminated, the force required to operate the tilting device 6310 can be reduced. That is, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 6310 can be reduced in the case of pedaling at high speed as compared with the case of slowly pedaling the tilting device 6310. Therefore, for example, the tilting device 6310 is operated in the middle of the movable range. When operating the tilting device 6310 at high speed (pushing-in operation) while securing the rotational resistance required to facilitate the maintenance operation, the reserved rotational resistance is released at once to rotate. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue felt by the player as compared with the case where the device having a large resistance is pushed through.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. In the first embodiment, the case where the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is determined by the posture in which the urging force changes has been described, but the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment rotates the tilting device 7310 ( The case where the tilting device 7310 is locked when the tilting device is tilted) and the starting point of the pedal operation is reached will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross sections of the operating device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a figure. In FIG. 45 (a), the tilting device 7310 is arranged in the ascending position, and in FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (a), the tilting device 7310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In FIG. 46 (b), a state in which the tilting device 7310 is quickly rotated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 46 (a) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the operation device 7300 includes a slide device 7318 in which the upper cover 7311 of the tilting device 7310 is formed so as to be slidable, and a displacement urging device 7319 arranged on the curved wall portion 7316. , Is configured.

The slide device 7318 has a locking member 7318a having a Z-shaped cross section and a locking member 7318a thereof, which is inserted into a through hole 7311a formed through the pressing plate portion 312 of the upper cover 7311 to the rear side wall portion 315. It mainly includes a coil spring 7318b that urges the rearward direction.

The locking member 7318a is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 45A) with respect to the upper cover 7311, and when arranged rearward, the rotation shaft is rotated by rotating the tilting device 7310. It is possible to come into contact with the power acting device 363 in the rotation direction centered on O1.

The displacement urging device 7319 includes an acting member 7319a pivotally supported by the curved wall portion 7316 of the upper cover 7311 within a range accommodated in the notch 7322a formed in the curved wall portion 7322 of the lower cover 7320, and the acting member 7319a thereof. A torsion spring 7319b for urging in a direction close to the curved wall portion 7316, and a direction in which the working member 7319a is arranged below the working member 7319a and is close to the working member 7319a from the side where the working member 7319a opens and closes with respect to the curved member 7316. Mainly includes an inertial operation member 7319c configured to be movable in the same direction, and a tension spring 7319d for maintaining the inertial operation member 7319c downward.

The working member 7319a has a moving magnet Ma7 made of a magnetic material arranged at the tip thereof, and has a polarity in a direction of attracting to the fixed magnet Ma2 in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis O1. The lower end of the working member 7319a is inclined so as to be closer to the upper end of the inertial acting member 7319c and away from the curved wall portion 7316. As a result, when the inertial acting member 7319c moves upward, the acting member 7319a can be rotated in a direction away from the curved wall portion 7316.

The inertial action member 7319c is made of a heavy material to the extent that sufficient inertia can be applied (to the extent that it stays in place with respect to the rapid movement of the tilting device 7310), and the peripheral surface on the side that comes into contact with the curved wall portion 7316 is formed. , Formed from an arc shape along the inner peripheral shape of the curved wall portion 7316. Therefore, when the inertial acting member 7319c moves relative to the upper cover 7311, the moving direction is set along the peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 7316.

As shown in FIG. 45B, when the tilting device 7310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the ascending position, the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the piston member 362a, and the lower end of the locking member 7318a is the power acting device 363. In contact with the tilting device 7310 in the rotational direction. Therefore, it is possible to configure a state in which the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is mechanically locked and the tilting device 7310 cannot be rotated (tilted) any more.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneous operation. That is, when the player who operates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment can sense the area where the push operation is performed and the area where the pedal is operated due to the change in the load generated from the tilting device 310, the boundary between them becomes ambiguous. For example, even if the player thinks that he / she is repeatedly hitting in the area of push operation, he / she actually pushes the tilting device 310 to the area of pedal operation, which may make continuous hitting difficult. rice field. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the change in load, the boundary between the push operation region and the pedal operation region is formed at the position where the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is stopped, as described above. It is possible to suppress erroneous operation.

Further, the contact surface of the locking member 7318a with the power acting device 363 is configured as a surface perpendicular to the arc centered on the rotation axis O1 (see FIG. 45B). As a result, when a load in the rotational direction is further applied from the state shown in FIG. 45 (b), it is possible to prevent the locking member 7318a from sliding toward the front side due to the force received from the power acting device 363. can.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), by moving the locking member 7318a of the slide device 7318 toward the front side, the contact between the locking member 7318a and the power acting device 363 is released, and the tilting device 7310 is rotated. It is possible to make it.

Since the direction in which the tilting device 7310 is rotated and the direction in which the locking member 7318a is moved are approximately right angles (the angle formed is close to a right angle), the operation of rotating the tilting device 7310 and the locking member 7318a are moved. It can be difficult to perform the operation at the same time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the locking member 7318a from moving naturally and causing an erroneous operation of accidentally pushing the tilting device 7310 to the area of pedal operation.

When the tilting device 7310 is slowly pushed in from the position shown in FIG. 46 (a), the tilting device 7310 is rotated while the inertial acting member 7319c is stopped relative to the upper cover 7311. In this case, the distance between the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 remains distant, and the attractive force thereof is negligibly small.

On the other hand, the tilting device 7310 is displaced at an excessively large speed by being pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 46 (a), or the locking member 7318a is tilted from the ascending position while being fixed to the front side for some reason. When the device 7310 is rotated, as shown in FIG. 46B, the inertial acting member 7319c is displaced relative to the upper cover 7311, so that the acting member 7319a rotates and moves with the fixed magnet Ma2. As the distance from the magnet Ma7 becomes shorter, the resistance due to the magnetic force increases. As a result, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 7310 can be temporarily increased, and the braking effect thereof can give the player a change in the feeling of operation, and the tilting device 7310 rotates vigorously in the area of pedal operation ( It is possible to suppress tilting) and prevent damage to the tilting device 7310.

Even if the inertial acting member 7319c is displaced upward when the tilting device 7310 reaches the descending position vigorously, the tilting device 7310 returns upward after the player releases the tilting device 7310. Since the inertial acting member 7319c is moved downward by inertia as it operates, when the tilting device 7310 returns, the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are attracted to each other and the resistance increases, so that the tilting device 7310 It is possible to avoid delaying the return.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), between the ascending position of the tilting device 7310 and the position after being rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position (shown in FIG. 45 (a)). (Between the position and the position shown in FIG. 45 (b)), that is, when the tilting device 7310 is arranged in the range of the push operation, the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are of a circle centered on the rotation axis O1. It is considered that they do not overlap in the radial direction. Therefore, within the range of the push operation, it is possible to prevent the tilting device 7310 from being delayed in displacement due to the attractive force between the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2.

That is, if the suction force acts by quickly rotating the tilting device 7310 when rotating the tilting device 7310 by 3 ° from the ascending position, the speed of the return operation of the tilting device 7310 after the push operation becomes slow. For example, when the continuous striking operation is performed within the range of the push operation, the operation becomes difficult, and the comfort of the game may be impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 from being attracted to each other within the range of the push operation, and even if the tilting device 7310 is displaced at an arbitrary speed, the tilting device 7310 is tilted. It is possible to prevent the speed of the return operation of the 7310 from becoming slow, and it is possible to improve the comfort of the game.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player changes depending on the posture of the tilting device 310 has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment has the player depending on the speed at which the tilting device 8310 is rotated (tilted). The case where the load applied to is changed will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

47 (a) and 47 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). Note that FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 8310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 8310 is swiftly rotated by a predetermined angle from the ascending position.

As shown in FIG. 47, the operation device 8300 includes a displacement urging device 8319 in which the upper cover 8311 of the tilting device 8310 is arranged on the curved wall portion 8316, and the upper case 8370 is tilted at the rear portion of the inner peripheral wall thereof. It is provided with a fixed magnet Ma81 formed of a magnetic material that extends along the rotation locus of the outer end of the 8310 and whose polarity is switched in the radial direction of the rotation locus of the tilting device 8310.

The displacement urging device 8319 has an acting member 8319a pivotally supported by the curved wall portion 8316 of the upper cover 8311 and an acting member thereof within a range accommodated in the notch 7322a formed in the curved wall portion 7322 of the lower cover 7320. A torsion spring 7319b that urges the 8319a in a direction close to the curved wall portion 8316, and an acting member 8319a that is arranged below the working member 8319a and is close to the working member 8319a from the side that opens and closes the curved member 8316. It mainly includes an inertial operation member 7319c configured to be movable in a direction, and a tension spring 7319d that holds the inertial operation member 7319c downward.

The acting member 8319a is a member that extends bifurcatedly from a position axially supported by the curved wall portion 8316, and one arm portion (the left arm portion in FIG. 47 (a)) acts in the seventh embodiment. Similar to the member 7319a, the through hole is extended inside the curved wall portion 8316, and the other arm portion (the arm portion on the right side in FIG. 47 (a)) is formed in the thickness direction of the curved wall portion 8316. It is configured to extend outward of the curved wall portion 8316 through 8316b.

A moving magnet Ma82 formed of a magnetic material is arranged at the tip of the other arm of the working member 8319a, and the magnetic pole direction of the moving magnet Ma82 is formed in a direction to generate a magnetic force attracted to the fixed magnet Ma81. Magnetism.

The lower end of one arm of the working member 8319a is inclined so as to be closer to the upper end of the inertial acting member 7319c and away from the curved wall portion 8316. As a result, when the inertial acting member 7319c moves upward, the acting member 8319a can be rotated in a direction away from the curved wall portion 8316.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the tilting device 8310 is arranged in the ascending position, the acting member 8319a is in a posture in which one arm is close to the curved wall portion 8316, and in this posture, the other arm is placed. The moving magnet Ma82 of the above is brought close to the fixed magnet Ma81. Therefore, the magnetic force (attraction force due to) between the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 becomes so large that it cannot be ignored, and the resistance when rotating the tilting device 8310 becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the tilting device 8310 is swiftly rotated by a predetermined amount from the ascending position, the inertial acting member 7319c stays in inertia, and the inertial acting member 7319c has one arm of the acting member 8319a and a curved wall. It enters between the portion 8316 and the acting member 8319a is rotated against the urging force of the torsion spring 7319b (FIG. 47 (a) is rotated clockwise). As a result, the moving magnet Ma82 arranged on the other arm portion is separated from the fixed magnet Ma81, and the magnetic force between the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 becomes negligibly small.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 8310 is operated slowly, the inertial acting member 8319c moves at the same speed as the upper cover 8311 (stops relative to the upper cover 8311). Therefore, it is possible to secure a large rotational resistance felt by the player when the tilting device 8310 is slowly rotated, and to reduce the rotational resistance felt by the player when the tilting device 8310 is quickly rotated.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 8310 is slowly operated, for example, the tilting device 8310 is maintained at a predetermined position, the rotational resistance is increased to facilitate maintenance, while when the tilting device 8310 is pushed in at once, the tilting device 8310 is tilted. When the operation of the device 8310 becomes quick, the rotation resistance and the rotation resistance can be reduced, and the force required for pushing the tilting device 8310 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operation load when the player operates the tilting device 8310.

In the inertial action member 7319c, the surface of the curved wall portion 8316 on the side of contact with the inner peripheral surface has a shape along the arc shape of the inner peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 8316, and when it moves relative to the upper cover 8311. Since it moves along the peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 8316 (moves in the same direction as the rotation direction of the tilting device 8310), it is moved up at the position where the moving distance with respect to the rotation angle of the tilting device 8310 is maximum (maximum diameter position). It is configured to be able to move along the moving direction of the cover 8311, which makes it easy to utilize the inertia.

Therefore, even when the rotation angle of the tilting device 8310 is small, the inertial acting member 7319c can be easily moved relative to the upper cover 8311, and the rotation resistance can be easily changed by the magnetic force.

Even if the inertial acting member 7319c is displaced upward when the tilting device 8310 reaches the descending position vigorously, the tilting device 8310 returns upward after the player releases the tilting device 8310. Since the inertial acting member 7319c is moved downward by inertia as it operates, the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 are attracted when the tilting device 8310 returns. As a result, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 8310 pushed in at once from returning vigorously, and to produce a profound feeling due to the slow return operation of the tilting device 8310.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the first embodiment, the case where the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is determined by the posture in which the urging force changes has been described, but the operating device 9300 in the ninth embodiment rotates the tilting device 9310 ( A case will be described in which the tilting device 9310 is locked when the tilting device 9310 is reached at the start point of the pedal operation, and the tilting device 9310 is translated in order to release the lock. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

48 (a), FIG. 48 (b), FIG. 49 (a), FIG. 49 (b) and FIG. 50 are tilting devices according to the ninth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is sectional drawing of 9310. In FIG. 48 (a), the tilting device 9310 is arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 48 (b), the tilting device 9310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the ascending position in FIG. 49 (b). In a), the tilting device 9310 is translated from the state shown in FIG. 48 (b) to the back side by a predetermined amount, and in FIG. 49 (b), the tilting device 9310 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a). In FIG. 50, the state in which the tilting device 9310 is quickly rotated (tilted) to the descending position is a position 3 ° from the ascending position from the state in which the tilting device 9310 is arranged in the descending position (the state shown in FIG. 48 (b) and the tilting device 9310). The state of being restored to (only the front-back position is different) is shown in the figure.

Further, in FIGS. 48 (a), 48 (b), 49 (a), 49 (b), and 50, the vicinity of the rotation shaft O1 is the recessed bearing portion 9361a (tilting device 9310) of the lower case 9360. The cross section including the axially supporting portion) is partially viewed as a cross section.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the tilting device 9310 includes an extended half-shaft portion 313c (see FIG. 9) of the upper cover 9311 and an extended half-shaft portion 331c (see FIG. 9) of the shaft cover 330. A shaft fixing member BR9 having a cup-shaped member to be fitted and having a notched surface BR9a having a part of a circle having a radius r1 cut out in a straight line, and a shaft member 340 (see FIG. 10). It is provided with a torsion spring 9343 that is wound around and gives a urging force to the tilting device 9310 in the rotational direction and the front-rear direction.

The upper cover 9311 includes a moving magnet Ma9 which is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the curved wall portion 9316 and is elastically supported so as to be movable in the radial direction of the curved wall portion 9316. The moving magnet Ma9 is made movable in a direction close to the curved wall portion 9316 by the centrifugal force generated by the rotation of the tilting device 9310.

The shaft fixing member BR9 of the tilting device 9310 is configured to be able to translate the inside of the recessed bearing portion 9361a of the lower case 9360 in the front-rear direction. That is, the concave bearing portion 9361a has a shape (an arc having a radius r1 (an arc for 90 °) formed when the outer circle of the shaft fixing member BR9 is translated by a distance L1) in the front-rear direction (FIG. 48 (a)). ) Are arranged in pairs (left and right), and their lower ends are formed in the front-rear direction (left and right in FIG. 48 (a)) by connecting them with a straight line at a distance L1.

The upper case 9370, which is fastened and fixed to the upper side of the lower case 9360 and pivotally supports the tilting device 9310, includes a recessed bearing portion 9371 which is arranged to face the concave bearing portion 9361a of the lower case 9360 and supports the shaft fixing member BR9.

The concave bearing portion 9371 has a shape occupied when the shaft fixing member BR9 is moved in the front-rear direction in a posture in which the cutout surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 is in a state along the front-rear direction (FIG. 48 (a) left-right direction). Based on the above, the arc portion of the shaft fixing member BR9 is configured to be recessed with an arc having a size capable of rotating with the central portion facing upward. That is, the concave bearing portion 9371 is configured to have a shape in which the arcs at both front and rear ends and the arcs at the center are connected by a locking plane 9371a extending along the front-rear direction.

The lower case 9360 has a push-back wall portion 9361h having a predetermined width in the vertical direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front side of the tubular receiving portion 361c, and the lower case 9360 is stretched rearward from the power acting device 363 on the front side of the rubber plate GR1. A locking rubber member 9361i, which is arranged in a protruding manner and has rubber elasticity, is provided.

The torsion spring 9343 is arranged so that one arm portion 9343a is formed from a bent shape at the tip and is in contact with the push-back wall portion 9361h of the lower case 9360, and the other arm portion 9343b is a rotation shaft of the tilting device 9310. It is locked to the convex portion arranged on the upper cover 311 diagonally above O1 (upper left in FIG. 48), and an urging force is generated in the direction in which both arms are opened. That is, the urging force acts in the direction of returning the tilting device 9310 to the ascending position.

The locking rubber member 9361i is at a position where the tilting device 9310 interferes with the curved member 350 when the tilting device 9310 is arranged at the front end of the recessed bearing portion 9361a, while the tilting device 9310 is located behind the recessed bearing portion 9361a. When it is arranged at the side end portion, it is arranged at a position where interference with the bending member 350 is avoided (the comb-shaped portion 352 in the state where the tilting device 9310 is arranged at the front side end portion of the recessed bearing portion 9361a). Is arranged between the rotation locus of the above and the rotation locus of the comb-shaped portion 352 in a state where the tilting device 9310 is arranged at the rear end portion of the recessed bearing portion 9361a).

As a result, the tilting device 9310 causes the locking rubber member 9361i to be tilted for some reason (for example, the locking plane 9371a is worn out and the shaft fixing member BR9 cannot be locked). It can function as a stopper to stop the rotation of the tilting device 9310 when it is over-rotated while being arranged at the front end of the 9361a. Further, by forming the locking rubber member 9361i from a rubber material, a sufficient amount of deformation can be secured, so that a member (curved member 350 or the like) whose shape of the tilting device 9310 is strictly controlled is deformed. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in a state where the tilting device 9310 is arranged in the raised position, the shaft fixing member BR9 is the front end portion (left end portion of FIG. 48 (a)) of the recessed bearing portion 9361a of the lower case. ), And a gap is formed between the cutout surface BR9a and the locking plane 9371a at an angle of 3 ° with respect to the rotation axis O1.

When a load is applied to the tilting device 9310 in the direction of the arrow F1 from the state of FIG. 48A, the tilting device 9310 rotates. When the tilting device 9310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the state of being arranged in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the cutout surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 and the locking plane 9371a of the upper case become By abutting on the surface, the rotation of the shaft fixing member BR9 is stopped, and the movement of the tilting device 9310 is stopped.

Therefore, as described above in the first embodiment, as compared with the case where the player switches the operation method by the load given from the tilting device 310, in the present embodiment, the tilting is performed in the push operation region of 3 ° from the ascending position. Since the device 9310 is stopped, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player cannot recognize the change in the load given by the tilting device 9310 and erroneously operates the device 9310.

In order to further rotate the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 48 (b), as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the tilting device 9310 is moved to the back side in the direction of the arrow F2 (to the right in FIG. 48 (b)). ), It is necessary to release the contact between the notched surface BR9a and the locking plane 9371a. In the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), one arm portion 9343a of the torsion spring 9343 is pressed against the push-back wall portion 9361h and deforms by a predetermined amount.

Here, since the directions of the arrow F1 and the arrow F2 are different, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 9310 from being translated to the back side while the tilting device 9310 is rotating. Further, in order to translate the tilting device 9310 before rotating it, it is possible to push the vicinity of the rotating shaft O1 to the back side, but the tilting device 9310 is a device that rotates and operates on the side far from the rotating shaft O1. Since the operation load is smaller when pressed, it is possible to recommend the player to push the opposite side of the rotation axis O1 (the upper end of the tilting device 9310), and the tilting device 9310 may move in translation before rotating. It can be suppressed from occurring.

By further rotating the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the tilting device 9310 can be pedaled to the lowered position as shown in FIG. 49 (b). Here, when the pedal is operated in a mode of slowly (less than a predetermined speed) displacement of the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the state in which the moving magnet Ma 9 is separated from the curved wall portion 9316 is maintained. Therefore, the attractive force generated between the fixed magnet Ma2 and the fixed magnet Ma2 becomes large, and the rotational resistance at the time of pedal operation can be secured.

On the other hand, when the pedal is operated in such a manner that the tilting device 9310 is quickly displaced (at a predetermined speed or higher) from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the moving magnet Ma 9 has a centrifugal force as shown in FIG. 49 (b). It is possible to reduce the attractive force generated between the moving magnet Ma9 and the fixed magnet Ma2 during the movement of the tilting device 9310 so as to be negligible. That is, it is possible to reduce the rotational resistance during pedal operation.

Therefore, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 9310 can be changed by the displacement speed of the tilting device 9310 during pedal operation. According to the present embodiment, since the rotational resistance increases due to the magnetic force when the tilting device 9310 is operated slowly, it is easy to perform the operation of maintaining the tilting device 9310 at a predetermined position, and when the tilting device 9310 is operated quickly, the magnetic force is used. By reducing the rotational resistance, it is possible to reduce the operational load felt by the player by reducing the load felt when the player pushes the tilting device 9310 at once.

When the player releases the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 49B, the tilting device 9310 starts the return operation toward the initial position. This return operation occurs at various speeds depending on the configuration of the torsion spring 9343, but the rotation and translation occur at the same time.

That is, when the displacement of the torsion spring 9343 in the rotation direction returns, the tilting device 9310 operates in the rotation direction along the arrow Ta, and one arm portion 9343a of the torsion spring 9343 is pressed against the push-back wall portion 9361h. By returning the displacement caused by the above, the tilting device 9310 operates in the translational direction along the arrow Tb.

Here, as described above, when the tilting device 9310 is rotated from the ascending position, the rotation operation is performed first, the translational operation is performed from the position where the tilting device 9310 is locked, and finally the rotation operation is performed. As you can see, the stages of operation were clearly separated. On the other hand, the return operation of the tilting device 9310 is a mixture of the rotation operation generated along the arrow Ta and the translation operation generated along the arrow Tb. Therefore, the path that the tilting device 9310 moves when the tilting device 9310 is pushed in and the path that the tilting device 9310 moves when the tilting device 9310 returns can be different.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 50, the elastic modulus of the torsion spring 9343 is such that the contact between the notched surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 and the locking plane 9371a on the back side (right side of FIG. 50) is avoided. Is adjusted.

As a result, while maintaining the action of stopping the tilting device 9310 in the middle of the moving range at the time of pushing, it is possible to return at the same speed without stopping at the time of returning, so that the tilting device 9310 stops in the middle. In comparison with, the time required for the return operation from the descending position to the ascending position can be shortened.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player when operating the tilting device 310 with the pedal can be switched between the reaction force generated by the torsion spring 343 and the reaction force generated by the coil spring 362b has been described. In the operation device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment, the moving end member 10362d that supports the lower end portion of the coil spring 362b is configured to be movable, so that the operation amount for pedaling the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 after the operation can be performed. The amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b can be changed when the arrangement of the coil springs is the same. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated and the action claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end portion of the piston member 362a. FIG. 51 (b) shows FIG. 51 (a). The state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by a predetermined angle pedal from the indicated state and tilted is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 51 (a), a state in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 51 (a), first position) is shown, and in FIG. 51 (b), the stepped member 10362f is on the rear side. (Fig. 51 (b) right side, second position) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the operation device 10300 has the above-mentioned tilting device 310 and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and is tilted. The tilting member is between the lower case 10360 forming the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 10360 having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and is arranged facing the lower case 10360. The tilting device 310 is fixed to the lower case 10360 in a manner in which the 310 is arranged, and the tilting device 310 is abutted against the tilting device 310 to determine the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is abutted on the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). It mainly includes an upper case 370 (see FIG. 9).

The lower case 10360 will be described. The lower case 10360 is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper side open, and is movably supported in the vertical direction (FIG. 51 (a) vertical direction). It mainly includes an urging device 10362 having a piston member 362a, and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged.

The urging device 10362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 through the acting claw portion 332, and is a bottomed cylinder that is operably supported in the vertical direction inside the tubular receiving portion 361c and is opened downward. The shape of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and the lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361, and the moving end, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the coil spring 362b from the lower end side and is supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A return spring 10362e disposed between the member 10362d, the moving end member 10362d and the bottom lid member 362c and urging the moving end member 10362d upward, and a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d ( A stepped member 10362f that is movable between a first position near the moving end member 10362d and a second position far from the moving end member 10362d from the front-rear direction (FIG. 51 (a) left-right direction), and a bottom support. It mainly includes a drive solenoid SOL10 that is fastened and fixed to the member 361 and drives the stepped member 10362f along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d.

Since the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d are orthogonal to each other in the operating direction, it is possible to prevent an impact generated when the stepped member 10362f is moved from occurring in the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the moving end member 10362d from being directly loaded by driving the drive solenoid SOL10.

A coil spring 362b is interposed between the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d and the tilting device 310 when the load is transmitted. Therefore, even if the player performs a violent operation such as hitting the tilting device 310, the transmission speed of the load transmitted to the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d by the action of the coil spring 362b as a cushioning material and Since the size can be reduced, damage to the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d can be prevented.

The moving end member 10362d is a portion facing the stepped member 10362f, and the upper surface in contact with the coil spring 362b is formed from a planar shape orthogonal to the moving direction (vertical direction) and protrudes toward the stepped member 10362f. A locking portion 10362d1 is provided. The moving amount of the moving end member 10362d from the upper end position (see FIG. 51 (a)) to the lower end position (see FIG. 54) is set to be equivalent to the moving amount of the piston member 362a.

The amount of protrusion of the locked portion 10362d is defined in relation to the stepped member 10362f. That is, when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the moving end member 10362d interferes in the moving direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51 (a)), while the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position. If this is the case, the amount of protrusion is such that the moving end member 10362d does not overlap in the moving direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51 (a)).

Therefore, in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the first position, the moving end member 10362d is vertically engaged with the stepped member 10362f, while in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position. The moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 10362f and moves up and down in conjunction with the pedal operation of the tilting device 310.

The return spring 10362e is formed of a spring member having an extremely small elastic modulus as compared with the coil spring 362b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d can freely move up and down, the coil spring 362b is more than the coil spring 362b. The return spring 10362e expands and contracts first (the return spring 10362e expands and contracts while the coil spring 362b is maintained at its natural length).

On the other hand, the return spring 10362e is larger than the total weight of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d when the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 51 (a)). Designed to generate forces. Therefore, when the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 51B and the player releases the hand, the moving end member 10362d returns to the upper end position by the urging force of the return spring 10362e.

As described above, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the player releases the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, and moves down in conjunction with the player performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. In other words, the moving end member 10362d is displaced as the player pushes in the tilting device 310.

The stepped member 10362f has a plate-shaped main body BD extending vertically and a plurality of protruding portions (in order from the upper side) protruding forward (left side in FIG. 51 (a)) from the main body BD. 1 protrusion MT1, second protrusion MT2, third protrusion MT3) are mainly provided.

The protruding portions MT1 to MT3 are vertically adjacent to each other on the side surface of the main body portion BD, and the vertical dimensions on the root side thereof are the same. That is, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the protruding portions MT1 to MT3 are arranged in each region (upper region BDU, middle region BDM, lower region BDB) that divides the vertical dimension of the main body portion BD into three equal parts. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the lower end position of the upper region BDU and the upper end position of the middle region BDM coincide with each other, and the lower end position of the middle region BDM and the upper end position of the lower region BDB coincide with each other.

The first protrusion MT1 extends from the upper end position of the upper region BDU and inclines downward toward the front, and the first locking surface MT1a extends from the lower end position of the upper region BDU and inclines upward toward the front. It mainly comprises one guide surface MT1b, which intersects at the intersection position C1 of the protruding tip.

The first locking surface MT1a and the first guide surface MT1b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position.

For example, as the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged above the intersection position C1, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 becomes the first. 1 Guided to the upper end side of the locking surface MT1a, the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, and at the same time, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the first locking surface MT1a. To reach. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the first locking surface MT1a in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and remains in place.

Further, for example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C1 and above the lower end position of the first guide surface MT1b. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the first guide surface MT1b, and at the same time the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 leads to the first lead. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT1b. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the second locking surface MT2a described later in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member via the coil spring 362b. Even if given to 10362d, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its original position.

The intersection position C1 is set to a position lowered from the upper end position of the upper region BDU by a dimension of 1/5 of the vertical dimension of the upper region BDU.

The second protrusion MT2 extends from the upper end position of the middle region BDM and inclines downward toward the front, and the second locking surface MT2a extends from the lower end position of the middle region BDM and inclines upward toward the front. The two guide surfaces MT2b are mainly provided, and they intersect at the intersection position C2 of the protruding tip.

The second locking surface MT2a and the second guide surface MT2b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position.

For example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a and above the intersection position C2. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the upper end side of the second locking surface MT2a, the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, and at the same time, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 engages in the second position. It reaches the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the stop surface MT2a. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the second locking surface MT2a in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and remains in place.

Further, for example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C2 and above the lower end position of the second guide surface MT2b. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the second guide surface MT2b, and at the same time the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 leads to the second lead. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT2b.

Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the third locking surface MT3a described later in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member via the coil spring 362b. Even if given to 10362d, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its original position.

The intersection position C2 is set to a position lowered from the upper end position of the middle region BDM by a dimension of 2/5 of the vertical dimension of the middle region BDM. That is, compared to the vertical direction (moving direction of the moving end member 10362f) from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the crossing position C1, the vertical direction from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C2. The directional dimension is set larger.

The third protrusion MT3 extends from the upper end position of the lower region BDB and inclines downward toward the front, and the third locking surface MT3a extends from the lower end position of the lower region BDB and inclines upward toward the front. It is mainly provided with the three guide surfaces MT3b, which intersect at the intersection position C3 of the protruding tip.

The third locking surface MT3a and the third guide surface MT3b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position.

For example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the upper end position of the third locking surface MT2a and above the intersection position C3. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the upper end side of the third locking surface MT3a, the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, and at the same time, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 engages in the third position. It reaches the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the stop surface MT3a. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the third locking surface MT3a in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and remains in place.

Further, for example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C3 and above the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the third guide surface MT2b, and at the same time the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 leads to the third guide. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT3b.

In the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the moving end member 10362d is supported by the bottom lid member 362c (since the bottom lid member 362c is formed from a shape that supports the moving end member 10362d). Even if a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in the same position.

The intersection position C3 is set to a position lowered from the upper end position of the lower region BDB by a dimension of 3/5 of the vertical dimension of the lower region BDB. That is, compared to the vertical direction (moving direction of the moving end member 10362f) from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C2, the vertical direction from the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a to the crossing position C3. The directional dimension is set larger.

Therefore, the vertical dimension from the upper end position of each region BDU, BDM, BDB to the corresponding intersection positions C1 to C3 increases as it goes downward. That is, the amount of movement required for the moving end member 10362d to pass through the crossing positions C1 to C3 while the stepped member 10362f is retracted to the second position can be increased toward the lower region.

As a result, when the stepped member 10362f is controlled to reciprocate between the first position and the second position at regular intervals, it corresponds to the operation speed when the player operates the tilting device 310 with a pedal. Therefore, the position where the moving end member 10362d is locked can be changed, and the load applied to the player can be changed, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timed change of the drive solenoid SOL10 in the first operation pattern. In the first operation pattern, the stepped member 10362f is held in the first position for 0.1 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL10, and then the stepped member 10362f is released by releasing the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.2 seconds, the stepped member 10362f operates in a constant pattern.

In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated (pushing operation from the state shown in FIG. 51 (a)) by the force of a general player to reach the descending position, a minimum of 0.6 seconds is required. In this embodiment, the elastic modulus of the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b is set.

Further, the displacement generated in the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the locking is released is directly generated in the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b.

As described above, the state change of the solenoid SOL10 occurs a plurality of times in 0.6 seconds required for pedaling the tilting device 310. Therefore, even when the player pedals the tilting device 310 at high speed (for example, tapping it with full force), the stepped member 10362f is once first before the tilting device 310 reaches the descending position. Placed in position. In other words, the moving end member 10362d does not move completely (move from the upper end position to the lower end position) while the stepped member 10362f is maintained at the second position.

Since the period in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position is shorter than the period required for the restoration of the spring, the amount of restoration of the coil spring 362c while the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position Ignore about. That is, the moving amount of the moving end member 10362d is equivalent to the moving amount of the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position.

Next, as a first operation mode, a case where the operation speed is smaller than the specified boundary value will be described. Here, since the period during which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersection position C1, the locked portion 10362d is continuously maintained. By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is again arranged at the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the crossing position C1 is 1/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is smaller than 1.4 degrees. In the case of the first operation mode in which the operation speed (first speed V1), in other words, the tilting device 310 is operated at an operation speed in which the time until the pedal is completely operated is longer than 3 seconds, the locked portion 10362d1 is used. Maintained at the top position.

In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position (see FIG. 51 (a)), the moving amount of the tilting device 310 and the displacement of the coil spring 362b are equivalent. In this embodiment, in this case, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 is maximized.

On the other hand, when the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is operated at an operating speed larger than 1.4 degrees, in other words, the tilting device 310 is operated at an operating speed shorter than 3 seconds until the pedal is completely operated. , The locked portion 10362d1 may move below the intersection position C1.

Next, a second operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 10300. In FIG. 53 (a), a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating a predetermined angle pedal from the state shown in FIG. 51 (b) is shown, and the stepped member 10362f is on the front side (left side in FIG. 53 (a), first. The state of being arranged at the position) is shown in the figure. In the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the moving end member 10362d can move to the upper end position of the second protruding portion MT2.

Here, since the period for which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersection position C2 during that period, it is continued. By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged at the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C2 is 2/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is larger than 1.4 degrees. And the operation speed smaller than 2.8 degrees (second speed V2), in other words, the operation speed that the time until the tilting device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than 3 seconds. In the case of the second operation mode operated by, the locked portion 10362d1 can move to the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a (see FIG. 53A), the displacement of the coil spring 362b is smaller than the moving amount of the tilting device 310. Therefore, when operating in the second operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 becomes smaller than in the case of operating in the first operation mode.

Next, a third operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 10300. FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating a predetermined angle pedal from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a), and the stepped member 10362f is on the front side (left side in FIG. 53 (b), first. The state of being arranged at the position) is shown in the figure. In the third operation mode, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the moving end member 10362d can move to the upper end position of the third protrusion MT3.

Here, since the period in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersection position C3 during that period, it is continued. By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged at the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C3 is 3/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is larger than 2.8 degrees. And, the operation speed smaller than 4.2 degrees (third speed V3), in other words, the time until the tilting device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is longer than 1.0 second and shorter than 1.5 seconds. In the case of the third operation mode operated at the operation speed, the locked portion 10362d1 can move to the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a.

In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a (see FIG. 53 (b)), the displacement of the coil spring 362b is the second displacement as compared with the moving amount of the tilting device 310. It becomes smaller than the operation mode of. Therefore, when operating in the third operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 becomes smaller than in the case of operating in the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

Next, a fourth operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of the operating device 10300. FIG. 54 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating a predetermined angle pedal from the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), and the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 54, first position). The state is illustrated. In the fourth operation mode, as shown in FIG. 54, the moving end member 10362d can move to the lower end position of the third protrusion MT3. In the state shown in FIG. 54, since the piston member 362a and the moving end member 10362d are arranged at the lower end positions, the displacement of the coil spring 362b has returned to the state at the start of pedal operation (see FIG. 51 (a)). Therefore, when the state shown in FIG. 53 (b) changes to the state shown in FIG. 54, the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is greatly reduced.

Here, since the period during which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained below the intersection position C3, it is continued. By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged at the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C3 is 3/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is larger than 4.2 degrees. The operation speed (fourth speed V4), in other words, in the case of the fourth operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is operated at an operation speed shorter than 1.0 second until the pedal is completely operated, the locked portion 10362d1 Can move to the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b.

In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b (see FIG. 54), the displacement of the coil spring 362b is larger than the moving amount of the tilting device 310 from the third operation mode. Also increases and becomes smaller. Therefore, when operating in the fourth operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 is compared with the case of operating in the first operation mode, the second operation mode, or the third operation mode. Becomes smaller.

In the above description, the fact that the moving end member can be moved to a predetermined position includes, for example, a case where the moving end member 10362d can be moved to a predetermined position by performing a continuous striking operation or the like during the push-in effective period.

FIG. 55 shows the moving end member at the end of the operation corresponding to the change in the time required to pedal the tilting device 10310 from the ascending position to the descending position (when the tilting device 10310 is arranged in the descending position) in the present embodiment. It is a figure which showed the change of the position where 10362d can be arranged. Note that FIG. 55 describes a case where the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern.

In FIG. 55, the vertical axis shows the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d, and the horizontal axis shows the time required for pedaling the tilting device 10310 (assuming that it is operated at a constant speed). As the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d goes downward, the amount of deformation of the coil spring 362b is reduced, so that the load (reaction force) given to the player who pedals the tilting device 10310 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 55, when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern, the load given to the player can be changed by the operation speed when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal. In other words, as the operation speed increases (the time required to operate the tilting device 10310 for pedaling decreases), the reaction force applied to the player can be reduced.

This reduction in reaction force is not caused by, for example, changing the amount of contraction of the coil spring 362b before the operation of the tilting device 310 in advance (not caused by changing the elastic modulus), but is not caused by changing the elastic modulus of the tilting device 310. It is caused by changing the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b with respect to the operation amount.

Therefore, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b can be changed according to the operation timing of the player. In other words, the load given to the player can be changed depending on the operation mode (first operation mode to the fourth operation mode) while keeping the state of the coil spring 362b equivalent before the operation. Therefore, for example, the coil spring. Even when the 362b is visible, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the reaction force changes in appearance.

Further, when the operation pattern of the solenoid SOL10 is changed from the first operation pattern described above, the reaction force applied to the player may change in a mode different from the above-mentioned mode even if the operation is performed in the same operation mode. ..

For example, a second operation pattern in which the period in which the stepped member 10632f is maintained in the second position is 0.05 seconds, unlike the first operation pattern, will be described.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a timed change of the drive solenoid SOL10 in the second operation pattern. In the second operation pattern, the stepped member 10362f is held in the first position for 0.25 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL10, and then the stepped member 10362f is released from the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.05 seconds, the stepped member 10362f operates in a constant pattern.

In the second operation pattern, as in the first operation pattern, the start point of excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is generated at intervals of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp the difference between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern from the operation sound generated when the drive solenoid SOL10 is excited and the operation vibration.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. The vertical dimension from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the tolerance position C1 is 1/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, and is from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the intersection position C2. Since the vertical dimension is 2/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.05 seconds is larger than 1.4 degrees and smaller than 2.8 degrees, in other words, tilting. When the time required to fully operate the pedal of the device 310 is shorter than 0.75 seconds and longer than 0.375 seconds, the locked portion 10362d1 is maintained at the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if a general player pedals the tilting device 310 with all one's might, it takes 0.6 seconds to fully operate the tilting device 310 to the descending position. Therefore, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the second operation pattern, the moving end member 10362d cannot be moved below the tolerance position C2 even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in as much as possible.

Further, even if the operation pattern is different, the difference in the time for maintaining the stepped member 10632f at the second position is as short as 0.2 seconds or less, so that the player can see the difference from the appearance and the operation sound. It can be difficult to notice.

As described above, it is difficult to grasp the point that the state of the coil spring 362b does not change before the operation and the difference in the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 that switches the load applied to the player according to the operation mode by switching the operation pattern. From the point, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the difference in the magnitude of the load given to the player due to the difference in the game mode even before the operation of the tilting device 310, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game. Can be prevented from being scraped.

That is, for example, the drive after the display "Hit the pedal as much as possible! If the reaction force is smaller than usual, chance!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is notified to urge the player to operate the tilting device 310. The operation of the solenoid SOL10 is controlled by, for example, the MPU 201 in an arbitrary operation pattern.

Here, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the first operation pattern, it is slower for the player to operate the tilting device 310 (for example, to operate it in the fourth operation mode described above). Compared with the case of operating the tilting device 310 (for example, the case of operating in the first operation mode described above), the load given to the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the second operation pattern, the moving end member 10362d does not reach the lower end position even if the player operates the tilting device 310 as much as possible, and the second locking surface. Since it stays at the upper end position of MT2a (see FIG. 53A), the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 becomes larger than that when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern.

In this case, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is larger than usual (compared to the case where the moving end member 10362d is locked to the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a of the stepped member 10362f. Although it is small, the reaction force is larger than when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern, so there was no chance at the stage when the player recognized the difference in the load (so-called "" You can notice that it was a "solenoid production").

Since the difference in reaction force can be noticed only by the player who pushed the tilting device 310 according to the notification, the player can be encouraged to push the tilting device 310 according to the notification (participation of the player). You can improve your motivation).

By switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10, it is possible to switch between multiple types of reaction forces corresponding to the player's operating speed, so it is possible to return multiple types of loads to the player who pushed in as notified. can.

These operation patterns may be switched, for example, in the third symbol display device 81 while the display prompting the tilting device 310 to be pushed is continued for a certain period of time. Hereinafter, an example of switching the operation pattern will be described.

For example, in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to dynamically display the timing of pushing the tilting device 310 as another display in addition to the display prompting the pushing of the tilting device 310 such as "press the button" for a certain period of time. For example, a sphere that moves in close proximity in the opposite direction on the same path is displayed, and an image such as "when the spheres overlap, push it all the way" is displayed.

By switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 in accordance with these displays and timings, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the tilting device 310.

For example, in the first control example of the drive solenoid SOL10, the drive solenoid SOL10 is operated in the first operation pattern at the time or period when the display indicates that the drive solenoid SOL10 is pushed in as much as possible, and the second operation pattern is performed in a short period before and after that. The stepped member 10362f is maintained at the first position by maintaining the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 during the rest of the period.

It should be noted that the first control example is executed, for example, in the case where a display prompting the tilting device 310 to be pushed is performed in an effect performed with a fluctuation having a large expectation degree (for example, a jackpot expectation degree of 60% or more).

On the other hand, for example, in the second control example of the drive solenoid SOL10, the drive solenoid operates in the second operation pattern in a short period before and after the time or period when the timing is set to push in as much as possible by the display, and the drive solenoid operates in the other period. By maintaining the excitation of the SOL10, the stepped member 10362f is maintained at the first position.

The second control example is executed when, for example, a display prompting the tilting device 310 to be pushed is performed in an effect performed with a fluctuation in which the expectation degree is not large (for example, the jackpot expectation degree is less than 60%). ..

Therefore, if it is possible to grasp whether the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the first control example or the second control example, it is possible to grasp the magnitude of the expectation. On the other hand, in the first control example and the second control example, the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 is the same at the time when the timing is set to the full push or when the period is excluded.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 may be pushed in at a timing other than the operation of pushing the tilting device as notified at the timing of pushing it all the way or at a timing other than the timing of pushing it all the way (for example, at the timing of pushing it all the way or at a timing other than the period). Whether the drive solenoid SOL10 is operating in the first control example even if the tilting device 310 is operated at the timing of pushing in as much as possible or at the first speed V1). It is not possible to grasp whether or not it is operating in the control example of 2. As a result, the player's concentration on the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first control example or the second control example, when the pushing of the tilting device 310 is detected by the various sensors S1 to S3, after a predetermined time has elapsed ( For example, after 1 second has elapsed), the drive solenoid SOL10 is maintained in an excited state (shifts to a control mode different from that of the first control example or the second control example).

Therefore, if the tilting device 310 is accidentally pushed in before the timing or period when the tilting device 310 is pushed in as much as possible, the drive solenoid is operated even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in again when the timing is set to be pushed in as much as possible or during the period. It is not possible to distinguish whether the operation of the SOL 10 is the first control example or the second control example. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the pushing operation before the pushing timing of the tilting device 310, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player who operates the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, in the production where the degree of expectation is extremely low, the drive solenoid SOL10 is excited when the notification for pushing the tilting device 310 is given or when the notification for pushing is not performed (such as in the case of the demo screen). Control may be performed to release the stepped member 10362f for a long time (maintain the stepped member 10362f in the second position). In this case, regardless of the difference in the operation mode, the moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 10362f, and the moving end member 10362d is lowered in conjunction with the pushing of the tilting device 310, so that the coil spring 362b expands and contracts. Almost never occurs. Therefore, the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be minimized. As a result, the reaction force given to the player by the operation (trial push, etc.) of the tilting device 310 when the degree of expectation is low can be reduced, and the player's feeling of fatigue due to the operation can be reduced.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player when operating the tilting device 310 with the pedal can be switched between the reaction force generated by the torsion spring 343 and the reaction force generated by the coil spring 362b has been described. In the operation device 11300 according to the eleventh embodiment, the moving end member 10362d that supports the lower end portion of the coil spring 362b is configured to be movable, so that the operation amount for pedaling the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 after the operation can be performed. The amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b can be changed when the arrangement of the coil springs is the same. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

57 (a) and 57 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 11300 according to the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 57 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated and the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end portion of the piston member 362a. FIG. 57 (b) shows FIG. 57 (a). The state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by a predetermined angle pedal from the indicated state and tilted is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 57 (a), a state in which the stepped member 11362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57 (a)) is shown, and in FIG. 57 (b), the stepped member 11362f is on the rear side (FIG. 57 (a)). b) The state of being arranged on the right side) is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the operation device 11300 has the above-mentioned tilting device 310 and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and is tilted. The tilting member is between the lower case 11360 forming the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 11360 having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and is arranged facing the lower case 11360. The tilting device 310 is fixed to the lower case 11360 in a manner in which the 310 is arranged, and the tilting device 310 is abutted to determine the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is abutted on the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). It mainly includes an upper case 370 (see FIG. 9).

The lower case 11360 will be described. The lower case 11360 is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper side open, and is movably supported in the vertical direction (FIG. 57 (a) vertical direction). Mainly includes an urging device 11362 having a piston member 362a, and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged.

The urging device 11362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 through the acting claw portion 332, similarly to the urging device 10362 described above in the tenth embodiment, and is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 in the vertical direction inside the tubular receiving portion 361c. A bottomed cylindrical piston member 362a that is operably supported and opened downward, a coil spring 362b that is housed in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 in a manner of covering the lower opening of the tubular receiving portion 361c, and the coil spring 362b are arranged so as to be in contact with each other from the lower end side in the vertical direction. A return spring that is disposed between the moving end member 10362d that is slidably movable and is supported by the bottom receiving member 361, and the moving end member 10362d and the bottom lid member 362c, and urges the moving end member 10362d upward. In addition to mainly providing 10362e, the first position close to the moving end member 10362d and the moving end member from the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d (front-back direction, FIG. 57 (a) left-right direction). The stepped member 11362f that is movable between the second position far from 10362d and the stepped member 11362f that is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 and is fixed to the bottom support member 361 along the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. It mainly includes a drive solenoid SOL11 for driving.

Since the stepped member 11362f and the moving end member 10362d are orthogonal to each other in the operating direction, it is possible to suppress an impact generated when the stepped member 11362f is moved in the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the moving end member 10362d from being directly loaded by driving the drive solenoid SOL11.

The moving end member 10362d includes a locked portion 10362d1 which is a portion facing the stepped member 11362f and projects toward the stepped member 11362f.

The amount of protrusion of the locked portion 10362d is defined in relation to the stepped member 11362f. That is, when the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, the moving end member 10362d interferes in the moving direction (vertical direction in FIG. 57A), while the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the second position. If this is the case, the amount of protrusion is such that the moving end member 10362d does not overlap in the moving direction (vertical direction in FIG. 57A).

Therefore, in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged in the first position, the moving end member 10362d is vertically locked to the stepped member 11362f, while in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged in the second position. The moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 11362f and moves up and down in conjunction with the pedal operation of the tilting device 310.

The return spring 10362e is formed of a spring member having an extremely small elastic modulus as compared with the coil spring 362b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated in a state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d can freely move up and down, the coil spring 362b is more than the coil spring 362b. The return spring 10362e expands and contracts first (the return spring 10362e expands and contracts while the coil spring 362b is maintained at its natural length).

On the other hand, the return spring 10362e is larger than the total weight of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d when the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A). Designed to generate forces. Therefore, when the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 57B and the player releases the hand, the moving end member 10362d returns to the upper end position by the urging force of the return spring 10362e.

As described above, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the player releases the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, and moves down in conjunction with the player performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. In other words, the moving end member 10362d is displaced as the player pushes in the tilting device 310.

The stepped member 11362f has a plate-shaped main body BD extending vertically and a plurality of protruding portions (in order from the upper side, upper side) protruding forward (left side in FIG. 57 (a)) from the main body portion BD. It mainly includes a protruding portion MTU and a lower protruding portion MTB).

The protruding portions MTU and MTB are aligned vertically on the side surface of the main body portion BD at intervals, and the shapes of the portions protruding from the front side surface to the front side of the main body portion BD are the same. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the main body BD includes each region (upper half region BDHU, lower half region BDHU) that divides the vertical dimension into two equal parts, and in the present embodiment, the lower end position of the upper half region BDHU. And the upper end position of the lower half region BDHB. The protrusions MTU and MTB are arranged in the upper half region BDHU arranged on the upper side of each of these regions.

The upper protrusion MTU has an upper locking surface MT11a that extends from the upper end position of the upper half region BDHU and inclines downward toward the front, and one of the vertical dimensions of the main body BD downward from the upper end position of the upper half region. Mainly provided with a lower horizontal plane MT11b extending in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d from a position lowered by the dimension of / 10 to the front side, and they intersect at the crossing position C11 of the protruding tip. do. That is, the crossing position C11 is arranged at a position lowered by 1/10 of the vertical dimension of the main body portion BD from the upper end position of the main body portion BD.

The upper locking surface MT11a has a function of defining the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position. For example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged above the intersection position C11, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 moves as the stepped member 11362f moves from the second position to the first position. Guided to the upper end side of the upper locking surface MT11a, the stepped member 11362f reaches the first position, and at the same time, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 moves to the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the upper locking surface MT11a. To reach. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the upper locking surface MT11a in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if the moving end member 10362d is removed, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in the same position.

Further, for example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C11 and above the intersection position C12 described later, the moving end member 10362d is located at an intermediate position (see FIG. 57B). When the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, it is not supported at all until it reaches the position supported by the lower protrusion MTB), so that it corresponds to the operation amount of the tilting device 310. It is possible to move freely in the vertical direction.

The lower protruding portion MTB is formed with the upper locking surface MT11a of the upper protruding portion MTU, starting from the intersection of a point extending horizontally from the lower end position of the upper half region BDHU to the front side and a point extending vertically downward from the intersection position C11. The upper locking surface MT12a extending toward the main body BD at the same inclination angle (in other words, extending downward from the main body BD toward the above-mentioned intersection) and the upper half region BDHU. Mainly provided with a lower horizontal plane MT12b extending from the lower end position to the front side in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, and they intersect at the crossing position C12 of the protruding tip. That is, the crossing position C12 coincides with the intermediate position of the main body BD (the lower end position of the upper half region BDHU) in the horizontal direction. Further, the intersection position C11 and the intersection position C12 coincide with each other in the vertical direction.

The upper locking surface MT12a has a function of defining the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position.

For example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C11 and above the intersection position C12, when the stepped member 11362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is on the upper side. It is possible to lock at the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the locking surface MT12a. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the upper locking surface MT12a in a state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if the moving end member 10362d is removed, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in the same position.

Further, for example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C12 (see FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b)), the moving end member 10362d has the moving end member 10362d. Since it is not supported at all until it reaches the lower end position, it can move freely in the vertical direction according to the operation amount of the tilting device 310.

Here, the vertical movable range of the moving end member 10362d is equivalent to the movable range in which the piston portion 362a moves in the vertical direction when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal (the tilting device 310 is pedaled to the lower end position). When the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the lower end position during operation, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is the same as the state shown in FIG. 57 (a)).

That is, in a state where the locked portion 10362d is arranged below the intersection position C12, the game is played via the tilting device 310 regardless of the degree of pedal operation of the tilting device 310 (pushing angle of the tilting device 310). The urging force (reaction force) of the coil spring 362b given to the person does not change.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the moving end member 10362b is arranged on the upper side of the lower protruding portion MTB, the reaction force caused by the coil spring 362b increases as the degree of pedal operation increases. When the moving end member 10362b is arranged on the lower side of the lower protruding portion MTB, the reaction force caused by the coil spring 362b is reduced to the magnitude before the pedal operation.

Therefore, the type of load given to the player via the tilting device 310 is that the moving end member 10362b is arranged on the upper side of the lower protruding portion MTB, and the greater the degree (tilt angle) of pedaling the tilting device 310, the more the coil. The first load in the state where the displacement amount of the spring 362b becomes large and the reaction force changes (reaction force change state, see FIG. 57 (a) or FIG. 57 (b)), and the moving end member 10362b is the lower protruding portion MTB. Arranged on the lower side, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b does not change regardless of the degree of pedal operation of the tilting device 310, and the reaction force changes almost the same (only the reaction force changes of the torsion spring 343 and the return spring 10362e). It is switched by the second load of the state (reaction force invariant state, see FIG. 59 (a) or FIG. 59 (b)).

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a timed change of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the third operation pattern. In the third operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is held in the first position for 0.6 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL11, and then the stepped member 11362f is released from the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.2 seconds, the stepped member 11362f operates in a constant pattern.

In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated (pushing operation from the state shown in FIG. 57A) by the force of a general player to reach the descending position (see FIG. 59B). The elastic modulus of the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b is set in such a manner that a minimum of 0.6 seconds is required.

Further, the displacement generated in the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the second position and the locking is released is directly generated in the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b.

As described above, in the third operation pattern by the solenoid SOL11, the tilting device 310 moves by half the moving range during the period (0.2 seconds) in which the stepped member 11362f is maintained in the retracted state. It is shorter than the required period (0.3 seconds) (0.2s <0.3s). Therefore, this is a case where the player pushes the tilting device 310 at the fastest speed (operates over 0.6 seconds to the lower end position) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57 (a)). However, while the stepped member 11362f moves from the first position to the second position and moves to the first position again, the moving end member 10362d does not move to the lower side of the lower protrusion MTB.

In addition, the stepped member 11362f is not arranged at the second position more than once in 0.6 seconds, which is the minimum required to fully operate the tilting device 310 with the pedal. Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 at the fastest speed (operates over 0.6 seconds to the lower end position) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57 (a)), the tilting device 310 is pushed in at the fastest speed. The stepped member 11362f is not arranged at the second position more than once during pushing.

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 at the fastest speed (operates to the lower end position over 0.6 seconds) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57 (a)), the tilting device 310 is pushed in at the fastest speed. Regardless of the pushing timing, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is the above-mentioned first load (reaction force change state).

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is pushed from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a) to the lower end position over a time longer than 0.6 seconds, a plurality of stepped members 11362f are placed in the second position during the operation. In some cases, the moving end member 10362d may move to the lower side of the lower protrusion MTB. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 59, an operation mode (conditional slow speed operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 is pushed to the lower end position over a time longer than 0.6 seconds will be described.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 11300. Note that FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating a predetermined angle pedal from the state shown in FIG. 57 (b), and FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted from the state shown in FIG. 59 (a). The state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by a predetermined angle pedal and reaches the lower end position is shown in the figure.

As described above, when the moving end member 10362d is supported by the protruding portions MTU and MTB, the upper and lower surfaces of the moving end member 10362d and the lower horizontal planes MT11b and MT12b directly below the moving end member 10362d are vertically supported. The minimum passing distance HMI, which is the distance in the direction, is 1/10 of the movable range of the moving end member.

For example, when the moving end member 10362d is started to descend from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A), the moving end member 10362d is moved while the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the second position. When the amount is less than the minimum passing distance HMI, the moving end member 10362d rises to a position supported by the upper protrusion MTU as the stepped member 11362f moves to the first position.

In the third operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is maintained in the second position for 0.2 seconds, so that the minimum passing distance HMI can be passed during that time (in other words, 2.0 is completed until the pedal operation is completed. When the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at an operation passing speed (operation speed shorter than a second, conditional slow speed), the moving end member 10362d passes through the lower protruding portion MTB and is arranged on the lower side during the operation. There is a possibility (see FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b)).

Therefore, when the player pedals the tilting device 310 at the above-mentioned conditional slow operation speed (the operation speed is shorter than 2.0 seconds until the completion of the pedal operation of the tilting device 310), the tilting device 310 is used. The load (reaction force) given to the player is referred to as the above-mentioned second load (reaction force invariant state).

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a change in the type of reaction force given to a player corresponding to a change in the time required for pedaling the tilting device 11310 from an ascending position to a descending position in the present embodiment.

In FIG. 60, the vertical axis shows the type of reaction force (first load, second load, first load or second load), and the horizontal axis shows the time required to pedal the tilting device 11310 (at a constant speed). (Assuming the case of operation) is shown in the plot every 0.1 seconds.

The "first load or second load" on the vertical axis indicates that the load may be the first load or the second load depending on the timing at which the pedal operation is started. For example, when the time required to operate the tilting device 11310 for the pedal is 0.8 seconds, and the pedal operation is started at the timing when the drive solenoid SOL11 changes to the first position (the timing at the left end of FIG. 58), 0. Since the drive solenoid SOL11 is arranged only once in the second position by the time when 8 seconds have elapsed, the type of reaction force given to the player is the first load, while the drive solenoid SOL11 is arranged in the second position. When the pedal operation is started after 0.1 seconds, the drive solenoid SOL11 is placed twice in the second position by 0.8 seconds, and the time maintained in that position passes through the minimum passing distance HMI. Since it is 0.1 seconds, which is longer than 0.08 seconds required to do so, the type of reaction force given to the player is the second load.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the pedal operation that becomes the first load or the second load, in the present embodiment, although the reaction force may be changed to the reaction force invariant state, the reaction force is changed to the reaction force invariant state. There is no reaction force change state. This is clear from the fact that when the moving end member 10362d is arranged above the intersection position C12, the reaction force changes state, and when the moving end member 10362d is arranged below the intersection position C12, the reaction force does not change. From this, in the pedal operation that becomes the first load or the second load, the action of reducing the reaction force during the pedal operation can be commonly generated.

In this way, when the drive solenoid SOL11 operates in the third operation pattern, the player can change the operation speed (time required for pedaling the tilting device 11310) when operating the tilting device 310 with the pedal. The load applied to the can be varied. In other words, the operation speed is higher when the operation speed is near the maximum (the operation speed near the operation speed at which the time required to complete the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is 0.6 seconds). The load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be increased as compared with the case where the speed is small (larger than the operation passing speed).

This change in reaction force is not caused by, for example, changing the amount of contraction of the coil spring 362b before the operation of the tilting device 310 in advance (not caused by changing the elastic modulus), but is not caused by changing the elastic modulus of the tilting device 310. It is caused by changing the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b with respect to the operation amount.

Therefore, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b can be changed according to the operation timing of the player. In other words, the load applied to the player can be changed depending on the operation mode while keeping the state of the coil spring 362b equivalent before the operation. Therefore, for example, even if the coil spring 362b is visible, the appearance is sensible. It is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the reaction force changes.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the time required for pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is shorter than 2.0 seconds, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is likely to change to the second load. Then, when the time is 2.0 seconds or more, the load given to the player via the tilting device 310 is maintained by the first load.

Therefore, if it is desired to reduce the reaction force returned to the player by slowly operating the tilting device 310, it is necessary to prevent the pedal from being operated for 2.0 seconds or longer. For example, by setting the effective period of the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 to be less than 2.0 seconds and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4), the player can operate the pedal within 2.0 seconds. Can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pedaling the tilting device 310 over 2.0 seconds or longer.

Further, when the operation pattern of the solenoid SOL10 is changed from the above-mentioned third operation pattern, the reaction force applied to the player may change in a mode different from the above-mentioned mode even if the solenoid SOL 10 is operated in the same operation mode. ..

For example, a fourth operation pattern in which the period in which the stepped member 11632f is maintained in the second position is 0.1 seconds, which is different from the third operation pattern, will be described.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a timed change of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the fourth operation pattern. In the fourth operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is held in the first position for 0.7 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL11, and then the stepped member 11362f is released from the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.1 seconds, the stepped member 11362f operates in a constant pattern.

In the fourth operation pattern, as in the third operation pattern, the start point of excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is generated at intervals of 0.8 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp the difference between the third operation pattern and the fourth operation pattern from the operation sound generated when the drive solenoid SOL11 is excited and the operation vibration.

As described above, when the moving end member 10362d is supported by the protruding portions MTU and MTB, the upper and lower surfaces of the moving end member 10362d and the lower horizontal planes MT11b and MT12b directly below the moving end member 10362d are vertically supported. The minimum passing distance HMI, which is the distance in the direction, is 1/10 of the movable range of the moving end member.

For example, when the moving end member 10362d is started to descend from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A), the moving end member 10362d is moved while the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the second position. When the amount is less than the minimum passing distance HMI, the moving end member 10362d rises to a position supported by the upper protrusion MTU as the stepped member 11362f moves to the first position.

In the fourth operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is maintained in the second position for 0.1 seconds, so that the minimum passing distance HMI can be passed during that time (in other words, the completion of the pedal operation is 1.0. When the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at the second operation passing speed, which is an operation speed shorter than a second (second conditional slow speed), the moving end member 10362d passes through the lower protruding portion MTB during the operation to the lower side. (See FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b)).

Therefore, when the player pedals the tilting device 310 at the above-mentioned second conditional slow operating speed (the operating speed is shorter than 1.0 second until the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is used. The load (reaction force) applied to the player via the above-mentioned second load (reaction force invariant state) is defined as the above-mentioned second load (reaction force). In other words, when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at the operating speed remaining excluding the second operation passing speed among the operating passing speeds, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is described above. Since it is the first load (reaction force change state), it differs from the third operation pattern in this respect.

That is, even when the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is the same, the drive solenoid SOL11 is operated in the third operation pattern or the drive solenoid SOL11 is operated in the fourth operation pattern, via the tilting device 310. The load (reaction force) given to the player changes.

Even if the operation pattern is different, the difference in the time for maintaining the stepped member 11632f at the second position is as short as 0.1 seconds or less, so that the player can see the difference from the appearance and the operation sound. It can be difficult to notice.

As described above, it is difficult to grasp the point that the state of the coil spring 362b does not change before the operation and the difference in the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL11 that switches the load applied to the player according to the operation mode by switching the operation pattern. From the point, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the difference in the magnitude of the load given to the player due to the difference in the game mode even before the operation of the tilting device 310, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game. Can be prevented from being scraped.

That is, for example, on the third symbol display device 81, the message "Push the pedal over 1.5 seconds! If the reaction force is smaller than usual, chance!" Is displayed, and the player is notified to urge the player to operate the tilting device 310. After that, the operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is controlled by, for example, MPU201 in an arbitrary operation pattern.

Here, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is controlled by the third operation pattern, the player who operates the tilting device 310 over 1.5 seconds is the one who operates the tilting device 310 as much as possible (0.6 seconds). The load applied to the player can be reduced as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is moved to the descending position).

On the other hand, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is controlled by the fourth operation pattern, the player operates the tilting device 310 over 1.5 seconds, and the tilting device 310 is operated with all one's might (0.6 seconds). Even when the tilting device 310 is moved to the descending position), the load applied to the player is the same (the reaction force becomes larger than when the drive solenoid SOL11 operates in the third operation pattern). ). Therefore, when the player who has performed the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 recognizes the magnitude of the reaction force, it can be noticed that there was no chance (it was a so-called "gase effect").

Since the difference in reaction force can be noticed only by the player who pushed the tilting device 310 according to the notification, the player can be encouraged to push the tilting device 310 according to the notification (participation of the player). You can improve your motivation).

By switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL11, it is possible to switch between multiple types of reaction forces corresponding to the player's operating speed, so it is possible to return multiple types of loads to the player who pushed in as notified. can.

The main object of the present embodiment is to pedal the tilting device 310 so that the player who notices the display hits the display prompting to push the tilting device 310 in the third symbol display device 81 just before the end of the period. When operating, the reaction force may be increased to reduce the moving speed of the tilting device 310 during pedal operation. Therefore, at the end of the period in which the operation control of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the above-mentioned third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern is displayed to prompt the pushing of the tilting device 310 in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the display). It is executed only from 2 seconds before the end timing to the end timing of the display), and during the other period, the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is released and the stepped member 11362f is placed in the second position. good.

As a result, the load (reaction force) given to the player via the tilting device 310 is reduced in the period other than the final stage of the period in which the display prompting the tilting device 310 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, during a period other than the final stage (for example, immediately after the start of the period in which the display prompting the tilting device 310 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), the player is asked to operate the tilting device 310 with a pedal. It is possible to prevent the applied load from becoming excessive and the player who operates the tilting device 310 from accumulating a feeling of fatigue. As a result, the probability that the player avoids the operation of the tilting device 310 can be reduced, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased by operating the tilting device 310 as notified.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68. In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the tilting device 310 operated by the player is fixed has been described, but in the operation device 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment, the second tilting device 400 operated by the player is tilted. It is connected to the device 12310 and can be expanded and contracted in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 12310. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is a front perspective view of the operation device 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, the operation device 12300 includes a tilting device 12310 used for the same purpose as the tilting device 310 described above, a lower cover 320 described above in each of the above embodiments, a shaft cover 330, and a shaft member 340. A curved member 350, a lower case 360, and an upper case 370 are provided, and in addition, a second tilting device 400, which is new in the present embodiment, is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 62, the second tilting device 400 is a device that is connected to the tilting device 12310 so as to straddle the tilting device 12310 from above and is formed in a U-shape in front view. The main operation method is a method of pushing the operation unit 440 extending in the left-right direction in the same direction as the operation direction of the tilting device 12310. That is, in the present embodiment, the player can participate in the game not only by pushing the tilting device 12310, but also by pushing the second tilting device 400.

63 (a) is a front view of the operating device 12300, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 12300 in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a).

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second tilting device 400 is connected to the tilting device 12310 on both side surfaces of the tilting device 12310. Specifically, the tilting device 12310 includes an upper cover 12311 to which an opening 12318 opened inward from both side surfaces as a starting point is added to the upper cover 311 described in each of the above embodiments. In the second tilting device 400, the support fixing portion 411 is fastened and fixed to the tilting device 12310 with the fastening fixing portion 410 inserted through the opening 12318 of the upper cover 12311.

The load applied to the player when pedaling the tilting device 12310 or the second tilting device 400 changes depending on how far the player pushes the position far from the rotation axis O1, as shown in FIG. 63 (b). As shown, the outermost diameter point (the point farthest from the rotation axis O1) of the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 is formed by the curved wall portion 316 of the tilting device 12310 (curved wall centered on the rotation axis O1). It is formed on the arc R12 (which is in contact with the portion 316).

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 63 (b) (the state in which the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 is arranged on the side close to the rotation axis O1), the reaction force applied to the player who pedals the tilting device 12310 is applied. The minimum value is equivalent to the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400.

That is, the reaction force given to the player who operates the side of the tilting device 12310 near the rotation axis O1 (left side in FIG. 63B) is the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400. On the other hand, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the side far from the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310 (right side of FIG. 63 (b), near the curved wall portion 316) is the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400. It is equivalent to the reaction force given to the player who operates.

In the present embodiment, the second tilting device 400 functions in such a manner that the reaction force applied to the player who operates the second tilting device 400 is smaller than that when the tilting device 12310 is operated. As a preliminary step to the explanation, the details of the second tilting device 400 will be described below.

64 and 65 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 12300 in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). In FIG. 64, the shortened state of the second tilting device 400 is shown, and in FIG. 65, the extended state of the second tilting device 400 is shown. Further, since the operation device 12300 is formed from a symmetrical shape, only the left side is shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, and the right side is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the second tilting device 400 includes a fastening and fixing portion 410 that is fastened and fixed to the side surface of the tilting device 12310 while being inserted through the opening 12318 of the tilting device 12310, and a fastening and fixing portion 410 thereof. The first arm portion 420 having the main body portion 421 in which the end of the branch portion 425 is accommodated and extends in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 and the first arm portion 420 on the radially outer side. A second arm portion 430 that is arranged and connected to the second arm portion 420, a cylindrical operation portion 440 that connects a pair of second arm portions 430, and a base end side (rotation axis O1) of the first arm portion 420. A drive motor 450 that is arranged on the side close to) and is rotationally driven by energization, and a transmission that is pivotally supported by the first arm portion 420 in such a manner that the driving force of the drive motor 450 can be transmitted to the second arm portion 430. It mainly includes a device 460 and a vibration transmission member 470 that is displaced due to a difference in phase of the rotating portion of the drive motor 450 and is separated from the weight member M1a of the drive motor M1.

The fastening and fixing portion 410, the first arm portion 420, and the second arm portion 430 are assembled by arranging a pair of left-right inverted members facing each other in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 64, superimposing them, and fastening and fixing them (FIG. 62). See). The operation unit 440 is inserted into a pair of left and right second arm portions 430 from the left and right directions.

That is, in the assembly procedure of the second tilting device 400, first, the drive motor 450, the transmission device 460 and the vibration transmission member 470 are housed in one member of the first arm portion 420, and then the other member is fastened and fixed to cover the lid. After assembling the first arm portion 420, the second arm portion 430 is overlapped with the second arm portion 430 connected to the radially outer end of the first arm portion 420 in the assembled state. On the other hand, the subassembly is formed by stacking and assembling the fastening and fixing portions 410 in such a manner that the fastening and fixing portions 410 are connected to the opposite end portions. This subassembly is formed in pairs on the left and right.

Next, the formed subassembly is brought closer to the tilting device 12310 from the side, and when the fastening fixing portion 410 is inserted into the opening 12318, the operation portion 440 is sandwiched between the left and right second arm portions 430. The tip of the 440 is inserted into the fitting portion 433 of the second arm portion 430.

Finally, by fastening and fixing the fastening and fixing portion 410 to the tilting device 12310, the movement of the second arm portion 430 in the extending direction of the operating portion 440 is restricted, so that the operating portion 440 may fall off from the subassembly. This is prevented, and the assembly of the second tilting device 400 to the tilting device 12310 is completed.

Next, the details of each part will be described. The fastening and fixing portion 410 is an opening arranged at a position facing the tip of the branch portion 425 and the support and fixing portion 411 that supports and fixes the branch portion 425 of the first arm portion 420 and is fastened and fixed to the tilting device 12310. It mainly comprises an opening 412.

The opening 412 has a function as a passage path when a vibration transmission member 470, a harness wired to the drive motor 450 (not shown), or the like (not shown) enters the inside of the tilting device 12310. Therefore, at least the opening is widened to a region that does not interfere with the movement locus of the vibration transmission member 470, and a gap is secured to the extent that the harness or the like is not bitten (pressed) while the vibration transmission member 470 is moving. Is formed by.

The first arm portion 420 has a main body portion 421 formed as a substantially rectangular container with the front side of the main body portion 421 open, and a vertical direction of the main body portion 421 from the inner wall of the main body portion 421 toward the internal space of the main body portion 421. 423 of the extension shaft branch extending from the inner side wall of the main body 421 to a position evenly separated in the left-right direction from the support wall 422 extending in the support wall 422 and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450 supported by the support wall 422. From the tip support portion 424 extending in the left-right direction from the tip end side end portion of the main body portion 421 and supporting one end of the urging spring SP1 and the base end side (lower side in FIG. 64) end portion of the main body portion 421. It mainly includes a branch portion 425 extending to the side close to the tilting device 12310.

The outer width of the main body 421 is shorter on the base end side than on the tip end side. That is, in the main body portion 421, the first facing surface 421a, which is a surface facing the end portion of the second arm portion 430 in the shortened state of the second tilting device 400 (see FIG. 64), is the surface of the second tilting device 400. It is formed inside the main body portion 421 with respect to the second facing surface 421b, which is a surface facing the end portion of the second arm portion 430 in the extended state (see FIG. 65). The first facing surface 421a and the second facing surface 421b are formed over the entire circumference of the first arm portion 420.

In other words, the distance between the end of the second arm 430 and the main body 421 of the first arm 420 is shorter in the extended state than in the shortened state, so that the first arm 420 and the first arm are the first. The buffering action of load transmission between the two arms 430 is reduced.

The support wall 422 is a substantially Z-shaped wall portion arranged apart from both the left and right side walls of the main body portion 421, and has an outer support wall 422a that supports the drive motor 450 by surface contact and a vibration transmission member 470. Mainly provided with an inner support wall 422b for guiding and supporting. Therefore, the support wall 422 has a plurality of functions of fixing the position of the drive motor 450 and stabilizing the position change of the vibration transmission member 470.

The inner support wall 422b is formed as a wall bent in a substantially Z shape in FIG. 64. One end of the urging spring SP3 of the vibration transmission member 470 is supported in the portion (intermediate portion) extending along the left-right direction in FIG. 64, and extends along the vertical direction (movement direction of the vibration transmission member 470) in FIG. 64. The vibration transmitting member 470 is guided and supported in the moving direction in the pair of portions (two surfaces connected to the intermediate portion).

The extension shaft support portion 423 rotatably supports the transmission device 460 and prevents the transmission shaft rod 461 from being displaced in the axial direction. That is, the transmission shaft rod 461 is pivotally supported by the inner surface of the extended shaft support portion 423 that faces in the left-right direction, and the slip prevention ring 463 is locked by the surface that faces in the vertical direction.

The tip support portion 424 is a portion that supports one end of the urging spring SP1 and a portion whose outer end portion in the left-right direction faces the inner side surface of the second arm portion 430. The load transmission efficiency between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 changes depending on the length of the distance between the left-right outer end portion of the tip support portion 424 and the inner surface of the second arm portion 430. That is, the shorter the interval, the higher the transmission efficiency.

Similar to the main body portion 421, the branch portion 425 is formed from a half-pipe shape in which the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 64 is open. The branch portion 425 includes a convex portion 425a projecting from the outer surface of the tip portion, and the convex portion 425a is formed in a shape to be internally fitted in the fastening fixing portion 410.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner surface of the fastening fixing portion 410 is supported in such a manner as to surround the outer surface on the tip end side of the branch portion 425, and the inside of the gap between the fastening fixing portion 410 and the branch portion 425. 64. Compared to the length of the gap in the vertical direction of the paper surface (direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction of the second tilting device 400), the length of the gap in the vertical direction of FIG. 64 (extending / contracting direction of the second tilting device 400). Is set longer. As a result, the first arm portion 420 can be made easier to selectively vibrate with respect to the fastening fixing portion 410 in the vertical direction of FIG. 64 (the telescopic direction of the second tilting device 400).

The second arm portion 430 is formed as a substantially rectangular container with the front side of FIG. 64 open, and is capable of accommodating the first arm portion 420 so as to protrude from the base end side (lower side of FIG. 64). A portion 431, an adjustment recess 432 recessed from the internal space of the main body portion 431 toward the tip side (upper side of FIG. 64), and an fitting portion 433 recessed along the left-right direction at the tip portion of the main body portion 431. Mainly includes a root support portion 434 extending inward in the left-right direction on the root side of the main body portion 431 to support the end portion of the urging spring SP1.

The length of the inner width of the main body portion 431 is shorter on the proximal end side than on the distal end side. That is, in the main body portion 431, the first facing surface 431a, which is a surface facing the end portion of the first arm portion 420 in the shortened state of the second tilting device 400 (see FIG. 64), is the surface of the second tilting device 400. It is formed outside the main body portion 431 with respect to the second facing surface 431b, which is a surface facing the end portion of the first arm portion 420 in the extended state (see FIG. 65). The first facing surface 431a and the second facing surface 431b are formed over the entire circumference of the second arm portion 430.

In other words, the distance between the end of the first arm 420 and the main body 431 of the second arm 430 is shorter in the extended state than in the shortened state, so that the first arm 420 and the first arm are the first. The buffering action of load transmission between the two arms 430 is reduced.

The adjusting recess 432 includes an inclined side surface 432a which is a wall surface inclined with respect to the drive shaft so as to pass through the drive shaft of the drive motor 450.

The fitting portion 433 is formed as a recessed portion having an internal shape substantially equivalent to a cross-sectional shape orthogonal to the axis of the operating portion 440 and recessed in the left-right direction.

The drive motor 450 includes a first cam 451 fixed to a drive shaft driven by energization. The details of the first cam 451 will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

The transmission device 460 has a substantially cylindrical transmission shaft rod 461 that is rotatably supported by the first arm portion 420 in conjunction with the rotation of the drive motor 450, and a transmission shaft rod from the tip end side of the transmission shaft rod 461. The tip adjusting member 462 that is fitted so that it cannot rotate relative to the shaft, the misalignment prevention ring 463 that is inserted into the transmission shaft rod 461 from the radial direction and fixed so that the position cannot be displaced in the axial direction, and the base end side tip of the transmission shaft rod 461. The second cam 464, which is fitted so as not to rotate relative to the transmission shaft rod, is arranged between the second cam 464 and the slip prevention ring 463, and generates an urging force that presses the second cam 464 against the first cam 451. The urging spring SP2 and the urging spring SP2 are mainly provided. As the slip prevention ring 463, a commercially available E-ring can be used.

FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the drive motor 450 and the transmission device 460. In FIG. 66, the case side portion of the drive motor 450 and the tip adjusting member 462 are not shown.

The transmission shaft rod 461 has a flat portion 461a, 461b, which is a flat wall portion extending in the axial direction along a plane perpendicular to the radial direction at both ends, and a diameter of the transmission shaft rod 461 having a width that allows the slip prevention ring 463 to be fitted. Mainly includes a recessed groove 461c that is recessed in a manner of reducing the size of the groove.

The first flat portion 461a arranged on the tip end side of the first arm portion 420 is a portion that non-rotatably supports the tip adjusting member 462.

The second flat portion 461b arranged on the proximal end side of the first arm portion 420 is a portion that supports the second cam 464 so as not to rotate and allows the second cam 464 to move in the axial direction. That is, the second cam 464 can move in the axial direction within the range in which the second flat portion 461b is formed, while the transmission shaft rod 461 tries to cross the end portion of the second flat portion 461b. Since it is axially locked to the cross section of the second flat portion 461b, it cannot move beyond the end portion of the second flat portion 461b. Therefore, the axial length of the second flat portion 461b is set based on the length that allows the movement of the second cam 464.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later in FIG. 67, one purpose of allowing the second cam 464 to move in the axial direction is to disengage the engagement between the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 and drive the second cam 464. It is to release the transmission of force. Therefore, the axial length of the second flat portion 461b is set with the length at which the second cam 464 can be disengaged from the first cam 451 by moving in the axial direction as the lower limit.

The second cam 464 is a cylindrical member having a central hole formed in a D-shaped cross section, and includes a protruding portion 464a protruding from the lower surface facing the first cam 451 toward the side close to the first cam 451. The protrusion 464a has a mountain shape that is inclined downward from the center position toward both sides in the circumferential direction of the second cam 464.

The first cam 451 is a cylindrical member in which the central shaft portion is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 451 and has a recessed portion 451a recessed from the upper surface facing the second cam 464 toward the side away from the second cam 464. A band-shaped protrusion 451b that is projected outward in the radial direction and extends in a band shape along the circumferential direction is mainly provided.

The recessed portion 451a has a shape that meshes with the protruding portion 464a of the second cam 464, that is, a valley shape that ascends and slopes from the center position toward both sides in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 66, the band-shaped protrusion 451b is a bottom view clock of a first portion 451b1 extending along a plane perpendicular to the axis along the lower end of the first cam 451 and a first portion 451b1 thereof. It mainly comprises a second portion 451b2 that inclines in a manner approaching the second cam 464 as it goes clockwise from the end in the clockwise direction.

Since the recessed portion 451a of the first cam 451 and the protruding portion 464a of the second cam 464 are each one, the engagement is resumed after the engagement between the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 is released. If so, the engagement is always resumed with the same angular relationship (phase relationship).

That is, the posture (or phase) after rotation of the drive motor 450 that rotationally drives the first cam 451 is the posture (or phase) of the second cam 464 while the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 are engaged. ). Therefore, as compared with the case where the posture (or phase) shift occurs before and after the disengagement, the sensor for detecting the posture (or phase) shift can be unnecessary, and the number of members can be reduced.

67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 460 in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). Note that FIG. 67A shows the same state as in FIG. 64, and FIG. 67B shows a state in which the first cam 451 rotates while the rotation of the transmission device 460 is restricted.

Here, when the player grips the operation portion 440 and applies a load to push it toward the first arm portion 420, the tip adjusting member 462 of the transmission device 460 is locked to the adjusting recess 432 of the second arm portion 430. The rotation of the transmission device 460 is restricted. Therefore, if the first cam 450 and the second cam 464 are still engaged, a load is applied to the drive motor 450 when the drive motor 450 is driven, and the drive motor 450 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first cam 451 continues to rotate in a state where the second cam 464 cannot rotate, the engagement between the second cam 464 and the first cam 451 is released. Will be done. More specifically, when the first cam 451 continues to rotate while the second cam 464 cannot rotate, the contact position between the recessed portion 451a of the first cam 451 and the protruding portion 464a of the second cam 464 is in the circumferential direction. As a result, the second cam 464 is axially separated from the first cam 451 along the inclination of the recessed portion 451a and the protruding portion 464a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the protruding portion 464a is arranged on the second cam side 464 side of the facing surface of the first cam 451 with the second cam 464 (from the recessed portion 451a to the protruding portion 454a). Is pushed out), the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 do not interfere with each other in the circumferential direction, so that the transmission of the driving force of the drive motor 450 can be canceled. It should be noted that the release of the transmission of the driving force is not related to the state (shortened state, extended state, etc.) of the second tilting device 400, and can be performed at any timing.

Therefore, even if the player handles the operation unit 440 somewhat roughly and pushes the operation unit 440 toward the rotation shaft O1 of the tilting device 12310 while driving the drive motor 450, the drive motor 450 causes the drive motor 450 to push the operation unit 440 toward the rotation shaft O1. It can be prevented from being damaged. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the operation method of the operation unit 440.

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the second cam 464 is pressed against the first cam 451 by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. Therefore, when the first cam 451 rotates one round and returns to the posture shown in FIG. 67A, the protruding portion 464a engages with the recessed portion 451a, and the transmission of the driving force can be resumed.

It will be described back to FIG. 64 and FIG. 65. The tip adjusting member 462 is a pillar member having a circular shape on the lower surface and is fixed to the transmission shaft rod 461 so as to be non-rotatable by inserting the first flat portion 461a of the transmission shaft rod 461 from the lower surface. Formed as a plane that is connected to the inclined surface portion 462a that abuts on the inclined side surface 432a in a predetermined posture (see FIG. 64) while the 461 rotates and the tip end portion of the inclined surface portion 462a and is orthogonal to the axial direction. The tip plane 462b to be formed is mainly provided.

The change from FIG. 64 to FIG. 65 occurs by rotating the rotation axis of the drive motor 450 by 180 degrees. More specifically, the rotation changes the arrangement (phase) of the tip plane 462b, and the contact position with the inclined side surface 432a changes, whereby the position of the operation unit 440 changes. Therefore, the moving speed of the operation unit 440 can be changed by adjusting the rotation speed of the drive motor 450.

The vibration transmission member 470 rotates from the guided arm portion 471, which is arranged to face the inner support wall 422b and extends along the extending direction of the first arm portion 420, and the lower end portion of the guided arm portion 471. An intermediate extension portion 472 extending toward the center of the tilting device 12310 along the shaft O1 and a weight member M1a of the drive motor M1 along a straight line from the extension tip of the intermediate extension portion 472 toward the rotation shaft O1. The end is fixed to the tip of the collided portion 473 and the guided arm portion 471, which are formed so as to be in contact with the weight member M1a when the rotation shaft O1 is arranged close to the rotating shaft O1. Mainly includes an urging spring SP3 to be mounted.

In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the vibration transmitting member is separated from the weight member M1a by the urging force of the urging spring SP3, and in the extended state (see FIG. 65), the guided arm portion 471 is pushed down by the band-shaped protrusion 451b. It is arranged close to the weight member M1a.

When the drive motor M1 rotates in this close arrangement state, the weight member M1a and the vibration transmission member 470 collide with each other when the weight member M1a is arranged on the vibration transmission member 470 side, and the weight member M1a becomes the vibration transmission member 470. When placed on the opposite side of, they are separated from each other.

The tip surface of the collided portion 473 arranged to face the weight member M1a is formed from a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the transmission shaft rod 461. Therefore, when the weight member M1a collides with the collided portion 473, a load along the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 64) of the transmission shaft rod 461 is applied to the vibration transmission member 470.

Therefore, as the weight member M1a is rotated by the drive of the drive motor M1, the vibration transmission member 470 is orthogonal to the extension direction of the first arm portion 420 (vertical direction in FIG. 64), that is, the operation direction of the tilting device 12310. It can be vibrated along the direction in which it does.

The vibration of the vibration transmission member 470 is transmitted in order to the first arm portion 420, the second arm portion 430, and the operation portion 440, and vibrates the player's finger touching the operation portion 440. At this time, since the vibration of the vibration transmission member 470 is generated along the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310, the vibration becomes smaller as the position of the operation unit 440 becomes farther from the rotation axis O1. It can be prevented from becoming.

That is, in the case of vibration generated along the circumferential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310, the load felt by the player due to the vibration becomes constant as the distance from the rotation axis O1 (the arm extends). Since it becomes smaller from the idea, it becomes difficult to make the player feel the vibration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, vibration occurs along the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310, so that the load felt by the player due to the vibration is applied regardless of the distance from the rotation axis O1. Can be equivalent. As a result, the vibration effect can be effectively performed even in the extended state (see FIG. 65).

Here, the transmission of vibration will be described by comparing the shortened state and the extended state. There are two modes of vibration transmitted to the operation unit 440. That is, the vibration in the rotation direction caused by the rotational operation of the tilting device 12310 due to the vibration of the drive motor M1 and the vibration in the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461 caused by the vibration transmission member 470 colliding with the weight member M1a. be. The vibration of these two systems has a low transmission efficiency in the shortened state and a high transmission efficiency in the extended state. The details will be described below.

First, the axial vibration of the transmission shaft rod 461 in the shortened state will be described. In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the urging force of the urging spring SP1 is applied to the second arm portion 430 in the direction of bringing the second arm portion 430 closer to the first arm portion 420. At this time, since the urging spring SP1 is stretched as compared with the extended state (see FIG. 65), the urging force is smaller than that of the extended state. Therefore, the positional deviation between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 is likely to occur, and when the first arm portion 420 vibrates along the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461 (particularly, it separates from the second arm portion 430). The vibration transmission efficiency from the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 430 is reduced.

Next, the vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 in the shortened state will be described. In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), a gap is formed between the tip support portion 424 of the first arm portion 420 and the first facing surface 431a of the second arm portion 430 arranged to face each other, and the second arm portion is formed. A gap is formed between the root support portion 434 of the 430 and the first facing surface 421a of the first arm portion 420 arranged to face each other. The length of these gap widths is such that the second arm portion 430 can be displaced with respect to the first arm portion 420, and the first arm portion 420 is displaced relative to the second arm portion 430. As a result, the vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 generated when the drive motor M1 rotates is absorbed. As a result, the vibration transmission efficiency from the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 430 is reduced.

Next, the axial vibration of the transmission shaft rod 461 in the extended state will be described. In the extended state (see FIG. 65), the urging force of the urging spring SP1 is applied to the second arm 430 in the direction of bringing the second arm 430 closer to the first arm 420, which is the same as in the shortened state. However, as the tip adjusting member 462 rotates, the second arm portion 430 moves in a direction away from the first arm portion 420. At this time, since the urging spring SP1 is shortened as compared with the case of the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the urging force is larger than that of the shortened state. Therefore, the positional deviation between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 is less likely to occur, and the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 420 when the first arm portion 420 vibrates along the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461. Vibration transmission efficiency to the arm 430 is ensured (increased).

In this way, the urging spring SP1 is used for both the action of returning the operation unit 440 to the shortened state (see FIG. 64) and the adjustment of the vibration transmission efficiency. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts.

Next, the vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 in the extended state will be described. In the extended state (see FIG. 65), the gap between the tip support portion 424 of the first arm portion 420 and the second facing surface 431b of the second arm portion 430 arranged to face each other is extremely small, and the second arm is made extremely small. The gap between the root support portion 434 of the portion 430 and the second facing surface 421b of the first arm portion 420 arranged to face each other is extremely reduced. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a gap sufficient to absorb the vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 generated when the drive motor M1 rotates, and secure the vibration transmission efficiency from the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 430. Can (can increase).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the two vibration modes, the vibration transmission efficiency can be reduced in the shortened state, while the vibration transmission efficiency can be increased in the extended state. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the operation unit 440 is separated from the rotation shaft O1 and the vibration given to the player is reduced in a state where the operation unit 440 is easy to operate.

That is, it is desirable to secure a distance between the vibrating device and the operating position from the viewpoint of preventing failure of the vibrating device. If a distance is secured, even when the player operates in a manner of hitting violently, the impact at the time of operation is attenuated before being transmitted to the vibrating device, so that the failure of the vibrating device can be prevented. .. On the other hand, the vibration transmitted to the operation position tends to be smaller as the vibration device and the operation position are separated from each other. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can maintain a feeling of vibration (degree and magnitude of vibration given to a player) while preventing a failure of the vibration device.

In particular, when the operating position moves with respect to the vibrating device as in the present embodiment, the feeling of vibration during operation changes before and after the movement, and in particular, the operating position moves to a position where the player can easily operate. The decrease in the feeling of vibration during operation should be avoided from the viewpoint of enhancing the interest given to the player.

It is clear that it is desirable that the operation position moves so that the player can easily operate the effect as the degree of expectation is higher. In addition, the big hit effect after the operation gives the player a large vibration. This is because it is desirable to be.

In the present embodiment, the operation unit 440 is arranged so as to be easier for the player to operate (the reaction force given to the player is smaller) in the extended state than in the shortened state. The distance between the drive motor M1 and the operation unit 440 is longer in the extended state (difficult to transmit vibration) than in the shortened state, while the vibration transmission efficiency is higher than in the shortened state. The extended state increases (vibration transmission becomes easier). Therefore, by adjusting the vibration transmission efficiency, the difference between the vibration feeling in the shortened state and the vibration feeling in the extended state can be reduced, and the vibration feeling can be leveled.

In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the distance from the upper cover 12311 of the tilting device 12310 to the drive motor M1 and the distance from the operation unit 440 to the drive motor M1 are almost the same. On the other hand, the upper cover 12311 is fixed to the drive motor M1 without being displaced, but the operation unit 440 is positioned with respect to the drive motor M1 due to the displacement of the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 from each other. It is possible to shift. In particular, in the shortened state, a gap is formed between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430.

Therefore, in the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the vibration given to the player should be smaller when the operation is performed by touching the operation unit 440 than when the operation is performed by touching the tilting device 12310. Can be done.

Therefore, for example, when the vibration given to the player who touches the operation unit 440 can be made smaller than the recognizable size, the operation unit 440 dares to be in the production of not wanting to be noticed that the drive motor M1 is being driven. You may give a notification to prompt the operation. As a result, by causing the player to operate the operation unit 440, the tilting device 12310 can be rotated, and the vibration of the tilting device 12310 by the drive motor M1 can be mixed with the rotational operation, so that the tilting device 12310 is in the ascending position. It is possible to make the vibration less noticeable to the player as compared with the case where the vehicle is stopped at.

According to this, by operating the operation unit 440, it also leads to the rotational operation of the tilting device 12310. If the player does not want the player to be aware of the presence or absence of the operation of the drive motor M1, the vibration can be made less noticeable by giving a notification prompting the player to operate the operation unit 440. Even when the operation timing of the player is arbitrarily set, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player who has performed the operation notices the operation (operation vibration, etc.) of the drive motor M1. Thereby, the degree of freedom of operation of the drive motor M1 can be improved.

68 (a) and 68 (b) are side views of the operating device 12300. Note that FIG. 68 (a) shows a shortened state, and FIG. 68 (b) shows an extended state.

This change in state is caused by the rotation of the drive motor 450, and the drive motor 450 is arranged on the side of the first arm portion 420 close to the rotation axis O1. Thereby, the mode years of the drive motor 450 can be lengthened.

That is, since the tilting device 12310 is a device that rotates around the rotation axis O1, even if it moves in the same manner, the position near the rotation axis O1 is compared with the position away from the rotation axis O1. The operating speed becomes smaller. Therefore, the impact generated by the operation of the player is smaller in the vicinity of the rotation axis O1 than in the position away from the rotation axis O1. Therefore, by disposing the drive motor 450 on the side of the first arm portion 420 close to the rotation shaft O1, the mode years of the drive motor 450 can be lengthened.

Further, by arranging the drive motor 450 in the vicinity of the rotation shaft O1, the moment generated at the center of the rotation shaft O1 in the tilting device 12310 due to the weight of the drive motor 450 can be reduced. As a result, the tilting device 12310 can be maintained in the ascending position with a small reaction force, so that the degree of freedom in setting the urging force of the torsion spring 343 can be improved. That is, since the degree of freedom in setting the reaction force returned to the player can be improved, for example, the feeling of repeated hits can be further improved by setting the reaction force.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the extended state, the distance between the operation unit 440 and the rotating shaft O1 is longer than the distance between the curved wall portion 316 of the tilting device 12310 and the rotating shaft O1 as compared with the shortened state. Become. Therefore, the operable range, which is the range in which the player can operate the operating device 12300, is larger than the range from the rotation axis O1 to the curved wall portion 316 in the shortened state. Therefore, in the extended state, the range in which the player can perform the operation is widened, so that the feeling of fatigue during the operation can be reduced.

Further, in the extended state, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit 440 arranged at the outermost side of the operable range is minimized. That is, it is possible to reduce the reaction force applied to the player by operating the operation unit 440 as compared with the case of operating the tilting device 12310. As a result, in the extended state, the stress (fatigue, etc.) felt by the player can be reduced by operating the operation unit 440 as compared with operating the tilting device 12310. Therefore, the player is urged to operate the operation unit 440. Can be facilitated.

In the present embodiment, as described above, a gap is formed between the fastening fixing portion 410 and the branch portion 425. Therefore, even when the operation unit 440 is rapidly pedal-operated, the tilting device 12310 to which the fastening fixing portion 410 is fixed and the operation unit 440 are arranged until a load is applied. Since the position can be displaced in comparison, the load applied to the connection position between the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 from being damaged in the vicinity of the connection position by the operation of the player.

In the present embodiment, in the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the tip adjusting member 462 and the adjusting recess 432 of the second arm portion 430 are engaged even in a direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction (vertical direction of FIG. 64) of the second arm portion 430. On the other hand, in the extended state (see FIG. 65), the tip flat surface 462b of the tip adjusting member 462 stays in contact with the lower side surface of the second arm 430, and the second arm 430 stays in contact with the lower surface. The engagement in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction of the is disengaged (the fitting becomes loose).

As a result, in the extended state, the second arm 430 can be more easily tilted in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction of the second arm 430 with respect to the first arm 420 as compared with the shortened state. .. For example, the second arm portion 430 can be easily tilted with respect to the first arm portion 420 about the vicinity of the root support portion 434 of the second arm portion 430 (the second arm portion with respect to the first arm portion 420). The 430 can be made more flexible). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second arm portion 430 from being damaged when the player operates the operation portion 440.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the shortened state, the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 interferes in the operating direction of the tilting device 12310 (for example, the normal direction of a part of the pressing plate portion 312). Therefore, when the player operates the tilting device 12310 in the shortened state, the operation unit 440 can be an obstacle, and the player can feel the difficulty of pushing.

On the other hand, in the extended state, the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 does not interfere in the operating direction of the tilting device 12310 (the normal direction of a part of the pressing plate unit 312), so that the game is played without being disturbed by the operating unit 440. The person can pedal the tilting device 12310.

Further, the direction of the normal line of the outer surface of the pressing plate portion 312 when the tilting device 12310 is started to operate the pedal in the extended state and faces the player is the operation starting direction of the second tilting device 400 (rotation axis O1). Since the tilt angle with respect to the vertical direction is smaller (in the direction of looking upward) than in the tangential direction of the circle circumscribing the operation unit 440 around the center, the tilting device 400 is compared with the case of operating the tilting device 400. It is possible to reduce the stress felt by the player during the pushing operation (the pushing operation becomes easier).

In the present embodiment, the distance between the axis center of the operation unit 440 and the rotating shaft O1 in the extended state is about 1.25 times the distance between the axis center of the operating unit 440 and the rotating shaft O1 in the shortened state.

As shown in FIG. 68, the operation unit 440 moves in the radial direction of the circle about the rotation axis O1 (the direction orthogonal to the operation direction of the tilting device 12310). Therefore, it is possible to maximize the amount of change in the load given to the player who operates the operation unit 440 with respect to the movement distance of the operation unit 440.

Further, according to the present embodiment, for example, the operating speed of the drive motor 450 during the operation instruction period, which is the period for instructing the pushing operation of the tilting device 12310 on the third symbol display device 81 or the like, and the pushing of the player. The difference from the operation speed can be given to the player as the difference in reaction force.

That is, for example, when the drive motor 450 is gradually operated from the extended state to the shortened state during the operation instruction period, it changes to the shortened state as compared with the case where the pushing operation is completed before the shortened state is completely changed. The load (reaction force) given to the player is smaller when the pushing operation is completed after the pushing operation is completed.

Therefore, for example, by starting the operation of the drive motor 450 after the operation of the player is detected by the sensors S1 to S3, whether or not the pushing operation can be completed before the shortened state is completely changed is determined by the player. It can be associated with the operation speed. Therefore, the reaction force applied to the player can be changed according to the change in the operation speed of the player.

In the present embodiment, when the second tilting device 400 vibrates due to the driving force of the drive motor M1 transmitted via the vibration transmission member 470, the first arm portion 420 accommodating the vibration transmission member 470, the drive motor 450, and the transmission The device 460 vibrates integrally. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as an increase in transmission resistance due to axial misalignment between the drive motor 450 and the transmission device 460 due to vibration.

In the present embodiment, the longer the operation unit 440 is extended and becomes easier to perform the tilting operation, the shorter the distance from the operation unit 440 to the game board 13 along the straight line connecting the operation unit 440 and the rotation axis O1. (The swing width of the player's fingers when pushing the operation unit 440 toward the rotation axis O1 side is shortened).

Therefore, when the player mistakenly moves the operation unit 440 toward the rotation axis O1, the acceleration that can be applied by the player can be reduced in the extended state where the acceleration tends to be large and the speed is most likely to be large (of the fingers). The swing width can be shortened), and the speed of the final operation unit 440 can be reduced. As a result, the impact when the operation unit 440 moves toward the rotation shaft O1 and reaches the end can be suppressed. That is, by reducing the acceleration generated by the player's operation (acceleration expected from the swing width of the fingers) in advance, the impact when the operation unit 440 reaches the terminal position (shortened state) is suppressed. Can be done.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the surfaces of the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 facing the player are different has been described, but the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment is the second tilting device 13400 and the tilting device 13310. The surfaces facing the player are regarded as substantially the same surface. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 69 (a) shows a shortened state of the second tilting device 13400, and FIG. 69 (b) shows an extended state of the second tilting device 13400. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper end position of the tilting device 13310 is recessed downward, and the operation unit 440 can be arranged in the recessed portion.

The second tilting device 13400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 12400 of the twelfth embodiment, and differs only in the fixing angle of the fastening fixing portion 410 from the tilting device 13310. That is, as shown in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b), the operation unit 440 expands and contracts in the direction SD1 along the surface of the tilting device 13310 facing the player.

As a result, in the shortened state, the same operation feeling as that of the tilting device 310 described above in the first embodiment can be exhibited, and in the extended state, the change of the surface (operation surface) facing the player is suppressed. When the operation unit 440 is operated, it is given to the player via the tilting device 13310 by extending the maximum distance from the rotation axis O1 of the portion that can be operated by the player while preventing the operation feeling from being significantly changed. The maximum value of the applied load (reaction force) can be reduced.

In the extended state, the relationship between the moments centered on the rotation axis O1 changes as compared with the shortened state, and the time until the tilting device 13310 and the second tilting device 13400 return to the posture before pushing in becomes longer. .. Therefore, by changing the second tilting device 13400 to the extended state after the tilting device 13310 is pushed to the descending position, it is possible to reduce the return speed of the tilting device 13310 and the second tilting device 13400. ..

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the surfaces of the second tilting device 13400 and the tilting device 13310 facing the player are substantially the same surface has been described, but the operation device 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment is the second tilting device 14400. The tilt angle of the surface facing the player (the surface formed when the operation unit 14400 changes between the shortened state and the extended state) is larger than the tilt angle of the surface of the tilting device 14310 facing the player. Is also set shallowly. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

70 (a) and 70 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 14300 in the 14th embodiment. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a shortened state of the second tilting device 14400, and FIG. 70 (b) shows an extended state of the second tilting device 14400. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper end position of the tilting device 14310 is recessed downward, and the operation unit 14440 can be arranged in the recessed portion.

The second tilting device 14400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 13400 of the thirteenth embodiment, and only the aspect of the operation unit 14440 is different. That is, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the operation unit 14400 is. The second tilting device 14400 is sliced at equal intervals on a plane parallel to the expansion and contraction direction, and is wound with a rubber-like protective film (not shown) to maintain a cylindrical shape.

The operation unit 14440 is directly opposite to the proximity portion 14441, which is placed closest to the surface facing the player most of the members sliced at equal intervals and is engaged and fixed to the tilting device 14310, and the proximity portion 14441. It is arranged between the tip fixing portion 14442 that is arranged and fixed to the second arm portion 430, the proximity portion 14441 and the tip fixing portion 14442, and is connected to each other so as to be relatively movable with respect to the adjacent member. It mainly includes an intermediate interlocking unit 14443.

As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the shortened state, the proximity portion 14441 and the tip fixing portion 14442 coincide with each other in the direction intersecting the upper surface of the tilting device 14310, the amount of elongation of the protective film is minimized, and the intermediate interlocking portion. The operation unit 14440 including 14443 has a cylindrical shape. In this state, there is no change from the shortened state of the thirteenth embodiment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the extended state, the proximity portion 14441 and the tip fixing portion 14442 are displaced in the direction intersecting the upper surface of the tilting device 14310, and the elongation amount of the protective film is maximized. The intermediate interlocking portion 14443 moves due to the tension of the protective film. As a result, the operation unit 14440 including the intermediate interlocking unit 14443 extends along the direction SD2 in which the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction is smaller than the inclination angle of the upper surface of the tilting device 14310 with respect to the horizontal direction. It becomes a shape.

As a result, in the shortened state, the same operation feeling as that of the tilting device 310 described above in the first embodiment can be exhibited, and in the extended state, the change in the height of the upper end position of the tilting device 14310 is suppressed. Even when the second tilting device 14400 is driven at the timing when the player tries to start the operation, the player feels a sense of discomfort while reducing the discomfort given to the player as compared with the case where the height of the operation position suddenly changes. By extending the maximum distance from the rotation axis O1 of the operable portion, the maximum value of the load (reaction force) given to the player via the tilting device 14310 when operating the operation unit 14440 can be reduced. can.

In the extended state, the relationship between the moments centered on the rotation axis O1 changes as compared with the shortened state, and the time until the tilting device 14310 and the second tilting device 14400 return to the posture before pushing in becomes longer. .. Therefore, by changing the second tilting device 14400 to the extended state after the tilting device 14310 is pushed to the lowered position, it is possible to reduce the return speed of the tilting device 14310 and the second tilting device 14400. ..

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 are always interlocked when the second tilting device 400 is operated by the pedal has been described, but the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the second tilting device 15300. The device 15400 is supported by the lower case 15360 and the upper case 15370 in such a manner that it can rotate relative to the tilting device 310. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

71 (a) and 71 (b) are side views of the operation device 15300 according to the fifteenth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 71 (a) shows a shortened state of the second tilting device 15400, and FIG. 71 (b) shows an extended state of the second tilting device 15400, and the tilting device 310 is pushed in. The state is illustrated.

The second tilting device 15400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 12400 of the twelfth embodiment, while the lower case 15360 and the upper case 15370 are located at the lower end position of the first arm portion 15420 instead of the fastening fixing portion 410. It also includes a shafted branch 15410 that is rotatably supported. The shaft-mounted support portion 15410 is rotatably supported coaxially with the rotation shaft O1 of the tilting device 310.

The first arm portion 15420 is substantially the same as the first arm portion 420 in the twelfth embodiment, except that the branch portion 425 is not formed, the vibration transmission member 470 does not overhang, and the detection section 15426 is extended from the lower surface. It has the configuration of. That is, it is provided with a drive motor 450 and a transmission device 460 inside, and is connected to the second arm portion 430 so as to be expandable and contractible.

With such a configuration, the second tilting device 15400 can operate independently of the tilting device 310. A configuration for independently detecting the operation of the second tilting device 15400 will be described. The upper case 15370 is supported by the upper case 15370 in a manner of being sandwiched between the upper case 15370 and the upper case 15370 near the root of the second tilting member 15400, and the second tilting device 15400 is returned to the initial posture (see FIG. 71 (a)). The torsion spring 15371 that generates the urging force of the above, the detection sensor 15372 that is arranged so that the tilt of the first arm portion 15420 can be recognized by detecting the position of the detection section 15426, and the lower surface of the first arm portion 15420 are in contact with each other. It mainly comprises a contact upper surface 15373 which is arranged so as to be possible.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed in, no load is applied to the second tilting device 15400, and the second tilting device 15400 works in such a manner that the urging force of the torsion spring 15371 is maintained in the initial posture. The device 15400 is maintained in the initial position. That is, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the return speed of the tilting device 310 is not affected by the moment generated from the second tilting device 15400, so that the tilting device 310 returns regardless of the state of the second tilting device 15400. You can set the speed.

Therefore, since the return mode of the tilting device 310 does not change depending on the state of the second tilting device 15400, an appropriate load can be applied to the player regardless of the state of the second tilting device 15400. For example, when the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, an appropriate feeling of repeated hits can be given.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the extended state of the second tilting device 15400, the operation unit 440 is arranged outside the arc R12. Therefore, when the player grips the operation unit 440 and pushes the second tilting device 15400, the pushing operation can be completed without touching the tilting device 310. That is, either the second tilting device 15400 or the tilting device 310 can be pushed in independently.

At this time, in the tilting posture (see FIG. 72 (b)) in which the tilting of the second tilting device 15400 is completed, the detection section 15426 is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor 15372 and a signal is output from the detection sensor 15372. As a result, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can be made to recognize that the second tilting device 15400 has been pushed in. That is, the detection sensor 15373 functions as a sensor for detecting the operation of the second tilting device 15400.

72 (a) and 72 (b) are side views of the operating device 15300. Note that FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b) show a shortened state of the second tilting device 15400. Further, in FIG. 72 (a), a state in which the second tilting device 15400 is tilted from FIG. 71 (a) and the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 15400 starts to come into contact with the upper cover 311 of the tilting device 310 is shown. In FIG. 72 (b), the second tilting device 15400 is further tilted from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), and the operating unit 440 abuts on the tilting device 310 to push the tilting device 310 and the second tilting device. The state in which the 15400 is in the tilted posture is illustrated.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed by the operation unit 440 and the tilting device 310 is tilted when the second tilting device 15400 is tilted to the tilted posture, the tilting device 310 is tilted as shown in FIG. 72 (b). It does not reach the descending position (it stays between the ascending and descending positions). The tiltable angle of the second tilting device 15400 is set to the same angle (about 21 degrees) as that of the tilting device 310.

According to the present embodiment, even if the second tilting device 15400 is in the shortened state, the tilting device 310 alone can be pushed to the pushing completion position. On the other hand, when the second tilting device 15400 is in the shortened state and the operation unit 440 is gripped and pushed independently, the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) is the second. The two tilting device 15400 can be pushed in independently, and thereafter (see FIG. 72 (b)), the tilting device 310 is also pushed in as the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in. That is, it is impossible to push the second tilting device 15400 alone to the pushing completion position (tilting posture).

Therefore, it is easier to understand the change in the reaction force given to the player when the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 15400 is gripped and pushed in as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is operated by pushing it with a finger. be able to. That is, by increasing the number of objects pushed by the operation from only the second tilting device 15400 (see FIG. 72 (a)) to the second tilting device 15400 and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 72 (b)), the player becomes a player. It is possible to visually grasp the change in reaction force.

In the shortened state, whether the operation unit 440 is gripped and operated or the tilting device 310 is operated by pushing it with a finger is determined by determining the input from each sensor S1 to S3, 15372 to the MPU 201. can do.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the second tilting device 15400 is maintained in the initial posture, so that there is no input from the detection sensor 15372 to the MPU 201, but the tilting device 310 changes its posture. Input to the MPU 201 is generated from the detection sensors S1 to S3.

On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the second tilting device 15400, an input from the detection sensor 15372 to the MPU 201 occurs as the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in.

As described above, although the second tilting device 15400 and the tilting device 310 are operating members that move in the same direction at the same time in a part of the range, it is possible to determine which one is being operated. Thereby, for example, it can be determined whether or not the player is operating the operation target as notified by the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, since the vibration transmission member 470 (see FIG. 64) is not arranged, the vibration of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the second tilting device 15400 only through the tilting device 310. That is, when the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in, the transmission of the vibration of the drive motor M1 is cut off in the states from FIGS. 71 (a) to 72 (a), and FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (b) are shown. In the above state, the vibration of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the player via the contact position of the tilting device 310 and the operation unit 440.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the moving end member 10362d is pushed into the tilting device 310 and descends has been described, but the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment has the moving end member 10362d regardless of the posture change of the tilting device 310. It is equipped with a lowering device 16362 g that automatically lowers. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 (a) and 73 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 16300 according to the sixteenth embodiment. It should be noted that FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated and the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end portion of the piston member 362a. FIG. 73 (b) shows FIG. 73 (a). The state in which the moving end member 10362d is lowered by the lowering device 16362g by a length of 1/3 of the movable length is shown. Further, in FIG. 73 (a), a state in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 73 (a), first position) is shown, and in FIG. 73 (b), the stepped member 10362f is on the rear side. (Fig. 73 (b) right side, second position) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 73A, the operation device 16300 has the tilting device 310 described above and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and is tilted. A tilting member between the lower case 16360 forming the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 16360 having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and is arranged facing the lower case 16360. The tilting device 310 is fixed to the lower case 16360 in a manner in which the 310 is arranged, and the tilting device 310 is abutted against the tilting device 310 to determine the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is abutted on the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). It mainly includes an upper case 370 (see FIG. 9).

The lower case 16360 will be described. The lower case 16360 is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper side open, and is movably supported in the vertical direction (FIG. 73 (a) vertical direction). Mainly includes an urging device 16362 having a piston member 362a, and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged.

The urging device 16362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 through the acting claw portion 332, and is a bottomed cylinder that is operably supported in the vertical direction inside the tubular receiving portion 361c and is opened downward. The shape of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and the lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361, and the moving end, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the coil spring 362b from the lower end side and is supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A return spring 16362e arranged between the member 10362d, the moving end member 10362d and the bottom lid member 362c and urging the moving end member 10362d upward, and a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d ( A stepped member 10362f that is movable between a first position near the moving end member 10362d and a second position far from the moving end member 10362d from the front-rear direction (FIG. 51 (a) left-right direction), and a bottom support. A drive solenoid SOL10 that is fastened and fixed to the member 361 and drives the stepped member 10362f along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, and a downward load is applied in a manner of riding on the moving end member 10362d. It mainly includes a lowering device 16362 g configured so that the vertical position of the moving end member 10362d can be changed.

In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b has a natural length in the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). That is, the state in which the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position is defined as the natural length of the coil spring 362b.

The return spring 16362e is formed of a spring member having an elastic modulus equivalent to that of the coil spring 362b. That is, the return spring 16362e and the coil spring 362b have the same displacement required to generate the same reaction force. Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 73B), the piston member 362a is pushed by the tilting device 310, and the displacement amount when the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e expand and contract. Is 1 to 1 (displacement amount of coil spring 362b: displacement amount of return spring 16362e = 1: 1).

The lowering device 16362g is a moving member 16362g1 arranged at a position overlapping the moving end member 10362d in a vertical direction, and a rod member inserted through the moving member 16362g1 and having an outer shape formed into a male screw shape. A drive motor 16362 g3 that rotates the screw rod 16362 g2 and is fixed to the bottom lid member 362c or the pachinko machine 10, and a moving member that extends parallel to the extension direction of the screw rod 16362 g2 from the side wall of the drive motor 16362 g3. It mainly includes a rotation prevention plate 16362g4 that comes into contact with the side surface of 16362g1 and prevents the moving member 16362g1 from rotating.

According to the present embodiment, the moving end member 10362d can be lowered by an arbitrary amount in advance by the lowering device 16362g, and then the position of the moving end member 10362d is changed by arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position. Can be made to. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be changed according to the arrangement of the tilting device 310.

The moving member 16362g1 is provided with a through hole penetrating along the vertical direction, and a female screw shape is formed in the through hole. The female screw shape and the male screw shape of the screw rod 16362 g are formed so as to be screwable with a slight gap. When the drive motor 16362g3 is driven and the screw rod 16362g2 is rotated, the moving member 16362g1 moves up and down by the so-called ball screw mechanism.

In the state shown in FIG. 73A, the moving member 16362g1 of the lowering device 16362g is arranged at the upper end position of the moving range, and the stepped member 16362f is arranged at the first position. Even if the tilting device 310 is pedaled in this state, the moving end member 10362d is supported by the stepped member 10362f, so that the moving end member 10362d is prevented from descending from the upper end position. Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the player by the operation of the tilting device 310 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 73B, the stepped member 16362f is arranged at the second position so that the moving end member 10362d can move up and down, and the moving member 16362g1 of the lowering device 16362g is lowered to move the moving end member 10362d. Is placed between the top and bottom positions. As described above, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d can be changed in advance before the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal.

As shown in FIG. 73B, when the moving end member 10362d is lowered in advance, the piston member 362a is also lowered in the same manner, so that the contact timing between the action claw portion 332 of the tilting device 310 and the piston member 362a Can be delayed. That is, the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 from the ascending position of the tilting device 310 at the timing when the reaction force generated by the urging device 16362 is applied to the reaction force applied to the player who pedals the tilting device 310 (the angle corresponding to the posture change). ) Becomes larger.

This makes it possible to give the player a different feeling of operation. That is, the player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually remembers how much the tilting device 310 should be pushed in and how much reaction force is generated by each operation, for example, changing the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual.

Therefore, by driving and controlling the lowering device 16362 g by associating the difference in the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur with the difference in the jackpot expectation (for example, when the jackpot expectation is large, the moving member 16362 g1 is lowered more significantly). Since the discomfort given to the player and the difference in the jackpot expectation can be associated with each other, it is possible to promote the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 for one purpose of confirming whether or not the discomfort occurs. ..

A case where the tilting device 310 is pedaled to the lowered position in the state shown in FIG. 73B will be described. Since the return spring 16362e is already displaced, the urging force corresponding to it is applied upward to the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, even if the acting claw portion 332 pushes down the piston member 362a, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the downward urging force generated from the coil spring 362b is less than the urging force of the return spring 16362e.

On the other hand, after the downward urging force generated from the coil spring 362b reaches the urging force of the return spring 16362e, that is, after the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b reaches the displacement amount of the return spring 16362e, the urging forces of each other are caught. In the matching mode, the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e both contract, so that the moving end member 10362d descends and separates from the moving member 16362g1.

In this case, the final arrangement of the piston member 362a and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e are the same, that is, the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d is provided. This is the same as the case where the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated in the state of being arranged at the upper end position (the state in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position from the state shown in FIG. 73A).

Therefore, there are cases where the tilting device 310 is pedaled while the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position, and cases where the tilting device 310 is in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). The load (reaction force) applied to the player immediately after pedaling the tilting device 310 to the descending position does not change depending on the pedal operation.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the player immediately after the end of the pedal operation can be made equal while changing the generation timing of the load (reaction force) applied to the player who operates the pedal of the tilting device 310.

This makes it possible to give the player a different feeling of operation. That is, the player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually remembers how much the tilting device 310 should be pushed in and how much reaction force is generated by each operation, for example, changing the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual. Similarly, by changing the reaction force returned immediately after the end of the pedal operation, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual.

Therefore, the lowering device 16362 g is driven and controlled by associating the combination of the difference in the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur, the difference in the reaction force returned immediately after the end of the pedal operation, and the difference in the jackpot expectation degree (for example, the jackpot expectation degree). When the reaction force is large, the timing of the reaction force generation is delayed and the reaction force immediately after the end of the pedal operation is changed), so that the discomfort given to the player can be associated with the difference in the jackpot expectation. It is possible to promote the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 for one purpose of confirming whether or not the tilting device 310 occurs.

When the player pedals the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 73 (b), the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position at the timing of generating the reaction force from the urging device 16362 (see FIG. 73 (a)). Since the stepped member 10362f is slower than when it is placed in the second position, it gives the player a sense of discomfort that the expectation of a big hit is high (Ikki), while the player is given a feeling immediately after the end of the pedal operation. Since the applied reaction force is the same as when the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 73A) and the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position, it can be expected that the jackpot expectation is high. No sense of incongruity is given (Ikyuu). That is, the player can be overwhelmed by the reaction force given by the tilting device 310 in the process of pushing the tilting device 310.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the player who pedals the tilting device 310 is notified of the jackpot expectation due to the difference in the reaction force generation timing in one pushing process. , It is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by the difference in the reaction force immediately after the end of pushing. Therefore, the player can be notified of the jackpot expectation due to the difference in reaction force multiple times in different time zones in one pushing process.

As a result, the degree of attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 can be concentrated from the start to the completion of the operation.

74 (a) and 74 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 16300. Note that FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which the stepped member 10362f is rearranged from the state shown in FIG. 73 (b) to the first position, and FIG. 74 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). The state in which the moving member 16362g1 is lowered from the state by a length of 1/3 of the movable length of the moving end member 10362d is shown.

In the state shown in FIG. 74 (a), the arrangement of the piston member 362a is the same as in FIG. 73 (b), but unlike the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), the vertical movement of the moving end member 10362d is stepped. It is regulated by member 10362f. Therefore, when the player operates the pedal of the tilting device 310, the timing at which the reaction force of the urging device 10362 is generated is the same as the case where the pedal is operated in the state shown in FIG. 73B, and the pedal operation is completed. The magnitude of the load (reaction force) applied to the player immediately afterwards can be made different from the case where the pedal operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b).

That is, by restricting the lowering of the moving end member 10362d, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b becomes larger (about 4/3 times) as compared with the case where the pedal is operated in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). Become).

This makes it possible to give the player a different feeling of operation. That is, the player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually remembers how much the tilting device 310 should be pushed in and how much reaction force is generated by each operation, for example, changing the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual. Similarly, by changing the reaction force returned immediately after the end of the pedal operation, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual.

Therefore, the lowering device 16362 g is driven and controlled by associating the combination of the difference in the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur, the difference in the reaction force returned immediately after the end of the pedal operation, and the difference in the jackpot expectation degree (for example, the jackpot expectation degree). When the reaction force is large, the timing of the reaction force generation is delayed and the reaction force immediately after the end of the pedal operation is changed), so that the discomfort given to the player can be associated with the difference in the jackpot expectation. It is possible to promote the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 for one purpose of confirming whether or not the tilting device 310 occurs.

When the player pedals the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 74 (a), the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position at the timing of generating the reaction force from the urging device 16362 (see FIG. 73 (a)). Since the stepped member 10362f is slower than when it is placed in the second position, it gives the player a sense of discomfort that the expectation of a big hit is high, and the reaction force given to the player immediately after the end of the pedal operation is the piston. Since the member 362a is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 73 (a)) and the stepped member 10362f is larger than the case where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position, it is expected that the jackpot expectation is high. Can be given. That is, the player can repeatedly confirm the magnitude of the jackpot expectation depending on the generation timing and magnitude of the reaction force applied from the tilting device 310 in the pushing process of the tilting device 310.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the player who pedals the tilting device 310 is notified of the jackpot expectation due to the difference in the reaction force generation timing in one pushing process. , It is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by the difference in the reaction force immediately after the end of pushing. Therefore, the player can be notified of the jackpot expectation due to the difference in reaction force multiple times in different time zones in one pushing process.

As a result, the degree of attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 can be concentrated from the start to the completion of the operation.

In the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), the arrangement of the piston member 362a is lowered as compared with the state shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (a). Therefore, the generation timing of the load (reaction force) generated from the urging device 16362 and applied to the player who operates the tilting device 310 is set later than the state shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (a). To.

In the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), the moving end member 10362d is arranged at a position 2/3 from the top of the moving range. Here, in order to pedal the tilting device 310 with the moving end member 10362d lowered to displace the return spring 16362e, it is necessary to displace the coil spring 362b by the same amount as the return spring 16362e. In the state shown in 74 (b), the maximum allowable displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is set to 1/3 of the moving range of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b cannot be made equal to the displacement amount of the return spring 16362e.

Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pedaled from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) to the descending position, the moving end member 10362d is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 74 (b). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), the arrangement of the stepped member 10362f cannot be determined from the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310.

Here, when it is necessary to arrange the stepped member 10362f at the first position in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d, for example, the moving end member 10362d is immediately moved after detecting the operation of the player. Even if control is to be performed, it is necessary to intervene an operation of retracting the stepped member 10362f to the second position, so that the moving end member 10362d and the stepped member 10362f may collide with each other, resulting in a desired operation. There was a problem that it was difficult to make it.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) of the present embodiment, the position of the moving end member 10362d is maintained with respect to the operation of the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to quickly move the moving member 16362g1 up and down immediately after pedaling the tilting device 310.

For example, when the moving member 16362g1 is rapidly raised, the moving end member 10362d is raised by the urging force of the return spring 16362e. More specifically, it rises by 1/6 of the moving range of the moving end member 10362d. As a result, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b changes 1.5 times, so that the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 increases about 1.5 times. Therefore, by raising the moving member 16362g1 immediately after the player pedals the tilting device 310 to the lowering position, the load given to the player can be immediately increased by 1.5 times. The increase in load can give a sense of discomfort.

Further, for example, a case where the moving member 16362 g1 is rapidly lowered will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of the operating device 16300. In addition, in FIG. 75, a state in which the moving end member 10362d is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) to the lower end position of the movable range of the moving end member 10362d is shown, and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362 is 0 ( The state of natural length) is shown in the figure.

When the moving member 16362g1 is suddenly lowered from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) toward the state shown in FIG. 75, the moving end member 10362d is also suddenly lowered, and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is reduced. Then, in the state shown in FIG. 75, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b becomes 0, and the load applied from the urging device 16362 to the tilting device 310 becomes 0.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is reduced. By lowering the moving member 16362g1 immediately after the player pedals the tilting device 310 to the lowering position, the load given to the player can be immediately reduced and eventually reduced to 0, so that the load is applied to the player. It is possible to give a sense of discomfort due to the decrease in.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by arranging the moving member 16362g1, the moving end member 10362d functions as the fixed end of the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d is used as the moving end (coil spring 362d and return spring 16362e). It is possible to limit both the case of functioning as an intermediate position (the end moving in the direction in which the springs are in series) and the case of functioning as an intermediate position.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the shape-invariant moving end member 10362d is pushed into the tilting device 310 and descends has been described, but the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes the shape-variable moving end member 17362d. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 76 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 17300 according to the 17th embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a), and FIG. 76 (b) is a portion of the modified rotating member 17362 g1. It is a perspective view, and FIG. 77 is a developed view of the outer peripheral surface of the deformed rotating member 17362g1. Note that FIG. 76A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated and the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end portion of the piston member 362a, and FIG. 77 shows a developed view for a center angle of 360 degrees. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the operation device 17300 has the above-mentioned tilting device 310 and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and is tilted. The tilting member is between the lower case 17360 forming the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 17360 having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and is arranged facing the lower case 17360. The tilting device 310 is fixed to the lower case 17360 in a manner in which the 310 is arranged, and the tilting device 310 is in contact with the tilting device 310 to determine the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). It mainly includes an upper case 370 (see FIG. 9).

The lower case 17360 will be described. The lower case 17360 is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper side open, and is movably supported in the vertical direction (FIG. 76 (a) vertical direction). It mainly includes an urging device 17362 having a piston member 362a, and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged.

The urging device 17362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 through the acting claw portion 332, and is a bottomed cylinder that is operably supported in the vertical direction inside the tubular receiving portion 361c and is opened downward. The shape of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and the lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361, and the moving end, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the coil spring 362b from the lower end side and is supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The return spring 17362e disposed between the member 17362d, the moving end member 17362d, and the bottom lid member 362c and urging the moving end member 10362d upward, and the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 17362d ( A stepped member 10362f capable of moving between a first position near the moving end member 17362d and a second position far from the moving end member 17362d from the front-rear direction (FIG. 76 (a) left-right direction), and a bottom support. The drive solenoid SOL10, which is fastened and fixed to the member 361 and drives the stepped member 10362f along the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, engages with the moving end member 17362d and moves up and down together with the moving end member 17362d. Mainly includes a member deforming device 17362g having a deformed rotating member 17362g1.

In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b has a natural length in the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). That is, the state in which the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position is defined as the natural length of the coil spring 362b.

The moving end member 17362d is arranged above the plate-shaped intermediate plate member 17362d1 on which the locked portion 10362d1 is formed and the intermediate plate member 17362d1 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1. The upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 which are arranged below the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and are capable of sliding in the vertical direction with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 are mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), since the moving end member 17362d is sandwiched between the coil spring 362b and the return spring 17362e at the top and bottom, the members 17362d1 to 17362d3 should be separated from each other unless there is a special load from others. It does not overlap and moves up and down.

The return spring 17362e is formed of a spring member having an elastic modulus equivalent to that of the coil spring 362b. That is, the return spring 17362e and the coil spring 362b have the same displacement required to generate the same reaction force. Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 76B), the piston member 362a is pushed by the tilting device 310, and the displacement amount when the coil spring 362b and the return spring 17362e expand and contract. Is 1 to 1 (displacement amount of coil spring 362b: displacement amount of return spring 17362e = 1: 1).

The member deforming device 17362g has a deformed rotating member 17362g1 arranged at a position where it interferes with the front side end of the moving end member 17362d in a vertical direction, and a D-shaped cross section inserted into the deformed rotating member 17362g1 so as to be relatively non-rotatable. Mainly includes a rod-shaped rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 and a drive motor 17362 g3 for rotating the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is formed of a pair of upper and lower cylindrical bodies UT and BT.

The upper cylindrical body UT forming the upper side of the modified rotating member 17362g1 is a member sandwiched between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the upper plate member 17362d2, and has an insertion hole UT0 having a D-shaped cross section and 1 / of the center angle. A first upper surface UT1 forming 4 (90 degrees) and a second upper surface UT2 adjacent to the first upper surface UT1 in the clockwise direction of the upper surface and forming 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle. The third upper surface UT3 is adjacent to the second upper surface UT2 in the clockwise direction of the upper surface to form a 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle, and the third upper surface UT3 is adjacent to the third upper surface UT3 in the clockwise direction of the upper surface. It mainly includes a fourth upper surface UT4 that forms 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle.

Similarly, the lower cylindrical body BT forming the lower side of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is a member sandwiched between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the lower plate member 17362d3, and coincides with the insertion hole UT0 in the vertical direction. The first lower surface BT1 that is arranged at the position and forms a D-shaped insertion hole and 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle, and the first lower surface BT1 are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction of the lower surface. The second lower surface BT2 that forms 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle and the second lower surface BT2 that are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction of the lower surface to form 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle. The third lower surface BT3 and the fourth lower surface BT4 which are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction of the lower surface of the third lower surface BT3 and form 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle are mainly provided.

The insertion hole of the upper cylindrical body UT and the insertion hole of the lower tubular body BT are formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2. That is, the upper tubular body UT and the lower tubular body BT are pivotally supported by the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 in a state in which they cannot rotate relative to the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 and are movable in the vertical direction (FIG. 76 (FIG. 76). a) See).

As a result, when the coil spring 362b is lowered after the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is also lowered along the rotating slide shaft rod 17362g2 as the moving end member 17362d is lowered.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the present embodiment, the intermediate plate member 17362d1 of the moving end member 17362d is sandwiched between the upper cylindrical body UT and the lower tubular body BT, and is formed by the upper cylindrical body UT. The upper plate member 17362d2 is arranged further above, and the lower plate member 17362d3 is arranged further below the lower cylindrical body BT. Then, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 rotates, and the vertical dimension of the portion of the tubular body UT and BT facing the moving end member 17362d changes, so that the upper plate member 173621d2 is arranged with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 or the intermediate plate. The arrangement of the lower plate member 173621d3 with respect to the member 17362d1 can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 77, on the upper surface of the upper cylindrical body UT of the deformed rotating member 17362g1, a moving upper end Uh1 which is the upper end position of the moving range and a moving lower end Uh0 which is the lower end position of the moving range are set. On the lower surface of the side cylindrical body BT, a moving upper end Bh0 which is the upper end position of the moving range and a moving lower end Bh1 which is the lower end position of the moving range are set.

The upper surface of the upper cylindrical body UT and the lower surface of the lower tubular body BT of the deformed rotating member 17362 g1 change their states (position change in the vertical direction with respect to the rotation of the drive motor 17362 g3) at an angular interval of 90 degrees.

For example, when the initial phase θ0, which is an angular position of one of the deformed rotating members 17362g1, is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d (see FIG. 76A), the drive motor 17362g3 is driven and the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is on the upper surface. When rotating counterclockwise, the phase arranged to face the moving end member 17362d shifts to the first phase θ1.

Meanwhile, since the first upper surface UT1 of the upper tubular body UT is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d, the upper plate member 17362d2 stops at the moving lower end Uh0 with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1, while the lower tubular body BT Since the first lower surface BT1 is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d, the lower plate member 17362d3 is displaced with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 from the moving upper end Bh0 toward the moving lower end Bh1 (see FIG. 78 (a)). By rotating the deformed rotating member 17362g1 in this way, the shape of the moving end member 17362d can be changed.

78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 79 (a) and FIG. 79 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 17300. In FIG. 78 (a), from FIG. 76 (a), the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the first phase θ1 of the deformed rotating member 17362 g1 is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d. In FIG. 78 (b), the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 is further rotated in the same direction, and the second phase θ2 of the deformed rotary member 17362 g1 is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d (a). Then, the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 further rotates in the same direction, and the third phase θ3 of the deformed rotary member 17362 g1 is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d. In FIG. 79 (b), the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 is the same. The state in which the intermediate position between the third phase θ3 and the initial phase θ0 of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is further rotated in the direction is arranged facing the moving end member 17362d is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, according to the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b or the return spring 17362e can be preliminarily contracted in a state where the moving end member 17362d is arranged at the upper end position. Thereby, the load (reaction force) given to the player can be changed.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 78 (a), the state of the coil spring 362b is the same as the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), while the return spring 17362e is pre-contracted. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 78 (a)) is shown in FIG. 76 (a). It does not change compared to the indicated state (in the comparison of the tilting device 310 tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) given to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position when the pedal operation is completed is shown in FIG. 76 (a). ) Is larger than the state shown in).

Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 78 (a), as compared with the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the tilting device 310 is used. The load given to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position after completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 while equalizing the load (reaction force) given to the player. (Reaction force) can be increased. This makes it possible to notify the player of the stepwise change.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 78 (b), the state of the coil spring 362b is preliminarily contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a), while the state of the return spring 17362e does not change. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 78 (b)) is shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (a). It is larger than the state shown in FIG. 78 (a) (in the comparison of the state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) given to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position when the pedal operation is completed is shown in FIG. 76 (a). ), It becomes larger than the state shown in FIG. 78 (a), and it becomes the same as compared with the state shown in FIG. 78 (a).

Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position as compared with the state shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 78 (a). When the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position after completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 while increasing the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 is used. The load (reaction force) applied to the player can be made larger than that shown in FIG. 76 (a) and can be made equivalent to the state shown in FIG. 78 (a). This makes it possible to notify the player of the stepwise change.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), the state of the coil spring 362b is pre-contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a), and the state of the return spring 17362e is pre-contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a). .. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 79 (a)) is shown in FIG. 78 (b). It is equivalent to the state shown (in the comparison of the state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) given to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position when the pedal operation is completed is shown in FIG. 78 (b). ) (It becomes larger than the state shown in FIG. 76 (a) and FIG. 78 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 79 (a), the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position is shown in FIG. 78. A load (anti-load) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position after the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed, which is equivalent to the state shown in (b). The force) can be increased as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a) and 78 (b). This makes it possible to notify the player of the stepwise change.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (b), the state of the coil spring 362b is pre-contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a), and the state of the return spring 17362e is pre-contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a). .. The amount of shrinkage is smaller than the amount of shrinkage shown in FIG. 79 (a). Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 79 (b)) is shown in FIG. 79 (a). It is smaller than the indicated state (in the comparison of the tilting device 310 tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) given to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position when the pedal operation is completed is shown in FIG. 79 (a). ) Is smaller than the state shown in).

Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 79 (b), the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position is shown in FIG. 79. A load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position after completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 while being smaller than the state shown in (a). The reaction force) can be made smaller than that shown in FIG. 79 (a). This makes it possible to notify the player of the stepwise change.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 79B is a state in which the fourth upper surface UT4 and the fourth lower surface BT4 are arranged to face the moving end member 17362d, and the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 is rotated by a predetermined angle to rotate the deformed rotary member 17362g1. By changing the portion facing the moving end member 17362d between the third phase θ3 and the initial phase θ0, the amount of movement (separation width) of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 can be reduced. It can be changed continuously.

According to the present embodiment, since the deformable portion of the moving end member 17362d and the stepped member 10362f do not interfere with each other, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 can be rotated at an arbitrary timing. For example, after the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed, after notifying that the tilting device 310 is continuously pushed in, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is rotated to change the state of the moving end member 17362d and tilted. The load (reaction force) applied to the player via the device 310 can be changed.

For example, by rotating the deformed rotating member 17362g1 by 90 degrees clockwise from the top view from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the state of FIG. 79 (a) is reached via the state of FIG. 79 (b). From there, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is further rotated 90 degrees in the opposite direction. In this way, by repeatedly reversing the direction and rotating the tilting device 310 by 90 degrees, it is possible to change the strength of the load given to the player who maintains the pushing of the tilting device 310.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the lower end surface 2332b of the acting claw portion 2332 has a shape for keeping the load felt by the player constant, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape behind the switching point 2332c may be recessed in a direction further separated from the piston member 2362a. As a result, after the switching point 2332c and the piston member 2362a are released from contact with each other (when the rotation angle of the tilting device 2310 becomes larger), the load applied from the piston member 2362a to the tilting device 2310 is reduced, so that the game can be played. It can be used for directing to reduce the load on the person.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the load applied to the tilting device 4310 continues to increase immediately after the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position (the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation), the area of the magnets overlapping in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 is set to zero. The load applied to the tilting device 4310 may be set to the minimum value at a position rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In this case, it is possible to facilitate the player to determine the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 are not in contact with each other until the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 may be configured to be in contact with each other until the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In this case, for example, the operating resistance when the tilting device 5310 is pushed can be changed by manually changing the tightness of the torsion spring 5383 that applies the urging force to the rotating roller 5381.

In the sixth embodiment, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 of the tilting device 6310 is such that the rotating shaft O1 is set with reference to the contact point J1 between the tilting device 6310 and the rotating member 6381 in the state where the tilting device 6310 is arranged in the raised position. Although the case of entering the inside from the centered arc C6 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the range from the contact point J1 to 3 ° upward, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 is formed along the arc C6, and in the range from 3 ° upward from the contact point J1, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 is formed. May be formed so as to enter inward from the arc C6. In this case, in the range from the state where the tilting device 6310 is arranged in the ascending position to the rotation of 3 ° (the range of the push operation), the rotating member 6381 is prevented from being separated from the tilting device 6310 due to the operating speed of the tilting device 6310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resistance given to the player from changing due to the displacement speed of the tilting device 6310 within the range of the push operation.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the fixed magnet Ma2 and the moving magnet Ma7 are attracted within the range of the pedal operation of the tilting device 7310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fixed magnet Ma2 and the moving magnet Ma7 may be attracted by a push operation. In this case, the moving resistance of the tilting device 7310 changes depending on the displacement speed of the tilting device 7310 during the push operation (for example, if the tilting device 7310 is pushed vigorously, the return becomes slow), so that an appropriate repeated striking operation can be performed. The permissible range of the displacement speed of the tilting device 7310 that can be made is narrowed. As a result, the mode of continuous striking when the player repeatedly strikes can be moved to the uniform side, and the tilting device 7310 is prevented from being damaged by an unexpected operation (operation in which the continuous striking speed is excessively increased, etc.). be able to.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the locking member 7318 is manually moved has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the locking member 7318 may be urged by a dashpot toward the back, and the locking member 7318 and the upper surface portion of the power acting member 363 may be inclined at a sliding angle. In this case, when the speed at which the tilting device 7310 is rotated is high, the locking member 7318 is powered by the load in the rotational direction before the locking member 7318 is moved toward the front side against the urging force of the dashpot. When the tilting device 7310 is pressed against the 363 and the tilting device 7310 is stopped, when the speed at which the tilting device 7310 is rotated is low, the locking member 7318 is moved toward the front before the force for pressing the locking member 7318 against the power acting member 363 increases. Can be moved to the side. Therefore, the locking member 7318 can be automatically moved only when the operation speed is low.

In the seventh embodiment, when the tilting device 7310 is stopped in the middle of rotation, the tilting device 7310 can be further rotated by moving the locking member 7318a in a direction different from the rotation direction. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, a member that stops the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is configured to be retractable by a notch mechanism, and the notch mechanism is switched by one step by operating the tilting device 7310 in the pushing direction. In the state, the configuration may be such that the rotation can be partitioned up to the descending position. In this case, the tilting device 7310 can be stopped in the middle of rotation by operating in the same direction as the tilting device 7310 is pushed in.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82 can be attracted from the state where the tilting device 8310 is arranged in the ascending position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82 may be configured to be attractable from a position where the tilting device 8310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In this case, when the tilting device 8310 is rotated in a state where the displacement speed of the tilting device 8310 is small (a state in which the inertial acting member 7319c stops relative to the upper cover 8311), the tilting device 8310 is operated by the urging device 362. The timing at which the displacement resistance of the tilting device 8310 increases and the timing at which the displacement resistance of the tilting device 8310 increases due to the attraction between the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82 can be matched, and the tilting device 8310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In some cases, the amount of increase in the load applied to the tilting device 8310 can be increased. This makes it easier for the player to determine the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the stepped member 10362f moves in and out along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the stepped member 10362f that moves in and out, it is a member that rotates on a rotation axis parallel to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, and the distance between the moving end member 10362d and the moving end member 10362d is continuous or discontinuous depending on the phase. You may use the phase change member which changes to.

The phase change member is formed from a so-called spiral shape, and interferes with the moving end member 10362d in the vertical direction (moving direction of the moving end member 10362d) at the maximum diameter portion, and interferes with the moving end member 10362d at the minimum diameter portion in the vertical direction. It is said that the shape is not. Further, the change in the radial length of the phase changing member occurs continuously.

According to this, if the large-diameter portion of the phase changing member is arranged on the moving end member 10362d side, the phase changing member and the moving end member 10362d may collide (the stepped member 10362f is in the first position). If the small diameter portion of the phase changing member is arranged on the moving end member 10362d side (corresponding to the arranged state), the phase changing member and the moving end member 10362d do not collide (the stepped member 10362f is the second). Corresponds to the state of being placed in position).

Similar to the case where the stepped member 10362f appears and disappears in a constant motion in the tenth embodiment, if the change in the diameter length of the phase changing member is designed according to the conditions, the same embodiment (of the phase changing member) is provided. The stop position of the moving end member 10362d can be controlled in the mode of continuing constant velocity rotation).

In this case, when the phase changing member approaches and collides with the moving end member 10362d, the direction of the load applied from the phase changing member to the moving end member 10362d has components in the rotation direction and the rotation axis direction of the phase changing member. It is in the direction of inclination. Further, the large diameter portion of the phase changing member gradually approaches the moving end member 10362d along the rotation direction of the phase changing member.

Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f moves in and out perpendicularly to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d and applies a load orthogonal to the moving direction to the moving end member 10362d (when a large load is momentarily applied to the moving end member 10362d). ), The change in the magnitude of the load applied to the moving end member 10362d can be made more gradual. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the moving end member 10362d and the phase changing member.

In the tenth embodiment, the description focuses on one pedal operation of the tilting device 310, but the description is not limited to this. For example, the tilting device 310 may be divided into a plurality of times to perform a notification (continuous striking, sequential pushing, etc.) to operate the pedal. In this case, while the stepped member 10362f is operating constantly, the lowered moving end member 10362d does not rise due to the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 (the stepped member 10362f is placed in the first position before restoration). Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the player via the tilting device 310 can be reduced as the pushing opportunity on the side where the number of pushing times is large.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the stepped member 10362f basically operates constantly from the power-on is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the stepped member 10362f may be set to start when the operation of the tilting device 310 is detected. In this case, since the drive solenoid SOL10 that drives the stepped member 10362f does not operate before the operation of the tilting device 310, the operation pattern of the stepped member 10362f is grasped by the sound generated during driving and the vibration generated during driving. This can be prevented, and the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved by operating the tilting device 310.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the urging force of the return spring 10362e is extremely small as compared with the coil spring 362b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be designed to generate an urging force equivalent to that of the coil spring 362b.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the second tilting device 400 is arranged so as to straddle the tilting device 12310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a lever shape (a shape in which the tilting device 400 is divided into left and right at the center of the left and right) which is fastened and fixed to one of the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 and bent into an L shape. In particular, when the tilting device 310 is fastened and fixed to the left side of the front view, it can be easily operated with the left hand and can be arranged avoiding the range where the wiring on the launching device side is crowded.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the second arm portion 430 of the second tilting device 400 is supported so as to be repositionably changeable by engaging with the tip adjusting member 462 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a female screw shape may be formed on the second arm portion 430, and a male screw shape may be formed on the tip adjusting arm portion 462 so that they can be loosely fitted. In this case, since the position of the second arm portion 430 changes due to the screw-shaped loose fitting, it is necessary to prevent the contact area between the second arm portion 430 and the tip adjusting member 462 from being reduced by the position of the second arm portion 430. Can be done.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 does not reach the descending position even if the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the tilting device 310 may be formed so as to reach the descending position by pushing the second tilting device 15400.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the spring coefficients of the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e are set to be the same has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the spring coefficient of the coil spring 362b may be set to half the spring coefficient of the return spring 16362e, or vice versa. In this case, it is possible to prevent the space for arranging the coil spring 362b or the return spring 16362e from being limited.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the moving end member 10362d is supported by the lowering device 16362g has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lowering device 16362 g and the moving end member 10362d may be connected. In this case, it is possible to prevent the lowering device 16362 g and the moving end member 10362d from being separated from each other when the operation amount of the tilting device 310 becomes large. Further, this connection may be formed so as to be dissociable. In this case, it is possible to allow the lowering device 16362g and the moving end member 10362d to separate from each other only at the time of release.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the coil spring 362b is set to the natural length when the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position and the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end of the moving range has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be shrunk in advance from the natural length. In this case, even if the moving end member 10362d is lowered by the action of the lowering device 16362g, the lowered portion can be compensated by the restoration of the coil spring 362d, and the piston member 362a is maintained at the upper end position of the moving range. Can be done. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player can be changed without changing the contact start timing between the tilting device 310 and the piston member 362a.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the moving end member 17362d expands and contracts due to the movement of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 with the rotation of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the upper plate member 17362d2, or between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the lower plate member 17362d3, a thick plate can be inserted or pulled out at an arbitrary timing. A plugging device may be provided. In this case, the moving end member 17362d can be expanded and contracted depending on the number of plates to be inserted.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the driving force for moving the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 is generated by the single drive motor 17362g3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a dedicated drive means may be provided for each of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3. In this case, it is possible to easily drive each of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 independently.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the tilting device 310 is exposed to the front surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a protective cover that protects the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 310. In this case, since the protective cover can prevent the player from applying a load around the rotating shaft O1 of the tilting device 310, the portion around the rotating shaft O1 of the tilting device 310 (including the drive motor M1) is damaged. It can be prevented.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lower end of the coil spring 362b is dammed by the bottom lid member 362c of the lower case 360 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bottom lid member 362c is movable along the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the coil spring 362b, and the bottom lid member 362c is configured to move (descend) with the tilting device 310. Is also good. In this case, even when the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle from the ascending position, a region where the displacement of the coil spring 362b can be reduced can be arbitrarily set as compared with the case where the bottom wall member 362c is fixed. can.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the tilting device 310 is constantly urged toward the ascending position by an urging member such as a torsion spring 343 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the torsion spring 343 may not be disposed, but another drive device (such as an air ejection device or a one-way drive device) that returns to the initial position may be disposed. In this case, the operation of the tilting device 310 after the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 310 during the operation can be arbitrarily set.

For example, in the case of applying rotational resistance to the tilting device 310 by magnetic force, if the hand is released at a position less than a predetermined angle from the ascending position, the tilting device 310 stays in place while staying at a predetermined angle or more from the ascending position. When the hand is released at the position of (for example, depending on the arrangement of the center of gravity), it can be configured to continuously operate to the descending position. As a result, the tilting device 310 can be operated in an unexpected operation mode, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the shape of the weight member M1a has a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the circumferential direction and the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axial direction is formed from a fan shape having the rotation axis as the apex has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the circumferential direction of the weight member M1a may be an elliptical shape. In this case, since the portion closest to the weight members M1a arranged opposite to each other can be brought closer to the rotation axis, the possibility that the weight members M1a come into contact with each other when the drive motors M1 are arranged close to each other can be reduced. Can be done.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls can be solved.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<An example of a technical concept that suppresses changes in the operating feeling of a tilting device with respect to the operating angle>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means includes an operated means to be input-operated by the player and an adjusting means for adjusting a load received by the player who has performed the input operation. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the adjusting means suppresses an increase in a load received by a player who has performed an input operation, at least in a part of the moving range of the operated means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for a player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the urging force for returning the operated means to an initial position increases in response to the pushing amount of the operated means. There are gaming machines (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-014571). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to deal with a case where the moving distance of the operated means becomes long. That is, in order to improve the operational feeling felt by the player, it is desirable to increase the rate of increase in the urging force with respect to the moving distance of the operated means from the initial position, but when the moving distance of the operated means becomes long, the game There is a problem that the load received by the person becomes excessive and the player performing the operation becomes tired, so that the pushing of the operated means is stopped during the game.

In this case, it becomes impossible to show the player the effect of changing the state of the liquid crystal display device by pushing the operated means, and the player's interest may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the adjusting means suppresses an increase in the load received by the player who has performed the input operation, at least in a part of the moving range of the operated means, so that the load received by the player is received. It is possible to suppress the increase in the number of players and prevent the player from getting tired.

When the moving distance of the operated means becomes long, for example, when the pushing amount of the operated means is detected and reflected in the operation, or when the operated means is an arc orbit (not a straight orbit) or a zigzag orbit. An example is the case where the operation is performed with.

For example, when the push-in amount is detected and reflected in the operation, it is easier to maintain the target push-in amount by lengthening the detection boundary, and it is possible to promote comfortable playing of the game. There is a high possibility that the moving distance of the operating means will be long.

The gaming machine A1 includes a urging means for generating an urging force for moving the operated means toward an initial position, and the urging means has a first elasticity that causes displacement along the moving path of the operated means. The gaming machine A2, which is composed of a spring member, is characterized in that the adjusting means suppresses a load received by a player within a range after the operated means has moved from an initial position by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the urging means is composed of a first elastic spring member that causes displacement along the movement path of the operated means, and the operated means is moved from the initial position. Since the load received by the player is suppressed within the range after the movement is performed by a predetermined distance, the load felt by the player is increased in proportion to the distance by which the operated means is moved, thereby giving the player a feeling of operation. It is possible to make the player recognize the point where the increase rate of the load given to the player is switched (for example, the point where the proportionality constant is changed) in the range after moving from the initial position by a predetermined distance.

Thereby, by using the change point of the load applied to the player as a mark, it is possible to easily move the operated means to an arbitrary point in the moving range of the operated means.

As the first elastic spring member, when the operated means rotates around a predetermined rotation axis, a torsion spring centered on the rotation axis or an arc centered on the rotation axis of the operated means. An example is a coil spring or the like that is curved and arranged along a wall portion of a shape, and an example is a coil spring that is arranged along the moving direction of the operated means when the operated means operates in translation. To.

In the game machine A2, the operated means is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis, and the adjusting means includes a second elastic spring member that applies a load to the operated means from the circumferential direction, and the second elastic spring thereof. The member is arranged to face the operated means and is configured to give an urging force to the operated means by abutting against the operated means while the operated means is moving, and the direction of displacement of the second elastic spring member is the said. A game machine A3 characterized in that it follows the tangential direction of an arbitrary arc centered on a rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the operated means is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis, and the second elastic spring member abuts during the movement of the operated means to exert an urging force. Since the direction of the displacement is along the tangential direction of an arbitrary arc centered on the rotation axis, after the operated means and the second elastic spring member come into contact with each other, the contact point is set as the rotation angle of the operated means. The displacement of the second elastic spring member can be changed in a direction different from the rate of change in the angle of the operated means. Therefore, the load applied from the second elastic spring member to the operated means can be arbitrarily set by variously changing the shape of the contact point of the operated means.

In the game machine A3, the operated means is provided with a contact portion which is arranged to face the second elastic spring member and is configured to be in contact with the second elastic spring member, and the contact portion is the subject. The elastic spring member comes into contact with the second elastic spring member in the first state in which the operating means is moved from the initial position by a predetermined distance, and in the second state in which the operating means is further moved in the same direction from the first state. The second contact point is provided with a second contact point that comes into contact with the first contact point, and the second contact point is the initial stage of the operated means rather than the straight line passing through the rotation axis and the first contact point. A game machine A4 characterized by being arranged on the position side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the second contact point is more than the first contact point of the contact portion, and the operated means is more than the straight line passing through the rotation axis and the first contact point. Since it is arranged on the initial position side of, for example, as compared with the case where the second contact point is arranged on a straight line passing through the first contact point and the rotation axis, the operated means from the first state to the second state. It is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the second elastic spring member rather than the distance at which the portion in the vicinity of contact with the second elastic spring member is displaced when the second elastic spring member is rotated. As a result, the load applied to the operated means by the second elastic spring member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A4, the shape of the second contact point is set in such a manner that the displacement amount of the second elastic spring member is reduced in the second state as compared with the first state. The gaming machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the shape of the second contact point is set in such a manner that the displacement amount of the second elastic spring member is reduced in the second state as compared with the first state. Therefore, the load applied to the operated means by the second elastic spring member in the second state can be reduced as compared with the load applied to the operated means by the second elastic spring member in the first state. Therefore, the urging force of the first elastic spring member that rises due to the movement of the operated means from the first state to the second state is partially offset by the decrease in the load applied to the operated means by the second elastic spring member. can do.

In any of the game machines A3 to A5, the second elastic spring member is configured so that the posture can be changed, and the direction of the posture change is such that the displacement amount of the first elastic spring member becomes larger, the second elastic spring member is said. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the angle between the moving direction of the moving direction and the moving direction of the operated means is set to be large.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A5, the second elastic spring member is configured so that the posture can be changed, and the direction of the posture change is the displacement amount of the first elastic spring member. As the size increases, the angle formed by the moving direction of the second elastic spring member and the moving direction of the operated means becomes larger. Therefore, as the urging force of the first elastic spring member increases, the second elastic spring member becomes larger. Among the urging forces of, the component loaded on the operated means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load felt by the player.

In the gaming machine A6, by connecting the second elastic spring member to the operated means, the relationship between the posture of the second elastic spring member and the posture of the operated means is associated one-to-one. A featured gaming machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the relationship between the posture of the second elastic spring member and the posture of the operated means is one-to-one by connecting the second elastic spring member to the operated means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second elastic spring member from changing its posture in an unexpected direction due to a sudden load applied to the operated means.

<Example of technical concept to change the rate of change of rotational resistance of tilting device>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means changes the rate of change between the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the load given to the player by the operated means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by providing means and means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for the player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There are gaming machines that are controlled (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-024322). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to recognize the pushing amount, so that it is necessary to separately provide a scale on the liquid crystal display device in order for the player to grasp the pushing amount. There was a point.

In this case, even if the effect of specifying the pushing amount is performed, it is necessary to operate the operated means while paying attention to the scale, so that other parts of the board surface of the game board (for example, the flow of the fired ball). There was a problem that he could not send his eyes to the game and could not play the game as he wanted.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the changing means for changing the change rate of the load given to the player from the operated means is provided, the operated means is placed at a predetermined position on the player by using the change in the load as a mark. It is possible to grasp that it has been pushed to. As a result, the player can grasp that the operated means has been pushed to a predetermined position without looking at the scale, so that the player can operate the operated means at any position on the board of the game board. You can pay attention to it.

In the gaming machine B1, the changing means is arranged face-to-face with the operating portion of the operated means in a state where the operated means is arranged at a start position separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance, and in that state, the operated means is operated. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that it is configured in such a manner that a load is started to be applied to the player via means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the changing means is arranged face-to-face with the operating portion of the operated means in a state where the operated means is arranged at a start position separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance. In that state, since the load is started to be applied to the player via the operated means, the operated means is arranged at the start position to receive the load felt by the player from the operated means without separately providing the driving means. Can be changed at the boundary.

As a result, the load applied to the player can be reliably changed at the start position without being affected by poor control, and the change can be used as a marker for the player to grasp the amount of pushing of the operated means. can do.

In the gaming machine B2, the changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that applies a load in the moving direction of the operated means, and the elastic spring member is initially before being brought into contact with the acting portion of the operated means. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it is arranged in a state of being displaced from its natural length by a predetermined distance.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that applies a load in the moving direction of the operated means, and the elastic spring member hits the acting portion of the operated means. Since it is arranged in a state of being displaced by a predetermined distance from the natural length in the initial state before being touched, the elastic spring member is attached to the operated means immediately before and immediately after the operated means is brought into contact with the elastic spring member. Since the elastic force corresponding to the displacement of is applied at one time, the load applied to the player can be changed rapidly. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the operated means has passed through the state of being arranged at a predetermined position from the change in the load given by the operated means.

In the game machine B3, when the contact point between the acting portion and the elastic spring member changes with the movement of the operated means, the acting portion is a section that first abuts on the elastic spring member. The first contact section of the working portion and the elastic spring member are provided with one contact section and a second contact section which is a section that comes into contact with the elastic spring member after the first contact section. The operated means moves by a predetermined amount in a state where the second contact section of the acting portion and the elastic spring member are in contact with each other, as compared with the case where the operated means moves by a predetermined amount in a state of contact with the elastic spring member. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the amount of increase in the load given to the player is smaller in the case of doing so.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the first hit is compared with the case where the operating portion moves a predetermined amount while contacting the elastic spring member in the first contact section. Since the increase in the load given to the player is smaller when the operated means is moved by a predetermined amount while contacting the elastic spring member in the second contact section where the push-in amount is larger than the contact section. It is possible to prevent the load felt by the player after the operated means has passed the predetermined position from becoming excessive while maintaining the effect of facilitating the recognition that the operated means is arranged at the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine B2, the acting portion is configured to include a magnetic material, and the changing means is composed of a magnetic load member arranged to face a part of the moving path of the acting portion, and the magnetic load member is composed of a magnetic load member. The gaming machine B5 is characterized by having magnetism that produces an attractive force with respect to the magnetic material constituting the acting portion.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the change in the load applied to the operated means is generated by the magnetic force (adsorption force) generated between the acting portion and the magnetic load member, so that the acting portion It is possible to make it easier for the player to feel the change in load between the case where the magnetic load member and the magnetic load member are close to each other and the case where the magnetic load member is far away.

Although the load when the player pushes the operated means increases, when the player performs the maintenance operation, the acting portion is attracted to the magnetic load member, so that the operated portion is given to the player. The load is reduced. Therefore, compared to the case where the load applied to the operated means is increased by the urging force of the elastic spring, the force required for the player to maintain the position of the operated means becomes smaller, and the player feels tired. Can be mitigated.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the operated means includes a moving means configured to be relatively movable with respect to the operated means and a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the moving member. The moving member can be configured with a first state and a second state after moving from the first state to a different position, and at least the moving member has the first state and the second state. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the load given to the player when it changes with and is configured to be variable.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the load given to the player can be changed by changing the state of the moving means, so that the operated means is arranged at a predetermined position. By operating the driving means when it is detected, the load given to the player can be changed, and the player can be made to recognize the current pushing position of the operated means.

In the gaming machine B6, when the driving means is composed of a rotary motor and the rotary motor rotates in the forward direction, the moving member is relatively moved with respect to the operated means, and when the rotary motor rotates in the reverse direction. The gaming machine B7, wherein the moving member stops relative to the operated means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, it is possible to configure a case where the load applied to the gaming machine changes depending on the rotation direction of the rotary motor and a case where the load does not change. Therefore, for example, operate the operated means. By confirming the vibration transmitted to a part of the gaming machine without checking the internal state, it is possible to suppress the game method and enhance the significance of operating the operated means. As a result, the operated means can be effectively utilized.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the input means can be moved in a direction intersecting the input direction of the operated means and the vibrating means for vibrating the operated means, and the operated means can be moved to the operated means. The changing means includes an operation unit that is arranged and can be operated by the player, and the changing means transmits the operation driving means that generates the driving force for moving the operation unit and the driving force of the operation driving means to the operation unit. When the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is far, the input means is provided with a transmission means for the operation unit and the input means is provided with a transmission means. B8 is a gaming machine B8 comprising a switching means for increasing the vibration transmission efficiency of the vibrating means to the operated means.

Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibrating means, it is better to bring the vibrating means closer to the part operated by the player, which is the vibration given to the player when the player operates. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation site is located at the position where the impact during operation is the largest, if the vibrating means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during operation. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a feeling of vibration and to secure a long service life of the vibrating means at the same time.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to secure the distance between the vibrating means and the operation unit, and prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance is long.

In addition, the operation target is enlarged by separating the operation unit from the operated means, and the operation of the input means by the player is facilitated, while the vibration feeling is reduced by the player's fingers moving away from the vibrating means. As a result, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to secure (level) the vibration given to the player who touches the input means.

As a result, the operation unit is separated from the operated means and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation (so-called “super hot” situation) that makes us feel that the degree of expectation is high in appearance. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the extremely weak feeling.

The degree of expectation includes the degree of expectation of reach development and the degree of expectation of big hit occurrence. Here, the reach development expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of developing to reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of jackpot occurrence.

The vibration sensation includes a sensation that the player who touches the member receives through the member, and a sensation that the player receives the vibration by another sensation (for example, visual sense) without touching the member (for example, the member's sensation). The feeling of vibrating by seeing an afterimage in the vicinity) is included.

The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, and the operation driving means is arranged on the side where the speed of the operated means is low. Game machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, when a violent operation such as hitting the operated means is performed, the impact given to the operation driving means is applied while maintaining the intensity of the operation. It can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as an operation mode in which the operation speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported by an axis and rotates in the circumferential direction of a circle about the axis, or the axis is not supported. In addition, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

In the gaming machine B8 or B9, the operating unit is separated from the operated means by the driving force of the operating driving means, and the switching means changes means to the extent that the operated means and the operating unit can be connected. The means for changing the degree thereof generates an urging force for moving the operating portion in a direction close to the operated means, and the urging force is the distance between the operated means and the operating portion. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that it rises as the length increases.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8 or B9, the operating unit can be maintained on the side close to the operated means by generating an urging force whose degree changing means varies, and the operated means can be operated. Adjust the buffering action of vibration transmission between the machine and the operating unit (keep the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating unit are placed close to each other, and reduce the buffering action when placed at a distance. )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

The mode of the degree changing means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be formed from an elastic spring made of metal, or it may be formed from an air spring.

In any of the gaming machines B8 to B10, the switching means approaches the vibrating means in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means as the operating unit moves away from the operated means, and at least the said. The displacement means includes a second transmission means that can come into contact with the vibrating means when the operating unit is most distant from the operated means, and the displacement means attaches the operating unit to the operated means. The gaming machine B11 is provided with a connecting means for operably connecting along a direction intersecting with the moving direction of the machine.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B8 to B10, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means. Since the vibration along the line is transmitted to the operation unit, it is possible to easily give the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means to the player who touches the operation unit.

For example, when the operation mode of the operated means during operation is a rotational operation about a predetermined axis, the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, the vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is generated. Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because it is not related to the moment), it is possible to secure a large vibration transmitted to the player even when the operating portion is separated from the operated means.

It is possible to change the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit. As a result, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed, so that various vibration effects can be performed. Can be achieved.

In addition, for example, by accommodating the operation driving means, the transmitting means, and the second transmitting means in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the driving force transmission path changes due to the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance increases. It can be prevented from doing so.

In any of the gaming machines B8 to B11, the transmission means includes a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation drive means. Game machine B12.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B8 to B11, the operation driving means is overloaded due to the player operating the operation unit by an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent problems such as failure of the slingshot. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the operation of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines B8 to B12, the operated means is rotatably supported along the input direction, and the operated portion is separated from the rotating axis of the operated means. A gaming machine B13 characterized by moving away from the means.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B8 to B12, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is due to the movement of the operating portion by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit can be changed according to the movement amount of the operation unit.

Further, when the operation unit is the farthest from the operated means, that is, when the operation target becomes the largest (the operable range becomes the largest and the operation becomes easier), the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation. As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the changing means includes an urging means that generates an urging force along the operation direction of the operated means, and the urging means is accompanied by the movement of the operated means. The first state, which is configured to be deformable and maintains the same amount of movement of the operated means from the predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the urging means, and the amount of deformation of the urging means from the predetermined state. The gaming machine B14 is characterized in that it can be switched between a second state in which the movement amount of the operated means is less than the movement amount.

According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves by a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state. Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control to change the elastic modulus of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed according to the operation timing.

The mode of change of the load with respect to the amount of deformation is not limited at all. For example, it may be a linear change mode (elastic spring or the like) or a non-linear deformation mode.

In the gaming machine B14, the changing means is arranged on the operating side portion which is arranged in the urging means and comes into contact with the operated means, and is arranged on the opposite side of the operating side portion of the urging means to the gaming machine main body. At least one of the contact position between the supported main body side portion and the operated means and the operation side portion, or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion can be changed during the input operation. The gaming machine B15 is characterized by comprising a position changing means.

According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B14, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operating length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the urging means during the input operation. , The rate of change in the load given to the player as a reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

In the gaming machine B15, the position changing means has a first state in which the state is fixed in close proximity to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the urging means, and a first state in which the state is released from the fixed state. It is characterized by comprising a moving means capable of switching between two states by movement, a moving driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a control means for controlling a driving mode of the moving driving means. Game machine B16.

According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B15, it is possible to control the support position by the position changing means by driving the moving driving means based on the control means. Therefore, the load applied to the player via the urging means can be changed by control.

It should be noted that the support of either end of the urging means may be released. When releasing the support point on the pedal side, it is essential to move along the peripheral surface (not in a mode of being pushed by the operation tip surface).

When the moving direction of the pedal and the moving direction of the moving means are orthogonal to each other, it is possible to suppress the reaction force applied to the player during the operation from changing to the driving timing of the moving means.

In the gaming machine B15 or B16, a change in at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operated side portion or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is an operation of the operated means. The gaming machine B17, which is characterized by the execution of.

According to the gaming machine B17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B15 or B16, a change in the urging force (degree of change) of the urging means occurs when the player operates the operated means (that is, attached). Since the state of the urging means is not changed in advance), it is possible to prevent the urging force of the urging means from being noticed from the state of the operated means (for example, the appearance) before the operation. It is possible to promote the operation of the operated means.

Further, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, it is possible to easily change the changing mode of the urging force depending on the operation mode.

<An example of a technical idea in which the load received by the player is large when the rotation speed of the tilting device is high>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies a load as a movement resistance to the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the operated means, and the load can be changed. When the operated means is displaceable at a first speed and a second speed larger than the first speed, the load changing means comprises the configured means for changing the load. The load given to the operated means by the load changing means when displaced at the second speed as compared with the load given to the operated means by the load changing means when displaced at the first speed. The gaming machine C1 characterized by being enlarged.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for the player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There are gaming machines that are controlled (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-024322). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operation of moving the operated means to a predetermined position is performed, the operation period is lengthened by operating the machine to be operated at a slightly slower speed in order to prevent the machine from passing through the predetermined position. For example, when it is noticed that the operation is requested just before the end of the operable period, there is a problem that the operation may not be in time.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the load changing means is subject to the displacement when the operated means is displaced at the second speed, which is larger than the first speed, as compared with the case where the operated means is displaced at the first speed. Since the load given to the operating means as resistance is large, the operated means is operated with a strong force (large acceleration), and even if the speed of the operated means increases, the operated means is released after the operating force is released. The distance required before it is stopped can be shortened. As a result, it is not necessary to slow down the speed of the operated means to operate the operated means, and the operation period of the operated means can be shortened. Therefore, I noticed that the operation is required just before the end of the operable period. Even in that case, the operation can be made in time.

The load changing means is not particularly limited, and for example, a commercially available product such as a rotary damper that changes the load with respect to the displacement speed of the working part can be arbitrarily selected and used. .. The feature of this gaming machine C1 is that the load changing means is arranged in the gaming machine even if the player is late in noticing that the gaming machine is requested to push and operate the operated means. Therefore, it is possible to immediately operate the operated means to the target position.

In the gaming machine C1, the mode of input of the operated means is changed between at least the first input and the second input depending on the displacement amount, and the load change in the range where the first input is performed. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that changes in the load given by the means are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the input mode is changed between the first input and the second input depending on the displacement amount of the operated means, and in the range where the first input is performed. Since the change in the load given by the load changing means is suppressed, it is possible to cope with the case where the function of the load changing means becomes an obstacle depending on the mode of input.

For example, the operated means is configured by performing a button pressing operation including a continuous striking operation at the first input and a pedal pressing operation for detecting the displacement amount at the second input, and the button is the first input. If the displacement resistance of the operated means increases by vigorously pressing the button, the returning of the operated means may be delayed by vigorously pressing the button, which may interfere with the repeated striking operation (operated). You can only press after waiting for the means to return to the original position, which may make it difficult to hit repeatedly).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the displacement resistance of the operated means is suppressed from being increased by the load changing means in the range where the first input is performed, the operated means at the time of performing the button pressing operation. It is possible to prevent the return of the operated means from being delayed due to the displacement speed of the above, and it is possible to easily perform the continuous striking operation.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the load changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that can be displaced by a load transmitted from the operated means, and the operated means is a portion that is arranged to face the elastic spring member. The load is not transmitted between the first portion that is in contact with the elastic spring member and the load can be transmitted between the elastic spring member and the elastic spring member that is different from the first portion. The gaming machine C3 comprises, and is characterized in that the second portion is arranged at least between a pair of the first portions.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the load changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that can be displaced by the load transmitted from the operated means, and the operated means is elastic. Between the first part, which is arranged to face the spring member and is in contact with the elastic spring member so that the load can be transmitted, and the part different from the first part, which is different from the elastic spring member. The load is non-transmitted in the second portion, and at least the second portion is arranged between the pair of first portions, so that the second portion passes through the portion facing the operated means. The load applied to the operated means can be adjusted according to the length of the above.

That is, the period during which the operated means passes while the second portion between the pair of first portions is arranged to face the elastic spring member is shorter than the period until the displacement given to the elastic spring member is completely returned. For example, the displacement given to the elastic spring member due to the contact movement of the first portion after passing through the second portion is applied to the remaining displacement of the elastic spring member, so that the elastic spring member has returned completely. The load applied to the operated means is larger than that in the case of displacing the elastic spring member.

On the other hand, the period during which the operated means passes while the second portion between the pair of first portions is arranged to face the elastic spring member is longer than the period until the displacement given to the elastic spring member is completely returned. If it is long, the displacement given to the elastic spring member by the contact movement of the first portion after passing through the second portion becomes the displacement from the natural length, so that the load applied to the operated means becomes small. Thereby, the load applied to the operated means by the elastic spring member can be adjusted by the magnitude of the speed at which the operated means moves while arranging the second portion facing the elastic spring member.

In the gaming machine C3, a plurality of the first portions are arranged and the second portion is arranged between the first portions, and the length of the first portion along the moving direction of the operated means is the said. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, when the means to be operated moves from the initial position, the portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member later is longer than the portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member first.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, a plurality of first parts are arranged and a second part is arranged between the first parts, and the moving direction of the operated means of the first part is arranged. When the means to be operated moves from the initial position, the length along the line is longer in the portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member later than in the portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member first. It is possible to secure a wide range in which the first portion of 1 gives an elastic load to the operated means at a position far from the initial position where the deviation of the operated means from the target position tends to be large due to the excessive movement of the means. If the operating force is released after moving the operated means too much, it can be easily returned to the target position with an elastic load, and the part near the initial position where the speed is unlikely to become excessive and the elasticity. It is possible to prevent the player from being easily tired due to an excessive load due to the contact with the spring member.

In the game machine C3 or C4, when the first portion abuts on the elastic spring member and moves while the operated means moves away from the initial position, the elastic spring moves to the operated means. When the elastic load of the member is transmitted, while the first portion moves in contact with the elastic spring member while the operated means moves toward the initial position, the operated means is operated. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that an elastic load due to the elastic spring member is not transmitted to the means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, whether or not an elastic load is transmitted from the elastic spring member to the operated means changes depending on the direction in which the operated means moves. The degree of deceleration when the operated means moves with the first portion in contact with the elastic spring member can be changed depending on the moving direction.

That is, when the operated means moves in a direction away from the initial position, it is possible to suppress the increase in the moving speed by giving an elastically increasing load as a resistance, while the operated means is initially used. When moving toward the position, the resistance is suppressed and the movement speed can be suppressed from slowing down.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the load applied from the load changing means to the operated means becomes excessive, the blocking means for blocking the transmission of the load from the load changing means to the operated means. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the load given to the operated means by the load changing means becomes excessive, the load from the load changing means to the operated means is applied. Since the blocking means for blocking the transmission of the slingshot is provided, the upper limit of the load given to the player via the operated means can be set. As a result, the load applied to the player by the operated means becomes excessive, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the operation load of the player.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the fixed wall attached to the operated means along the moving path of the operated means and the fixed wall that is close to and separated from the fixed wall and can be moved and the operated means. The auxiliary operating member is provided with the auxiliary operating member, and the auxiliary operating member is arranged at a position away from the fixed wall when the operated means is operated at the first speed, and is arranged at a position away from the fixed wall. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that when the operating means is operated at the second speed, the operating means is moved close to the fixed wall so as to be able to come into contact with the fixed wall.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a fixed wall is provided along the movement path of the operated means, and an auxiliary operating member arranged in the operated means is a fixed wall. Since it is configured to change whether or not to abut with the operation means depending on the magnitude of the displacement speed of the operated means, the friction caused by the movement of the operated means while the auxiliary operating member and the fixed wall are in contact with each other. The load applied to the player via the operated means can be changed by the amount of the force.

When the operated means is moved at the first speed, the auxiliary operating member and the fixed wall do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the operated means is moved at the first speed, it is possible to prevent a slight increase or decrease in the load.

As the movement mode of the auxiliary operating member, the method of directly moving in the direction close to the fixed wall by the inertial force (centrifugal force) at the time of movement of the operated means, or the movement of the operated means by the inertial force (centrifugal force). An embodiment in which another member that moves relative to each other along the direction is provided, the fixing mechanism is released by the movement of the other member, and the member moves in a direction close to the fixed wall is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the input means can be moved in a direction intersecting the input direction of the operated means and the vibrating means for vibrating the operated means, and the operated means can be moved to the operated means. The changing means includes an operation unit that is arranged and can be operated by the player, and the changing means transmits the operation driving means that generates the driving force for moving the operation unit and the driving force of the operation driving means to the operation unit. When the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is far, the input means is provided with a transmission means for the operation unit and the input means is provided with a transmission means. C8 is a gaming machine C8 comprising a switching means for increasing the vibration transmission efficiency of the vibrating means to the operated means.

Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibrating means, it is better to bring the vibrating means closer to the part operated by the player, which is the vibration given to the player when the player operates. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation site is located at the position where the impact during operation is the largest, if the vibrating means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during operation. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a feeling of vibration and to secure a long service life of the vibrating means at the same time.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to secure the distance between the vibrating means and the operation unit, and prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance is long.

In addition, the operation target is enlarged by separating the operation unit from the operated means, and the operation of the input means by the player is facilitated, while the vibration feeling is reduced by the player's fingers moving away from the vibrating means. As a result, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to secure (level) the vibration given to the player who touches the input means.

As a result, the operation unit is separated from the operated means and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation (so-called “super hot” situation) that makes us feel that the degree of expectation is high in appearance. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the extremely weak feeling.

The degree of expectation includes the degree of expectation of reach development and the degree of expectation of big hit occurrence. Here, the reach development expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of developing to reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of jackpot occurrence.

The vibration sensation includes a sensation that the player who touches the member receives through the member, and a sensation that the player receives the vibration by another sensation (for example, visual sense) without touching the member (for example, the member's sensation). The feeling of vibrating by seeing an afterimage in the vicinity) is included.

The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, and the operation driving means is arranged on the side where the speed of the operated means is low. Game machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, when a violent operation such as hitting the operated means is performed, the impact given to the operation driving means is applied while maintaining the intensity of the operation. It can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as an operation mode in which the operation speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported by an axis and rotates in the circumferential direction of a circle about the axis, or the axis is not supported. In addition, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the operating unit is separated from the operated means by the driving force of the operating driving means, and the switching means changes means to the extent that the operated means and the operating unit can be connected. The means for changing the degree thereof generates an urging force for moving the operating portion in a direction close to the operated means, and the urging force is the distance between the operated means and the operating portion. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that it rises as the length increases.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the operating unit can be maintained on the side close to the operated means by generating a urging force in which the degree changing means varies, and the operated means can be operated. Adjust the buffering action of vibration transmission between the machine and the operating unit (keep the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating unit are placed close to each other, and reduce the buffering action when placed at a distance. )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

The mode of the degree changing means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be formed from an elastic spring made of metal, or it may be formed from an air spring.

In any of the gaming machines C8 to C10, the switching means approaches the vibrating means in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means as the operating unit moves away from the operated means, and at least the said. The displacement means includes a second transmission means that can come into contact with the vibrating means when the operating unit is most distant from the operated means, and the displacement means attaches the operating unit to the operated means. The gaming machine C11 is provided with a connecting means for operably connecting along a direction intersecting with the moving direction of the machine.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C8 to C10, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means. Since the vibration along the line is transmitted to the operation unit, it is possible to easily give the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means to the player who touches the operation unit.

For example, when the operation mode of the operated means during operation is a rotational operation about a predetermined axis, the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, the vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is generated. Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because it is not related to the moment), it is possible to secure a large vibration transmitted to the player even when the operating portion is separated from the operated means.

It is possible to change the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit. As a result, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed, so that various vibration effects can be performed. Can be achieved.

In addition, for example, by accommodating the operation driving means, the transmitting means, and the second transmitting means in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the driving force transmission path changes due to the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance increases. It can be prevented from doing so.

In any of the gaming machines C8 to C11, the transmission means includes a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation drive means. Game machine C12.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C8 to C11, the operation driving means is overloaded due to the player operating the operation unit by an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent problems such as failure of the slingshot. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the operation of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines C8 to C12, the operated means is rotatably supported along the input direction, and the operated portion is separated from the rotating axis of the operated means. A gaming machine C13 characterized by moving away from the means.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C8 to C12, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is due to the movement of the operating portion by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit can be changed according to the movement amount of the operation unit.

Further, when the operation unit is the farthest from the operated means, that is, when the operation target becomes the largest (the operable range becomes the largest and the operation becomes easier), the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation. As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the load changing means includes a urging means that generates an urging force along the operation direction of the operated means, and the urging means moves the operated means. A first state that is configured to be deformable and maintains the same amount of movement of the operated means from a predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the urging means, and a deformation amount of the urging means from the predetermined state. The gaming machine C14 is characterized in that it can be switched to a second state in which the movement amount of the operated means is less than the movement amount of the operated means.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves by a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state. Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control to change the elastic modulus of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed according to the operation timing.

The mode of change of the load with respect to the amount of deformation is not limited at all. For example, it may be a linear change mode (elastic spring or the like) or a non-linear deformation mode.

In the gaming machine C14, the load changing means is arranged on the opposite side of the operating side portion arranged in the urging means and in contact with the operated means and the operating side portion of the urging means, and the gaming machine main body. During the input operation, at least one of the contact position between the main body side portion supported by the pachinko and pachislot machine and the contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is described. A gaming machine C15 comprising: a position changing means capable of changing to a side where the urging force of the urging means is weakened.

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C14, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operating length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the urging means during the input operation. , The rate of change in the load given to the player as a reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

In the gaming machine C15, the position changing means has a first state in which the state is fixed in close proximity to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the urging means, and a first state in which the state is released from the fixed state. The control means includes a moving means capable of switching between two states by movement, a moving driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a control means for controlling the driving mode of the moving driving means. The gaming machine C16 is characterized in that the moving means is maintained in the first state for a time required to complete the operation when the operated means is operated at least at the second speed.

According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C15, when the operated means is operated at the second speed, the contact position between the operated means and the operated side portion, and the gaming machine main body and the main body side. It is possible to have the possibility of completing the operation without changing both the support position and the portion. In this case, it is possible to secure the load given to the player as a reaction force of the urging means.

In the gaming machine C16, the position changing means can change at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion in a plurality of steps. The control means moves the moving means in a manner in which the contact position and the support position cannot be changed in a plurality of stages while the position changing means is maintained in the second state. Characteristic gaming machine C17.

According to the gaming machine C17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C16, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is changed in a plurality of stages. Since it is prevented that a change in a plurality of stages occurs while the moving means is maintained in the second state, the hand and the operated means can be operated as compared with the case where the operated means is operated at the second speed. When operated at the first speed, the amount of change in the load given to the player can be increased.

In the gaming machine C17, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion changes at a predetermined stage, whereby the attachment is made. The gaming machine C18, characterized in that the urging force generated from the force means toward the operated means disappears.

According to the gaming machine C18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C17, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is at a predetermined stage. When the change occurs, of the reaction forces given to the player who operates the operated means, the reaction force generated by the urging means disappears, so that the player can easily notice the change in the reaction force.

In any of the gaming machines C16 to C18, a change in at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operated side portion or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is the operation to be performed. A gaming machine C19, characterized in that it is generated by performing an operation of a means.

According to the gaming machine C19, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C16 to C18, the change in the urging force (degree of change) of the urging means occurs when the player operates the operated means (). That is, since the state of the urging means is not changed in advance), it is necessary to prevent the urging force of the urging means from being noticed from the state (for example, appearance) of the operated means before the operation. It is possible to promote the operation of the operated means.

Further, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, it is easy to make the urging force (that is, the reaction force given to the player) different depending on the operation mode. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines C15 to C19, the notification means for notifying the player for a predetermined period for prompting the player to operate the input means is provided, and the load changing means is provided in the first period before the end of the notification by the notifying means. A gaming machine C20 characterized by operating.

According to the gaming machine C20, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C15 to C19, by keeping the period for increasing the load on the operation to the minimum necessary, the feeling of fatigue given to the player by the operation of the input means can be felt. Can be reduced. As a result, the stress given to the player when operating the input means can be reduced, and the possibility (or probability) that the player operates the input means to participate in the game can be increased.

<An example of the technical idea that the load on the player is small when the rotation speed of the tilting device is high>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies a load as a movement resistance to the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the operated means, and changes the load. The operated means is provided with a load changing means, and when the operated means is displaced at a first speed and a second speed larger than the first speed, the operated means is subjected to the displacement at the first speed. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that, when displaced at the second speed, the load given to the operated means by the load changing means is smaller than the load given by the load changing means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for the player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There are gaming machines that are controlled (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-024322). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when it is required to move and maintain the operated means to the middle of the moving range and to push it all at once to the end, it is possible to apply resistance suitable for both of them. There was a problem that it was difficult.

That is, when the operated means is moved and maintained halfway in the moving range, the larger the moving resistance of the operated means, the easier it is to adjust the force of the player who gives a load to the operated means. When the operation of pushing to the end at once is performed, the smaller the movement resistance is, the more comfortable the operation can be performed, so that there is a problem that contradictory performance is required.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a load changing means for applying a load as a moving resistance to the operated means and changing the load is provided, and the moving speed of the operated means is set to the first speed. Then, when the operated means moves at a second speed larger than the first speed, the load given by the load changing means is smaller, so that when the operated means is displaced at the first speed, the operated means is displaced. The position of the operated means can be easily maintained, and when the operated means is displaced at the second speed, the operated means can be easily pushed in at once.

In the gaming machine D1, the load changing means includes a braking assisting member that moves in a direction close to the operated means by an urging force, and the braking assisting member comes into contact with the operated means to become the operated means. It is configured such that the contact position between the braking assisting member and the operated means moves away from the initial position of the braking assisting member so that a load as a movement resistance is applied and the operated means moves away from the initial position. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the braking assisting member that gives a load as a movement resistance to the operated means by coming into contact with the operated means is directed so that the operated means moves away from the initial position. As the brake assisting member moves, the contact position between the braking assisting member and the operated means is configured to move away from the initial position of the braking assisting member. Further, by moving the operated means at a speed at which the operated means is moved, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the load as the movement resistance from the braking assisting member to the operated means.

In the gaming machine D2, the operated means is configured to rotate about a predetermined rotation axis, the braking assisting member is brought into contact with a side wall portion along a movement path of the operated means, and the side wall portion is initially set. Compared to the first contact point that first contacts the braking assisting member when the operated means moves from the position, the second contact point that subsequently contacts the braking assisting member is the first contact point. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is arranged inside a circle centered on the predetermined rotation axis passing through a contact point.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, a point at which the braking assisting member can be contacted after the first contact point passes through the first contact point and is a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis. Since it is arranged inside, the arm of the moment generated by the load applied from the braking assist member to the operated means can be shortened as the operated means moves from the initial position, and the rotational resistance of the operated means can be reduced. Can be reduced.

The gaming machine D1 includes a fixed wall provided along the movement path of the operated means, and the load changing means includes an inertial member elastically supported by the operated means and the inertial member thereof. When the inertial member is relatively stopped with respect to the operating means, it is in contact with the fixed wall, while when the inertial member moves relative to the operated means, it is separated from the fixed wall. A gaming machine D4 comprising an auxiliary operating member to be provided.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the load changing means has an inertial member elastically supported by the operated means and a fixed wall according to the movement of the inertial member with respect to the operated means. The auxiliary operating member is the same as the operated means because the auxiliary operating member is provided with an auxiliary operating member that abuts or separates from the fixed wall when the inertial member moves relative to the operated means. Easy to move at high speed While it is easy to apply a load as a moving resistance when moving at a low speed, it is possible to reduce the load as a moving resistance at high speed where the auxiliary operating member is easy to be placed on the operated means. can.

In the game machine D4, the operated means is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis, and the inertial member moves along a rotation locus at an end of the operated means on the opposite side of the rotation axis. A game machine D5 characterized by being supported.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, when the operated means is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and the operated means is moved at high speed, the operated means is among the operated means. An inertial member is placed at the end on the opposite side of the rotation axis where the movement distance is the largest, and the inertial member is supported so that it can move along a path along the rotation trajectory where the movement distance can be most effectively utilized. It can be effectively used to facilitate the relative movement of the inertial member with respect to the operated means.

In the game machine D4 or D5, a magnetic material is disposed in a part of the fixed wall, and the auxiliary operating member contains a magnetic material having a polarity opposite to that of the magnetic material disposed on the fixed wall, and the said. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it can be attracted by magnetic force when the auxiliary operating member and the fixed wall come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4 or D5, a magnetic material is disposed on a part of the fixed wall, and when the auxiliary operating member and the fixed wall come into contact with each other, they can be attracted by magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to change the arrangement of the auxiliary operating member when the operated means is moved at the same speed between the portion where the attraction due to the magnetic force is generated and the portion where the attraction due to the magnetic force is not generated. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the operated means in the portion where the adsorption due to the magnetic force occurs.

In any of the game machines D1 to D6, the input means is movable in a direction intersecting the vibration means for vibrating the operated means and the input direction of the operated means, and the operated means is used. The changing means includes an operation unit that is arranged and can be operated by the player, and the changing means transmits the operation driving means that generates the driving force for moving the operation unit and the driving force of the operation driving means to the operation unit. When the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is longer than when the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is short. D7 is a gaming machine D7 comprising a switching means for increasing the vibration transmission efficiency of the vibrating means to the operated means.

Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibrating means, it is better to bring the vibrating means closer to the part operated by the player, which is the vibration given to the player when the player operates. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation site is located at the position where the impact during operation is the largest, if the vibrating means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during operation. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a feeling of vibration and to secure a long service life of the vibrating means at the same time.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to secure the distance between the vibrating means and the operation unit, and prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance is long.

In addition, the operation target is enlarged by separating the operation unit from the operated means, and the operation of the input means by the player is facilitated, while the vibration feeling is reduced by the player's fingers moving away from the vibrating means. As a result, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to secure (level) the vibration given to the player who touches the input means.

As a result, the operation unit is separated from the operated means and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation (so-called “super hot” situation) that makes us feel that the degree of expectation is high in appearance. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the extremely weak feeling.

The degree of expectation includes the degree of expectation of reach development and the degree of expectation of big hit occurrence. Here, the reach development expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of developing to reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of jackpot occurrence.

The vibration sensation includes a sensation that the player who touches the member receives through the member, and a sensation that the player receives the vibration by another sensation (for example, visual sense) without touching the member (for example, the member's sensation). The feeling of vibrating by seeing an afterimage in the vicinity) is included.

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, and the operation driving means is arranged on the side where the speed of the operated means is low. Game machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, when a violent operation such as hitting the operated means is performed, the impact given to the operation driving means is applied while maintaining the intensity of the operation. It can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as an operation mode in which the operation speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported by an axis and rotates in the circumferential direction of a circle about the axis, or the axis is not supported. In addition, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D7 or D8, the operating unit is separated from the operated means by the driving force of the operating driving means, and the switching means changes means to the extent that the operated means and the operating unit can be connected. The means for changing the degree thereof generates an urging force for moving the operating portion in a direction close to the operated means, and the urging force is the distance between the operated means and the operating portion. D9 is a gaming machine characterized in that it rises as the length increases.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7 or D8, the operating unit can be maintained on the side close to the operated means by generating a urging force in which the degree changing means varies, and the operated means can be operated. Adjust the buffering action of vibration transmission between the machine and the operating unit (keep the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating unit are placed close to each other, and reduce the buffering action when placed at a distance. )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

The mode of the degree changing means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be formed from an elastic spring made of metal, or it may be formed from an air spring.

In any of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the switching means approaches the vibrating means in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means as the operating unit moves away from the operated means, and at least the said. The displacement means includes a second transmission means that can come into contact with the vibrating means when the operating unit is most distant from the operated means, and the displacement means attaches the operating unit to the operated means. D10 is a gaming machine D10 comprising a connecting means for operably connecting along a direction intersecting with a moving direction of the machine.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means. Since the vibration along the line is transmitted to the operation unit, it is possible to easily give the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means to the player who touches the operation unit.

For example, when the operation mode of the operated means during operation is a rotational operation about a predetermined axis, the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, the vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is generated. Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because it is not related to the moment), it is possible to secure a large vibration transmitted to the player even when the operating portion is separated from the operated means.

It is possible to change the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit. As a result, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed, so that various vibration effects can be performed. Can be achieved.

In addition, for example, by accommodating the operation driving means, the transmitting means, and the second transmitting means in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the driving force transmission path changes due to the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance increases. It can be prevented from doing so.

In any of the gaming machines D7 to D10, the transmission means includes a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation drive means. Game machine D11.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D7 to D10, the operation driving means is overloaded due to the player operating the operation unit by an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent problems such as failure of the slingshot. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the operation of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines D7 to D11, the operated means is rotatably supported along the input direction, and the operated portion is separated from the rotating axis of the operated means. A gaming machine D12 characterized by moving away from the means.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D7 to D11, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is due to the movement of the operating unit by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit can be changed according to the movement amount of the operation unit.

Further, when the operation unit is the farthest from the operated means, that is, when the operation target becomes the largest (the operable range becomes the largest and the operation becomes easier), the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation. As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the load changing means includes a urging means that generates an urging force along the operation direction of the operated means, and the urging means moves the operated means. A first state, which is configured to be deformable and maintains the same amount of movement of the operated means from a predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the urging means, and a deformation amount of the urging means from the predetermined state. The gaming machine D13 is characterized in that it can be switched to a second state in which the movement amount of the operated means is less than the movement amount of the operated means.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves by a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state. Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control to change the elastic modulus of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed according to the operation timing.

The mode of change of the load with respect to the amount of deformation is not limited at all. For example, it may be a linear change mode (elastic spring or the like) or a non-linear deformation mode.

In the gaming machine D13, the load changing means is arranged on the opposite side of the operation side portion arranged in the urging means and in contact with the operated means and the operation side portion of the urging means, and the gaming machine main body. During the input operation, at least one of the contact position between the main body side portion supported by the pachinko and pachislot machine and the contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is described. The gaming machine D14 comprising: a position changing means capable of changing to a side where the urging force of the urging means is weakened.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D13, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operating length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the urging means during the input operation. , The rate of change in the load given to the player as a reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

In the gaming machine D14, the position changing means has a first state in which the state is fixed in close proximity to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the urging means, and a first state in which the state is released from the fixed state. The moving means includes a moving means capable of switching between two states by movement, a moving driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a control means for controlling the driving mode of the moving driving means. The second invariant range includes a first invariant range and a second invariant range as a range in which the load applied to the player is maintained even if the position is displaced from the operated means in the second state, and each of these invariant ranges is the operated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in order from the movement base end side along the movement direction of the means, and the length of the second invariant range is longer than the length of the first invariant range. D15.

According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D14, the second invariant range arranged on the moving tip side is longer than the first invariant range arranged on the moving base end side. As the operating speed of the operated means increases, the invariant range in which the moving means is supported moves to the moving tip side of the operated means (the support position of the moving means moves to the moving tip side of the operated means). Therefore, the load given to the player can be reduced in the case of operating at the second speed as compared with the case of operating at the first speed.

It should be noted that the support of either end of the urging means may be released. When releasing the support point on the pedal side, it is essential to move along the peripheral surface (not in a mode of being pushed by the operation tip surface).

When the moving direction of the pedal and the moving direction of the moving means are orthogonal to each other, it is possible to suppress the reaction force applied to the player during the operation from changing to the driving timing of the moving means.

In the gaming machine D14 or D15, the control means puts the moving means into the first state and the second state in a time shorter than the time required for the operated means to move completely in the moving range at the second speed. The gaming machine D16 characterized by being controlled in a switching mode.

According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D14 or D15, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operated means from being completed while the moving means is maintained in the first state. This makes it possible to prevent the load applied to the player when operating at the second speed from becoming larger than the load applied to the player when operating at the first speed.

Control can be performed to change the support position by the position changing means by driving the moving driving means based on the control means. Therefore, the load applied to the player via the urging means can be changed by control.

In the gaming machine D16, the position changing means can change at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion in a plurality of steps. The control means moves the moving means in a manner in which the contact position and the support position cannot be changed in a plurality of stages while the position changing means is maintained in the second state. The featured gaming machine D17.

According to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D16, depending on the number of times the moving means is maintained in the second state, the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion, or the gaming machine main body. It is possible to specify the maximum number of times that at least one of the support positions with the main body side portion changes. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned contact position or support position from changing too much regardless of the speed at which the operated means is operated.

In the gaming machine D17, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion changes at a predetermined stage, whereby the attachment is made. The gaming machine D18, characterized in that the urging force generated from the force means toward the operated means disappears.

According to the gaming machine D18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D18, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is at a predetermined stage. When the change occurs, of the reaction force given to the player who operates the operated means, the reaction force generated by the urging means disappears, so that the player can easily notice the change in the reaction force.

In any of the gaming machines D15 to D18, a change in at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is the operation to be performed. The gaming machine D19, which is generated by executing the operation of the means.

According to the gaming machine D19, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D15 to D18, the change in the urging force (degree of change) of the urging means occurs when the player operates the operated means ( That is, since the state of the urging means is not changed in advance), it is necessary to prevent the urging force of the urging means from being noticed from the state (for example, appearance) of the operated means before the operation. It is possible to promote the operation of the operated means.

Further, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, it is possible to easily change the changing mode of the urging force depending on the operation mode.

In any of the gaming machines D14 to D19, a notification means for notifying the player for a predetermined period for prompting the player to operate the input means is provided, and the notification by the notification means prompts the operation by the first speed. In addition, the gaming machine D20 characterized in that the load changing means functions.

According to the gaming machine D20, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D14 to D19, by operating the input means by preventing the load on the operation from becoming large even at the time of the production in which the operation timing is not specified in detail. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue given to the player. As a result, the stress given to the player when operating the input means can be reduced, and the possibility (or probability) that the player operates the input means to participate in the game can be increased.

<An example of the technical idea that the tilting device is locked at the position where the type of operation changes>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means includes an operated means to be input-operated by the player and a locking means for locking the movement of the operated means. The operated means can change the mode of input between at least the first input and the second input depending on the operation amount, and is locked to the locking means at a locking position where the second input is not performed. The gaming machine E1 characterized by being played.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for a player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input mode is changed according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine to be used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-024322). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to pay attention to the posture of the operated means in order to plan the timing of changing the input mode, or the pushing amount is adjusted by the load given to the player by the operated means. There is a problem that it is difficult to stop the operated means at the timing when the input mode is changed.

Therefore, for example, there is a problem that the continuous striking operation may not be recognized while entering the range of the pushing operation without recognizing the boundary between the continuous striking operation and the pushing operation that changes the pushing amount, and the game may not be comfortable. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the operated means is locked to the locking means at a position where the second input of the operated means is not performed, so that the position where the operated means is second input is performed. It can be reliably stopped before it invades. Therefore, the operation of the operated means can be completed within the first input range, and the comfort of the game can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the moving speed of the operated means becomes excessive as compared with the case where the moving range is moved and partitioned without being locked in the middle. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the operated means.

The mode of the locking means is not particularly limited, and various modes can be adopted. For example, the member that locks the operated means may be displaced close to the operated means by a solenoid or a spring by detecting that the operated means is arranged at the locked position, or the operated means may be displaced. A fixed magnet that attracts the means while being arranged at a predetermined position may be provided and locked by the adsorption. Further, when the operated means rotates, it may be locked in relation to the shape of the shaft rod that pivotally supports the operated means and the shape of the shaft hole that supports the shaft rod.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with an urging means for generating an urging force for moving the operated means toward an initial position, and the locked means to be operated by the locking means is locked up to the locked position. The gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is released by the operation of the second stage started after moving the means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the unlocking of the operated means by the locking means moves the operated means to the locking position against the urging force of the urging means. Since it is released by the operation of the second stage which is started after that, it is possible to suppress the operation after the locked position vigorously. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation of moving the operated means from the state in which the operated means is arranged at the initial position to the end of the movement at once.

The second stage operation started after moving the operated means to the locked position is, for example, when the operated means is pushed in, it is pushed in the same direction again at the locked position. Examples include an operation, an operation of being pushed in a direction different from the direction of being pushed up to the locking position, an operation of arranging a trigger member in a manner imitating a trigger on the operated means, and pulling the trigger member. To.

In the gaming machine E2, the operating direction of the operation in the second stage is different from the operating direction of the operation performed from the state where the operated means is arranged at the initial position. ..

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the operation direction of the operation in the second stage is different from the operation direction of the operation performed from the state where the operated means is arranged at the initial position. Therefore, for example, when a continuous striking operation is requested in a state where the operated means is arranged between the initial position and the locked position, the operated means is mistakenly arranged in the locked position. Even if the operation of pressing the operating means is performed, the locked state of the operated means is not released, so that the continuous striking operation can be continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from unexpectedly erroneously operating the operated means.

In the game machine E2, the operated means is configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the operated means is a first axis which is a rotation center in a state where the operated means is arranged at an initial position, and a first axis thereof. It is possible to move between a second axis different from the one axis, and the rotation axis can be started to move while the operated means is arranged at the locking position. When the operated means rotates about the first axis, the contact locking member which comes into contact with the operated means in the circumferential direction is provided, and when the operated means rotates around the second axis, the said The gaming machine E4 characterized in that the contact between the operated means and the contact locking member is released.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, whether or not the operated means comes into contact with the abutting locking member of the abutting means is determined by the operated means rotating about the first rotation axis. Since it changes depending on whether it rotates about the second rotation axis, it is possible to lock the operated means and release the lock without adding another movable member. This makes it possible to reduce the number of members.

When it is possible to start the movement of the rotating shaft while the operated means is arranged at the locked position, the shape of the rotating shaft of the operated means is not a perfect circle shape and is incomplete with a notch. When the shaft hole is composed of a circle and the shaft hole through which the rotating shaft is inserted is not a perfect circle but is composed of a shape having a convex portion, the notch and the convex are formed with the operated means arranged at the locking position. An example is a case where the rotating shaft and the shaft hole are formed in a shape in which the portions are brought into contact with each other and the rotating shaft can move from the first position to the second position along the shaft hole in that posture. ..

The relationship between the shape of the rotating shaft and the shaft hole is not limited, and the rotating shaft and the shaft hole may be composed of a cylindrical rotating shaft and a long hole-shaped shaft hole, and both the rotating shaft and the shaft hole have irregularities. It may be configured in a deformed shape having.

In the gaming machine E4, the urging force generated by the urging means has a direction of returning the rotation of the operated means to the initial position side and a direction of returning the rotation axis of the operated means to the first axis side. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being hung in both directions.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, the urging force generated by the urging means returns the rotation of the operated means to the initial position side and the rotation axis of the operated means is the first axis. Since it can be applied in both directions of returning to the side, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of urging means arranged as the moving direction of the operated means increases.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the rotation operation of the operated means from the initial position is a pushing operation performed from the front to the back with the player playing the operated means as a reference, and the first axis is , The gaming machine E6 characterized in that it is arranged on the front side of the second axis.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4 or E5, the rotation operation from the initial position of the operated means is pushed from the front to the back with the player playing the operated means as a reference. It is an operation, and since the first axis is arranged on the front side of the second axis, the player can call the operated means when the rotation axis of the operated means is moved from the first axis to the second axis. The angle between the direction of the load and the direction of the load applied by the player when the operated means is rotated is reduced, and the rotation axis of the operated means is smoothly moved from the operation of rotating the operated means. You can move on to the operation.

<Minimum configuration is the top of gaming machines C, and some restrictions are the top of gaming machines A and E>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies a load to the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the operated means in the opposite direction of the input operation, and also applies the load. A load changing means configured to be changeable is provided, and the load changing means is the opposite of the first urging means for transmitting an urging force to the operated means and the operated means for the first urging means. The second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the side, and the first urging means arranged between the first urging means and the second urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. A gaming machine F1 comprising: an urging means and an urging force changing means formed so as to be able to change the urging force generated by the second urging means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for the player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There are gaming machines that are controlled (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-252949). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the urging means for applying the urging force to the operated means is formed by a single coil spring, the player can make a difference in the reaction force from the stage where the operating width of the operated means is small. There was a problem that the sense of presence at the time of operation was insufficient because it could be recognized. That is, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to cause a change in reaction force only when the pushing width becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first urging means for applying the urging force to the operated means by the urging force changing means and the second urging means connected in series with the first urging means. Since the deformation mode can be adjusted, for example, the reaction force can be changed while the operation amount of the operated member is small, while the reaction force can be changed after the operated means is sufficiently operated. .. This makes it possible to increase the sense of presence during operation.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the urging force changing means is provided with a load generating means formed so as to be able to apply a load in a direction along the operating direction of the operated means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, by applying a load to the urging force changing means by the load generating means, the urging force of the first urging means and the second attachment to the arrangement of the operated means. It is possible to change the relationship between the force and the force of the force.

The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the load from the load generating means is formed in such a manner that the load is eliminated when the operating amount of the operated means exceeds a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the load from the load generating means disappears when the operating amount of the operated means exceeds a predetermined amount. It is possible to continuously set the range of the operation amount in which the load is generated from the load generating means and the range of the operation amount in which the load is not generated from the load generating means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the urging force changing means includes an interlocking means that moves with the movement of the operated means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, it is impossible to grasp the change in the load given to the player via the operated means before the operation of the operated means. Can be.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the urging force changing means includes a stretching means that expands and contracts along a direction in which the first urging means and the second urging means are arranged in series. Machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, at least one of the first urging means and the second urging means is preliminarily contracted while the position of the operated means is maintained. By setting it, the reaction force with respect to the arrangement of the operated means can be changed.

The mode of expansion and contraction of the expansion and contraction means is not limited at all. For example, the upper plate and the lower plate may be driven to change the interval, or an arbitrary number of plates may be inserted between the upper plate and the lower plate, and the plate may expand and contract by the thickness of the inserted plates. good.

In the gaming machine F5, the expanding / contracting means is formed so as to be able to expand / contract to one side of the first urging means side or the second urging means side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, the urging force generated with respect to the arrangement of the operated means of the first urging means or the second urging means can be changed independently.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the expanding / contracting means is expanded / contracted by the driving force of a single driving means.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5 or F6, the expansion / contraction means can be expanded / contracted by a single driving means, so that the number of arranged driving means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the urging force changing means includes an intermediate means movably arranged between the first urging means and the second urging means, and the first urging means and the first urging means. 2. The gaming machine F8 comprising: regulating means configured to be able to regulate the movement of the intermediate means in the direction in which the urging means are connected in series.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first urging means and the first urging means and the first urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means depending on whether the movement of the intermediate means is permitted or restricted. 2 The urging force generated by the urging means can be switched.

In the gaming machine F8, the regulating means includes a plurality of contacting means formed so as to be able to come into contact with the intermediate means.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, the movement of the intermediate means can be regulated by a plurality of contact means. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the movement of the intermediate means at a plurality of positions while using a single regulating means.

In the gaming machine F9, the plurality of contacting means are formed by making the lengths of the facing arrangement surfaces facing the intermediate means different in the moving direction of the intermediate means.

According to the gaming machine F10, since the lengths of the intermediate means of the facing arrangement surfaces of the plurality of contact means are formed differently in the moving direction, each contact means is made to correspond to various operation modes of the intermediate means. Can be done.

The gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The featured gaming machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (notification means)
201 MPU (control means)
300-17300 Operation device (input means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310, 5310, 6310, 7310, 8310, 9310, 12310, 13310, 14310 Tilt device (operated means)
332 Acting claw part (acting part)
332b Lower end surface (contact part)
332d Front arc part (part of the first contact section)
332e Rear arc part (part of the second contact section)
343 Torsion spring (urging means, first elastic spring member)
362 Bouncer (part of adjustment means, part of change means)
362a Piston member (part of the second elastic spring member, part of the elastic spring member, operation side)
362b Coil spring (part of second elastic spring member, part of elastic spring member, part of urging means, first urging means)
410 Fastening fixing part (part of connecting means)
420, 15420 1st arm (part of connecting means)
440, 14440 Operation unit 450 Drive motor (operation drive means)
451 1st cam (part of release means)
460 transmission device (transmission means)
464 2nd cam (part of release means)
470 Vibration transmission member (part of switching means, second transmission means)
2326 Switching operation member (moving member)
5372 escape hole (part of blocking means)
5380 Third urging device (part of load changing means)
5383 Torsion spring (part of elastic spring member)
6316 Curved wall part (side wall part)
6380 4th urging device (part of load changing means)
6381 Rotating member (braking auxiliary member)
7318 Slide device (part of locking means)
7319a Acting member (part of auxiliary operating member)
7319c Inertial action member (inertial member)
8319a Acting member (part of auxiliary operating member)
9343 Torsion spring (part of urging means)
9361i Locking rubber member (part of abutment locking member)
9371a Locking plane (part of abutment locking member)
10362, 11362, 16362, 17362 Bouncer (part of load changing means)
10362d Moving end member (main body side, part of interlocking means, part of intermediate means)
10362e, 16362e, 17362e Return spring (second urging means)
10362f Stepped member (moving means, part of position changing means, part of urging force changing means, regulating means)
11362f Stepped member (moving means, part of position changing means, part of urging force changing means, regulating means)
16362g lowering device (part of urging force changing means, part of load generating means)
17362d Moving end member (part of telescopic means, part of intermediate means)
17362g Member deformation device (part of urging force changing means, part of expansion / contraction means)
17362g3 Drive motor (drive means)
M1 drive motor (rotary motor, drive means, part of vibration means)
M1a weight member (part of vibration means)
Ma1 moving magnet (part of the working part)
Ma2 fixed magnet (magnetic load member)
Ma81 fixed magnet (part of fixed wall)
MT1, MT2, MT3 protrusions (part of contact means)
MT1a, MT2a, MT3a Locking surface (part of facing arrangement surface)
MTU, MTB protrusion (part of contact means)
N1 straight line O1 rotation axis SP1 spring (part of switching means, degree changing means)
SOL10, SOL11 drive solenoid (drive means, part of position change means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a means to be operated by a player to perform a pushing operation, and is controlled in such a manner that input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine (Patent Document 1).

2010-252949 Publication No.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the reaction force generated when the operating member is operated. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a good reaction force generated when operating an operating member.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a gaming machine including an input means for a player to perform an input operation, wherein the input means is an operated means to be input-operated by the player and a subject thereof. The operating means is provided with a load changing means that applies a load in the opposite direction of the input operation and is configured to be able to change the load, and the load changing means is a first urging that transmits an urging force to the operated means. Between the means and the second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the opposite side of the operated means with respect to the first urging means, and between the first urging means and the second urging means. The urging force changing means, which is arranged in the above-mentioned and is formed so as to be able to change the urging force generated by the first urging means and the second urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. The means includes telescopic means that expand and contract along the direction in which the first urging means and the second urging means are arranged in series.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the reaction force at the time of operating the operating member can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device. It is a top view exploded perspective view of the operation device. It is a top view exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a bottom view disassembled perspective view of a tilting device. (A) is a front view of the upper cover, (b) is a side view of the upper cover in the arrow XIIb of FIG. 12 (a), and (c) is a top view of the upper cover. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the upper cover in line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 12A, and FIG. 12B is a perspective view of the bottom surface of the upper cover. (A) is a front view of the lower cover, (b) is a side view of the lower cover in the arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), (c) is a top view of the lower cover, and (d). ) Is a cross-sectional view of the lower cover in the XIVd-XIVd line of FIG. 14 (a). (A) to (d) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIVd-XIVd line of FIG. 14 (a). (A) is a top view of the shaft cover, (b) is a front view of the shaft cover, and (c) is a side view of the shaft cover in the arrow XVIc of FIG. 16 (a). It is a top view exploded perspective view of the lower case. It is a bottom view disassembled perspective view of the lower case. (A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a graph which shows the load applied to the tilting device with respect to the tilting angle from the ascending position of the tilting device. It is a top view exploded perspective view of the tilting device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of a tilting device and a lower case. (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of a tilting device and a lower case. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a graph which shows the load applied to the tilting device with respect to the tilting angle from the ascending position of the tilting device. (A) is a front perspective view of the rotary piston member according to the third embodiment, (b) is a partial front perspective view of the lower case, and (c) is a partial front perspective view of the shaft cover. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in 4th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a graph which shows the load applied to the tilting device with respect to the tilting angle from the ascending position of the tilting device. It is a side view of the operation device in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the upper case, and (b) and (c) are sectional views of the upper case and the third urging device in the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) is a side view of the rotary roller, and (b) is a front view of the rotary roller in the arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the line XXXVIb-XXXVIb of FIG. 36 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36. It is a side view of the operation device in 6th Embodiment. (A) and (b) are partial side views of the operating device. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device according to 7th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device in the eighth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the tilting apparatus in the 9th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the tilting device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operation device in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timed change of the drive solenoid in the 1st operation pattern. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of the operating device. It is a figure which showed the change of the arrangement of the moving end member at the end of an operation corresponding to the change of the time required to operate a pedal from an ascending position to a descending position of a tilting device. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the drive solenoid in the 2nd operation pattern. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operation device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a figure which showed the timed change of the drive solenoid in the 3rd operation pattern. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a figure which showed the change of the kind of reaction force given to a player corresponding to the change of the time required to operate a pedal from an ascending position to a descending position of a tilting device. It is a figure which showed the timekeeping change of the drive solenoid in the 4th operation pattern. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 12th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of the operating device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). It is an exploded perspective view of a drive motor and a transmission device. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device according to the thirteenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device according to the fourteenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device in the fifteenth embodiment. (A) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operation device in the 16th embodiment. (A) and FIG. 74 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device. FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of the operating device. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of FIG. 19A of the operation device according to the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 19B is a partial perspective view of a deformed rotating member. It is a developed view of the outer peripheral surface of a deformed rotating member. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 22, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to perform a bullet game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. 1) is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by such as.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first one. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable change jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than the normal time. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probable change or the shortened working hours, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric motor is operated once. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed to increase compared to the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a winning (starting winning) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower three. Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) alternately for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in operation (open) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is not correct. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol hold lamps are provided for the maximum number of hold lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When a ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is arranged below the front view of the first winning opening 64. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by turning on the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second prize opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). The state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is easier to win in the second winning opening 640 than in the normal time during the probability change and the time reduction.

Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of changing the way of hitting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71. The out openings 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a slide position detection sensor S, a sensor group including a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor M1.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 such as the variation effect of the third symbol is produced. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is arranged at the center portion in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 in the front view (that is, the center portion in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tilted by being pushed by a player, and the tilting device 310 is a storage recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. The area composed of is made movable. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the fingers of the hand can easily enter. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by inserting his / her finger into the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310.

Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with his right hand, the swing operation member 310 is often operated with his left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the swing operation member 310 with the left hand.

6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 6 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the VIb-VIb line of FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 7 (a) is shown. Is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 in the line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operating device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in an ascending position (initial position in the present embodiment), and FIG. 7 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in a descending position (pushing end in the present embodiment). The state is illustrated, and an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by the player, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "pushing the pedal") appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). Before the specific display appears, the player stands by with his / her hand placed on the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 6 (b)). At this time, by placing a hand on the upper part of the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, the player can operate the tilting device 310 immediately when a specific display appears while keeping the tilting device 310 in the raised position. So you can easily wait.

From the state shown in FIG. 6B, the tilting device 310 is operated by moving the tilting device 310 from the ascending position to the descending position by tilting the hand around the base of the hand (FIG. 7B). reference). In the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to be able to detect the tilting angle from the ascending position.

The accommodating recess 17a of the upper plate 17 is arranged sufficiently separated from the outer shape of the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the player grips the left and right side surfaces of the tilting device 310, it is possible to easily insert a finger between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a.

As shown in FIG. 7, the player moves (tilts) the tilting device 310 by applying a force in the direction of the arrow F1 that draws a curve along an arc from the state shown in FIG. That is, since the direction of the force for moving the tilting device 310 draws a curved line instead of a straight line, even if the player applies a large linear force to the tilting device 310 at the ascending position (see FIG. 6), the tilting device 310 As it moves, the angle between the direction of the force and the direction of movement of the tilting device 310 (tangential direction of the rotation locus) increases. Therefore, the load applied to the tilting device 310 in the descending position can be reduced (the linear force given by the player can be partially released).

FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 of the operating device 300 is arranged in the ascending position (see FIG. 6). As shown in FIG. 8, the operation device 300 is configured such that the tilting device 310 having a fan-shaped cross section is pivotally supported at the front end and tilted with respect to the pushing operation (see FIGS. 6 and 7).

FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the upper surface of the operating device 300. As shown in FIG. 9, the operation device 300 is a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the front side end portion (the front end portion on the paper in FIG. 9), and the tilting device 310. A lower case 360 that has a concave bearing portion 361a that supports the ring member BR1 from below and forms a push-in end of the tilting device 310, and a lower case 360 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and faces the lower case 360. It has a recessed portion to be arranged, and the tilting member 310 is placed between the tilting member 310 and the lower case 360. The upper case 370 (where the tilting device 310 is abutted against the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame) is mainly provided.

The lower case 360 is a member that supports the tilting device 310 when it is pushed in. Therefore, before and after the operation, the tilting device 310 and the lower case 360 repeatedly abut and separate from each other. If the harness or the like housed inside the lower case 360 is pinched when the tilting device 310 and the lower case 360 come into contact with each other, the wire may be broken and cause a failure.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positioning plate 363e formed in a plate shape is arranged on the front side of the power acting device 363. By arranging the wiring of the harness etc. in the space behind the positioning plate 363e, the harness etc. protrudes between the tilting device 310 and the receiving surface 361e and between the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332, and at the time of operation. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched.

FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the top surface of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom surface of the tilting device 310. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the tilting device 310 is arranged at the uppermost portion and has a role as a decorative portion having the highest degree of attention from the player, and is a portion that is pushed in by the player and has a light-shielding property. On the upper cover 311 formed of a high material, the lower cover 320 formed of a light-transmitting material, which is vertically overlapped with the upper cover 311 and fastened and fixed to the upper cover 311, and the upper cover 311. A shaft cover 330 that is fastened and fixed and sandwiches the lower cover 320 between the upper cover 311 and the working claw portion 332, a pair of shaft members 340 that are internally fitted between the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330, and the upper A curved curved member 350 disposed between the inside of the rear end of the cover 311 and the outside of the rear end of the lower cover 320 and having a comb-shaped comb-shaped portion 352, and the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320. It mainly includes a drive motor M1 sandwiched between them, and a ring-shaped ring member BR1 in which the extended size shaft portion 313c of the upper cover 311 and the extended half shaft portion 331c of the shaft cover 330 are internally fitted.

The shaft members 340 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and have a cylindrical tubular portion 341 that is internally fitted into the recessed portions 313b, 331b and the extended semi-shaft portions 313c, 331c of the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330, and the cylindrical portion 341 thereof. A disk portion 342 formed in a disk shape having a diameter larger than that of the tubular portion 341 in the middle of the tubular portion 341, and the disk portion 342 are locked to move in the axial direction, and the tubular portion 341 is located in the twisted portion. It mainly includes a torsion spring 343 that is arranged in a inserted state.

By arranging a pair of left and right shaft members 340, the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330 can be fastened and fixed by passing a fastening screw near the center of the shaft center. As a result, even if a large load is applied by the player near the center of the shaft center (even if the player makes an erroneous operation), the upper cover 311 and the shaft cover 330 are placed on the shaft center due to the strength of the fastening screw. It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the central portion from being damaged.

The outer diameter of the tubular portion 341 is set as a diameter that defines the allowable reduction limit of the torsion spring 343. By setting this diameter, it is possible to adjust the reaction force generated from the torsion spring 343 during operation. That is, the torsional spring can increase the elastic force by reducing the diameter of the circular portion, but in the range where the torsional spring 343 can be reduced in diameter due to deformation, it reverses as the operating angle of the tilting device 310 increases. While the force can be increased, if the diameter reduction limit is reached during the operation of the tilting device 310, the lower arm 343a or the upper arm 343b will be deformed with respect to the circular portion even if the operating angle of the tilting device 310 is increased. Since it stays, the amount of increase in the reaction force can be significantly reduced.

Therefore, the setting mode of the reaction force of the torsion spring 343 with respect to the operation angle of the tilting device 310 is the mode in which the elastic force increases in a proportional relationship with the change of the tilting angle of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 is tilted halfway. It can be selected from the mode in which the elastic force increases in a proportional relationship with the change in the angle, but the change in the elastic force is suppressed from a predetermined angle. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the reaction force of the torsion spring 343 with respect to the operating angle of the tilting device 310.

The torsion spring 343 includes a lower arm 343a extending downward on the inner side of the tilting member 310 in the axial direction and an upper arm 343b extending upward on the outer side in the axial direction, and the lower arm 343a is inserted into the through hole 331f of the shaft cover 330. The upper arm 343b is locked to the notch 314a of the upper cover 311 and the notch 323a of the lower cover 320.

In the torsion spring 343, the diameter reduction limit is restricted to the outer shape of the tubular portion 341, and the diameter expansion limit is restricted to the inner shape of the accommodating portions 313a and 331a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the torsion spring 343 from being excessively reduced in diameter or expanded in diameter due to deterioration over time, quality of parts, or operation of the tilting device 310 in an unexpected operation mode. be able to. As a result, the torsion spring 343 can be prevented from being suddenly deformed, so that the elastic modulus can be easily maintained for a long period of time (several years).

The size of the diameter of the torsion spring 343 can be arbitrarily set. For example, when the outer diameter of the torsion spring 343 is set to be about the same as the inner peripheral diameter of the accommodating portion 313a, the outer peripheral portion of the torsion spring 343 comes into contact with the accommodating portion 313a in the assembled state.

Therefore, when the player operates in a manner of hitting the vicinity of the upper half of the cylinder 313, the elastic force (force generated when expanding and contracting in the radial direction) of the torsion spring 343 is deformed (crushed downward) of the upper half of the cylinder. It can be used as a resistance against such deformation). As a result, the upper half of the cylinder 313 can be supported from below, so that it is possible to prevent the upper half of the cylinder 313 from being damaged. That is, the torsion spring 343 has both an effect of generating a reaction force for returning the tilting device 310 to the ascending position and an effect of preventing damage to the cylindrical upper half portion 313 of the upper cover 311.

The curved member 350 includes a main body portion 351 having an I-shaped cross section that curves along the shapes of the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 and the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320, and the front end portion of the main body portion 351 (FIG. It mainly includes a comb-shaped portion 352 extending to the right in a shape along the shape of (10 paper surface front side) and a switching extending portion 353 extending in the opposite direction of the comb-shaped portion 352.

The main body portion 351 has a plate-shaped pinched portion 351a extending in the left-right direction from the back end portion (the back side of the paper in FIG. 10), and a portion adjacent to the pinched portion 351a at the lower end portion, which is recessed upward. A fitting recess 351b is provided, and the sandwiched portion 351a is provided between the inside of the rear end portion (curved wall portion 316) of the upper cover 311 and the outside of the rear end portion (curved wall portion 322) of the lower cover 320. Be pinched.

The sandwiched portion 351a is a plate portion that curves along the shape of the curved wall portion 322, and is a portion that is sandwiched between the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 and the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320. ..

The comb-shaped portion 352 includes a convex portion 352a projecting to the right from the main body portion 351 and a concave portion 352b sandwiched between adjacent convex portions 352a and recessed toward the main body portion 351. In the present embodiment, they are arranged at equal intervals (intervals that are switched every time the tilting device 310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° in the assembled state).

The switching extension portion 353 includes a convex portion 353a projecting to the left from the main body portion 351 and a recessed portion 353b adjacent to the lower end portion of the convex portion 353a and recessed toward the main body portion 351. , Equipped with. In the present embodiment, the boundary positions of the convex portion 353a and the concave portion 353b are configured to coincide with the intermediate position (half position) of the convex portion 352a at the lower end of the comb-shaped portion 352.

The drive motors M1 are arranged in pairs on the left and right, and include a fan-shaped weight member M1a that is eccentrically supported by a rotary shaft that is driven to rotate. When the drive motor M1 is rotationally driven, the center of gravity of the weight member M1a moves, and the tilting member 310 can be vibrated by the movement of the center of gravity, which raises the expectation of the player who operates the tilting device 310. can.

Wiring such as a harness that supplies electric power to the drive motor M1 hangs down from the left and right ends of the motor support portion 325 to the lower side of the tilting device 310. After that, it penetrates into the inside of the main body member 363a through the lower surface of the decorative plate 363d via the lower side of the positioning plate 363e (see FIG. 17). The details will be described later.

Next, the upper cover 311 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. 12 (a) is a front view of the upper cover 311, FIG. 12 (b) is a side view of the upper cover 311 in the arrow XIIb of FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 12 (c) is a side view of the upper cover. It is a top view of 311. 13 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the upper cover 311 in the line XIIIa-XIIIa of FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 13 (b) is a bottom perspective view of the upper cover 311.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the upper cover 311 is arranged at a plate-shaped pressing plate portion 312 that inclines upward from the front side to the back side and a front end portion of the pressing plate portion 312. The upper half of the cylinder 313, which has a half-pipe shape whose outer shape extends in the left-right direction, and the upper half of the cylinder 313 in the front side of the pressing plate portion 312 in the vertical direction toward the rear end (FIG. 13). (A) The front side wall portion 314 extending along the (vertical direction) and the rear side wall extending from the pressing plate portion 312 in parallel with the front side wall portion 314 at a predetermined interval behind the front side wall portion 314. A portion 315, a curved wall portion 316 extending downward from the rear end portion of the pressing plate portion 312, and an upper cover 311 extending along the same plane from the lower end portion of the curved wall portion 316. It mainly includes a bottom wall portion 317 forming a bottom surface.

The pressing plate portion 312 is configured so that the central portion in the left-right direction projects upward as compared with the outer portion in the left-right direction, and the opening 312a is provided in the portion opposite to the upper half portion 313 of the cylinder. The opening 312a is a portion where the overhanging portion 321a of the lower cover 320 overhangs, and the effect of light by the LED arranged on the decorative plate 363d (see FIG. 9) can be visually recognized through the lower cover 320.

The upper half of the cylinder 313 is a portion in which the central axis of the cylinder is the same as the rotation axis of the tilting device 310. It has a recessed portion 313b formed as a recessed portion having a semicircular cross section and an inner peripheral surface having substantially the same shape (slightly larger radius) as the recessed portion 313b, and faces outward from the tilting device 310. A fastening hole 313d, which is arranged on the center side of the tilting device 310 from the recessed portion 313b and the extended half-shaft portion 313c extended in the shape of a half pipe, and the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the shaft cover 330 is fixed. And, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the raised position, the overhanging contact portion 313e and the recessed portion 313b that are brought into contact with the overhanging contact portion 361 g (see FIG. 9) of the lower case 360 in the circumferential direction are provided. It mainly includes a flat wall-shaped alignment wall portion 313f formed along a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 on the opposite side of the accommodating portion 313a.

The accommodating portion 313a forms a space in which the torsion spring 343 of the shaft member 340 and the disc portion 342 are accommodated. Since the disk portion 342 is accommodated facing the extended half-axis portion 313c side, the disk portion 342 abuts on the inner wall of the accommodating portion 313a on the extended half-axis portion 313c side in the axial direction (FIG. 16 (a)). ) Left-right direction) misalignment is prevented.

The recessed portion 313b and the extended half shaft portion 313c are portions where the cylindrical portion 341 of the shaft member 340 is internally fitted together with the cylindrical lower half portion 331 of the shaft cover 330 in the assembled state of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 9). Yes, and the extended half-axis portion 313c is internally fitted in the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 11).

The fastening hole 313d is a screw hole into which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the shaft cover 330 is fixed. In the assembled state of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 9), the strength of the fastening screw fixed to the fastening hole 313d can reinforce the upper half of the cylinder 313, so that the player can reinforce the upper half of the cylinder 313 (tilting device). Even if an operation such as hitting the front side portion of the 310 is performed, it is possible to prevent the tilting device 310 from being damaged.

The overhanging contact portion 313e has an effect of producing an effect by being visually recognized together with the decoration of the front end portion of the lower case 360 (see FIG. 9), and the tilting device 310 moves upward and rises. When it reaches the position, it comes into contact with the contact portion 361 g and functions as a detent.

The alignment wall portion 313f is a wall portion on which the end portion of the shaft member 340 opposite to the side on which the disk portion 342 is arranged can be abutted, and the abutment allows the shaft member 340 to abut in the axial direction. Misalignment is prevented.

In the present embodiment, the length from the inner wall of the accommodating portion 313a on the extended half-shaft portion 313c side to the alignment wall portion 313f is a torsion spring 343 in the plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the disk portion 342 of the shaft member 340. Is equal to the length from the surface on the opposite side to the side on which the torsion spring is arranged to the end on the side where the torsion spring of the tubular portion 341 is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft member 340 from moving in the axial direction in the assembled state.

That is, the alignment wall portion 313f can have both an effect as a reinforcing rib for increasing the rigidity of the upper half portion 313 of the cylinder and an effect as a positioning portion for positioning the shaft member 340 in the axial direction.

The front side wall portion 314 is a plate-shaped portion connected to the rear end portion of the upper half portion 313 of the cylinder, and includes notches 314a arranged in pairs in the front-rear direction at both left and right end portions. Since the notch 314a is a notch in which the upper arm 343b (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is locked, the tilting device 310 has an urging force in the rotational (tilting) direction from the torsion spring 343 via the notch 314a. Receive.

The rear side wall portion 315 is a portion that comes into contact with the contact end surface 321b of the lower cover 320 on the surface, and is a plate-shaped reinforcing plate portion that is disposed between the front side wall portion 314 and connected to the front side wall portion 314. 315a is provided.

In the reinforcing plate portion 315a, a plurality of plate-shaped portions are arranged symmetrically, and the plate-shaped portions other than the plate-shaped portions arranged at the center are recessed supports which are recesses on the lower surface for receiving and supporting the drive motor M1. A unit 315b is provided. As a result, a plurality of small frame shapes are formed in the front side wall portion 314, the rear side wall portion 315, and the reinforcing plate portion 315a, so that the strength in the vicinity of the front side wall portion 314 and the rear side wall portion 315 of the pressing plate portion 312 can be improved. Can be done.

The curved wall portion 316 is configured such that the central portion in the left-right direction projects outward from the upper half portion 313 in the left-right direction as compared with the outer portion in the left-right direction (see FIG. 13B), and the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 13B). That is, it is a plate-shaped portion curved vertically and horizontally formed in an arc shape centered on the center of the circle of the upper half of the cylinder), and is curved along the vertical direction on the inner side surface (side surface on the rotation axis side). A curved recess 316a to be recessed is provided. The width of the curved recess 316a is formed to be slightly larger than the width of the sandwiched portion 351a of the curved member 350.

The curved wall portion 316 includes a first peripheral surface 316b and a second peripheral surface 316c having different separation widths from the rotation axis O1 (see FIG. 19B) as the outer peripheral surface thereof.

The first peripheral surface 316b is arranged near the center position in the left-right direction of the tilting device 310, and has the longest separation width from the rotating shaft O1 (in the arc centered on the rotating shaft O1, the tilting device 310 has. It is formed as a peripheral surface (along the arc with the maximum diameter included).

The second peripheral surface 316c is arranged near both ends of the tilting device 310 in the left-right direction, and the width of separation from the rotation axis O1 is shorter than that of the first peripheral surface 316b (an arc centered on the rotation axis O1). Among them, it is formed as a peripheral surface (along an arc having a diameter shorter than the arc having the maximum diameter included in the tilting device 310).

Here, the reaction force applied when the player pushes the tilting device 310 into operation changes depending on how far the operating position of the player is from the rotation axis O1. That is, the farther the position where the pushing operation player touches the tilting device 310 is from the rotation axis O1, the smaller the reaction force applied to the player during the pushing operation (lever principle).

Therefore, compared to the case where the pressing plate portion 312 is touched and pushed in near the first peripheral surface 316b, the case where the pressing plate portion 312 is touched and pushed in near the second peripheral surface 316c is a game during operation. Since the reaction force given to the player can be increased, the player's different wishes can be fulfilled. That is, the player who wants to reduce the reaction force felt at the time of operation is urged to operate the vicinity of the first peripheral surface 316b, and the player who wants to secure a large reaction force felt at the time of operation is near the second peripheral surface 316c. By encouraging the player to operate, the same mechanism can fulfill the wishes of both players with different hopes, so that some of the dissatisfactions caused by the players can be resolved.

The upper cover 311 includes a side wall portion 318 that connects the pressing plate portion 312 and the curved wall portion 316 from the side surface. Since the lower side surface of the side wall portion 318 is formed from the same shape as the upper side surface of the side wall portion 323 of the lower cover 320 and is arranged at a position facing the side wall portion 323 in the vertical direction, the side wall portion 318 is disposed at the time of assembly. The side wall portion 323 of the lower cover 320 can be positioned by abutting the cover in the vertical direction.

Next, the lower cover 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a) is a front view of the lower cover 320, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the lower cover 320 in the arrow XIVb of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. 14 (c) is a lower cover. It is a top view of 320, and FIG. 14 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the lower cover 320 in the XIVd-XIVd line of FIG. 14 (a).

As shown in FIG. 14, the lower cover 320 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a plate-shaped reinforcing plate portion 321 that inclines upward from the front side to the back side, and the rear of the reinforcing plate portion 321. A curved wall portion 322 that curves downward from the end portion and extends downward, and a pair of plate-shaped side wall portions that extend downward from the left-right end portion of the reinforcing plate portion 321 and are connected to the curved wall portion 322. A box connected to 323, a front contact wall portion 324 extending inward in the left-right direction from the front end of the side wall portion 323, and the front contact wall portion 324, and the front side and the upper side are open. It mainly includes a motor support portion 325 formed in a shape.

Since the upper surface of the reinforcing plate portion 321 has a shape (transferred shape) that can be in close contact with the lower surface of the pressing plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) of the upper cover 311, the reinforcing plate portion 321 is fastened to the upper cover 311 in the vertical direction. By being fixed, the strength of the upper cover 311 can be reinforced. This makes it possible to prevent the upper cover 311 from being damaged when the player gives a strong impact to the upper cover 311. Further, the reinforcing plate portion 321 has an overhanging portion 321a that overhangs upward in the central portion in the front-rear direction, an abutting end surface 321b formed on the end surface near the front left and right center position, and inside on both the left and right sides near the front end portion. It mainly includes a recessed portion 321c that is recessed from the wall toward the left and right outwards.

The overhanging portion 321a is a portion that can be visually recognized by the player through the opening 312a (see FIG. 10) of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). The overhanging portion 321a is formed of a light-transmitting resin. Therefore, the light emission of the LED arranged on the upper surface of the decorative plate 363d can be visually recognized by the player through the overhanging portion 321a.

The contact end surface 321b is arranged at a position where the contact end surface 321b abuts on the rear side wall portion 315 of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the lower cover 320 can be reinforced by utilizing the strength of the rear side wall portion 315.

When the drive motor M1 is fitted into the recessed support portion 325b1, the recessed portion 321c is recessed to a position where it does not interfere with the drive motor M1 in the top view (FIG. 14 (c) vertical view on the paper surface). That is, the drive motor M1 can be slid vertically with respect to the lower cover 320 to pass through the recessed portion 321c, and the drive motor M1 can be fitted into the recessed support portion 325b1.

As a result, when the drive motor M1 is fitted into the lower cover 320, the drive motor M! Since it is not necessary to move the motors in the left-right direction, the separation width in the left-right direction of the pair of left-right drive motors M1 can be minimized (the weight members M1a can be brought closer to each other in the left-right direction).

The curved wall portion 322 is formed from an arc shape centered on the same axis as the central axis of the curved shape of the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 (see FIG. 13A), and is formed at each position in the left-right direction. It is composed of a radius slightly smaller than that of the curved wall portion 316. As a result, the lower cover 320 can be accommodated in the upper cover 311 in a state where the curved wall portion 316 and the curved wall portion 322 are in close contact with each other.

Further, the curved wall portion 322 has a notch 322a cut in the vertical direction at the center position in the left-right direction, an enlarged opening 322b in which the notch width is expanded at the upper end portion of the notch 322a, and a lower end portion of the curved wall portion 322. 322c is mainly provided with a retaining portion 322c for closing the notch 322a.

The notch 322a is a gap through which the main body portion 351 of the curved member 350 (see FIG. 10) is inserted, and the dimension of the gap is slightly wider than the thickness of the main body portion 351. Further, the enlarged opening 322b is an opening through which the comb-shaped portion 352 and the switching extension portion 353 of the curved member 350 are inserted, and the width in the left-right direction is the width in the left-right direction of the comb-shaped portion 352 and the switching extension portion 353. It is made larger than the total width of the convex length).

The retaining portion 322c is a portion that prevents the curved member 350 (see FIG. 11) from coming off, and has a thickness slightly smaller than the fitting recess 351b so that it can be fitted with the fitting recess 351b of the curved member 350. Consists of shape.

The side wall portion 323 includes a notch 323a that is notched upward from the lower end on the front end surface. The notch 323a is arranged behind the notch 314a (see FIG. 11) of the upper cover 311 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), and the upper arm 343b (see FIG. 11) of the torsion spring 343 is arranged like the notch 314a. It is inserted and locked.

The side wall portion 323 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the light emission of the LED arranged on the decorative plate 363d can be visually recognized by the player through the side wall portion 323. The side wall portion 323 is emitted through the side wall portion 323 because the size of the range exposed to the upper side of the upper case 370 changes as the pushing angle of the tilting device 310 changes in the external view (see FIG. 8). The amount of light emitted can be changed by the angle of the tilting device 310. That is, the decorative plate 323d is arranged after the tilting device 310 is operated (from the rising position to reaching the descending position) as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position. Among the light emitted from the LEDs, the amount of light visually recognized by the player through the side wall portion 323 can be reduced.

The front cover wall portion 324 is formed in an arrangement in which the front side wall portion 314 (see FIG. 13 (b)) of the upper cover 311 is in contact with the front side wall portion 314 (see FIG. 13 (b)) in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Thereby, the strength of the front side wall portion 314 can be utilized to reinforce the front contact wall portion 324.

The motor support portion 325 is a portion for arranging the drive motor M1 (see FIG. 10), and is a base of the drive motor M1 extending upward from the bottom plate portion 325a forming the bottom surface and the left and right ends of the bottom plate portion 325a. It mainly includes a side wall portion 325b having a recessed support portion 325b1 that supports the end portion from below, and a plate-shaped rear plate portion 325c that connects the bottom plate portion 325a and the side wall portion 325b.

By arranging the drive motor M1 (see FIG. 10) at a position close to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, which is the front end of the lower cover 320, the drive motor M1 becomes the pachinko machine 10 (FIG. 10) when the tilting device 310 operates. The distance traveled relative to the lower case 360 (see FIG. 8) fixed to 1) can be kept short. Therefore, while the drive motor M1 is mounted on the moving tilting device 310, the degree to which the wiring for supplying electricity to the driving motor M1 is deformed by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be reduced. As a result, deterioration of the wiring of the drive motor M1 can be delayed, so that the maintenance period can be lengthened.

The bottom plate portion 325a includes an extension portion 325a1 extending vertically downward from the front end portion and a protruding rib 352a2 protruding downward from a position that divides the length in the left-right direction into four equal parts. Mainly prepare.

The extending portion 325a1 is a plate-shaped portion formed in the left-right direction, and is a front end portion of the acting claw portion 332 in the assembled state of the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 and the shaft cover 330. It engages with the front overhanging portion 332a1, which is a portion overhanging above the upper end of the portion 331a (see FIG. 19B). Therefore, even if a design error occurs so that the bottom plate portion 325 of the lower cover 320 is separated from the front side wall portion 314 of the upper cover 311 (with a gap) while the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 are fastened and fixed. When the working claw portion 332 is fastened and fixed to the upper cover 311, the extending portion 325a1 can be brought closer to the front side wall portion 314 side by engaging the front overhanging portion 332a1 of the working claw portion 332 with the extending portion 325a1. , The generated design error can be absorbed. Therefore, the allowable range of design error between the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 can be increased.

The protruding rib 325a2 is a rib-shaped portion formed in the front-rear direction arranged at an intermediate position of the adjacent acting claw portion 332 in the assembled state, and is a portion for ensuring the rigidity of the bottom plate portion 325a. Since the working claw portion 332 is arranged between the adjacent protruding ribs 325a2 in such a manner that the working claw portion 332 abuts on the bottom plate portion 325a in the assembled state, the working claw portion is arranged in the portion where the protruding rib 325a2 is not arranged. The rigidity of the bottom plate portion 325a can be ensured by substituting the portion 332 for the rib.

The side wall portion 325b faces the reinforcing plate portion 315a arranged on the outermost side of the plurality of reinforcing plate portions 315a (see FIG. 13B) of the upper cover 311 in the vertical direction, and faces the reinforcing plate portion 315a. The drive motor M1 can be sandwiched between the recessed support portion 315b and the recessed support portion 325b1.

The upper end surface of the rear plate portion 325c abuts on the rear side wall portion 315 of the upper cover 311 (see FIG. 13 (b)) in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). As a result, it is possible to secure a large resistance when the motor support portion 325 receives an upward load (from the piston member 362a (see FIG. 20A) described later in which the motor support portion 325 applies an upward load). It is possible to secure a large resistance when receiving it).

Next, a procedure for sandwiching the curved member 350 between the lower cover 320 and the upper cover 311 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (a) to 15 (d) show a portion of the tilting device 310 in the line corresponding to the XIVd-XIVd line of FIG. 14 (a), which illustrates the procedure of covering the lower cover 320 with the upper cover 311 in chronological order. It is a cross-sectional view.

In addition, in FIG. 15A, a state in which the curved member 350 is inserted through the notch 322a of the lower cover 320 is shown, and in FIG. 15B, the upper cover 311 is a curved member from the state of FIG. 15A. The state in which the upper cover 311 is lowered to the position immediately before the contact with the 350 is shown, and in FIG. 15 (c), the state in which the upper cover 311 is lowered by a predetermined amount from the state in FIG. 15 (b) is shown. Then, the state in which the upper cover 311 is lowered from the state of FIG. 15C to the position where the upper cover 311 is fixed with respect to the lower cover 320 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 15, even if the fitting recess 351b of the curved member 350 is not firmly fitted to the retaining portion 322c in the assembly process (see FIG. 15A), the upper cover 311 is covered from that state. By lowering the curved member 350, the posture of the curved member 350 is changed in such a manner that the sandwiched portion 351a of the curved member 350 follows the shape of the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320 and the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311 (FIG. 15 (b). ) And FIG. 15 (c)), by fully lowering the upper cover 311, it is possible to form a state in which the fitting recess 351b of the curved member 350 is fitted in the retaining portion 322c (see FIG. 15 (d)). .. As a result, the work of fixing the curved member 350 between the upper cover 311 and the lower cover 320 can be easily performed, and the work time can be shortened.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 15 (d), the main body portion 351 of the curved member 350 is configured such that the width direction is along the thickness direction of the curved wall portion 316 of the upper cover 311. Even when the cover is thin, it can be prevented from being deformed in the thickness direction by the rigidity of the curved member 350. By contacting the upper end of the curved member 350 with the upper end surface of the curved recess 316a of the curved wall portion 316, the curved member 350 is prevented from moving in the vertical direction, and the curved member 350 is below the upper cover 311. It is fixed between the cover 320 and the cover 320.

When the upper cover 311 is further lowered from the state shown in FIG. 15 (d) (when it is partially destroyed by an excessive load, etc.), the curved member 350 is further pushed in, and the retaining portion of the lower cover 320 is removed. The curved member 350 may slide down by folding the 322c, but in the present embodiment, the reinforcing plate portion 321 of the lower cover 320 and the pressing plate portion 312 of the upper cover 311 come into contact with each other on the surface, so that the lower cover 320 is in contact with the lower cover 320. Since the strength for maintaining the position of the upper cover 311 is improved, it is possible to prevent the retaining portion 322c from breaking.

The shaft cover 330 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (a) is a top view of the shaft cover 330, FIG. 16 (b) is a front view of the shaft cover 330, and FIG. 16 (c) is a shaft cover in the arrow XVIc of FIG. 16 (a). It is a side view of 330.

As shown in FIG. 16, the shaft cover 330 extends rearward from the lower cylinder portion 331 having the same shape as the upper cylinder portion 313 (see FIG. 13 (b)) and the lower cylinder portion 331 thereof. It mainly comprises a plurality of working claw portions 332.

The lower half of the cylinder 331 is a portion in which the central axis of the cylinder is the same as the rotation axis of the tilting device 310, and the accommodating portion 331a accommodating the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and the accommodating portion 331a below the cylinder. It has a recessed portion 331b formed as a recessed portion having a semicircular cross section toward the center side in the left-right direction of the half portion 331, and an inner peripheral surface having substantially the same shape (slightly larger radius) as the recessed portion 331b. The extended half-shaft portion 331c extending in the shape of a half pipe toward the outside of the lower half portion 331 of the cylinder, and the fastening screw are arranged on the center side of the lower half portion 331 of the cylinder rather than the recessed portion 331b. The insertion hole 331d to be inserted, the overhanging contact portion 331e that comes into contact with the overhanging abutting portion 361g of the lower case 360 in the circumferential direction when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position, and the accommodating portion 331a. A plane wall-like alignment formed along a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 on the opposite side of the accommodating portion 331a with the recessed portion 331b sandwiched between the through hole 331f formed through the recessed portion 331b side. Mainly provided with a wall portion of 331 g. The accommodating portion 331a, the recessed portion 331b, the extended half shaft portion 331c, the insertion hole 331d, and the overhanging contact portion 331e have the same configuration as the cylindrical upper half portion 313 (see FIG. 13B) having the same name. Since it is the part of, the description is omitted.

The accommodating portion 331a forms a space in which the torsion spring 343 of the shaft member 340 and the disc portion 342 are accommodated. Since the disk portion 342 is accommodated facing the extended half-axis portion 331c side, the disk portion 342 abuts on the inner wall of the accommodating portion 331a on the extended half-axis portion 331c side in the axial direction (FIG. 16 (a). ) Left-right direction) misalignment is prevented.

On the other hand, the end portion of the shaft member 340 on the side opposite to the side on which the disk portion 342 is arranged is in contact with the alignment wall portion 331g to prevent axial misalignment.

In the present embodiment, the length from the inner wall of the accommodating portion 331a on the extended half-shaft portion 331c side to the alignment wall portion 331g is the torsion spring 343 in the plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the disk portion 342 of the shaft member 340. Is equal to the length from the surface on the opposite side to the side on which the torsion spring is arranged to the end on the side where the torsion spring of the tubular portion 341 is arranged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the shaft member 340 from moving in the axial direction in the assembled state.

That is, the alignment wall portion 331g can have both an effect as a reinforcing rib for increasing the rigidity of the lower half portion 331 of the cylinder and an effect as a positioning portion for positioning the shaft member 340 in the axial direction.

The through hole 331f is a hole through which the lower arm 343a (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is inserted, and is formed over about 45 ° around the central axis of the circumference of the lower half of the cylinder 331. Therefore, the torsional spring 343 can be twisted and deformed by displacing the lower arm 343b of the torsional spring 343 inserted through the through hole 331f on the outside of the shaft cover 330.

The action claw portion 332 is a plate-shaped portion in which a plurality (four in the present embodiment) are continuously provided in the left-right direction, and has an upper end surface 332a having a planar shape and a lower end surface 332b having an arc shape. Mainly prepare.

The upper end surface 332a is in contact with the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 325a (see FIG. 11) of the lower cover 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). As a result, the resistance to bending deformation of the bottom plate portion 325a of the lower cover 320 can be improved.

The lower end surface 332b is a side surface that comes into contact with the piston member 362a of the lower case 360, and the switching point 332c, which is the lowest point in the state shown in FIG. 16 (c), is the posture (upper) shown in FIG. 16 (c). When the end surface 332a comes into contact with the piston member 362a in a horizontal posture), it is arranged on the central axis of the piston member 362a of the lower case 360 (see FIG. 20B). Further, the lower end surface 332b includes a front arc portion 332d arranged on the front side of the switching point 332c and a rear arc portion 332e arranged on the rear side of the switching point 332c, and the front arc portion 332d thereof. The shape is such that the rear arc portion 332e forms an arc having the same radius.

It should be noted that a plurality of (four in this embodiment) working claw portions 332 are continuously provided, and each of them is in contact with the piston member 362a (see FIG. 17) of the lower case 360, so that the piston is tilted when the tilting device 310 is tilted. Since the load given from the urging device 362 (see FIG. 17) can be doubled (four times in this embodiment) based on the urging force loaded from one member 362a, the operating amount of the tilting device 310 can be increased. Even when it is small, the amount of change in the load given by the urging device 362 can be increased.

Further, even if one of the plurality of acting claws 332 is broken due to the impact when operated by the player, the remaining acting claws 332 receive a load from the piston member 362a. As a result, the game can be continued as usual. Therefore, the maintenance period of the tilting device 310 can be set long.

Next, the lower case 360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the upper surface of the lower case 360, and FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the bottom surface of the lower case 360. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the lower case 360 has a bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with an open upper portion and a bottom receiving member 361 that is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361. An urging device 362 having a piston member 362a configured to be movable in the thickness direction (vertical direction), and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged. , Mainly prepared.

The bottom support member 361 has a concave bearing portion 361a recessed in a semicircular shape with an upper portion open at both left and right ends of the front end portion, and a left-right direction in the rear and lower directions of the central axis of the recessed bearing portion 361a. A strip-shaped convex portion 361b that is extended in a strip shape and is projected upward, and a tubular receiver that is vertically extended in the vertical direction and has a bottom bore behind the strip-shaped convex portion 361b. A notch 361d formed along the front-rear direction in a lid plate acting as a lid for blocking the movement of the piston member 362a at the upper end of the portion 361c and the cylindrical receiving portion 361c, and a recessed bearing portion 361a. A receiving surface 361e formed as an outer U-shaped flat surface that inclines diagonally downward from the rear, a base portion 361f on which the power acting device 363 is placed, and a tilting device at an ascending position (see FIG. 8) of the tilting device 310. It mainly includes an overhanging abutting portion 361g that abuts on the overhanging abutting portion 313e of the 310 in the circumferential direction, and a rubber plate GR1 placed near the rear end portion of the receiving surface 361e.

The recessed bearing portion 361a is a recessed portion that sandwiches and supports the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 9) of the tilting device 310 together with the upper case 370, and is configured in a semicircular shape having a radius slightly larger than that of the ring member BR1. The radius.

The band-shaped convex portion 361b is a protrusion to which the lower arm 343a (see FIG. 10) of the torsion spring 343 is locked. As a result, when the tilting device 310 is operated from the ascending position to the descending position, the torsion spring 343 is wound and the urging force for moving the tilting device 310 toward the ascending position is increased.

The tubular receiving portion 361c is a tubular portion into which the piston member 362a of the urging device 362 is internally fitted, and is extended in the vertical direction and has a plurality of rows (4 in the present embodiment) on the left and right. Will be set up.

The cut portion 361d is formed with a width (slightly larger than the width of the acting claw portion 332) that can accept the acting claw portion 332 (see FIG. 10) of the tilting device 310, and the central portion thereof is the urging device 362. The piston member 362a is recessed with an outer shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the hemispherical portion. Therefore, the notch portion 361d can align (suppress the misalignment) of both the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332. As a result, when the pushing amount of the tilting device 310 becomes large, the piston member 362a of the urging device 362 and the acting claw portion 332 of the tilting device 310 are displaced in the left-right direction (the axial direction of the tilting device 310). It can be suppressed.

The receiving surface 361e is a portion that is arranged to face the bottom wall portion 317 (see FIG. 10) when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the descending position. In normal times, even if an impact occurs when the tilting device 310 is placed in the descending position (even if it is moved to the descending position at high speed), the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the rubber plate GR1. As a result, the impact is absorbed, so that damage to the tilting device 310 is suppressed (in this case, a gap is provided between the receiving surface 361e and the bottom wall portion 317). On the other hand, when the rubber plate GR1 is worn, even if sufficient shock absorption is not performed, the receiving surface 361e comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310 on the surface, so that the tilting device 310 is in the lowered position. It is possible to reduce the impact (pressure) that the tilting device receives when it reaches.

The base portion 361f mainly includes a rectangular opening 361f1 and a wall-shaped positioning wall portion 361f2 projecting upward from three sides excluding the front side among the four sides that partition the upper surface.

Through the opening 361f1, an electric wiring for supplying electric power to the electric power acting device 363 is inserted. In the assembled state, no opening is formed in the bottom receiving member 361 other than the opening 361f1 (the tubular receiving portion 361c, which is the main opening, is closed by the bottom lid member 362c).

Therefore, for example, even if the player accidentally pours the beverage into the operation device 300, the beverage can be temporarily stored in the portion (peripheral portion) other than the base portion 361f, so that the beverage is immediately lowered. It is possible to prevent the drink from dripping.

The positioning wall portion 361f2 is formed in an arrangement along the outer shape of the bottom surface of the main body member 363a in the assembled state. Therefore, when the main body member 363a is assembled to the base portion 361f, positioning can be performed by pressing the main body member 363a against the positioning wall portion 361f2, so that the difficulty of assembly can be reduced.

The base portion 361f is formed as a base portion that rises upward from the bottom plate of the bottom receiving member 361. Further, in the assembled state, it is a portion covered from above by the tilting device 310. Therefore, even if the player accidentally pours the beverage into the operation device 300, the beverage travels along the upper surface of the tilting device 310 and penetrates into the (peripheral) bottom receiving member 361 except for the base portion 361f. It is possible to prevent it from falling directly on the upper surface of the base portion 361f. In this case, it is possible to prevent the beverage from being applied to the upper surface of the base portion 361f before the beverage is stored by the height of the raised portion of the base portion 361f. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the beverage enters the inside through the opening 361f1 and enters the inside of the pachinko machine 10 through the wiring such as the harness.

Further, in the assembled state, the positioning wall portion 361f2 and the three sides of the bottom surface of the main body member 363a are in close contact with each other, and the upper surface of the base portion 361f and the bottom surface of the main body member 363a are in close contact with each other. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the beverage will infiltrate between the upper surface of the base portion 361f and the lower surface of the power acting device 363.

In the present embodiment, the wiring such as a harness connecting the pachinko machine 10 and the operation device 300 is configured in such a manner that it cannot communicate with the operation device 300 unless it passes through the opening 361f1. Therefore, when a wire or the like is inserted into the pachinko machine 10 or the like through a gap of the operation device 300, it is necessary to intrude a bent path in the same manner as the above-mentioned beverage path, which may increase the difficulty of fraudulent activity. Since it can be done, it is possible to easily prevent fraud.

The urging device 362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 10) through the acting claw portion 332, and the inside of the tubular receiving portion 361c is operably supported in the vertical direction and opened downward. A bottomed cylindrical piston member 362a, a coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a tubular receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 in a manner of covering the side opening, is mainly provided.

The piston member 362a has an upper tip portion having a hemispherical shape and an upper half portion having an outer shape that allows passage through the notch portion 361d, while the lower half portion has an outer shape larger than the notch portion 361d. The passage of the piston member 362a is prevented. Further, in the lower half portion, a rib having a semicircular cross section that is projected in the eight directions from the central axis and is extended in the vertical direction is formed, so that the piston member 362a is supported by the cylindrical receiving portion 361c. By reducing the contact area between the piston member 362a and the tubular receiving portion 361c, the frictional force applied to the piston member 362a from the tubular receiving portion 361c can be reduced while maintaining the action of maintaining the posture. ..

In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b is housed in the tubular receiving portion 361c in a state of being pre-contracted from the natural length in the assembled state (see FIG. 8). Therefore, when no load is applied from the acting claw portion 322, the piston member 362a is arranged at the ascending end position (the position where the movement of the piston member 362a is dammed by the notch portion 361d) by the urging force of the coil spring 362b.

The power acting device 363 is a cup-shaped main body member 363a which is mounted on the base portion 361f of the bottom receiving member 361 and whose upper end surface is inclined upward from the front to the back, and the main body member 363a thereof. The right side sensor fixing plate 363b, which is an electronic board that is inserted into a notch formed in the rear wall from the upper end to the bottom and is fastened and fixed to a plate portion extending rearward of the main body member 363a, and its right side sensor. On the left side sensor fixing plate 363c, which is an electronic board to be fastened and fixed to the plate portion extending to the rear of the main body member 363a in the same manner as the right side sensor fixing plate 363b on the opposite side of the fixing plate 363b, and the main body member 363a. It mainly includes a decorative plate 363d, which is an electronic substrate fixed to an end surface by a surface and an LED or other lighting device is arranged, and a positioning plate 363e formed in a plate shape on the front side of the power acting device 363. ..

The main body member 363a includes an opening 363a1 opened in the bottom plate, an upper ceiling portion 363a2 which is an upper surface portion of the front and rear wall surfaces, a lower ceiling portion 363a3 which is an upper surface portion of the left and right wall surfaces, and downward from the upper end of the rear wall surface. A pair of recessed portions 363a4 recessed in a groove shape, and a plane along the inner wall of the pair of recessed portions 363a4 on the side closer to the other recessed portion 363a4 and orthogonal to the rotation axis O1. A pair of plate-shaped fixing plates 363a5 extending in parallel to the back side, an alignment protrusion 363a6 projecting directly from the lower ceiling portion 363a3 at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction of the lower ceiling portion 363a3, and a main body member 363a. It mainly includes a wiring guide portion 363a7 formed from a cup shape in which the front and the upper side are opened on the left and right outer sides.

The opening 363a1 is a portion serving as a passage hole through which electrical wiring such as a harness is inserted from below the base portion 361f. By connecting the electrical wiring to the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c and the decorative plate 363d, it is possible to supply electric power to the LEDs arranged on the sensors S1 to S3 and the decorative plate 363d.

The lower ceiling portion 363a3 is formed slightly (about 1 mm) lower than the upper ceiling portion 363a2 (a step is formed between the upper ceiling portion 363a2 and the lower ceiling portion 363a3). Since the decorative plate 363d is fastened and fixed to the main body member 363a in an arrangement in which the decorative plate 363d is in contact with the upper ceiling portion 363a2 in the assembled state, a slight gap can be formed between the decorative plate 363d and the lower ceiling portion 363a3. This gap can be used as a passage for electrical wiring such as a harness or as a passage for air for suppressing heat generation of the decorative plate 363d.

The recessed portion 363a4 is formed with a width that allows the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c to be inserted in the assembled state, and the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c do not protrude from the upper ceiling portion 363a2 (with the decorative plate 363d). It is formed to a depth of about (not in contact).

The fixing plate 363a5 is a plate member that comes into contact with the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c inserted in the recessed portion 363a4 and is fastened and fixed to the sensor fixing plates 363b and 363c.

The alignment protrusion 363a6 is a protrusion that is inserted into the alignment hole 363d1 of the decorative plate 363d and aligns the decorative plate 363d with respect to the main body member 363a.

The wiring guide portion 363a7 is a support portion that prevents wiring such as a harness from hanging down. Wiring such as a harness connected to the drive motor M1 extends from the lower side of the positioning plate 363e in the left-right direction, passes through the inside of the wiring guide portion 363a7, and goes to the main body member 363a or the decorative plate 363d.

For example, when heading to the main body member 363a, the decorative plate 363d passes through the gap between the decorative plate 363d and the lower ceiling portion 363a3 and is inserted into the main body member 363a. It is electrically connected to the ceiling by soldering or connecting a connector.

On the right side sensor fixing plate 363b, a photocoupler type first sensor S1 and a second sensor S2 are vertically arranged at the rear end portion. On the left side sensor fixing plate 363c, a photocoupler type third sensor S3 is arranged at a position facing the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2. Each of the sensors S1 to S3 is arranged outside the main body member 363a in the assembled state.

The first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 are sensors that detect the direction and position of the tilting device 310 by detecting the passage of the convex portion 352a (see FIG. 10) of the curved member 350, and the third sensor S3 is , A sensor that detects the operating state of the tilting device 310 (pushing or continuous striking operation or pedal operation for detecting the pushing amount) by detecting the passage of the convex portion 353a (see FIG. 10) of the curved member 350. In the following, an operation such as a continuous striking operation in which there is no difference in detection depending on the pushing amount is referred to as a "push operation", and an operation for detecting the pushing amount is referred to as a "pedal operation". In particular, the push operation includes a case where the tilting device 310 returns before reaching the piston member 362a, and the pedal operation includes a case where the tilting device 310 tilts while pushing the piston member 362a.

Further, the photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that emits light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light emitting unit, and has a gap (slit) into which a detection portion can be inserted. It means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The right side sensor fixing plate 363b includes a connector receiving portion 363b1 into which a connector such as a harness is inserted into the front end portion. Electricity is sent from the connector receiving portion 363b1 to each sensor S1 and S2 via the right side sensor fixing plate 363b. The connector receiving portion 363b1 is housed inside the main body member 363a in the assembled state. As a result, the harness or the like can be inserted into the connector receiving portion 363b1 without extending the harness or the like to the outside of the main body member 363a.

The left side sensor fixing plate 363c includes a connector receiving portion 363c1 into which a connector such as a harness is inserted into the front side end portion. Electricity is sent from the connector receiving portion 363c1 to the third sensor S3 via the left side sensor fixing plate 363c. The connector receiving portion 363c1 is housed inside the main body member 363a in the assembled state. As a result, the harness or the like can be inserted into the connector receiving portion 363c1 without extending the harness or the like to the outside of the main body member 363a.

The decorative plate 363d includes a pair of alignment holes 363d1, which are through holes through which the alignment protrusions 363a6 are inserted.

The positioning plate 363e is a plate-shaped portion formed in a manner of bending and hanging from the front side wall of the main body member 363a toward the front side. By gathering the wiring of the harness etc. in the space behind the positioning plate 363e, the harness etc. protrudes between the piston member 362a arranged on the opposite side via the positioning plate 363e and the working claw portion 332, and the operation is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being pinched at times. This will be described in detail below.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 19), the drive motor M1 is arranged directly above the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332. Therefore, if the wiring of the harness or the like connected to the drive motor M1 is hung directly below, the gap between the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332 when the wiring of the harness or the like bends during the tilting operation of the tilting device 310. May invade.

On the other hand, if the wiring of the harness or the like is passed through the lower side of the positioning plate 363e to the left or right and then crawls toward the main body, the wiring of the harness or the like bends during the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 (the length of the wiring). The center position of the wire, the portion that hangs under the influence of gravity) can be arranged on the rear side of the positioning plate 363e. In this case, even if the wiring of the harness or the like is bent and deformed, the deformed portion is stopped by the positioning plate 363e, so that the deformed portion can be prevented from entering the gap between the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 332. can.

This makes it possible to simplify the work of assembling the wiring such as the harness. That is, since the moving range of the wiring such as the harness can be regulated by the positioning plate 363e, the number of fixing members such as the binding band for fixing the wiring such as the harness to the lower case 360 can be minimized, and the assembly can be performed. It is possible to prevent the work from becoming complicated.

Further, when wiring such as a harness is hung vertically downward from the main body side of the drive motor M1, the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion 322 are arranged so as to avoid a position where there is a possibility of interference when the wiring is bent. However, in the present embodiment, since the movement range of the wiring such as the harness can be restricted by the positioning plate 363e, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the working claw portion 322 can be improved (at the left and right ends). The action claw portion 322 can be arranged).

The lower side surface of the positioning plate 363e inclines as it approaches the left and right ends in the vicinity of the left and right ends. That is, the vicinity of the center position on the left and right is extended downward, and the extension length is short near the positions on both ends of the left and right. As a result, the volume of the material required for the positioning plate 363e can be reduced, so that the material cost can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring of the harness or the like is set so as to shift the vicinity of the left and right end positions from the center position of the wiring of the harness or the like. Even if it is not regulated, it is possible to prevent wiring such as a harness from entering the gap between the piston member 362a and the working claw portion 332. Therefore, by chamfering the positioning plate 363e near the left and right end positions as in the present embodiment, the wiring such as the harness is combined with the piston member 362a and the acting claw portion while suppressing an excessive load on the wiring. It is also possible to secure the effect of preventing the intrusion into the gap between the 332s.

Next, the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21. 19 (a) is a front view of the operating device 300, and FIG. 19 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). Note that FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b) show a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position. Further, the XIXb-XIXb line is shown as a line passing through the center of a predetermined piston member 362a of the lower case 360.

As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the lower arm 343a of the torsion spring 343 abuts on the strip-shaped convex portion 361b of the lower case 360 in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the raised position. And locked. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward (tilting operation) from the ascending position, the torsion spring 343 is wound, and the urging force of the torsion spring 343 increases in proportion to the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310. do.

In the relationship between the curved member 350 and the sensors S1 to S3, in the raised position, the recessed portions 352b and 353b (see FIG. 10) of the curved member 350 are arranged in the region between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion. In all the sensors S1 to S3, the light emitted from the light projecting unit reaches the light receiving unit. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is tilted, the curved member 350 is configured so that any of the sensors S1 to S3 is shielded from light, so that all the sensors S1 to S3 are irradiated from the light projecting unit. When it is detected that the light reaches the light receiving portion, it can be detected that the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, the tilting operation (rotational operation) of the tilting device 310 will be described. 20 (a), 20 (b), 21 (a) and 21 (b) are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 in the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a).

20 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 3 °) from the state shown in FIG. 19 (b), and FIG. 20 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 3 °). A state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 7 °, about 10 ° from the ascending position) from the state shown in a) is shown, and is shown in FIG. 20 (b) in FIG. 21 (a). A state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 10 °, about 20 ° from the ascending position) is shown in FIG. 21 (b), and in FIG. 21 (b), the tilting device 310 is tilted from the state shown in FIG. 21 (a). The state in which the 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle (about 4 °, about 24 ° from the ascending position) and is arranged in the descending position is shown in the figure. Further, for ease of understanding, the action claw portion 322 and the piston member 362a are partially enlarged and illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position, the lower end surface of the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the piston member 362a. Therefore, the load felt by the player through the tilting device 310 is the sum of the urging force of the torsion spring 343 and the urging force of the coil spring 362b.

In the present embodiment, since the coil spring 362b is arranged on the tubular receiving portion 361c in a state of being contracted by a predetermined amount from the natural length, the load applied from the coil spring 362b to the acting claw portion 332 is applied from the start of contact. Since it is large, the rate of change in the load felt by the player increases sharply (see FIG. 22).

Therefore, the player can feel that the state of the operating device 300 has changed at the position where the load applied via the tilting device 310 changes abruptly. In the present embodiment, the state between FIGS. 19 (b) and 20 (a) is the push operation state, and the state between FIGS. 20 (a) and 21 (b) is the state for pedal operation. Is configured as.

That is, the push operation (pushing operation or repeated striking operation) can be performed with the target point up to the position where the load suddenly rises in the state shown in FIG. 20 (a), and further resists the sudden rise in the load. You can operate the pedal by pushing it in. Therefore, by a single operation of tilting the tilting device 310, separate operations of push operation and pedal operation can be performed, and each operation method can be switched using the load given to the player from the tilting device 310 as a mark. Therefore, it is possible to switch each operation method intuitively (using the feeling of pressing) instead of visually changing the operation method while looking at the scale.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is pulled from the rotation shaft O1 and is rearward from the straight line N1 passing through the contact point between the action claw portion 332 and the piston member 362a (FIG. 20 (a). ) It is composed of an upward slope toward the right).

Therefore, for example, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the lower end surface 332b of the working claw portion 332 is formed along the straight line N1, so that the tilting device can be reduced. When the pushing amount of the 310 is large (see FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b)), it is possible to prevent the amount of displacement of the torsion spring 343 from becoming excessively large.

Here, as the direction from FIG. 20A to FIG. 21B, the contact point of the acting claw portion 332 with respect to the piston member 362a moves away from the rotation axis O1. Therefore, for example, the lower end surface 332b of the acting claw portion 332 is a straight line N1. When formed along the above, the displacement of the contact point in the vertical direction when the tilting device 310 is tilted by a predetermined angle increases, and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b increases. The load to be applied increases.

In this case, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in with a large displacement speed, the closer to the pushing end, the sharper the change in the load applied to the working claw portion 332 from the piston member 362a, and the acting claw portion 332 becomes larger. There is a risk of damage.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower end surface 332b of the acting claw portion 332 is inclined upward toward the rear (inclined in the direction away from the piston member 362a), so that the displacement speed of the tilting device 310 is large. Even when the pushing operation is performed, the speed at which the coil spring 362b is displaced can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the amount of change in the load applied from the piston member 362a to the acting claw portion 322 to suddenly increase.

Further, since the lower end surface 332b of the acting claw portion 332 is formed of an arc shape and the tip of the piston member 362a is formed of a hemispherical shape, the contact mode can be maintained as a point contact, and the acting claw portion 332 and the piston member 362a can be maintained. The frictional force generated between the and the can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent a load that causes the piston member 362a to tilt sideways (tilt in the front-rear direction) when the acting claw portion 332 tilts.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the acting claw portion 332 is inserted into the notch portion 361d of the lower case 360 in a state where the tilting device 310 is tilted by 20 ° from the ascending position. Therefore, the tip of the piston member 362a is hemispherical, the working claw portion 332 is formed with a width thinner than the diameter of the piston member 362a, and the acting claw portion 332 is formed in the left-right direction (direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 21A). Even if it is easily displaced with respect to the piston member 362a, it can be suppressed by stopping the movement of the working claw portion 332 in the left-right direction at the notch portion 361d. As a result, the urging force generated according to the displacement of the coil spring 362b can be reliably applied to the acting claw portion 332 via the piston member 362.

In addition, the separation width of the notch portion 361d is made smaller than that of the present embodiment, or a cushioning member is arranged on the side surface of the notch portion 361d, and the action claw portion 332 is sandwiched between the notch portions 361d to apply a frictional force. You may do so. In this case, since the load received by the player when the acting claw portion 332 enters the notch portion 361d can be abruptly changed, the acting claw portion 332 and the piston member 362a shown in FIG. 20A are in contact with each other. It can be formed as a position that serves as a mark next to the position where contact starts (a plurality of load boundary positions can be provided).

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the descending position, the bottom wall portion 317 of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the rubber plate GR1 to absorb the impact at the time of stopping and at the same time. , Can give a profound feeling.

Here, a method of detecting the posture, the operating direction, and the operating speed of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the sensors S1 to S3 (see FIG. 17), when the convex portions 352a and 353a of the curved member 350 are not interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensors S1 to S3 (not shielded from light). Is turned on, and is turned off when the convex portions 352a and 353a of the curved member 350 are interposed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sensors S1 to S3 (light-shielded).

As described above, since the sensors S1 to S3 are turned on while the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position, the counter is corrected (zero) when each sensor S1 to S3 is turned on. It is controlled by the mode.

During the tilting device 310 from the ascending position to 3 °, the second sensor S2 is turned off, the third sensor S3 remains on, and the first sensor S1 is switched on and off. In the present embodiment, the state in which the third sensor S3 is on is controlled as a push operation section. Therefore, while the third sensor S3 remains on, the pushing operation and the continuous striking operation are detected by detecting the number of times and the speed at which the first sensor S1 switches between on and off.

When the tilting device 310 is tilted at an angle larger than 3 ° from the ascending position, the third sensor S3 is turned off. In the present embodiment, the state in which the third sensor S3 is off is controlled as a pedal operation section. After the third sensor S3 is turned off, the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is detected according to the switching time of the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2, and the first sensor S1 and the second sensor S2 The operating direction (in which direction) of the tilting device 310 is detected by the rising timing of the pulse signal, and further, the distance and the operating direction calculated from those operating speeds are counted to detect the tilting device 310. The current posture is detected. This makes it possible to relate the degree of tilting of the tilting device 310 to the staging.

With reference to FIG. 22, the load felt by the player when the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 8) is tilted will be described. FIG. 22 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 310 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 from the ascending position. In the graph shown in FIG. 22, the tilt angle is shown on the horizontal axis in a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the ascending position (with FIG. 19B as the left end and increasing to the right from there), and the vertical axis shows the tilting angle. Shows the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 22, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 20A) until the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. (See FIG. 10), the spring constant rises at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant.

When the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position, an urging force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b is applied to the tilting device 310 via the piston member 362a (see FIG. 20A). ..

Since the coil spring 362b is arranged in a state of being contracted from its natural length in advance in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), the load felt by the player is applied at the position where the tilting device 310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. It changes rapidly (the rate of change in load changes). In the present embodiment, the control is switched between the push operation and the pedal operation at this position as a boundary, so that the player can use the operation method as a mark with a sudden change in load (a sudden change in the rate of change in load). Switching can be done easily.

As described above, when the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 is formed along the straight line N1 (see FIG. 20A), the displacement of the piston member 362a increases as the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 increases. The ratio (displacement amount of the piston member 362a with respect to the tilt angle of the tilt device 310) becomes large.

Therefore, the amount of increase added to the urging force of the torsion spring 343 of the load applied to the tilting device 310 increases along a predetermined quadratic function as the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 increases. As shown, the rate of change of the load with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 increases toward the side where the load applied to the tilting device 310 increases (on the right side of the graph in FIG. 22). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is tilted at a high speed, the load (impact) applied from the piston member 362a to the acting claw portion 332 increases as the tilting angle increases from the ascending position, and the durability of the acting claw portion 332 increases. There is a risk of diminished sex.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower end surface 332b of the action claw portion 332 has an arc shape that ascends and inclines toward the rear (see FIG. 20B), so that the displacement of the piston member 362a can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress the increase in load in the manner shown in the correction curve T1. As a result, the load (impact) applied to the acting claw portion 332 can be suppressed. The durability of the action claw portion 332 can be improved.

Further, since a plurality of working claws 332 (4 in this embodiment) are arranged (see FIG. 10), the load felt by the player via the tilting device 310 is kept large, and each of the acting claws 332 is arranged. The given load can be suppressed. Thereby, both the purpose of changing the operation feeling of the player and the purpose of improving the durability of the acting claw portion 332 can be achieved.

In the present embodiment, the drive motor M1 that vibrates the tilting device 310 is arranged directly above the urging device 362 with the tilting device 310 arranged in the lowered position (see FIG. 21 (b)). As a result, the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1 can be weakened by the buffering action of the coil spring 362b before being transmitted to the bottom receiving member 361.

Therefore, the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the front frame of the pachinko machine 10 from vibrating. Therefore, even if the player touches the front frame, it is not possible to grasp the internal state of the operating device 300 (whether or not the drive motor M1 is operating), so that the operating device 300 is operated before the tilting device 310 is operated. It is possible to prevent the motivation for operation from diminishing by knowing the internal state of.

In the present embodiment, the rotation shaft O1 of the tilting device 310 is arranged on the front side. Therefore, when it is desired to increase the vibration effect of the tilting device 310 due to the vibration generated by the operation of the drive motor M1, it is desirable to arrange the drive motor M1 in the vicinity of the rotating shaft O1. As a result, the drive sound can be easily heard by the player, and the player can easily notice the operation of the drive motor M1.

On the other hand, since the vicinity of the rotating shaft O1 is also a position where the amount of operation of the tilting device 310 is small, there is little space and it is difficult to arrange wiring such as a harness well. In particular, care must be taken when there is a member such as a harness that may pinch the wiring.

That is, when the drive motor M1 is arranged near the rotation shaft O1 of the tilting device 310, there is a problem that it is difficult to arrange the drive motor M1 so as not to pinch the wiring such as a harness. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, wiring such as a harness is once arranged in such a manner that the back surface side of the positioning plate 363e is passed (passed) to the left and right. As a result, the portion where the amount of bending of the wiring such as the harness is the largest due to the operation of the tilting device 310 and the contact portion between the piston member 362e and the acting claw portion 332 which may sandwich the wiring such as the harness are positioned. It can be partitioned by a plate 363e. As a result, it is possible to physically prevent the wiring of the harness or the like from being sandwiched between the piston member 362e and the acting claw portion 332.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 28. In the first embodiment, the case where the load felt by the player is increased by operating the tilting device 310 with the pedal has been described, but the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment is predetermined when the tilting device 2310 is operated with the pedal. A case will be described in which the outer shapes of the acting claw portion 2332 and the piston member 2362a of the tilting device 2310 are formed in such a manner that the load felt by the player is constant with respect to the posture of the tilting device 2310. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the upper surface of the tilting device 2310 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the left drive motor M1 and the left switching operation member 2326 are attached to the lower cover 2320, and the right drive motor M1 and the right switching operation member 2326 are separated from the lower cover 2320. The state of the cover is shown, and the switching operation member 2326 is shown in an enlarged manner.

As shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 2310 is switched between a through hole 2325a1 in which the bottom plate portion 2325a of the motor support portion 2325 of the lower cover 2320 is bored in the vertical direction and a through hole 2325a1 that is vertically movable. It includes an operating member 2326.

As shown in FIG. 23, the switching operation member 2326 is arranged in the gap between the adjacent acting claw portions 2332 and overhangs the main body member 2326a integrally molded from the resin material and the upper part of the main body member 2326a. It mainly includes a swing member 2326b that is pivotally supported so as to swing.

The main body member 2326a has a contact plate portion 2326a1 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction, and a thin plate shape that projects from the upper end portion of the contact plate portion 2326a1 while tilting back and forth while acting as a leaf spring. The leaf spring acting portion 2326a2, the accommodating recess 2326a3 which is a recess accommodating the swinging member 2326b tilting back and forth, and the abutting plate portion 2326a1 projecting outward from an intermediate position and having a thinness that allows bending and deformation. It mainly includes a retaining portion 2326a4 that is configured.

In the accommodating recess 2326a3, the wall portion on the front side (left side in FIG. 23) rises along the vertical direction, and the wall portion on the back side (right side in FIG. 23) is displaced toward the back (right side in FIG. 23) as it goes upward. Be tilted. As a result, the tilting of the swing member 2326b from the posture of standing along the vertical direction toward the front side is restricted, and the tilting toward the back is permitted.

The retaining portion 2326a4 is displaceable in a direction close to the contact plate portion 2326a1, and when pressed against the contact plate portion 2326a1, is accommodated inside the maximum width of the contact plate portion 2326a1. There is a recess on the side surface of the contact plate portion 2326a1 to receive the retaining portion 2326a4). As a result, if the width of the through hole 2325a1 is set to be slightly larger than the width of the contact plate portion 2326a1, the switching operation is caused by the retaining portion 2326a4 when the switching operation member 2326 is inserted into the through hole 2325a1 from above. It is possible to prevent the member 2326 from being clogged in the through hole 2325a1, and it is possible to prevent the switching operation member 2326 from coming out of the through hole 2325a1 by the retaining portion 2326a4 after the switching operation member 2326 is inserted and partitioned. can.

The swing member 2326b is a rod-shaped member having a rotation axis along the thickness direction of the main body member 2326a, and is urged by a spring member (not shown) toward the wall portion on the front side of the accommodating recess 2326a3. To. That is, the state shown in FIG. 23 is the initial position of the swing member 2326b (the position where no load is generated from the outside), and the overhang length from the main body member 2326a is maximized at the initial position.

The operation of the switching operation member 2326 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and 25 (a) to 25 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device 2310 and the lower case 2360. In addition, in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and 25 (a) to 25 (c), the state in which the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the descending position is illustrated.

In FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), the switching operation member 2326 is viewed in cross section on a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the drive motor M1 and the tilting device 2310 is viewed in cross section. Is shown in the descending position (therefore, the vertical direction of FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c) and 25 (a) to 25 (c) is a direction inclined from the vertical direction. Will be).

From FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c), a state in which the weight member M1a is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 24 by the driving force of the drive motor M1 is shown in chronological order. That is, in FIG. 24A, the state before the weight member M1a abuts on the swing member 2326b, and in FIG. 24B, the weight member M1a after the weight member M1a abuts on the swing member 2326b. In FIG. 24 (c), the state in which the weight member M1a is separated from the swing member 2326b and the swing member 2326b is returned to the initial position is shown in the state of being rotated by the maximum angle clockwise.

As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c), when the weight member M1a rotates counterclockwise in FIG. 24, the displacement of the swing member 2326b is within the range of the recess of the accommodating recess 2326a3. Therefore, the main body member 2326a does not move up and down, and the arrangement of the switching operation member 2326 is maintained.

From FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), a state in which the weight member M1a is rotated clockwise in FIG. 25 by the driving force of the drive motor M1 is illustrated in chronological order. That is, in FIG. 25 (a), the state before the weight member M1a abuts on the swing member 2326b, and in FIG. 25 (b), the weight member M1a after the weight member M1a abuts on the swing member 2326b. In FIG. 25 (c), a state in which a load is applied in a direction to rotate counterclockwise is shown, and a state in which the weight member M1a is separated from the swing member 2326b is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), when the weight member M1a rotates clockwise in FIG. 25, the swing member 2326b is pressed against the wall surface on the front side of the accommodating recess 2326a3 and rotates. Therefore, the interference between the weight member M1a and the swing member 2326b is avoided by moving the switching operation member 2326 downward. That is, the switching operation member 2326 vibrates in the vertical direction in accordance with the rotation of the weight member M1a.

In the present embodiment, when the switching operation member 2326 is arranged at the initial position, the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 does not abut on the bottom receiving member 361 of the lower case 2360 (see FIG. 25A), and the weight member. In a state where M1a pushes down the switching operation member 2326, the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 is in contact with the bottom receiving member 361 (see FIG. 25 (b)).

Here, in the present embodiment, the separation width between the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 in FIG. 25 (a) is the vertical movement width of the switching operation member 2326 (FIG. 25 (a) and FIG. 25 (b). ), The shape of the main body member 2326a is designed to be shorter than the displacement) of the switching operation member 2326.

Therefore, when the state changes from FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (b), pressure is applied from the switching operation member 2326 to the bottom receiving member 361, and the reaction force is applied in the direction of pushing up the drive motor M1 upward. A load is applied to the upper cover 311 that presses the drive motor M1 from above.

Therefore, in a state where the tilting device 2310 is pushed down to the lowered position, the player can feel the load repeatedly generated due to the vibration of the switching operation member 2326. This repeatedly generated load can be felt by the player by pushing it down to the descending position. For example, the tilting device 2310 switches the separation width between the lower end of the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361. When the posture is set to be longer than the vertical movement width of the member 2326, the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 do not come into contact with each other, so that the player is not repeatedly subjected to the load.

Therefore, the player can recognize that the tilting device 2310 can be pushed to the lowered position by feeling the repeatedly generated load. As a result, it is possible to prevent an operation error caused by insufficient pushing amount and excessive pushing (excessive pushing amount) caused by ambiguous target position.

Further, even if the tilting device 2310 is arranged at the descending position and the drive motor M1 is rotated, the switching operation member 2326 may or may not vibrate depending on the rotation direction.

Here, at the timing when the pachinko machine 10 requests the operation of the operation device 2300, another accessory (for example, arranged around the third symbol display device 81 and stretched inward as an effect) that starts the operation by the operation. The drive device of the moving accessory) may be driven to the operation start position (may be prepared for operation). Normally, if the lottery result is a hit, other characters will move violently, and if the lottery result is wrong, the other characters will remain stopped, but due to the motor drive sound and vibration during preparation for operation, There is a problem that the player knows the lottery result without waiting for the production of other characters, which reduces the interest of the player.

Therefore, even in the operation device 2300, the lottery result can be predicted by the drive sound and vibration of the drive motor M1, the significance of operating the tilting device 2310 is diminished, and there is a risk that the player will stop the operation. be.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor M1 is similarly rotated in both the states shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the same drive noise and vibration are generated, while the drive motor M1 is rotated. Whether or not the switching operation member 2326 abuts on the bottom receiving member 361 changes depending on the direction. The displacement of the tilting device 2310 caused by the switching operation member 2326 coming into contact with the bottom receiving member 361 is slight, and it is difficult to visually confirm whether or not the switching operation member 2326 is in contact with the bottom receiving member 361. Will be done.

Therefore, for example, when the lottery result is a hit, the switching operation member 2326 and the bottom receiving member 361 can be brought together by increasing the probability that the switching operation member 2326 vibrates when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the descending position. Since the lottery result can be predicted by feeling the repetitive load generated by the contact as a change in the load applied to the hand, it is possible to increase the significance of the player pushing the tilting device 2310 to the descending position. As a result, the operation device 2300 can be effectively utilized (the player is made to push the tilting device 2310).

It will be described back to FIG. 23. In the shaft cover 2330, the working claw portion 2332 has a gentle inclination angle on the front side (left side in FIG. 23), while the inclination angle on the back side (right side in FIG. 23) is steep, so that the load applied to the player increases. Is configured to be suppressable.

With reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the vertical movement of the piston member 2362a due to the rotation (tilting) of the tilting device 2310 will be described. 26 (a) and 26 (b) and 27 (a) and 27 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device 2310 in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a).

In FIG. 26 (a), the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position and the action claw portion 2332 and the piston member 2362a start to come into contact with each other, which is the state shown in FIG. 26 (a) in FIG. 26 (b). The tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 ° from the tilting device 2310 and the action claw portion 2332 pushes down the piston member 2362a. In FIG. 27 (a), the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) to rotate the piston member 2362a. 27 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a) and the piston member 2362a is raised to the initial position.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the lower case 2360 includes a tubular receiving portion 2361c arranged below the tubular receiving portion 361c of the first embodiment, and operates inside the tubular receiving portion 2361c in the vertical direction. The upper end of the piston member 2362a is formed in a shape in which the front side is cut out by an arc.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the lower end surface 2332b of the action claw portion 2332 has the switching point 2332c and the piston member 2362a in the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) (rotated by 13 ° from the ascending position). Along with being abutted, the rear arc portion 2332e behind the switching point 2332c (on the right side in FIG. 26A) is configured such that the length from the rotation axis O1 becomes shorter as the distance from the switching point 2332c increases. .. An arc C1 having a radius of a distance from the rotation axis O1 to the switching point 2332c about the rotation axis O1 is shown by an imaginary line.

The load applied to the tilting device 2310 when the tilting device 2310 is tilted will be described. The load applied from the piston member 2362a in the moving direction of the tilting device 2310 varies depending on the posture of the tilting device 2310 because the component ratio of the displacement amount of the tilting device 2310 along the moving direction of the piston member 2362a changes. Here, the description thereof will be omitted, and the description will be made on the assumption that all the loads proportional to the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b are applied against the moving direction of the tilting device 2310.

When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 ° based on the position where the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position (the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26A to the state shown in FIG. 26B). ), The front arc portion 2332d on the front side (left side of FIG. 26B) of the switching point 2332c of the acting claw portion 2332 pushes the piston member 2362a to the position P1, and the coil spring 362b of the urging device 2362 is displaced. As a result, the load applied from the piston member 2362a to the acting claw portion 2332 increases. When rotating the tilting device 2310, the player receives a load from both the torsion spring 343 and the urging device 2362, so that the tilting device 2310 is rotated from FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (b). Along with this, the load given to the player increases.

When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) (when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a)), the piston member 2362a Ascends to position P2. That is, when the rear arc portion 2332e is formed along the arc C1, the position of the piston member 2362a is maintained with respect to the rotation of the tilting device 2310, so that the radius is formed smaller than the arc C1. As a result, the piston member 2362a rises from the position P1 shown in FIG. 26B to the position P2.

Therefore, when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a), the player can increase the load due to the displacement of the torsion spring 343 and recover the displacement of the coil spring 362b. It receives the resultant force as the load with the decrease of the load due to.

In the present embodiment, the amount of change in the urging force generated when the torsion spring 343 is displaced by 5 ° and the amount of change in the urging force generated when the coil spring 362b is displaced by the distance between the positions P1 and P2. However, the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b are selected so as to be equivalent to each other. Therefore, the load received by the player in the state of FIG. 26 (b) and the state of FIG. 27 (a) is constant.

When the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a) (when the tilting device 2310 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (b)), the piston member 2362a Ascends to position P3. Here, the position P3 is a position that rises from the position P2 by the distance between the positions P1 and the position P2.

That is, when the tilting device 2310 rotates (tilts) from the state shown in FIG. 27 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (b), from the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 27 (a). The torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b are displaced by the same amount as when the tilting device 2310 is rotated. Therefore, the load received by the player in the state of FIG. 27 (a) and the state of FIG. 27 (b) is constant. Therefore, the load received by the player can be kept constant during the period from FIG. 26 (b) to FIG. 27 (b) (the period during which the tilting device 2310 is rotated by 10 °).

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the load applied to the player by the tilting device 2310 when operating the tilting device 2310 will be described. FIG. 28 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 2310 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 2310 from the ascending position. In the graph shown in FIG. 28, the tilt angle is shown on the horizontal axis in a manner in which the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the ascending position as the left end and increases to the right from there, and the tilting device 2310 is shown on the vertical axis. The load applied to the player is shown through.

As shown in FIG. 28, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 2310 is a torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 26A) until the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. (See FIG. 10), the spring constant rises at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant.

When the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position, an urging force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b is applied to the tilting device 2310 via the piston member 2362a (see FIG. 26A). ..

Since the coil spring 362b is arranged in a state of being contracted from the natural length in advance in the assembled state (see FIG. 8), the load felt by the player is applied at the position where the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. It changes rapidly (the rate of change in load changes). In the present embodiment, since the control is switched between the push operation and the pedal operation with this position as a boundary, the player can easily switch the operation method with the sudden change in the load as a mark.

From the state in which the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position to the state in which it is tilted further by 10 °, the load given to the player increases at a rate larger than the rate of increase in the load by the torsion spring 343 (angle α1). ..

The load applied to the player is constant from the state in which the tilting device 2310 is tilted by 13 ° from the ascending position to the state in which the tilting device 2310 is further tilted by 10 °. As a result, the burden on the player when pedaling the tilting device 2310 can be reduced as compared with the case where the urging force is further increased even from the posture of the tilting device 2310 at an angle of 13 °, and the tilting device 2310 can be reduced. Can be facilitated to maintain a constant angle.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the piston member 362a of the urging device 362 is fixed has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is the case where the piston member 362a can tilt in the middle of vertical movement. To explain. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

29 (a) is a front perspective view of the rotary piston member 3364 in the third embodiment, FIG. 29 (b) is a partial front perspective view of the lower case 3360, and FIG. 29 (c) is a shaft cover. It is a partial front perspective view of 3330. In FIG. 29 (b), a part of the inner peripheral shape of the tubular receiving portion 3361c on the front side is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 29 (c), the assembled structure of the rotary piston member 3364 is partially imagined. Illustrated by a line.

As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the rotary piston member 3364 includes a main body member 3364a in which a plate-shaped portion is extended in a spherical portion having a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular receiving portion 3361c. A notch 3364b that is cut out in a U-shaped cross section on the same plane as the plane extending from the lower part of the main body member 3364a and a plate-shaped portion, and the notch 3364b are inserted into the notch and displaceably arranged. It mainly includes a long rod-shaped rod member 3364c and a penetrating shaft member 3364d that pivotally supports and fixes the rod member 3364c inside the spherical portion of the main body member 3364a.

The rod member 3364c is provided with a shaft support hole through which the rod member 3364c is inserted at an end portion on the side accommodated in the main body member 3364a, and is convexly provided at the end portion on the opposite side in a direction parallel to the penetrating direction of the shaft support hole. The guide pin portion 3364c1 is provided.

The through shaft member 3364d is inserted and fixed in a support hole formed in the spherical portion of the main body member 3364a along the thickness direction of the plate-shaped portion, and the rod member 3364c is rotatably supported by the through shaft member 3364d. To.

As shown in FIG. 29 (b), the rotary piston member 3364 is supported by the cylindrical receiving portion 3361c of the lower case 3360. The tubular receiving portion 3361c is formed in a cylindrical shape whose inner circumference is formed with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the spherical portion of the main body member 3364a of the rotating piston member 3364, and the upper surface thereof is covered with a lid, and the rotating piston is covered with the lid. A cut portion 3361d having a width slightly larger than the thickness of the plate-shaped portion of the main body member 3364a of the member 3364 is formed.

The rod member 3364c and the main body member 3364a are projected to the outside of the tubular receiving portion 3361c via the notch portion 3361d.

As shown in FIG. 29 (c), the shaft cover 3330 is provided along the same plane as the through hole 3331 g through which the rod member 3364c is inserted into the lower half of the cylinder 3331 and the plane on which the through hole 3331 g is formed. It is provided with an arcuate elongated hole having a notch on the upper surface thereof and a support elongated hole portion 3331h configured to be able to support the guide pin portion 3364c1. The long support hole portion 3331h is extended within a range of an angle of 30 ° about the rotation axis O1.

In the assembled state, the guide pin portion 3364c1 is inserted through the support elongated hole portion 3331h. In the assembly method, the tilting device 3310 is brought close to the lower case 3360 in a posture in which the acting claw portion 332 does not abut on the rotating piston member 3364, the rod member 3364c is inserted through the through hole 3331g, and then the tilting device 3310 is rotated and rotated. This is a method of pushing the piston member 3364 by a predetermined amount. As a result, the guide pin portion 3364c1 can be internally fitted into the support elongated hole portion 3331h through the notch in the support elongated hole portion 3331h, and the assembled state shown in FIG. 30 (a) can be configured.

Next, the operation of the rotary piston member 3364 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. 30 (a), FIG. 30 (b), FIG. 31 (a) and FIG. 31 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the tilting device 3310 in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). In addition, FIG. 30A shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 30B shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the ascending position. 31 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is rotated (tilted) by 10 ° from the ascending position, and FIG. 31 (b) shows the tilting device 3310 rotated (tilted) by 20 ° from the ascending position. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 30A and 30B, when the tilting device 3310 is arranged in the raised position, the guide pin portion 3364c1 is on the front side of the support elongated hole portion 3331h (left side in FIG. 30A). The guide pin portion 3364c1 is arranged in the middle of the support elongated hole portion 3331h in a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position.

From FIG. 30A to FIG. 30B, the position of the rotary piston member 3364 does not change, and the shape of the support elongated hole portion 3331h is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis O1. No load is generated between the guide pin portion 3364c1 and the support elongated hole portion 3331h, and the load applied to the player is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 343.

As shown in FIG. 31 (a), in a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 10 ° from the ascending position, the rotary piston member 3364 is pushed down by the working claw portion 332, and the guide pin portion 3364c1 is the support elongated hole portion 3331h. It is arranged at the end of the rear side (right side in FIG. 31 (a)). In this state, in addition to the load received from the torsion spring 343, the tilting device 3310 is loaded with the urging force generated from the coil spring 362b arranged below the rotary piston member 3364.

As shown in FIG. 31 (b), in a state where the tilting device 3310 is rotated by 20 ° from the ascending position, the support elongated hole portion 3331h is further rotated clockwise around the rotation axis O1 to cause the guide pin portion. The 3364c is pulled, whereby the rotary piston member 3364 rotates, so that the upper end portion of the plate-shaped portion of the main body member 3364a that comes into contact with the acting claw portion 332 moves in the direction of escaping from the acting claw portion 332. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotary piston member 3364 from moving further downward, so that it is possible to prevent the coil spring 362b from further contracting, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the load applied to the tilting device 3310. Can be done.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is urged by a spring member having spring elasticity has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment describes the case where the tilting device 4310 receives an urging force due to a magnetic force. do. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

32 (a), 32 (b), 33 (a) and 33 (b) are cross sections of the operating device 4300 according to the fourth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a figure. In addition, in FIG. 32 (a), the tilting device 4310 was arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 32 (b), the tilting device 4310 was rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the state shown in FIG. 32 (a). In FIG. 33 (a), the state in which the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 32 (b) (state in which the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 8 ° from the ascending position) is shown in FIG. 33. In (b), a state in which the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 5 ° from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a) (a state in which the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 13 ° from the ascending position) is shown. In this embodiment, the coil spring 362b of the urging device 362 is arranged with a natural length in the state shown in FIG. 32 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the operation device 4300 is arranged to face the moving magnet Ma1 formed of a magnetic material and fixed to the curved wall portion 322 of the lower cover 320 of the tilting device 4310, and the moving magnet Ma1. A fixed magnet Ma2, which is fixed to the rear end portion of the right side sensor fixing plate 363b of the lower case 360 and is formed of a magnetic material, is provided. The moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are formed in a shape along an arc centered on the rotation axis O1, the moving magnet Ma1 has an arc shape with a center angle of about 5 °, and the fixed magnet has a center angle of about 3. Each of them has an arc shape of °, and the magnetism is switched in the radial direction about the rotation axis O1.

The operation of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is arranged in the ascending position, the opposing surfaces of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 move to a position where they do not overlap in the radial direction about the rotation axis O1. A magnet Ma1 and a fixed magnet Ma2 are arranged. The attractive force of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 increases in proportion to the area of the surfaces that face each other and overlap, but when the facing surfaces do not overlap, the attractive force does not occur (it is negligibly small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the upper end position of the fixed magnet Ma2 and the lower end position of the moving magnet Ma1 coincide with each other in the radial direction about the rotation axis O1, so that the tilting device 4310 moves when the tilting device 4310 starts moving. A magnetic force in the attraction direction begins to act between the magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2.

As shown in FIG. 32 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, the area where the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 overlap in the radial direction of the rotating shaft O1 becomes maximum. That is, each time the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) from the state of being arranged in the ascending position, the magnetic force generated between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 increases in proportion to the rotation angle, and FIG. 32 (b) ) Is the maximum. Further, since the upper end position of the moving magnet Ma1 is arranged 2 ° above the upper end position of the fixed magnet Ma2, the tilting device 4310 is further rotated by 2 ° from the state of FIG. 32B (from the ascending position). When the rotation angle is from 3 ° to 5 °), the maximum magnetic force is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 33A, when the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 8 ° from the ascending position, the lower end position of the fixed magnet Ma2 and the upper end position of the moving magnet Ma1 coincide with each other in the radial direction about the rotation axis O1. do. That is, since the facing surfaces of the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 do not overlap each other, no magnetic force is generated between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 (it becomes negligibly small).

By the time the state shown in FIG. 33 (b) is reached, the tilting device 4310 is fixed to the moving magnet Ma1 as the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts) from the position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated (tilted) by 5 ° from the ascending position. The area where the surfaces facing the magnet Ma2 overlap is reduced. Therefore, the moving magnet is proportional to the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 from the position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 5 ° from the ascending position (the position where the magnetic force is maximized) until the state shown in FIG. 33 (b) is reached. The magnetic force generated between Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 33B, when the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 13 ° from the ascending position, the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are separated from each other, and the load applied to the tilting device 4310 is the torsion spring 343 and the attachment. Only the urging force generated by the urging device 362. Therefore, as the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts), the load applied to the tilting device 4310 increases.

With reference to FIG. 34, the load applied to the player from the tilting device 4310 will be described. FIG. 34 is a graph showing the load applied to the tilting device 4310 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 4310 from the ascending position. In the graph shown in FIG. 34, the tilt angle is shown on the horizontal axis in a manner in which the tilting device 4310 is arranged in the ascending position (see FIG. 32 (a)) as the left end and increases to the right from there. The vertical axis shows the load applied to the player via the tilting device 4310. In addition, in FIG. 34, for easy understanding, a graph assuming that the displacement of the coil spring 362b is proportional to the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is described (the shape of the action claw portion 332 described above in the first embodiment). The effect of is ignored).

As shown in FIG. 34, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 4310 is the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 32 (b)) until the tilting device 4310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position. (See FIG. 10) Tilt in a manner in which a magnetic force MF1 generated as a component in the rotational direction of the tilting device 4310 is added between the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 to a straight line that rises at a predetermined angle α1 in proportion to the spring constant. It increases in proportion to the rotation angle of the device 4310.

When the tilting device 4310 is tilted by 3 ° from the ascending position, an urging force corresponding to the displacement of the coil spring 362b begins to be loaded on the tilting device 4310 via the piston member 362a (see FIG. 32 (b)). At the same time, the area where the moving magnet Ma1 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are opposed to each other in the radial direction of the rotation axis O1 begins to be maximized.

Since the section having the largest area continues until the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 becomes 5 °, the magnetic force does not change in that section, and the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and the coil spring 362b (FIG. 32 (b)). As the urging force increases due to the displacement of (see), the load applied to the tilting device 4310 changes. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the coil spring 362b is arranged with a natural length, the load smoothly rises from the state where the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is 3 ° from the rising position.

When the tilting device 4310 rotates (tilts) 3 ° (tilts) (rotates (tilts) from the ascending position to a position of 8 °) from a position where the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is 5 ° from the ascending position, the moving magnet Ma1 is used. The area of the surface facing the fixed magnet Ma2 that overlaps with the rotation axis O1 in the radial direction begins to decrease. This decrease is made larger than the increase in the urging force caused by the displacement of the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and the coil spring 362b (see FIG. 32 (b)), so that the rotation angle is from the position of 5 °. The load applied to the player is reduced up to the 8 ° position.

That is, while the tilting device 4310 is placed between the ascending position and the position where the rotation angle is 5 °, the load given to the player increases as the rotation angle increases, while the rotation angle is 5 °. From the position of to the position where the rotation angle is 8 °, the load given to the player decreases as the rotation angle increases, so the positive and negative of the load change rate is reversed at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the change rate of the load has changed at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °, and the amount at which the player operates the tilting device 4310 at the position where the rotation angle is 5 °. Since it can be used as a mark for grasping, this configuration can be useful for the game.

Further rotation from the position where the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is 8 ° from the ascending position eliminates the fluctuation of the load due to the magnetic force. Therefore, as the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 is increased, the torsion spring 343 (see FIG. 10) and The displacement of the coil spring 362b (see FIG. 32 (b)) increases the urging force applied to the player. That is, the positive / negative of the load change rate is reversed again at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the change rate of the load has changed at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °, and the amount at which the player operates the tilting device 4310 at the position where the rotation angle is 8 °. It can be used as a mark for grasping.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, in the process of rotating the tilting device 4310, the load applied to the player with the position where the rotation angle is 8 ° as the valley bottom is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the tilting device 4310 in a posture in which the rotation angle is 8 °, as compared with the case where the load applied to the player increases as the rotation angle of the tilting device 4310 increases. This makes it easy to maintain the posture of the tilting device 4310 at a position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° or more from the ascending position in the stage before the pedal operation.

In this embodiment, a return device for returning the tilting device 4310 from a position with a rotation angle of 8 ° to a position of 5 ° (a device for ejecting air from below along the circumferential direction of the tilting device 4310 is not shown). To prepare for. As a result, it is possible to assist the return operation of the tilting device 4310 from the descending position to the ascending position and prevent the tilting device 4310 from continuing to stop at the position of the rotation angle of 8 °.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. In the first embodiment, the case where the urging force for returning the tilting device 310 to the ascending position side changes only by the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310 has been described, but the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is the tilting device. A case where the urging force applied to the tilting device 5310 changes depending on the rotation (tilting) speed of the 5310 (when the urging force increases when the rotation speed is high) will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 is a side view of the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 35, the operation device 5300 is configured such that the upper cover 5311 of the tilting device 5310 includes a recessed portion 5316b in which the tilting device 5310 is recessed in a groove shape along the left-right direction of the curved wall portion 5316. A third urging device 5380 is provided on the rear upper portion of the upper case 5370. The third urging device 5380 is a device that applies a load to the tilting device 5310 by abutting on the curved wall portion 5316.

With reference to FIG. 36, an assembly structure with the upper case 5370 of the third urging device 5380 will be described. 36 (a) is a top view of the upper case 5370, and FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c) are the upper case 5370 and the third urging device 5380 in the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 36 (c), the rotary roller 5381 of the third urging device 5380 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 36, the upper case 5370 extends as a long hole along the front-rear direction on the side surface of the box-shaped storage box portion 5371 that is opened toward the front side at the upper portion thereof. It mainly includes a relief hole 5372 to be provided, a pair of cylindrical portions 5373 that support the rotary roller 5381 at two points, and a locking portion 5374 to which the torsion spring 5383 is locked.

The third urging device 5380 rotatably supports a rotating roller 5381 that rotates with the rotation (tilting) of the tilting device 5310 by abutting on the tilting device 5310, and the rotary roller 5381 in a relief hole 5372. It mainly includes a shaft rod member 5382 to be inserted, and a torsion spring 5383 that is wound around the shaft rod member 5382 and gives an elastic urging force to the rotary roller 5381.

In the torsion spring 5383, one arm abuts from below the locking portion 5374, and the other arm abuts from below the convex pin 5381c of the rotary roller 5381, so that the rotary roller 5381 is wound downward. (FIG. 36 (b) counterclockwise), the urging force is increased when the rotation is performed. On the other hand, when the rotary roller 5381 rotates in the upward direction (clockwise in FIG. 36B), the convex pin 5381c of the rotary roller 5381 only separates from the other arm portion of the torsion spring 5383. There is no change in urging force.

The rotary roller 5381 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. 37 (a) is a side view of the rotary roller 5381, and FIG. 37 (b) is a front view of the rotary roller 5381 in the arrow XXXVIIb of FIG. 37 (a).

As shown in FIG. 37, the rotary roller 5381 is formed in the center of the main body portion 5381a formed in a disk shape and the circle of the main body portion 5381a in a circular cross section in the thickness direction, and the shaft rod member 5382 ( A through hole 5381b through which (FIG. 36 (c)) is inserted, a convex pin 5381c projecting from an eccentric position of the main body 5381a along the thickness direction, and an outer peripheral surface to the center of the main body 5381a. It mainly includes a recessed portion 5381d that is recessed toward the center and extends in the axial direction.

The convex pin 5381c is a portion to which the torsion spring 5383 is locked, and abuts on the arm portion of the torsion spring 5383 from above (see FIG. 36 (b)). The recessed portion 5381d is a recessed portion for allowing the rotary roller 5381 to move rearward, and is recessed with a width larger than the diameter of the cylindrical portion 5373.

Next, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 5310 and the third urging device 5380 will be described. 38 (a), 38 (b), 39 (a), 39 (b), 40 (a) and 40 (b) correspond to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG. 36 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device 5300 in line.

FIG. 38 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 5310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 5310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the ascending position. In (a), a state in which the tilting device 5310 is further rotated (tilted) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 38 (b) is shown, and in FIG. 39 (b), the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 6 ° (tilted) from the ascending position. 40 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 5310 is quickly rotated (tilted) by 14 ° from the state shown in FIG. 39 (b), and FIG. 40 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 40 (b). The state in which the tilting device 5310 is further rotated (tilted) from the state shown in a) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the curved wall portion 5316 of the upper cover 5311 includes a recessed portion 5316b and a contact portion 5316c which is a portion that abuts on the rotary roller 5381. That is, the same as the contact portion 5316c (formed at 3 ° centered on the rotating shaft O1) and the subsequent recessed portion 5316b (formed at 2.5 ° centered on the rotating shaft O1) that first abuts on the rotating roller 5381. Two sets of abutting portions 5316c and recessed portions 5316b are formed in the shape of. The final contact portion 5316c (the lower contact portion of the recessed portion 5361b arranged at the uppermost portion) is about half the width (centered on the rotation axis O1) as compared with the other contact portions 5361c. Is formed at about 1.5 °).

In FIG. 38 (a), since the recessed portion 5316b is arranged at a position facing the rotating roller 5381, even if the rotating roller 5381 and the curved wall portion 5316 do not come into contact with each other and the tilting device 5310 is rotated. The load applied to the tilting device 5310 from the rotary roller 5381 does not increase.

As shown in FIG. 38 (b), when the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, the contact portion 5316c and the rotary roller 5381 start to come into contact with each other. By further rotating the tilting device 5310 from here (see FIG. 39 (a)), urging force due to the displacement of the torsion spring 5383 from the rotating roller 5381 begins to be applied to the tilting device 5310.

As shown in FIG. 39 (b), when the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 6 ° from the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), the rotary roller 5381 comes into contact with the upper end of the contact portion 5316c. When the tilting device 5310 is slightly rotated from this position, the rotating roller 5381 and the recessed portion 5381d face each other, and the contact between the rotating roller 5381 and the curved wall portion 5316 is released, so that the rotating roller 5381 is twisted. It tries to return to the initial position by the urging force of the spring 5383.

Therefore, when the speed at which the tilting device 5310 is rotated is slow, the next contact portion 5316c (in FIG. 39B, the contact portion 5316c above the contact portion 5316c with which the rotating roller 5381 is in contact). The rotary roller 5381 returns to the initial position (see FIG. 38 (a)) before the rotary roller 5381 comes into contact with the rotary roller 5381.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), when the tilting device 5310 is quickly rotated in such a manner that the next contact portion 5316c is brought into contact with the rotary roller 5381 before the rotary roller 5381 returns, the rotary roller 5381 is used. Each time the tilting device 5310 rotates (tilts) with the contact portion 5316c facing each other, the displacement of the rotating roller 5381 and the torsion spring 5383 increases (accumulates), and the load applied from the rotating roller 5381 to the tilting device 5310 increases. Become.

Therefore, the load applied to the player can be changed depending on the speed at which the tilting device 5310 rotates. In the present embodiment, the push operation and the pedal operation are switched with respect to the position where the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, but as described above in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b). Since the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 do not come into contact with each other at a position up to 3 ° from the ascending position corresponding to the push operation, the load is excessive no matter how quickly the player operates the tilting device 5310 at this position. Will never be. Therefore, the operating resistance of the tilting device 5310 does not change depending on the displacement speed of the tilting device 5310 when the player performs the push operation. It is possible to avoid the situation where the trouble occurs.

On the other hand, at the position after rotating at an angle larger than 3 ° from the ascending position, the contact portion 5316c begins to abut with the rotating roller 5381, and then the recessed portion 5316b passes through the position facing the rotating roller 5381. As a result, the state of the rotary roller 5381 when the contact portion 5316c and the rotary roller 5381 come into contact with each other changes again (the amount of rotation of the rotary roller 5381 from the initial position is changed, so that the tilting device is tilted from the rotary roller 5381. The load applied to 5310 changes).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operating resistance of the tilting device 5310 can be changed according to the displacement speed of the tilting device 5310 in the range where the pedal is operated, while the operating resistance of the tilting device 5310 is changed in the range where the push operation is performed. The operation performance can be improved without depending on the speed of displacement.

In FIG. 40 (a), the case where the rotary roller 5381 is rotated by the entire circumference of the contact portion 5316c is shown. In this state, the recessed portion 5381d of the rotary roller 5381 is in a state of approaching the cylindrical portion 5373.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the tilting device 5310 is further rotated from FIG. 40 (a), the recessed portion 5381d of the rotating roller 5381 is arranged to face the cylindrical portion 5373. Therefore, the rotary roller 5381 can move along the escape hole 5372 in the direction close to the cylindrical portion 5373.

As a result, even if the load applied from the rotary roller 5381 to the tilting device 5310 becomes excessive, the rotary roller 5381 can move in the direction away from the tilting device 5310. Therefore, when the tilting device 5310 is quickly operated, a game is played. It is possible to prevent the person from receiving an excessive load from the tilting device 5310.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42, a case where the length of the contact portion 5316c is changed depending on the position will be described. 41 (a), 41 (b) and 42 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 5300b in the line corresponding to the XXXVIb-XXXVIb line of FIG.

The operation device 5300b differs from the operation device 5300 only in the formation pattern of the recessed portion 5316b and the contact portion 5316c of the curved wall portion 5316. That is, the width of the contact portion 5316c to which the tilting device 5310b first abuts from the ascending position shown in FIG. The contact portion 5316c that abuts on the rotating roller 5381 in a state of being rapidly rotated by 10 ° (see FIG. 41 (b)) has a long width (formed at 4 ° around the rotation axis O1) and is further tilted from the ascending position. The width of the contact portion 5316c that comes into contact with the rotating roller 5381 in a state where the device 5310b is quickly rotated by 20 ° (see FIG. 42) is further increased in width (formed at 7 ° around the rotation axis O1).

Therefore, not only the player who operates the tilting device 5310b quickly but also the player who operates the tilting device 5310b slowly can feel the change in the operation feeling that the load given from the tilting device 5310b changes. can.

That is, assuming a player who operates the tilting device 5310b slowly enough to completely return the rotary roller 5381 to the initial position in the section of each recessed portion 5381d, the rotary roller 5381 comes into contact with the rotary roller 5381 in FIG. 41 (b). From the start of contact with the contact portion 5316c to the end of contact, the urging force generated when the short contact portion 5316c arranged below the contact portion 5316c and the rotary roller 5381 come into contact with each other. Four times more encouraging power is given.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 42, when the short contact portion 5316c and the rotary roller 5381 are in contact with each other from the start of contact with the contact portion 5316c to be in contact with the rotary roller 5381 to the end of contact. It is given 7 times the urging force that is generated. Further, at the moment when the contact between the rotary roller 5381 and the contact portion 5316c is released, the load applied to the tilting device 5310b is sharply reduced. Therefore, the player pushes in the tilting device 5310b without visually observing the tilting device 5310b, using the change in the maximum value of the load given by the rotating roller 5381 and the sudden decrease in the load as a mark. Can be predicted.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. In the first embodiment, the case where the urging force for returning the tilting device 310 to the ascending position side changes only by the rotation (tilting) angle of the tilting device 310 has been described, but the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment is the tilting device. A case where the urging force applied to the tilting device 6310 changes depending on the rotation (tilting) speed of the 6310 (when the urging force decreases when the rotation speed is high) will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43 is a side view of the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that FIG. 43 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 6310 is arranged in an ascending position, and a rear portion of the operating device 6300 is partially viewed in cross section. As shown in FIG. 43, the operation device 6300 has a contact point J1 in which the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 of the upper cover 6311 of the tilting device 6310 abuts on the rotating member 6381 when the tilting device 6310 is arranged in the raised position. As a reference, the arc C6 centered on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 6310 is used as a reference, and the shape becomes smaller than the diameter of the arc C6 as the distance from the contact point J1 increases. It is equipped with a force device 6380. The fourth urging device 6380 is a device that applies a load to the tilting device 6310 by abutting on the curved wall portion 6316.

In the upper case 6370, a box-shaped storage box portion 6371 that is opened toward the front side at the upper portion thereof, a shaft support hole 6372 formed in the side surface of the storage box portion 6371, and a torsion spring 6383 are engaged. A locking portion 6373 and a locking portion 6373 are mainly provided.

The fourth urging device 6380 rotatably supports a rotating member 6381 that applies a load to the tilting device 6310 by abutting on the tilting device 6310, and the rotating member 6381, and a shaft rod inserted into the shaft support hole 6372. It mainly includes a member 6382 and a torsion spring 6383 that is wound around the shaft rod member 6382 and gives an elastic urging force to the rotating member 6381.

The rotating member 6381 is provided with a through hole 6381b that is eccentrically bored in the gourd-shaped main body portion 6381a through which the shaft rod member 6382 is inserted, and the torsion spring 6383 can be locked in a direction parallel to the axial direction. A convex pin 6381c to be convex is provided.

In the torsion spring 6383, one arm abuts from below the locking portion 6373, and the other arm abuts from below the convex pin 6381c of the rotating member 6381, so that the rotating member 6381 is wound downward. (Fig. 43 counterclockwise), the urging force is increased when the rotation is performed. On the other hand, when the rotating member 6381 rotates in the upward direction (clockwise in FIG. 43), the convex pin 6381c of the rotating member 6381 only separates from the other arm portion of the torsion spring 5383, and the urging force is increased. No change occurs.

44 (a) and 44 (b) are partial side views of the operating device 6300. In FIG. 44 (a), the tilting device 6310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position, and in FIG. 44 (b), the tilting device 6310 is quickly rotated by 17 ° from the state of FIG. 44 (a). (A state in which the tilting device 6310 is rotated by 20 ° from the ascending position) is illustrated, and in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the rear portion of the operating device 6300 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. ..

In FIG. 44A, the rotating member 6381 rotates clockwise due to the urging force of the torsion spring 6383 from the state shown in FIG. 43, and the contact between the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 is maintained. Here, assuming that the force generated by the contact between the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 is the same along the circumferential direction of the tilting device 6310, the rotating member 6381 and the curved wall portion 6316 are shown in FIG. 44 (a). Since the distance from the abutting position to the rotation axis O1 is shorter than the radius of the arc C6, the state shown in FIG. 44A is the load given by the rotating member 6381 as compared with the state shown in FIG. 43. As a result, the length of the arm of the moment generated in the tilting device 6310 is shortened.

Therefore, in a state where the rotating member 6381 is in contact with the curved wall portion 6316, the larger the angle at which the tilting device 6310 rotates (tilts) from the ascending position, the smaller the rotational resistance of the tilting device 6310 caused by the rotating member 6381. Therefore, when the rotation angle of the tilting device 6310 becomes large while securing the load given to the tilting device 6310 from the state where the tilting device 6310 is arranged in the ascending position and starts to rotate, the tilting device 6310 gives the player a load. It is possible to prevent the load from becoming excessively large.

In FIG. 44 (b), a state in which the tilting device 6310 is swiftly rotated from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a) is shown, and in this state, the rotating member 6381 is separated from the curved wall portion 6316. That is, the state in which the rotating member 6381 is rotated by the urging force of the torsion spring 6383 and the tilting device 6310 is rotated at a higher speed than the case where the rotating member 6381 is attached to the curved wall portion 6316 is shown.

In this case, since the load applied to the tilting device 6310 from the rotating member 6381 is eliminated, the force required to operate the tilting device 6310 can be reduced. That is, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 6310 can be reduced in the case of pedaling at high speed as compared with the case of slowly pedaling the tilting device 6310. Therefore, for example, the tilting device 6310 is operated in the middle of the movable range. When operating the tilting device 6310 at high speed (pushing-in operation) while securing the rotational resistance required to facilitate the maintenance operation, the reserved rotational resistance is released at once to rotate. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue felt by the player as compared with the case where the device having a large resistance is pushed through.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. In the first embodiment, the case where the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is determined by the posture in which the urging force changes has been described, but the operating device 7300 in the seventh embodiment rotates the tilting device 7310 ( The case where the tilting device 7310 is locked when the tilting device is tilted) and the starting point of the pedal operation is reached will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

45 (a), 45 (b), 46 (a) and 46 (b) are cross sections of the operating device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is a figure. In FIG. 45 (a), the tilting device 7310 is arranged in the ascending position, and in FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (a), the tilting device 7310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In FIG. 46 (b), a state in which the tilting device 7310 is quickly rotated by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 46 (a) is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the operation device 7300 includes a slide device 7318 in which the upper cover 7311 of the tilting device 7310 is formed so as to be slidable, and a displacement urging device 7319 arranged on the curved wall portion 7316. , Is configured.

The slide device 7318 has a locking member 7318a having a Z-shaped cross section and a locking member 7318a thereof, which is inserted into a through hole 7311a formed through the pressing plate portion 312 of the upper cover 7311 to the rear side wall portion 315. It mainly includes a coil spring 7318b that urges the rearward direction.

The locking member 7318a is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 45A) with respect to the upper cover 7311, and when arranged rearward, the rotation shaft is rotated by rotating the tilting device 7310. It is possible to come into contact with the power acting device 363 in the rotation direction centered on O1.

The displacement urging device 7319 includes an acting member 7319a pivotally supported by the curved wall portion 7316 of the upper cover 7311 and an acting member 7319a thereof within a range accommodated in the notch 7322a formed in the curved wall portion 7322 of the lower cover 7320. A torsion spring 7319b for urging in a direction close to the curved wall portion 7316, and a direction in which the working member 7319a is arranged below the working member 7319a and is close to the working member 7319a from the side where the working member 7319a opens and closes with respect to the curved member 7316. Mainly includes an inertial operation member 7319c configured to be movable in the same direction, and a tension spring 7319d for maintaining the inertial operation member 7319c downward.

The working member 7319a has a moving magnet Ma7 made of a magnetic material arranged at the tip thereof, and has a polarity in a direction of attracting to the fixed magnet Ma2 in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis O1. The lower end of the working member 7319a is inclined so as to be closer to the upper end of the inertial acting member 7319c and away from the curved wall portion 7316. As a result, when the inertial acting member 7319c moves upward, the acting member 7319a can be rotated in a direction away from the curved wall portion 7316.

The inertial action member 7319c is made of a heavy material to the extent that sufficient inertia can be applied (to the extent that it stays in place with respect to the rapid movement of the tilting device 7310), and the peripheral surface on the side that comes into contact with the curved wall portion 7316 is formed. , Formed from an arc shape along the inner peripheral shape of the curved wall portion 7316. Therefore, when the inertial acting member 7319c moves relative to the upper cover 7311, the moving direction is set along the peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 7316.

As shown in FIG. 45B, when the tilting device 7310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the ascending position, the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the piston member 362a, and the lower end of the locking member 7318a is the power acting device 363. In contact with the tilting device 7310 in the rotational direction. Therefore, it is possible to configure a state in which the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is mechanically locked and the tilting device 7310 cannot be rotated (tilted) any more.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneous operation. That is, when the player who operates the operation device 300 in the first embodiment can sense the area where the push operation is performed and the area where the pedal is operated due to the change in the load generated from the tilting device 310, the boundary between them becomes ambiguous. For example, even if the player thinks that he / she is repeatedly hitting in the area of push operation, he / she actually pushes the tilting device 310 to the area of pedal operation, which may make continuous hitting difficult. rice field. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in addition to the change in load, the boundary between the push operation region and the pedal operation region is formed at the position where the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is stopped, as described above. It is possible to suppress erroneous operation.

Further, the contact surface of the locking member 7318a with the power acting device 363 is configured as a surface perpendicular to the arc centered on the rotation axis O1 (see FIG. 45B). As a result, when a load in the rotational direction is further applied from the state shown in FIG. 45 (b), it is possible to prevent the locking member 7318a from sliding toward the front side due to the force received from the power acting device 363. can.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), by moving the locking member 7318a of the slide device 7318 toward the front side, the contact between the locking member 7318a and the power acting device 363 is released, and the tilting device 7310 is rotated. It is possible to make it.

Since the direction in which the tilting device 7310 is rotated and the direction in which the locking member 7318a is moved are approximately right angles (the angle formed is close to a right angle), the operation of rotating the tilting device 7310 and the locking member 7318a are moved. It can be difficult to perform the operation at the same time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the locking member 7318a from moving naturally and causing an erroneous operation of accidentally pushing the tilting device 7310 to the area of pedal operation.

When the tilting device 7310 is slowly pushed in from the position shown in FIG. 46 (a), the tilting device 7310 is rotated while the inertial acting member 7319c is stopped relative to the upper cover 7311. In this case, the distance between the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 remains distant, and the attractive force thereof is negligibly small.

On the other hand, the tilting device 7310 is displaced at an excessively large speed by being pushed in from the state shown in FIG. 46 (a), or the locking member 7318a is tilted from the ascending position while being fixed to the front side for some reason. When the device 7310 is rotated, as shown in FIG. 46B, the inertial acting member 7319c is displaced relative to the upper cover 7311, so that the acting member 7319a rotates and moves with the fixed magnet Ma2. As the distance from the magnet Ma7 becomes shorter, the resistance due to the magnetic force increases. As a result, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 7310 can be temporarily increased, and the braking effect thereof can give the player a change in the feeling of operation, and the tilting device 7310 rotates vigorously in the area of pedal operation ( It is possible to suppress tilting) and prevent damage to the tilting device 7310.

Even if the inertial acting member 7319c is displaced upward when the tilting device 7310 reaches the descending position vigorously, the tilting device 7310 returns upward after the player releases the tilting device 7310. Since the inertial acting member 7319c is moved downward by inertia as it operates, when the tilting device 7310 returns, the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are attracted to each other and the resistance increases, so that the tilting device 7310 It is possible to avoid delaying the return.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), between the ascending position of the tilting device 7310 and the position after being rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position (shown in FIG. 45 (a)). (Between the position and the position shown in FIG. 45 (b)), that is, when the tilting device 7310 is arranged in the range of the push operation, the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 are of a circle centered on the rotation axis O1. It is considered that they do not overlap in the radial direction. Therefore, within the range of the push operation, it is possible to prevent the tilting device 7310 from being delayed in displacement due to the attractive force between the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2.

That is, if the suction force acts by quickly rotating the tilting device 7310 when rotating the tilting device 7310 by 3 ° from the ascending position, the speed of the return operation of the tilting device 7310 after the push operation becomes slow. For example, when the continuous striking operation is performed within the range of the push operation, the operation becomes difficult, and the comfort of the game may be impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the moving magnet Ma7 and the fixed magnet Ma2 from being attracted to each other within the range of the push operation, and even if the tilting device 7310 is displaced at an arbitrary speed, the tilting device 7310 is tilted. It is possible to prevent the speed of the return operation of the 7310 from becoming slow, and it is possible to improve the comfort of the game.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player changes depending on the posture of the tilting device 310 has been described, but the operation device 8300 in the eighth embodiment has the player depending on the speed at which the tilting device 8310 is rotated (tilted). The case where the load applied to is changed will be described. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

47 (a) and 47 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 8300 according to the eighth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). Note that FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 8310 is arranged in the ascending position, and FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 8310 is swiftly rotated by a predetermined angle from the ascending position.

As shown in FIG. 47, the operation device 8300 includes a displacement urging device 8319 in which the upper cover 8311 of the tilting device 8310 is arranged on the curved wall portion 8316, and the upper case 8370 is tilted at the rear portion of the inner peripheral wall thereof. It is provided with a fixed magnet Ma81 formed of a magnetic material that extends along the rotation locus of the outer end of the 8310 and whose polarity is switched in the radial direction of the rotation locus of the tilting device 8310.

The displacement urging device 8319 has an acting member 8319a pivotally supported by the curved wall portion 8316 of the upper cover 8311 and an acting member thereof within a range accommodated in the notch 7322a formed in the curved wall portion 7322 of the lower cover 7320. A torsion spring 7319b that urges the 8319a in a direction close to the curved wall portion 8316, and the working member 8319a are arranged below the working member 8319a and are close to the working member 8319a from the side where the working member 8319a opens and closes with respect to the curved member 8316. It mainly includes an inertial operation member 7319c configured to be movable in a direction, and a tension spring 7319d that holds the inertial operation member 7319c downward.

The acting member 8319a is a member that extends bifurcatedly from a position axially supported by the curved wall portion 8316, and one arm portion (the left arm portion in FIG. 47 (a)) acts in the seventh embodiment. Similar to the member 7319a, the through hole is extended inside the curved wall portion 8316, and the other arm portion (the arm portion on the right side in FIG. 47 (a)) is formed in the thickness direction of the curved wall portion 8316. It is configured to extend outward of the curved wall portion 8316 through 8316b.

A moving magnet Ma82 formed of a magnetic material is arranged at the tip of the other arm of the working member 8319a, and the magnetic pole direction of the moving magnet Ma82 is formed in a direction to generate a magnetic force attracted to the fixed magnet Ma81. Magnetism.

The lower end of one arm of the working member 8319a is inclined so as to be closer to the upper end of the inertial acting member 7319c and away from the curved wall portion 8316. As a result, when the inertial acting member 7319c moves upward, the acting member 8319a can be rotated in a direction away from the curved wall portion 8316.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), when the tilting device 8310 is arranged in the ascending position, the acting member 8319a is in a posture in which one arm is close to the curved wall portion 8316, and in this posture, the other arm is placed. The moving magnet Ma82 of the above is brought close to the fixed magnet Ma81. Therefore, the magnetic force (attraction force due to) between the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 becomes so large that it cannot be ignored, and the resistance when rotating the tilting device 8310 becomes large.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), when the tilting device 8310 is swiftly rotated by a predetermined amount from the ascending position, the inertial acting member 7319c stays in inertia, and the inertial acting member 7319c has one arm of the acting member 8319a and a curved wall. It enters between the portion 8316 and the acting member 8319a is rotated against the urging force of the torsion spring 7319b (FIG. 47 (a) is rotated clockwise). As a result, the moving magnet Ma82 arranged on the other arm portion is separated from the fixed magnet Ma81, and the magnetic force between the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 becomes negligibly small.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 8310 is operated slowly, the inertial acting member 8319c moves at the same speed as the upper cover 8311 (stops relative to the upper cover 8311). Therefore, it is possible to secure a large rotational resistance felt by the player when the tilting device 8310 is slowly rotated, and to reduce the rotational resistance felt by the player when the tilting device 8310 is quickly rotated.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 8310 is slowly operated, for example, the tilting device 8310 is maintained at a predetermined position, the rotational resistance is increased to facilitate maintenance, while when the tilting device 8310 is pushed in at once, the tilting device 8310 is tilted. When the operation of the device 8310 becomes quick, the rotation resistance and the rotation resistance can be reduced, and the force required for pushing the tilting device 8310 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operation load when the player operates the tilting device 8310.

In the inertial action member 7319c, the surface of the curved wall portion 8316 on the side of contact with the inner peripheral surface has a shape along the arc shape of the inner peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 8316, and when it moves relative to the upper cover 8311. Since it moves along the peripheral surface of the curved wall portion 8316 (moves in the same direction as the rotation direction of the tilting device 8310), it is moved up at the position where the moving distance with respect to the rotation angle of the tilting device 8310 is maximum (maximum diameter position). It is configured to be able to move along the moving direction of the cover 8311, which makes it easy to utilize the inertia.

Therefore, even when the rotation angle of the tilting device 8310 is small, the inertial acting member 7319c can be easily moved relative to the upper cover 8311, and the rotation resistance can be easily changed by the magnetic force.

Even if the inertial acting member 7319c is displaced upward when the tilting device 8310 reaches the descending position vigorously, the tilting device 8310 returns upward after the player releases the tilting device 8310. Since the inertial acting member 7319c is moved downward by inertia as it operates, the moving magnet Ma82 and the fixed magnet Ma81 are attracted when the tilting device 8310 returns. As a result, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 8310 pushed in at once from returning vigorously, and to produce a profound feeling due to the slow return operation of the tilting device 8310.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In the first embodiment, the case where the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is determined by the posture in which the urging force changes has been described, but the operating device 9300 in the ninth embodiment rotates the tilting device 9310 ( A case will be described in which the tilting device 9310 is locked when the tilting device 9310 is reached at the start point of the pedal operation, and the tilting device 9310 is translated in order to release the lock. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

48 (a), FIG. 48 (b), FIG. 49 (a), FIG. 49 (b) and FIG. 50 are tilting devices according to the ninth embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a). It is sectional drawing of 9310. In FIG. 48 (a), the tilting device 9310 is arranged in the ascending position, and in FIG. 48 (b), the tilting device 9310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the ascending position in FIG. 49 (b). In a), the tilting device 9310 is translated from the state shown in FIG. 48 (b) to the back side by a predetermined amount, and in FIG. 49 (b), the tilting device 9310 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a). In FIG. 50, the state in which the tilting device 9310 is quickly rotated (tilted) to the descending position is a position 3 ° from the ascending position from the state in which the tilting device 9310 is arranged in the descending position (the state shown in FIG. 48 (b) and the tilting device 9310). The state of being restored to (only the front-back position is different) is shown in the figure.

Further, in FIGS. 48 (a), 48 (b), 49 (a), 49 (b), and 50, the vicinity of the rotation shaft O1 is the recessed bearing portion 9361a (tilting device 9310) of the lower case 9360. The cross section including the axially supporting portion) is partially viewed as a cross section.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the tilting device 9310 includes an extended half-shaft portion 313c (see FIG. 9) of the upper cover 9311 and an extended half-shaft portion 331c (see FIG. 9) of the shaft cover 330. A shaft fixing member BR9 having a cup-shaped member to be fitted and having a notched surface BR9a having a part of a circle having a radius r1 cut out in a straight line, and a shaft member 340 (see FIG. 10). It is provided with a torsion spring 9343 that is wound around and gives a urging force to the tilting device 9310 in the rotational direction and the front-rear direction.

The upper cover 9311 includes a moving magnet Ma9 which is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the curved wall portion 9316 and is elastically supported so as to be movable in the radial direction of the curved wall portion 9316. The moving magnet Ma9 is made movable in a direction close to the curved wall portion 9316 by the centrifugal force generated by the rotation of the tilting device 9310.

The shaft fixing member BR9 of the tilting device 9310 is configured to be able to translate the inside of the recessed bearing portion 9361a of the lower case 9360 in the front-rear direction. That is, the concave bearing portion 9361a has a shape (an arc having a radius r1 (an arc for 90 °) formed when the outer circle of the shaft fixing member BR9 is translated by a distance L1) in the front-rear direction (FIG. 48 (a)). ) Are arranged in pairs (left and right), and their lower ends are formed in the front-back direction (the shape connected by a straight line with a distance L1 in the front-back direction (left and right in FIG. 48 (a))).

The upper case 9370, which is fastened and fixed to the upper side of the lower case 9360 and pivotally supports the tilting device 9310, includes a recessed bearing portion 9371 which is arranged to face the concave bearing portion 9361a of the lower case 9360 and supports the shaft fixing member BR9.

The recessed bearing portion 9371 has a shape occupied when the shaft fixing member BR9 is moved in the front-rear direction in a posture in which the cutout surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 is in a state along the front-rear direction (FIG. 48 (a) left-right direction). Based on the above, the arc portion of the shaft fixing member BR9 is configured to be recessed with an arc having a size capable of rotating with the central portion facing upward. That is, the concave bearing portion 9371 is configured to have a shape in which the arcs at both front and rear ends and the arcs at the center are connected by a locking plane 9371a extending along the front-rear direction.

The lower case 9360 has a push-back wall portion 9361h having a predetermined width in the vertical direction and extending in the left-right direction on the front side of the tubular receiving portion 361c, and the lower case 9360 is stretched rearward from the power acting device 363 on the front side of the rubber plate GR1. A locking rubber member 9361i, which is arranged in a protruding manner and has rubber elasticity, is provided.

The torsion spring 9343 is arranged so that one arm portion 9343a is formed from a bent shape at the tip and is in contact with the push-back wall portion 9361h of the lower case 9360, and the other arm portion 9343b is a rotation shaft of the tilting device 9310. It is locked to the convex portion arranged on the upper cover 311 diagonally above O1 (upper left in FIG. 48), and an urging force is generated in the direction in which both arms are opened. That is, the urging force acts in the direction of returning the tilting device 9310 to the ascending position.

The locking rubber member 9361i is at a position where the tilting device 9310 interferes with the curved member 350 when the tilting device 9310 is arranged at the front end of the recessed bearing portion 9361a, while the tilting device 9310 is located behind the recessed bearing portion 9361a. When it is arranged at the side end portion, it is arranged at a position where interference with the bending member 350 is avoided (the comb-shaped portion 352 in the state where the tilting device 9310 is arranged at the front side end portion of the recessed bearing portion 9361a). Is arranged between the rotation locus of the above and the rotation locus of the comb-shaped portion 352 in a state where the tilting device 9310 is arranged at the rear end portion of the recessed bearing portion 9361a).

As a result, the tilting device 9310 causes the locking rubber member 9361i to be tilted for some reason (for example, the locking plane 9371a is worn out and the shaft fixing member BR9 cannot be locked). It can function as a stopper to stop the rotation of the tilting device 9310 when it is over-rotated while being arranged at the front end of the 9361a. Further, by forming the locking rubber member 9361i from a rubber material, a sufficient amount of deformation can be secured, so that a member (curved member 350 or the like) whose shape of the tilting device 9310 is strictly controlled is deformed. Can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in a state where the tilting device 9310 is arranged in the raised position, the shaft fixing member BR9 is the front end portion (left end portion of FIG. 48 (a)) of the recessed bearing portion 9361a of the lower case. ), And a gap is formed between the cutout surface BR9a and the locking plane 9371a at an angle of 3 ° with respect to the rotation axis O1.

When a load is applied to the tilting device 9310 in the direction of the arrow F1 from the state of FIG. 48A, the tilting device 9310 rotates. When the tilting device 9310 is rotated (tilted) by 3 ° from the state of being arranged in the raised position, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the cutout surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 and the locking plane 9371a of the upper case become By abutting on the surface, the rotation of the shaft fixing member BR9 is stopped, and the movement of the tilting device 9310 is stopped.

Therefore, as described above in the first embodiment, as compared with the case where the player switches the operation method by the load given from the tilting device 310, in the present embodiment, the tilting is performed in the push operation region of 3 ° from the ascending position. Since the device 9310 is stopped, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player cannot recognize the change in the load given by the tilting device 9310 and erroneously operates the device 9310.

In order to further rotate the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 48 (b), as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the tilting device 9310 is moved to the back side in the direction of the arrow F2 (to the right in FIG. 48 (b)). ), It is necessary to release the contact between the notched surface BR9a and the locking plane 9371a. In the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), one arm portion 9343a of the torsion spring 9343 is pressed against the push-back wall portion 9361h and deforms by a predetermined amount.

Here, since the directions of the arrow F1 and the arrow F2 are different, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 9310 from being translated to the back side while the tilting device 9310 is rotating. Further, in order to translate the tilting device 9310 before rotating it, it is possible to push the vicinity of the rotating shaft O1 to the back side, but the tilting device 9310 is a device that rotates and operates on the side far from the rotating shaft O1. Since the operation load is smaller when pressed, it is possible to recommend the player to push the opposite side of the rotation axis O1 (the upper end of the tilting device 9310), and the tilting device 9310 may move in translation before rotating. It can be suppressed from occurring.

By further rotating the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the tilting device 9310 can be pedaled to the lowered position as shown in FIG. 49 (b). Here, when the pedal is operated in a mode of slowly (less than a predetermined speed) displacement of the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the state in which the moving magnet Ma 9 is separated from the curved wall portion 9316 is maintained. Therefore, the attractive force generated between the fixed magnet Ma2 and the fixed magnet Ma2 becomes large, and the rotational resistance at the time of pedal operation can be secured.

On the other hand, when the pedal is operated in such a manner that the tilting device 9310 is quickly displaced (at a predetermined speed or higher) from the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the moving magnet Ma 9 has a centrifugal force as shown in FIG. 49 (b). It is possible to reduce the attractive force generated between the moving magnet Ma9 and the fixed magnet Ma2 during the movement of the tilting device 9310 so as to be negligible. That is, it is possible to reduce the rotational resistance during pedal operation.

Therefore, the rotational resistance of the tilting device 9310 can be changed by the displacement speed of the tilting device 9310 during pedal operation. According to the present embodiment, since the rotational resistance increases due to the magnetic force when the tilting device 9310 is operated slowly, it is easy to perform the operation of maintaining the tilting device 9310 at a predetermined position, and when the tilting device 9310 is operated quickly, the magnetic force is used. By reducing the rotational resistance, it is possible to reduce the operational load felt by the player by reducing the load felt when the player pushes the tilting device 9310 at once.

When the player releases the tilting device 9310 from the state shown in FIG. 49B, the tilting device 9310 starts the return operation toward the initial position. This return operation occurs at various speeds depending on the configuration of the torsion spring 9343, but the rotation and translation occur at the same time.

That is, when the displacement of the torsion spring 9343 in the rotation direction returns, the tilting device 9310 operates in the rotation direction along the arrow Ta, and one arm portion 9343a of the torsion spring 9343 is pressed against the push-back wall portion 9361h. By returning the displacement caused by the above, the tilting device 9310 operates in the translational direction along the arrow Tb.

Here, as described above, when the tilting device 9310 is rotated from the ascending position, the rotation operation is performed first, the translational operation is performed from the position where the tilting device 9310 is locked, and finally the rotation operation is performed. As you can see, the stages of operation were clearly separated. On the other hand, the return operation of the tilting device 9310 is a mixture of the rotation operation generated along the arrow Ta and the translation operation generated along the arrow Tb. Therefore, the path that the tilting device 9310 moves when the tilting device 9310 is pushed in and the path that the tilting device 9310 moves when the tilting device 9310 returns can be different.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 50, the elastic modulus of the torsion spring 9343 is such that the contact between the notched surface BR9a of the shaft fixing member BR9 and the locking plane 9371a on the back side (right side of FIG. 50) is avoided. Is adjusted.

As a result, while maintaining the action of stopping the tilting device 9310 in the middle of the moving range at the time of pushing, it is possible to return at the same speed without stopping at the time of returning, so that the tilting device 9310 stops in the middle. In comparison with, the time required for the return operation from the descending position to the ascending position can be shortened.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player when operating the tilting device 310 with the pedal can be switched between the reaction force generated by the torsion spring 343 and the reaction force generated by the coil spring 362b has been described. In the operation device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment, the moving end member 10362d that supports the lower end portion of the coil spring 362b is configured to be movable, so that the operation amount for pedaling the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 after the operation can be performed. The amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b can be changed when the arrangement of the coil springs is the same. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 10300 according to the tenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated and the action claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end portion of the piston member 362a. FIG. 51 (b) shows FIG. 51 (a). The state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by a predetermined angle pedal from the indicated state and tilted is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 51 (a), a state in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 51 (a), first position) is shown, and in FIG. 51 (b), the stepped member 10362f is on the rear side. (Fig. 51 (b) right side, second position) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the operation device 10300 has the above-mentioned tilting device 310 and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and is tilted. The tilting member is between the lower case 10360 forming the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 10360 having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and is arranged facing the lower case 10360. The tilting device 310 is fixed to the lower case 10360 in a manner in which the 310 is arranged, and the tilting device 310 is abutted against the tilting device 310 to determine the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is abutted on the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). It mainly includes an upper case 370 (see FIG. 9).

The lower case 10360 will be described. The lower case 10360 is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper side open, and is movably supported in the vertical direction (FIG. 51 (a) vertical direction). It mainly includes an urging device 10362 having a piston member 362a, and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged.

The urging device 10362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 through the acting claw portion 332, and is a bottomed cylinder that is operably supported in the vertical direction inside the tubular receiving portion 361c and is opened downward. The shape of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and the lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361, and the moving end, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the coil spring 362b from the lower end side and is supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A return spring 10362e disposed between the member 10362d, the moving end member 10362d and the bottom lid member 362c and urging the moving end member 10362d upward, and a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d ( A stepped member 10362f that is movable between a first position near the moving end member 10362d and a second position far from the moving end member 10362d from the front-rear direction (FIG. 51 (a) left-right direction), and a bottom support. It mainly includes a drive solenoid SOL10 that is fastened and fixed to the member 361 and drives the stepped member 10362f along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d.

Since the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d are orthogonal to each other in the operating direction, it is possible to prevent an impact generated when the stepped member 10362f is moved from occurring in the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the moving end member 10362d from being directly loaded by driving the drive solenoid SOL10.

A coil spring 362b is interposed between the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d and the tilting device 310 when the load is transmitted. Therefore, even if the player performs a violent operation such as hitting the tilting device 310, the transmission speed of the load transmitted to the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d by the action of the coil spring 362b as a cushioning material and Since the size can be reduced, damage to the stepped member 10362f and the moving end member 10362d can be prevented.

The moving end member 10362d is a portion facing the stepped member 10362f, and the upper surface in contact with the coil spring 362b is formed from a planar shape orthogonal to the moving direction (vertical direction) and protrudes toward the stepped member 10362f. A locking portion 10362d1 is provided. The moving amount of the moving end member 10362d from the upper end position (see FIG. 51 (a)) to the lower end position (see FIG. 54) is set to be equivalent to the moving amount of the piston member 362a.

The amount of protrusion of the locked portion 10362d is defined in relation to the stepped member 10362f. That is, when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the moving end member 10362d interferes in the moving direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51 (a)), while the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position. If this is the case, the amount of protrusion is such that the moving end member 10362d does not overlap in the moving direction (vertical direction in FIG. 51 (a)).

Therefore, in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the first position, the moving end member 10362d is vertically engaged with the stepped member 10362f, while in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position. The moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 10362f and moves up and down in conjunction with the pedal operation of the tilting device 310.

The return spring 10362e is formed of a spring member having an extremely small elastic modulus as compared with the coil spring 362b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d can freely move up and down, the coil spring 362b is more than the coil spring 362b. The return spring 10362e expands and contracts first (the return spring 10362e expands and contracts while the coil spring 362b is maintained at its natural length).

On the other hand, the return spring 10362e is larger than the total weight of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d when the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 51 (a)). Designed to generate forces. Therefore, when the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 51B and the player releases the hand, the moving end member 10362d returns to the upper end position by the urging force of the return spring 10362e.

As described above, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the player releases the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, and moves down in conjunction with the player performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. In other words, the moving end member 10362d is displaced as the player pushes in the tilting device 310.

The stepped member 10362f has a plate-shaped main body BD extending vertically and a plurality of protruding portions (in order from the upper side) protruding forward (left side in FIG. 51 (a)) from the main body BD. 1 protrusion MT1, second protrusion MT2, third protrusion MT3) are mainly provided.

The protruding portions MT1 to MT3 are vertically adjacent to each other on the side surface of the main body portion BD, and the vertical dimensions on the root side thereof are the same. That is, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the protruding portions MT1 to MT3 are arranged in each region (upper region BDU, middle region BDM, lower region BDB) that divides the vertical dimension of the main body portion BD into three equal parts. Will be done.

In the present embodiment, the lower end position of the upper region BDU and the upper end position of the middle region BDM coincide with each other, and the lower end position of the middle region BDM and the upper end position of the lower region BDB coincide with each other.

The first protrusion MT1 extends from the upper end position of the upper region BDU and inclines downward toward the front, and the first locking surface MT1a extends from the lower end position of the upper region BDU and inclines upward toward the front. It mainly comprises one guide surface MT1b, which intersects at the intersection position C1 of the protruding tip.

The first locking surface MT1a and the first guide surface MT1b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position.

For example, as the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged above the intersection position C1, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 becomes the first. 1 Guided to the upper end side of the locking surface MT1a, the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, and at the same time, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the first locking surface MT1a. To reach. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the first locking surface MT1a in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and remains in place.

Further, for example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C1 and above the lower end position of the first guide surface MT1b. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the first guide surface MT1b, and at the same time the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 leads to the first lead. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT1b. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the second locking surface MT2a described later in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member via the coil spring 362b. Even if given to 10362d, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its original position.

The intersection position C1 is set to a position lowered from the upper end position of the upper region BDU by a dimension of 1/5 of the vertical dimension of the upper region BDU.

The second protrusion MT2 extends from the upper end position of the middle region BDM and inclines downward toward the front, and the second locking surface MT2a extends from the lower end position of the middle region BDM and inclines upward toward the front. The two guide surfaces MT2b are mainly provided, and they intersect at the intersection position C2 of the protruding tip.

The second locking surface MT2a and the second guide surface MT2b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position.

For example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a and above the intersection position C2. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the upper end side of the second locking surface MT2a, the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, and at the same time, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 engages in the second position. It reaches the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the stop surface MT2a. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the second locking surface MT2a in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and remains in place.

Further, for example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C2 and above the lower end position of the second guide surface MT2b. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the second guide surface MT2b, and at the same time the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 leads to the second lead. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT2b.

Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the third locking surface MT3a described later in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member via the coil spring 362b. Even if given to 10362d, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in its original position.

The intersection position C2 is set to a position lowered from the upper end position of the middle region BDM by a dimension of 2/5 of the vertical dimension of the middle region BDM. That is, compared to the vertical direction (moving direction of the moving end member 10362f) from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the crossing position C1, the vertical direction from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C2. The directional dimension is set larger.

The third protrusion MT3 extends from the upper end position of the lower region BDB and inclines downward toward the front, and the third locking surface MT3a extends from the lower end position of the lower region BDB and inclines upward toward the front. It is mainly provided with the three guide surfaces MT3b, which intersect at the intersection position C3 of the protruding tip.

The third locking surface MT3a and the third guide surface MT3b have a function of fixing the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position.

For example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the upper end position of the third locking surface MT2a and above the intersection position C3. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the upper end side of the third locking surface MT3a, the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, and at the same time, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 engages in the third position. It reaches the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the stop surface MT3a. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the third locking surface MT3a in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if given, the moving end member 10362d does not move and remains in place.

Further, for example, the stepped member 10362f moves from the second position to the first position in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C3 and above the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b. Along with this, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is guided to the lower end side of the third guide surface MT2b, and at the same time the stepped member 10362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 leads to the third guide. It reaches the lower end position (root position, rear end position) of the surface MT3b.

In the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the moving end member 10362d is supported by the bottom lid member 362c (since the bottom lid member 362c is formed from a shape that supports the moving end member 10362d). Even if a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in the same position.

The intersection position C3 is set to a position lowered from the upper end position of the lower region BDB by a dimension of 3/5 of the vertical dimension of the lower region BDB. That is, compared to the vertical direction (moving direction of the moving end member 10362f) from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C2, the vertical direction from the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a to the crossing position C3. The directional dimension is set larger.

Therefore, the vertical dimension from the upper end position of each region BDU, BDM, BDB to the corresponding intersection positions C1 to C3 increases as it goes downward. That is, the amount of movement required for the moving end member 10362d to pass through the crossing positions C1 to C3 while the stepped member 10362f is retracted to the second position can be increased toward the lower region.

As a result, when the stepped member 10362f is controlled to reciprocate between the first position and the second position at regular intervals, it corresponds to the operation speed when the player operates the tilting device 310 with a pedal. Therefore, the position where the moving end member 10362d is locked can be changed, and the load applied to the player can be changed, but the details will be described later.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timed change of the drive solenoid SOL10 in the first operation pattern. In the first operation pattern, the stepped member 10362f is held in the first position for 0.1 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL10, and then the stepped member 10362f is released by releasing the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.2 seconds, the stepped member 10362f operates in a constant pattern.

In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated (pushing operation from the state shown in FIG. 51 (a)) by the force of a general player to reach the descending position, a minimum of 0.6 seconds is required. In this embodiment, the elastic modulus of the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b is set.

Further, the displacement generated in the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the locking is released is directly generated in the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b.

As described above, the state change of the solenoid SOL10 occurs a plurality of times in 0.6 seconds required for pedaling the tilting device 310. Therefore, even when the player pedals the tilting device 310 at high speed (for example, tapping it with full force), the stepped member 10362f is once first before the tilting device 310 reaches the descending position. Placed in position. In other words, the moving end member 10362d does not move completely (move from the upper end position to the lower end position) while the stepped member 10362f is maintained at the second position.

Since the period in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position is shorter than the period required for the restoration of the spring, the amount of restoration of the coil spring 362c while the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position Ignore about. That is, the moving amount of the moving end member 10362d is equivalent to the moving amount of the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position.

Next, as a first operation mode, a case where the operation speed is smaller than the specified boundary value will be described. Here, since the period during which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersection position C1, the locked portion 10362d is continuously maintained. By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is again arranged at the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the crossing position C1 is 1/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is smaller than 1.4 degrees. In the case of the first operation mode in which the operation speed (first speed V1), in other words, the tilting device 310 is operated at an operation speed in which the time until the pedal is completely operated is longer than 3 seconds, the locked portion 10362d1 is used. Maintained at the top position.

In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position (see FIG. 51 (a)), the moving amount of the tilting device 310 and the displacement of the coil spring 362b are equivalent. In this embodiment, in this case, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 is maximized.

On the other hand, when the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is operated at an operating speed larger than 1.4 degrees, in other words, the tilting device 310 is operated at an operating speed shorter than 3 seconds until the pedal is completely operated. , The locked portion 10362d1 may move below the intersection position C1.

Next, a second operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 10300. In FIG. 53 (a), a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating a predetermined angle pedal from the state shown in FIG. 51 (b) is shown, and the stepped member 10362f is on the front side (left side in FIG. 53 (a), first. The state of being arranged at the position) is shown in the figure. In the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. 53 (a), the moving end member 10362d can move to the upper end position of the second protruding portion MT2.

Here, since the period for which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersection position C2 during that period, it is continued. By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged at the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C2 is 2/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is larger than 1.4 degrees. And the operation speed smaller than 2.8 degrees (second speed V2), in other words, the operation speed that the time until the tilting device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than 3 seconds. In the case of the second operation mode operated by, the locked portion 10362d1 can move to the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a (see FIG. 53A), the displacement of the coil spring 362b is smaller than the moving amount of the tilting device 310. Therefore, when operating in the second operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 becomes smaller than in the case of operating in the first operation mode.

Next, a third operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 10300. FIG. 53 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating a predetermined angle pedal from the state shown in FIG. 53 (a), and the stepped member 10362f is on the front side (left side in FIG. 53 (b), first. The state of being arranged at the position) is shown in the figure. In the third operation mode, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the moving end member 10362d can move to the upper end position of the third protrusion MT3.

Here, since the period in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained above the intersection position C3 during that period, it is continued. By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged at the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C3 is 3/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is larger than 2.8 degrees. And, the operation speed smaller than 4.2 degrees (third speed V3), in other words, the time until the tilting device 310 is fully operated by the pedal is longer than 1.0 second and shorter than 1.5 seconds. In the case of the third operation mode operated at the operation speed, the locked portion 10362d1 can move to the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a.

In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position of the third locking surface MT3a (see FIG. 53 (b)), the displacement of the coil spring 362b is the second displacement as compared with the moving amount of the tilting device 310. It becomes smaller than the operation mode of. Therefore, when operating in the third operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 becomes smaller than in the case of operating in the first operation mode or the second operation mode.

Next, a fourth operation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of the operating device 10300. FIG. 54 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating a predetermined angle pedal from the state shown in FIG. 53 (b), and the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side of FIG. 54, first position). The state is illustrated. In the fourth operation mode, as shown in FIG. 54, the moving end member 10362d can move to the lower end position of the third protrusion MT3. In the state shown in FIG. 54, since the piston member 362a and the moving end member 10362d are arranged at the lower end positions, the displacement of the coil spring 362b has returned to the state at the start of pedal operation (see FIG. 51 (a)). Therefore, when the state shown in FIG. 53 (b) changes to the state shown in FIG. 54, the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is greatly reduced.

Here, since the period during which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position is 0.2 seconds, if the locked portion 10362d1 of the moving end member 10362d is maintained below the intersection position C3, it is continued. By arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position, the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged at the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. Since the vertical dimension from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the crossing position C3 is 3/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.2 seconds is larger than 4.2 degrees. The operation speed (fourth speed V4), in other words, in the case of the fourth operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is operated at an operation speed shorter than 1.0 second until the pedal is completely operated, the locked portion 10362d1 Can move to the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b.

In this case, since the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the lower end position of the third guide surface MT3b (see FIG. 54), the displacement of the coil spring 362b is larger than the moving amount of the tilting device 310 from the third operation mode. Also increases and becomes smaller. Therefore, when operating in the fourth operation mode, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b with respect to the posture of the tilting device 310 is compared with the case of operating in the first operation mode, the second operation mode, or the third operation mode. Becomes smaller.

In the above description, the fact that the moving end member can be moved to a predetermined position includes, for example, a case where the moving end member 10362d can be moved to a predetermined position by performing a continuous striking operation or the like during the push-in effective period.

FIG. 55 shows the moving end member at the end of the operation corresponding to the change in the time required to pedal the tilting device 10310 from the ascending position to the descending position (when the tilting device 10310 is arranged in the descending position) in the present embodiment. It is a figure which showed the change of the position where 10362d can be arranged. Note that FIG. 55 describes a case where the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern.

In FIG. 55, the vertical axis shows the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d, and the horizontal axis shows the time required for pedaling the tilting device 10310 (assuming that it is operated at a constant speed). As the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d goes downward, the amount of deformation of the coil spring 362b is reduced, so that the load (reaction force) given to the player who pedals the tilting device 10310 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 55, when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern, the load given to the player can be changed by the operation speed when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal. In other words, as the operation speed increases (the time required to operate the tilting device 10310 for pedaling decreases), the reaction force applied to the player can be reduced.

This reduction in reaction force is not caused by, for example, changing the amount of contraction of the coil spring 362b before the operation of the tilting device 310 in advance (not caused by changing the elastic modulus), but is not caused by changing the elastic modulus of the tilting device 310. It is caused by changing the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b with respect to the operation amount.

Therefore, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b can be changed according to the operation timing of the player. In other words, the load given to the player can be changed depending on the operation mode (first operation mode to the fourth operation mode) while keeping the state of the coil spring 362b equivalent before the operation. Therefore, for example, the coil spring. Even when the 362b is visible, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the reaction force changes in appearance.

Further, when the operation pattern of the solenoid SOL10 is changed from the first operation pattern described above, the reaction force applied to the player may change in a mode different from the above-mentioned mode even if the operation is performed in the same operation mode. ..

For example, a second operation pattern in which the period in which the stepped member 10632f is maintained in the second position is 0.05 seconds, unlike the first operation pattern, will be described.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a timed change of the drive solenoid SOL10 in the second operation pattern. In the second operation pattern, the stepped member 10362f is held in the first position for 0.25 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL10, and then the stepped member 10362f is released from the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.05 seconds, the stepped member 10362f operates in a constant pattern.

In the second operation pattern, as in the first operation pattern, the start point of excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is generated at intervals of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp the difference between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern from the operation sound generated when the drive solenoid SOL10 is excited and the operation vibration.

In this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is tilted by about 21 degrees. The vertical dimension from the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a to the tolerance position C1 is 1/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, and is from the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a to the intersection position C2. Since the vertical dimension is 2/15 of the vertical length of the main body BD, the tilt angle per 0.05 seconds is larger than 1.4 degrees and smaller than 2.8 degrees, in other words, tilting. When the time required to fully operate the pedal of the device 310 is shorter than 0.75 seconds and longer than 0.375 seconds, the locked portion 10362d1 is maintained at the upper end position of the second locking surface MT2a.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if a general player pedals the tilting device 310 with all one's might, it takes 0.6 seconds to fully operate the tilting device 310 to the descending position. Therefore, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the second operation pattern, the moving end member 10362d cannot be moved below the tolerance position C2 even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in as much as possible.

Further, even if the operation pattern is different, the difference in the time for maintaining the stepped member 10632f at the second position is as short as 0.2 seconds or less, so that the player can see the difference from the appearance and the operation sound. It can be difficult to notice.

As described above, it is difficult to grasp the point that the state of the coil spring 362b does not change before the operation and the difference in the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 that switches the load applied to the player according to the operation mode by switching the operation pattern. From the point, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the difference in the magnitude of the load given to the player due to the difference in the game mode even before the operation of the tilting device 310, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game. Can be prevented from being scraped.

That is, for example, the drive after the display "Hit the pedal as much as possible! If the reaction force is smaller than usual, chance!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the player is notified to urge the player to operate the tilting device 310. The operation of the solenoid SOL10 is controlled by, for example, the MPU 201 in an arbitrary operation pattern.

Here, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the first operation pattern, it is slower for the player to operate the tilting device 310 (for example, to operate it in the fourth operation mode described above). Compared with the case of operating the tilting device 310 (for example, the case of operating in the first operation mode described above), the load given to the player can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the second operation pattern, the moving end member 10362d does not reach the lower end position even if the player operates the tilting device 310 as much as possible, and the second locking surface. Since it stays at the upper end position of MT2a (see FIG. 53A), the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 becomes larger than that when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern.

In this case, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is larger than usual (compared to the case where the moving end member 10362d is locked to the upper end position of the first locking surface MT1a of the stepped member 10362f. Although it is small, the reaction force is larger than when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first operation pattern, so there was no chance at the stage when the player recognized the difference in the load (so-called "" You can notice that it was a "solenoid production").

Since the difference in reaction force can be noticed only by the player who pushed the tilting device 310 according to the notification, the player can be encouraged to push the tilting device 310 according to the notification (participation of the player). You can improve your motivation).

By switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10, it is possible to switch between multiple types of reaction forces corresponding to the player's operating speed, so it is possible to return multiple types of loads to the player who pushed in as notified. can.

These operation patterns may be switched, for example, in the third symbol display device 81 while the display prompting the tilting device 310 to be pushed is continued for a certain period of time. Hereinafter, an example of switching the operation pattern will be described.

For example, in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to dynamically display the timing of pushing the tilting device 310 as another display in addition to the display prompting the pushing of the tilting device 310 such as "press the button" for a certain period of time. For example, a sphere that moves in close proximity in the opposite direction on the same path is displayed, and an image such as "when the spheres overlap, push it all the way" is displayed.

By switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 in accordance with these displays and timings, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the operation of the tilting device 310.

For example, in the first control example of the drive solenoid SOL10, the drive solenoid SOL10 is operated in the first operation pattern at the time or period when the display indicates that the drive solenoid SOL10 is pushed in as much as possible, and the second operation pattern is performed in a short period before and after that. The stepped member 10362f is maintained at the first position by maintaining the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 during the rest of the period.

It should be noted that the first control example is executed, for example, in the case where a display prompting the tilting device 310 to be pushed is performed in an effect performed with a fluctuation having a large expectation degree (for example, a jackpot expectation degree of 60% or more).

On the other hand, for example, in the second control example of the drive solenoid SOL10, the drive solenoid operates in the second operation pattern in a short period before and after the time or period when the timing is set to push in as much as possible by the display, and the drive solenoid operates in the other period. By maintaining the excitation of the SOL10, the stepped member 10362f is maintained at the first position.

The second control example is executed when, for example, a display prompting the tilting device 310 to be pushed is performed in an effect performed with a fluctuation in which the expectation degree is not large (for example, the jackpot expectation degree is less than 60%). ..

Therefore, if it is possible to grasp whether the drive solenoid SOL10 is controlled by the first control example or the second control example, it is possible to grasp the magnitude of the expectation. On the other hand, in the first control example and the second control example, the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL10 is the same at the time when the timing is set to the full push or when the period is excluded.

Therefore, the tilting device 310 may be pushed in at a timing other than the operation of pushing the tilting device as notified at the timing of pushing it all the way or at a timing other than the timing of pushing it all the way (for example, at the timing of pushing it all the way or at a timing other than the period). Whether the drive solenoid SOL10 is operating in the first control example even if the tilting device 310 is operated at the timing of pushing in as much as possible or at the first speed V1). It is not possible to grasp whether or not it is operating in the control example of 2. As a result, the player's concentration on the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

In the present embodiment, when the drive solenoid SOL10 operates in the first control example or the second control example, when the pushing of the tilting device 310 is detected by the various sensors S1 to S3, after a predetermined time has elapsed ( For example, after 1 second has elapsed), the drive solenoid SOL10 is maintained in an excited state (shifts to a control mode different from that of the first control example or the second control example).

Therefore, if the tilting device 310 is accidentally pushed in before the timing or period when the tilting device 310 is pushed in as much as possible, the drive solenoid is operated even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in again when the timing is set to be pushed in as much as possible or during the period. It is not possible to distinguish whether the operation of the SOL 10 is the first control example or the second control example. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the pushing operation before the pushing timing of the tilting device 310, and it is possible to improve the concentration of the player who operates the tilting device 310.

On the other hand, in the production where the degree of expectation is extremely low, the drive solenoid SOL10 is excited when the notification for pushing the tilting device 310 is given or when the notification for pushing is not performed (such as in the case of the demo screen). Control may be performed to release the stepped member 10362f for a long time (maintain the stepped member 10362f in the second position). In this case, regardless of the difference in the operation mode, the moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 10362f, and the moving end member 10362d is lowered in conjunction with the pushing of the tilting device 310, so that the coil spring 362b expands and contracts. Almost never occurs. Therefore, the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be minimized. As a result, the reaction force given to the player by the operation (trial push, etc.) of the tilting device 310 when the degree of expectation is low can be reduced, and the player's feeling of fatigue due to the operation can be reduced.

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. In the first embodiment, the case where the load applied to the player when operating the tilting device 310 with the pedal can be switched between the reaction force generated by the torsion spring 343 and the reaction force generated by the coil spring 362b has been described. In the operation device 11300 according to the eleventh embodiment, the moving end member 10362d that supports the lower end of the coil spring 362b is configured to be movable, so that the operation amount for pedaling the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 after the operation can be performed. The amount of displacement of the coil spring 362b can be changed when the arrangement of the coil springs is the same. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

57 (a) and 57 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 11300 according to the eleventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 57 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated and the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end portion of the piston member 362a. FIG. 57 (b) shows FIG. 57 (a). The state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by a predetermined angle pedal from the indicated state and tilted is shown in the figure. Further, in FIG. 57 (a), a state in which the stepped member 11362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57 (a)) is shown, and in FIG. 57 (b), the stepped member 11362f is on the rear side (FIG. 57 (a)). b) The state of being arranged on the right side) is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the operation device 11300 has the above-mentioned tilting device 310 and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and is tilted. The tilting member is between the lower case 11360 forming the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 11360 having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and is arranged facing the lower case 11360. The tilting device 310 is fixed to the lower case 11360 in a manner in which the 310 is arranged, and the tilting device 310 is abutted to determine the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is abutted on the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). It mainly includes an upper case 370 (see FIG. 9).

The lower case 11360 will be described. The lower case 11360 is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper side open, and is movably supported in the vertical direction (FIG. 57 (a) vertical direction). Mainly includes an urging device 11362 having a piston member 362a, and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged.

The urging device 11362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 through the acting claw portion 332, similarly to the urging device 10362 described above in the tenth embodiment, and is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 in the vertical direction inside the tubular receiving portion 361c. A bottomed cylindrical piston member 362a that is operably supported and opened downward, a coil spring 362b that is accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 in a manner of covering the lower opening of the tubular receiving portion 361c, and the coil spring 362b are arranged so as to be in contact with each other from the lower end side in the vertical direction. A return spring that is disposed between the moving end member 10362d that is slidably movable and is supported by the bottom receiving member 361, and the moving end member 10362d and the bottom lid member 362c, and urges the moving end member 10362d upward. In addition to mainly providing 10362e, the first position close to the moving end member 10362d and the moving end member from the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d (front-back direction, FIG. 57 (a) left-right direction). A stepped member 11362f that is movable between a second position far from 10362d and a stepped member 11362f that is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 and is fixed to the bottom receiving member 361 along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. It mainly includes a drive solenoid SOL11 for driving.

Since the stepped member 11362f and the moving end member 10362d are orthogonal to each other in the operating direction, it is possible to suppress an impact generated when the stepped member 11362f is moved in the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the moving end member 10362d from being directly loaded by driving the drive solenoid SOL11.

The moving end member 10362d includes a locked portion 10362d1 which is a portion facing the stepped member 11362f and projects toward the stepped member 11362f.

The amount of protrusion of the locked portion 10362d is defined in relation to the stepped member 11362f. That is, when the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, the moving end member 10362d interferes in the moving direction (vertical direction in FIG. 57A), while the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the second position. If this is the case, the amount of protrusion is such that the moving end member 10362d does not overlap in the moving direction (vertical direction in FIG. 57A).

Therefore, in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged in the first position, the moving end member 10362d is vertically locked to the stepped member 11362f, while in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged in the second position. The moving end member 10362d is not locked to the stepped member 11362f and moves up and down in conjunction with the pedal operation of the tilting device 310.

The return spring 10362e is formed of a spring member having an extremely small elastic modulus as compared with the coil spring 362b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated in a state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d can freely move up and down, the coil spring 362b is more than the coil spring 362b. The return spring 10362e expands and contracts first (the return spring 10362e expands and contracts while the coil spring 362b is maintained at its natural length).

On the other hand, the return spring 10362e is larger than the total weight of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d when the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A). Designed to generate forces. Therefore, when the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is stopped from the state shown in FIG. 57B and the player releases the hand, the moving end member 10362d returns to the upper end position by the urging force of the return spring 10362e.

As described above, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the player releases the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, and moves down in conjunction with the player performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. In other words, the moving end member 10362d is displaced as the player pushes in the tilting device 310.

The stepped member 11362f has a plate-shaped main body BD extending vertically and a plurality of protruding portions (in order from the upper side, upper side) protruding forward (left side in FIG. 57 (a)) from the main body portion BD. It mainly includes a protruding portion MTU and a lower protruding portion MTB).

The protruding portions MTU and MTB are aligned vertically on the side surface of the main body portion BD at intervals, and the shapes of the portions protruding from the front side surface to the front side of the main body portion BD are the same. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the main body BD includes each region (upper half region BDHU, lower half region BDHU) that divides the vertical dimension into two equal parts, and in the present embodiment, the lower end position of the upper half region BDHU. And the upper end position of the lower half region BDHB. The protrusions MTU and MTB are arranged in the upper half region BDHU arranged on the upper side of each of these regions.

The upper protrusion MTU has an upper locking surface MT11a that extends from the upper end position of the upper half region BDHU and inclines downward toward the front, and one of the vertical dimensions of the main body BD downward from the upper end position of the upper half region. Mainly provided with a lower horizontal plane MT11b extending in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d from a position lowered by the dimension of / 10 to the front side, and they intersect at the crossing position C11 of the protruding tip. do. That is, the crossing position C11 is arranged at a position lowered by 1/10 of the vertical dimension of the main body portion BD from the upper end position of the main body portion BD.

The upper locking surface MT11a has a function of defining the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position. For example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged above the intersection position C11, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 moves as the stepped member 11362f moves from the second position to the first position. Guided to the upper end side of the upper locking surface MT11a, the stepped member 11362f reaches the first position, and at the same time, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 moves to the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the upper locking surface MT11a. To reach. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the upper locking surface MT11a in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if the moving end member 10362d is removed, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in the same position.

Further, for example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C11 and above the intersection position C12 described later, the moving end member 10362d is located at an intermediate position (see FIG. 57B). When the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, it is not supported at all until it reaches the position supported by the lower protrusion MTB), so that it corresponds to the operation amount of the tilting device 310. It is possible to move freely in the vertical direction.

The lower protruding portion MTB is formed with the upper locking surface MT11a of the upper protruding portion MTU, starting from the intersection of a point extending horizontally from the lower end position of the upper half region BDHU to the front side and a point extending vertically downward from the intersection position C11. The upper locking surface MT12a extending toward the main body BD at the same inclination angle (in other words, extending downward from the main body BD toward the above-mentioned intersection) and the upper half region BDHU. Mainly provided with a lower horizontal plane MT12b extending from the lower end position to the front side in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, and they intersect at the crossing position C12 of the protruding tip. That is, the crossing position C12 coincides with the intermediate position of the main body BD (the lower end position of the upper half region BDHU) in the horizontal direction. Further, the intersection position C11 and the intersection position C12 coincide with each other in the vertical direction.

The upper locking surface MT12a has a function of defining the position of the moving end member 10362d in a state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position.

For example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C11 and above the intersection position C12, when the stepped member 11362f reaches the first position, the protruding tip of the locked portion 10362d1 is on the upper side. It is possible to lock at the upper end position (root position, rear end position) of the locking surface MT12a. Since the locked portion 10362d1 is supported by the upper locking surface MT12a in a state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the first position, a downward load is applied to the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b. Even if the moving end member 10362d is removed, the moving end member 10362d does not move and is maintained in the same position.

Further, for example, in a state where the locked portion 10362d1 is arranged below the intersection position C12 (see FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b)), the moving end member 10362d has the moving end member 10362d. Since it is not supported at all until it reaches the lower end position, it can move freely in the vertical direction according to the operation amount of the tilting device 310.

Here, the vertical movable range of the moving end member 10362d is equivalent to the movable range in which the piston portion 362a moves in the vertical direction when the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal (the tilting device 310 is pedaled to the lower end position). When the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the lower end position during operation, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is the same as the state shown in FIG. 57 (a)).

That is, in a state where the locked portion 10362d is arranged below the intersection position C12, the game is played via the tilting device 310 regardless of the degree of pedal operation of the tilting device 310 (pushing angle of the tilting device 310). The urging force (reaction force) of the coil spring 362b given to the person does not change.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the moving end member 10362b is arranged on the upper side of the lower protruding portion MTB, the reaction force caused by the coil spring 362b increases as the degree of pedal operation increases. When the moving end member 10362b is arranged on the lower side of the lower protruding portion MTB, the reaction force caused by the coil spring 362b is reduced to the magnitude before the pedal operation.

Therefore, the type of load given to the player via the tilting device 310 is that the moving end member 10362b is arranged on the upper side of the lower protruding portion MTB, and the greater the degree (tilt angle) of pedaling the tilting device 310, the more the coil. The first load in the state where the displacement amount of the spring 362b becomes large and the reaction force changes (reaction force change state, see FIG. 57 (a) or FIG. 57 (b)), and the moving end member 10362b is the lower protruding portion MTB. Arranged on the lower side, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b does not change regardless of the degree of pedal operation of the tilting device 310, and the reaction force changes almost the same (only the reaction force changes of the torsion spring 343 and the return spring 10362e). It is switched by the second load of the state (reaction force invariant state, see FIG. 59 (a) or FIG. 59 (b)).

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a timed change of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the third operation pattern. In the third operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is held in the first position for 0.6 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL11, and then the stepped member 11362f is released from the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.2 seconds, the stepped member 11362f operates in a constant pattern.

In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated (pushing operation from the state shown in FIG. 57A) by the force of a general player to reach the descending position (see FIG. 59B). The elastic modulus of the torsion spring 343 and the coil spring 362b is set in such a manner that a minimum of 0.6 seconds is required.

Further, the displacement generated in the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 11362f is arranged at the second position and the locking is released is directly generated in the moving end member 10362d via the coil spring 362b.

As described above, in the third operation pattern by the solenoid SOL11, the tilting device 310 moves by half the moving range during the period (0.2 seconds) in which the stepped member 11362f is maintained in the retracted state. It is shorter than the required period (0.3 seconds) (0.2s <0.3s). Therefore, this is a case where the player pushes the tilting device 310 at the fastest speed (operates over 0.6 seconds to the lower end position) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57 (a)). However, while the stepped member 11362f moves from the first position to the second position and moves to the first position again, the moving end member 10362d does not move to the lower side of the lower protrusion MTB.

In addition, the stepped member 11362f is not arranged at the second position more than once in 0.6 seconds, which is the minimum required to fully operate the tilting device 310 with the pedal. Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 at the fastest speed (operates over 0.6 seconds to the lower end position) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57 (a)), the tilting device 310 is pushed in at the fastest speed. The stepped member 11362f is not arranged at the second position more than once during pushing.

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 at the fastest speed (operates to the lower end position over 0.6 seconds) from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57 (a)), the tilting device 310 is pushed in at the fastest speed. Regardless of the pushing timing, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is the above-mentioned first load (reaction force change state).

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is pushed from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a) to the lower end position over a time longer than 0.6 seconds, a plurality of stepped members 11362f are placed in the second position during the operation. In some cases, the moving end member 10362d may move to the lower side of the lower protrusion MTB. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 59, an operation mode (conditional slow speed operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 is pushed to the lower end position over a time longer than 0.6 seconds will be described.

59 (a) and 59 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 11300. Note that FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted by operating a predetermined angle pedal from the state shown in FIG. 57 (b), and FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted from the state shown in FIG. 59 (a). The state in which the tilting device 310 is operated by a predetermined angle pedal and reaches the lower end position is shown in the figure.

As described above, when the moving end member 10362d is supported by the protruding portions MTU and MTB, the upper and lower surfaces of the moving end member 10362d and the lower horizontal planes MT11b and MT12b directly below the moving end member 10362d are vertically supported. The minimum passing distance HMI, which is the distance in the direction, is 1/10 of the movable range of the moving end member.

For example, when the moving end member 10362d is started to descend from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A), the moving end member 10362d is moved while the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the second position. When the amount is less than the minimum passing distance HMI, the moving end member 10362d rises to a position supported by the upper protrusion MTU as the stepped member 11362f moves to the first position.

In the third operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is maintained in the second position for 0.2 seconds, so that the minimum passing distance HMI can be passed during that time (in other words, 2.0 is completed until the pedal operation is completed. When the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at an operation passing speed (operation speed shorter than a second, conditional slow speed), the moving end member 10362d passes through the lower protruding portion MTB and is arranged on the lower side during the operation. There is a possibility (see FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b)).

Therefore, when the player pedals the tilting device 310 at the above-mentioned conditional slow operation speed (the operation speed is shorter than 2.0 seconds until the completion of the pedal operation of the tilting device 310), the tilting device 310 is used. The load (reaction force) given to the player is referred to as the above-mentioned second load (reaction force invariant state).

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a change in the type of reaction force given to a player corresponding to a change in the time required for pedaling the tilting device 11310 from an ascending position to a descending position in the present embodiment.

In FIG. 60, the vertical axis shows the type of reaction force (first load, second load, first load or second load), and the horizontal axis shows the time required to pedal the tilting device 11310 (at a constant speed). (Assuming the case of operation) is shown in the plot every 0.1 seconds.

The "first load or second load" on the vertical axis indicates that the load may be the first load or the second load depending on the timing at which the pedal operation is started. For example, when the time required to operate the tilting device 11310 for the pedal is 0.8 seconds, and the pedal operation is started at the timing when the drive solenoid SOL11 changes to the first position (the timing at the left end of FIG. 58), 0. Since the drive solenoid SOL11 is arranged only once in the second position by the time when 8 seconds have elapsed, the type of reaction force given to the player is the first load, while the drive solenoid SOL11 is arranged in the second position. When the pedal operation is started after 0.1 seconds, the drive solenoid SOL11 is placed twice in the second position by 0.8 seconds, and the time maintained in that position passes through the minimum passing distance HMI. Since it is 0.1 seconds, which is longer than 0.08 seconds required to do so, the type of reaction force given to the player is the second load.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the pedal operation that becomes the first load or the second load, in the present embodiment, although the reaction force may be changed to the reaction force invariant state, the reaction force is changed to the reaction force invariant state. There is no reaction force change state. This is clear from the fact that when the moving end member 10362d is arranged above the intersection position C12, the reaction force changes state, and when the moving end member 10362d is arranged below the intersection position C12, the reaction force does not change. From this, in the pedal operation that becomes the first load or the second load, the action of reducing the reaction force during the pedal operation can be commonly generated.

In this way, when the drive solenoid SOL11 operates in the third operation pattern, the player can change the operation speed (time required for pedaling the tilting device 11310) when operating the tilting device 310 with the pedal. The load applied to the can be varied. In other words, the operation speed is higher when the operation speed is near the maximum (the operation speed near the operation speed at which the time required to complete the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is 0.6 seconds). The load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be increased as compared with the case where the speed is small (larger than the operation passing speed).

This change in reaction force is not caused by, for example, changing the amount of contraction of the coil spring 362b before the operation of the tilting device 310 in advance (not caused by changing the elastic modulus), but is not caused by changing the elastic modulus of the tilting device 310. It is caused by changing the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b with respect to the operation amount.

Therefore, the reaction force of the coil spring 362b can be changed according to the operation timing of the player. In other words, the load applied to the player can be changed depending on the operation mode while keeping the state of the coil spring 362b equivalent before the operation. Therefore, for example, even if the coil spring 362b is visible, the appearance is sensible. It is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the reaction force changes.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the time required for pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is shorter than 2.0 seconds, the load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is likely to change to the second load. Then, when the time is 2.0 seconds or more, the load given to the player via the tilting device 310 is maintained by the first load.

Therefore, if it is desired to reduce the reaction force returned to the player by slowly operating the tilting device 310, it is necessary to prevent the pedal from being operated for 2.0 seconds or longer. For example, by setting the effective period of the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 to be less than 2.0 seconds and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4), the player can operate the pedal within 2.0 seconds. Can be promoted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pedaling the tilting device 310 over 2.0 seconds or longer.

Further, when the operation pattern of the solenoid SOL10 is changed from the above-mentioned third operation pattern, the reaction force applied to the player may change in a mode different from the above-mentioned mode even if the solenoid SOL 10 is operated in the same operation mode. ..

For example, a fourth operation pattern in which the period in which the stepped member 11632f is maintained in the second position is 0.1 seconds, which is different from the third operation pattern, will be described.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a timed change of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the fourth operation pattern. In the fourth operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is held in the first position for 0.7 seconds by exciting the drive solenoid SOL11, and then the stepped member 11362f is released from the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11. By repeating the operation mode of being maintained at the second position for 0.1 seconds, the stepped member 11362f operates in a constant pattern.

In the fourth operation pattern, as in the third operation pattern, the start point of excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is generated at intervals of 0.8 seconds. Therefore, it is difficult to grasp the difference between the third operation pattern and the fourth operation pattern from the operation sound generated when the drive solenoid SOL11 is excited and the operation vibration.

As described above, when the moving end member 10362d is supported by the protruding portions MTU and MTB, the upper and lower surfaces of the moving end member 10362d and the lower horizontal planes MT11b and MT12b directly below the moving end member 10362d are vertically supported. The minimum passing distance HMI, which is the distance in the direction, is 1/10 of the movable range of the moving end member.

For example, when the moving end member 10362d is started to descend from the state where the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 57A), the moving end member 10362d is moved while the stepped member 11362f is maintained at the second position. When the amount is less than the minimum passing distance HMI, the moving end member 10362d rises to a position supported by the upper protrusion MTU as the stepped member 11362f moves to the first position.

In the fourth operation pattern, the stepped member 11362f is maintained in the second position for 0.1 seconds, so that the minimum passing distance HMI can be passed during that time (in other words, the completion of the pedal operation is 1.0. When the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at the second operation passing speed, which is an operation speed shorter than a second (second conditional slow speed), the moving end member 10362d passes through the lower protruding portion MTB during the operation to the lower side. (See FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b)).

Therefore, when the player pedals the tilting device 310 at the above-mentioned second conditional slow operating speed (the operating speed is shorter than 1.0 second until the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), the tilting device 310 is used. The load (reaction force) applied to the player via the above-mentioned second load (reaction force invariant state) is defined as the above-mentioned second load (reaction force). In other words, when the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated at the operating speed remaining excluding the second operation passing speed among the operating passing speeds, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is described above. Since it is the first load (reaction force change state), it differs from the third operation pattern in this respect.

That is, even when the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is the same, the drive solenoid SOL11 is operated in the third operation pattern or the drive solenoid SOL11 is operated in the fourth operation pattern, via the tilting device 310. The load (reaction force) given to the player changes.

Even if the operation pattern is different, the difference in the time for maintaining the stepped member 11632f at the second position is as short as 0.1 seconds or less, so that the player can see the difference from the appearance and the operation sound. It can be difficult to notice.

As described above, it is difficult to grasp the point that the state of the coil spring 362b does not change before the operation and the difference in the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL11 that switches the load applied to the player according to the operation mode by switching the operation pattern. From the point, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the difference in the magnitude of the load given to the player due to the difference in the game mode even before the operation of the tilting device 310, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game. Can be prevented from being scraped.

That is, for example, on the third symbol display device 81, the message "Push the pedal over 1.5 seconds! If the reaction force is smaller than usual, chance!" Is displayed, and the player is notified to urge the player to operate the tilting device 310. After that, the operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is controlled by, for example, MPU201 in an arbitrary operation pattern.

Here, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is controlled by the third operation pattern, the player who operates the tilting device 310 over 1.5 seconds is the one who operates the tilting device 310 as much as possible (0.6 seconds). The load applied to the player can be reduced as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is moved to the descending position).

On the other hand, when the operation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is controlled by the fourth operation pattern, the player operates the tilting device 310 over 1.5 seconds, and the tilting device 310 is operated with all one's might (0.6 seconds). Even when the tilting device 310 is moved to the descending position), the load applied to the player is the same (the reaction force becomes larger than when the drive solenoid SOL11 operates in the third operation pattern). ). Therefore, when the player who has performed the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 recognizes the magnitude of the reaction force, it can be noticed that there was no chance (it was a so-called "gase effect").

Since the difference in reaction force can be noticed only by the player who pushed the tilting device 310 according to the notification, the player can be encouraged to push the tilting device 310 according to the notification (participation of the player). You can improve your motivation).

By switching the operation pattern of the drive solenoid SOL11, it is possible to switch between multiple types of reaction forces corresponding to the player's operating speed, so it is possible to return multiple types of loads to the player who pushed in as notified. can.

The main object of the present embodiment is to pedal the tilting device 310 so that the player who notices the display hits the display prompting to push the tilting device 310 in the third symbol display device 81 just before the end of the period. When operating, the reaction force may be increased to reduce the moving speed of the tilting device 310 during pedal operation. Therefore, at the end of the period in which the operation control of the drive solenoid SOL11 in the above-mentioned third operation pattern or the fourth operation pattern is displayed to prompt the pushing of the tilting device 310 in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the display). It is executed only from 2 seconds before the end timing to the end timing of the display), and during the other period, the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL11 is released and the stepped member 11362f is placed in the second position. good.

As a result, the load (reaction force) given to the player via the tilting device 310 is reduced in the period other than the final stage of the period in which the display prompting the tilting device 310 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, during a period other than the final stage (for example, immediately after the start of the period in which the display prompting the tilting device 310 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81), the player is asked to operate the tilting device 310 with a pedal. It is possible to prevent the applied load from becoming excessive and the player who operates the tilting device 310 from accumulating a feeling of fatigue. As a result, the probability that the player avoids the operation of the tilting device 310 can be reduced, and the motivation to participate in the game can be increased by operating the tilting device 310 as notified.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 68. In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the tilting device 310 operated by the player is fixed has been described, but in the operation device 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment, the second tilting device 400 operated by the player is tilted. It is connected to the device 12310 and can be expanded and contracted in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 12310. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 62 is a front perspective view of the operation device 12300 according to the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 62, the operation device 12300 includes a tilting device 12310 used for the same purpose as the tilting device 310 described above, a lower cover 320 described above in each of the above embodiments, a shaft cover 330, and a shaft member 340. A curved member 350, a lower case 360, and an upper case 370 are provided, and in addition, a second tilting device 400, which is new in the present embodiment, is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 62, the second tilting device 400 is a device that is connected to the tilting device 12310 so as to straddle the tilting device 12310 from above and is formed in a U-shape in front view. The main operation method is a method of pushing the operation unit 440 extending in the left-right direction in the same direction as the operation direction of the tilting device 12310. That is, in the present embodiment, the player can participate in the game not only by pushing the tilting device 12310, but also by pushing the second tilting device 400.

63 (a) is a front view of the operating device 12300, and FIG. 63 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 12300 in line LXIIIb-LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a).

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the second tilting device 400 is connected to the tilting device 12310 on both side surfaces of the tilting device 12310. Specifically, the tilting device 12310 includes an upper cover 12311 to which an opening 12318 opened inward from both side surfaces as a starting point is added to the upper cover 311 described in each of the above embodiments. In the second tilting device 400, the support fixing portion 411 is fastened and fixed to the tilting device 12310 with the fastening fixing portion 410 inserted through the opening 12318 of the upper cover 12311.

The load applied to the player when pedaling the tilting device 12310 or the second tilting device 400 changes depending on how far the player pushes the position far from the rotation axis O1, as shown in FIG. 63 (b). As shown, the outermost diameter point (the point farthest from the rotation axis O1) of the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 is formed by the curved wall portion 316 of the tilting device 12310 (curved wall centered on the rotation axis O1). It is formed on the arc R12 (which is in contact with the portion 316).

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 63 (b) (the state in which the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 is arranged on the side close to the rotation axis O1), the reaction force applied to the player who pedals the tilting device 12310 is applied. The minimum value is equivalent to the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400.

That is, the reaction force given to the player who operates the side of the tilting device 12310 near the rotation axis O1 (left side in FIG. 63B) is the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400. On the other hand, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the side far from the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310 (right side of FIG. 63 (b), near the curved wall portion 316) is the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400. It is equivalent to the reaction force given to the player who operates.

In the present embodiment, the second tilting device 400 functions in such a manner that the reaction force applied to the player who operates the second tilting device 400 is smaller than that when the tilting device 12310 is operated. As a preliminary step to the explanation, the details of the second tilting device 400 will be described below.

64 and 65 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 12300 in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). In FIG. 64, the shortened state of the second tilting device 400 is shown, and in FIG. 65, the extended state of the second tilting device 400 is shown. Further, since the operation device 12300 is formed from a symmetrical shape, only the left side is shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, and the right side is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the second tilting device 400 includes a fastening and fixing portion 410 that is fastened and fixed to the side surface of the tilting device 12310 while being inserted through the opening 12318 of the tilting device 12310, and a fastening and fixing portion 410 thereof. The first arm portion 420 having the main body portion 421 in which the end of the branch portion 425 is accommodated and extends in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 and the first arm portion 420 on the radially outer side. A second arm portion 430 that is arranged and connected to the second arm portion 420, a cylindrical operation portion 440 that connects a pair of second arm portions 430, and a base end side (rotation axis O1) of the first arm portion 420. A drive motor 450 that is arranged on the side close to) and is rotationally driven by energization, and a transmission that is pivotally supported by the first arm portion 420 in such a manner that the driving force of the drive motor 450 can be transmitted to the second arm portion 430. It mainly includes a device 460 and a vibration transmission member 470 that is displaced due to a difference in phase of the rotating portion of the drive motor 450 and is separated from the weight member M1a of the drive motor M1.

The fastening and fixing portion 410, the first arm portion 420, and the second arm portion 430 are assembled by arranging a pair of left-right inverted members facing each other in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 64, superimposing them, and fastening and fixing them (FIG. 62). See). The operation unit 440 is inserted into a pair of left and right second arm portions 430 from the left and right directions.

That is, in the assembly procedure of the second tilting device 400, first, the drive motor 450, the transmission device 460 and the vibration transmission member 470 are housed in one member of the first arm portion 420, and then the other member is fastened and fixed to cover the lid. After assembling the first arm portion 420, the second arm portion 430 is overlapped with the second arm portion 430 connected to the radially outer end of the first arm portion 420 in the assembled state. On the other hand, the subassembly is formed by stacking and assembling the fastening and fixing portions 410 in such a manner that the fastening and fixing portions 410 are connected to the opposite end portions. This subassembly is formed in pairs on the left and right.

Next, the formed subassembly is brought closer to the tilting device 12310 from the side, and when the fastening fixing portion 410 is inserted into the opening 12318, the operation portion 440 is sandwiched between the left and right second arm portions 430. The tip of the 440 is inserted into the fitting portion 433 of the second arm portion 430.

Finally, by fastening and fixing the fastening and fixing portion 410 to the tilting device 12310, the movement of the second arm portion 430 in the extending direction of the operating portion 440 is restricted, so that the operating portion 440 may fall off from the subassembly. This is prevented, and the assembly of the second tilting device 400 to the tilting device 12310 is completed.

Next, the details of each part will be described. The fastening and fixing portion 410 is an opening arranged at a position facing the tip of the branch portion 425 and the support and fixing portion 411 that supports and fixes the branch portion 425 of the first arm portion 420 and is fastened and fixed to the tilting device 12310. It mainly comprises an opening 412.

The opening 412 has a function as a passage path when a vibration transmission member 470, a harness wired to the drive motor 450 (not shown), or the like (not shown) enters the inside of the tilting device 12310. Therefore, at least the opening is widened to a region that does not interfere with the movement locus of the vibration transmission member 470, and a gap is secured to the extent that the harness or the like is not bitten (pressed) while the vibration transmission member 470 is moving. Is formed by.

The first arm portion 420 has a main body portion 421 formed as a substantially rectangular container with the front side of the main body portion 421 open, and a vertical direction of the main body portion 421 from the inner wall of the main body portion 421 toward the internal space of the main body portion 421. 423 of the extension shaft branch extending from the inner side wall of the main body 421 to a position evenly separated in the left-right direction from the support wall 422 extending in the support wall 422 and the drive shaft of the drive motor 450 supported by the support wall 422. From the tip support portion 424 extending in the left-right direction from the tip end side end portion of the main body portion 421 and supporting one end of the urging spring SP1 and the base end side (lower side in FIG. 64) end portion of the main body portion 421. It mainly includes a branch portion 425 extending to the side close to the tilting device 12310.

The outer width of the main body 421 is shorter on the base end side than on the tip end side. That is, in the main body portion 421, the first facing surface 421a, which is a surface facing the end portion of the second arm portion 430 in the shortened state of the second tilting device 400 (see FIG. 64), is the surface of the second tilting device 400. It is formed inside the main body portion 421 with respect to the second facing surface 421b, which is a surface facing the end portion of the second arm portion 430 in the extended state (see FIG. 65). The first facing surface 421a and the second facing surface 421b are formed over the entire circumference of the first arm portion 420.

In other words, the distance between the end of the second arm 430 and the main body 421 of the first arm 420 is shorter in the extended state than in the shortened state, so that the first arm 420 and the first arm are the first. The buffering action of load transmission between the two arms 430 is reduced.

The support wall 422 is a substantially Z-shaped wall portion arranged apart from both the left and right side walls of the main body portion 421, and has an outer support wall 422a that supports the drive motor 450 by surface contact and a vibration transmission member 470. Mainly provided with an inner support wall 422b for guiding and supporting. Therefore, the support wall 422 has a plurality of functions of fixing the position of the drive motor 450 and stabilizing the position change of the vibration transmission member 470.

The inner support wall 422b is formed as a wall bent in a substantially Z shape in FIG. 64. One end of the urging spring SP3 of the vibration transmission member 470 is supported in the portion (intermediate portion) extending along the left-right direction in FIG. 64, and extends along the vertical direction (movement direction of the vibration transmission member 470) in FIG. 64. The vibration transmitting member 470 is guided and supported in the moving direction in the pair of portions (two surfaces connected to the intermediate portion).

The extension shaft support portion 423 rotatably supports the transmission device 460 and prevents the transmission shaft rod 461 from being displaced in the axial direction. That is, the transmission shaft rod 461 is pivotally supported by the inner surface of the extended shaft support portion 423 that faces in the left-right direction, and the slip prevention ring 463 is locked by the surface that faces in the vertical direction.

The tip support portion 424 is a portion that supports one end of the urging spring SP1 and a portion whose outer end portion in the left-right direction faces the inner side surface of the second arm portion 430. The load transmission efficiency between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 changes depending on the length of the distance between the left-right outer end portion of the tip support portion 424 and the inner surface of the second arm portion 430. That is, the shorter the interval, the higher the transmission efficiency.

Similar to the main body portion 421, the branch portion 425 is formed from a half-pipe shape in which the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 64 is open. The branch portion 425 includes a convex portion 425a projecting from the outer surface of the tip portion, and the convex portion 425a is formed in a shape to be internally fitted in the fastening fixing portion 410.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state, the inner surface of the fastening fixing portion 410 is supported in such a manner as to surround the outer surface on the tip end side of the branch portion 425, and the inside of the gap between the fastening fixing portion 410 and the branch portion 425. 64. Compared to the length of the gap in the vertical direction of the paper surface (direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction of the second tilting device 400), the length of the gap in the vertical direction of FIG. 64 (extending / contracting direction of the second tilting device 400). Is set longer. As a result, the first arm portion 420 can be made easier to selectively vibrate with respect to the fastening fixing portion 410 in the vertical direction of FIG. 64 (the telescopic direction of the second tilting device 400).

The second arm portion 430 is formed as a substantially rectangular container with the front side of FIG. 64 open, and is capable of accommodating the first arm portion 420 so as to protrude from the base end side (lower side of FIG. 64). A portion 431, an adjustment recess 432 recessed from the internal space of the main body portion 431 toward the tip side (upper side of FIG. 64), and an fitting portion 433 recessed along the left-right direction at the tip portion of the main body portion 431. Mainly includes a root support portion 434 extending inward in the left-right direction on the root side of the main body portion 431 to support the end portion of the urging spring SP1.

The length of the inner width of the main body portion 431 is shorter on the proximal end side than on the distal end side. That is, in the main body portion 431, the first facing surface 431a, which is a surface facing the end portion of the first arm portion 420 in the shortened state of the second tilting device 400 (see FIG. 64), is the surface of the second tilting device 400. It is formed outside the main body portion 431 with respect to the second facing surface 431b, which is a surface facing the end portion of the first arm portion 420 in the extended state (see FIG. 65). The first facing surface 431a and the second facing surface 431b are formed over the entire circumference of the second arm portion 430.

In other words, the distance between the end of the first arm 420 and the main body 431 of the second arm 430 is shorter in the extended state than in the shortened state, so that the first arm 420 and the first arm are the first. The buffering action of load transmission between the two arms 430 is reduced.

The adjusting recess 432 includes an inclined side surface 432a which is a wall surface inclined with respect to the drive shaft so as to pass through the drive shaft of the drive motor 450.

The fitting portion 433 is formed as a recessed portion having an internal shape substantially equivalent to a cross-sectional shape orthogonal to the axis of the operating portion 440 and recessed in the left-right direction.

The drive motor 450 includes a first cam 451 fixed to a drive shaft driven by energization. The details of the first cam 451 will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

The transmission device 460 has a substantially cylindrical transmission shaft rod 461 that is rotatably supported by the first arm portion 420 in conjunction with the rotation of the drive motor 450, and a transmission shaft rod from the tip end side of the transmission shaft rod 461. The tip adjusting member 462 that is fitted so that it cannot rotate relative to the shaft, the misalignment prevention ring 463 that is inserted into the transmission shaft rod 461 from the radial direction and fixed so that the position cannot be displaced in the axial direction, and the base end side tip of the transmission shaft rod 461. The second cam 464, which is fitted so as not to rotate relative to the transmission shaft rod, is arranged between the second cam 464 and the slip prevention ring 463, and generates an urging force that presses the second cam 464 against the first cam 451. The urging spring SP2 and the urging spring SP2 are mainly provided. As the slip prevention ring 463, a commercially available E-ring can be used.

FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the drive motor 450 and the transmission device 460. In FIG. 66, the case side portion of the drive motor 450 and the tip adjusting member 462 are not shown.

The transmission shaft rod 461 has a flat portion 461a, 461b, which is a flat wall portion extending in the axial direction along a plane perpendicular to the radial direction at both ends, and a diameter of the transmission shaft rod 461 having a width that allows the slip prevention ring 463 to be fitted. Mainly includes a recessed groove 461c that is recessed in a manner of reducing the size of the groove.

The first flat portion 461a arranged on the tip end side of the first arm portion 420 is a portion that non-rotatably supports the tip adjusting member 462.

The second flat portion 461b arranged on the proximal end side of the first arm portion 420 is a portion that supports the second cam 464 so as not to rotate and allows the second cam 464 to move in the axial direction. That is, the second cam 464 can move in the axial direction within the range in which the second flat portion 461b is formed, while the transmission shaft rod 461 tries to cross the end portion of the second flat portion 461b. Since it is axially locked to the cross section of the second flat portion 461b, it cannot move beyond the end portion of the second flat portion 461b. Therefore, the axial length of the second flat portion 461b is set based on the length that allows the movement of the second cam 464.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later in FIG. 67, one purpose of allowing the second cam 464 to move in the axial direction is to disengage the engagement between the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 and drive the second cam 464. It is to release the transmission of force. Therefore, the axial length of the second flat portion 461b is set with the length at which the second cam 464 can be disengaged from the first cam 451 by moving in the axial direction as the lower limit.

The second cam 464 is a cylindrical member having a central hole formed in a D-shaped cross section, and includes a protruding portion 464a protruding from the lower surface facing the first cam 451 toward the side close to the first cam 451. The protrusion 464a has a mountain shape that is inclined downward from the center position toward both sides in the circumferential direction of the second cam 464.

The first cam 451 is a cylindrical member in which the central shaft portion is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 451 and has a recessed portion 451a recessed from the upper surface facing the second cam 464 toward the side away from the second cam 464. A band-shaped protrusion 451b that is projected outward in the radial direction and extends in a band shape along the circumferential direction is mainly provided.

The recessed portion 451a has a shape that meshes with the protruding portion 464a of the second cam 464, that is, a valley shape that ascends and slopes from the center position toward both sides in the circumferential direction.

As shown in FIG. 66, the band-shaped protrusion 451b is a bottom view clock of a first portion 451b1 extending along a plane perpendicular to the axis along the lower end of the first cam 451 and a first portion 451b1 thereof. It mainly comprises a second portion 451b2 that inclines in a manner approaching the second cam 464 as it goes clockwise from the end in the clockwise direction.

Since the recessed portion 451a of the first cam 451 and the protruding portion 464a of the second cam 464 are each one, the engagement is resumed after the engagement between the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 is released. If so, the engagement is always resumed with the same angular relationship (phase relationship).

That is, the posture (or phase) after rotation of the drive motor 450 that rotationally drives the first cam 451 is the posture (or phase) of the second cam 464 while the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 are engaged. ). Therefore, as compared with the case where the posture (or phase) shift occurs before and after the disengagement, the sensor for detecting the posture (or phase) shift can be unnecessary, and the number of members can be reduced.

67 (a) and 67 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 460 in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 63 (b). Note that FIG. 67A shows the same state as in FIG. 64, and FIG. 67B shows a state in which the first cam 451 rotates while the rotation of the transmission device 460 is restricted.

Here, when the player grips the operation portion 440 and applies a load to push it toward the first arm portion 420, the tip adjusting member 462 of the transmission device 460 is locked to the adjusting recess 432 of the second arm portion 430. The rotation of the transmission device 460 is restricted. Therefore, if the first cam 450 and the second cam 464 are still engaged, a load is applied to the drive motor 450 when the drive motor 450 is driven, and the drive motor 450 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the first cam 451 continues to rotate in a state where the second cam 464 cannot rotate, the engagement between the second cam 464 and the first cam 451 is released. Will be done. More specifically, when the first cam 451 continues to rotate while the second cam 464 cannot rotate, the contact position between the recessed portion 451a of the first cam 451 and the protruding portion 464a of the second cam 464 is in the circumferential direction. As a result, the second cam 464 is axially separated from the first cam 451 along the inclination of the recessed portion 451a and the protruding portion 464a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the protruding portion 464a is arranged on the second cam side 464 side of the facing surface of the first cam 451 with the second cam 464 (from the recessed portion 451a to the protruding portion 454a). Is pushed out), the first cam 451 and the second cam 464 do not interfere with each other in the circumferential direction, so that the transmission of the driving force of the drive motor 450 can be canceled. It should be noted that the release of the transmission of the driving force is not related to the state (shortened state, extended state, etc.) of the second tilting device 400, and can be performed at any timing.

Therefore, even if the player handles the operation unit 440 somewhat roughly and pushes the operation unit 440 toward the rotation shaft O1 of the tilting device 12310 while driving the drive motor 450, the drive motor 450 causes the drive motor 450 to push the operation unit 440 toward the rotation shaft O1. It can be prevented from being damaged. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the operation method of the operation unit 440.

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (b), the second cam 464 is pressed against the first cam 451 by the urging force of the urging spring SP2. Therefore, when the first cam 451 rotates one round and returns to the posture shown in FIG. 67A, the protruding portion 464a engages with the recessed portion 451a, and the transmission of the driving force can be resumed.

It will be described back to FIG. 64 and FIG. 65. The tip adjusting member 462 is a pillar member having a circular shape on the lower surface and is fixed to the transmission shaft rod 461 so as to be non-rotatable by inserting the first flat portion 461a of the transmission shaft rod 461 from the lower surface. Formed as a plane that is connected to the inclined surface portion 462a that abuts on the inclined side surface 432a in a predetermined posture (see FIG. 64) while the 461 rotates and the tip end portion of the inclined surface portion 462a and is orthogonal to the axial direction. The tip plane 462b to be formed is mainly provided.

The change from FIG. 64 to FIG. 65 occurs by rotating the rotation axis of the drive motor 450 by 180 degrees. More specifically, the rotation changes the arrangement (phase) of the tip plane 462b, and the contact position with the inclined side surface 432a changes, whereby the position of the operation unit 440 changes. Therefore, the moving speed of the operation unit 440 can be changed by adjusting the rotation speed of the drive motor 450.

The vibration transmission member 470 rotates from the guided arm portion 471, which is arranged to face the inner support wall 422b and extends along the extending direction of the first arm portion 420, and the lower end portion of the guided arm portion 471. An intermediate extension portion 472 extending toward the center of the tilting device 12310 along the shaft O1 and a weight member M1a of the drive motor M1 along a straight line from the extension tip of the intermediate extension portion 472 toward the rotation shaft O1. The end is fixed to the tip of the collided portion 473 and the guided arm portion 471, which are formed so as to be in contact with the weight member M1a when the rotation shaft O1 is arranged close to the rotating shaft O1. Mainly includes an urging spring SP3 to be mounted.

In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the vibration transmitting member is separated from the weight member M1a by the urging force of the urging spring SP3, and in the extended state (see FIG. 65), the guided arm portion 471 is pushed down by the band-shaped protrusion 451b. It is arranged close to the weight member M1a.

When the drive motor M1 rotates in this close arrangement state, the weight member M1a and the vibration transmission member 470 collide with each other when the weight member M1a is arranged on the vibration transmission member 470 side, and the weight member M1a becomes the vibration transmission member 470. When placed on the opposite side of, they are separated from each other.

The tip surface of the collided portion 473 arranged to face the weight member M1a is formed from a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the extending direction of the transmission shaft rod 461. Therefore, when the weight member M1a collides with the collided portion 473, a load along the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 64) of the transmission shaft rod 461 is applied to the vibration transmission member 470.

Therefore, as the weight member M1a is rotated by the drive of the drive motor M1, the vibration transmission member 470 is orthogonal to the extension direction of the first arm portion 420 (vertical direction in FIG. 64), that is, the operation direction of the tilting device 12310. It can be vibrated along the direction in which it does.

The vibration of the vibration transmission member 470 is transmitted in order to the first arm portion 420, the second arm portion 430, and the operation portion 440, and vibrates the player's finger touching the operation portion 440. At this time, since the vibration of the vibration transmission member 470 is generated along the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310, the vibration becomes smaller as the position of the operation unit 440 becomes farther from the rotation axis O1. It can be prevented from becoming.

That is, in the case of vibration generated along the circumferential direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310, the load felt by the player due to the vibration becomes constant as the distance from the rotation axis O1 (the arm extends). Since it becomes smaller from the idea, it becomes difficult to make the player feel the vibration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, vibration occurs along the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 12310, so that the load felt by the player due to the vibration is applied regardless of the distance from the rotation axis O1. Can be equivalent. As a result, the vibration effect can be effectively performed even in the extended state (see FIG. 65).

Here, the transmission of vibration will be described by comparing the shortened state and the extended state. There are two modes of vibration transmitted to the operation unit 440. That is, the vibration in the rotation direction caused by the rotational operation of the tilting device 12310 due to the vibration of the drive motor M1 and the vibration in the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461 caused by the vibration transmission member 470 colliding with the weight member M1a. be. The vibration of these two systems has a low transmission efficiency in the shortened state and a high transmission efficiency in the extended state. The details will be described below.

First, the axial vibration of the transmission shaft rod 461 in the shortened state will be described. In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the urging force of the urging spring SP1 is applied to the second arm portion 430 in the direction of bringing the second arm portion 430 closer to the first arm portion 420. At this time, since the urging spring SP1 is stretched as compared with the extended state (see FIG. 65), the urging force is smaller than that of the extended state. Therefore, the positional deviation between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 is likely to occur, and when the first arm portion 420 vibrates along the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461 (particularly, it separates from the second arm portion 430). The vibration transmission efficiency from the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 430 is reduced.

Next, the vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 in the shortened state will be described. In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), a gap is formed between the tip support portion 424 of the first arm portion 420 and the first facing surface 431a of the second arm portion 430 arranged to face each other, and the second arm portion is formed. A gap is formed between the root support portion 434 of the 430 and the first facing surface 421a of the first arm portion 420 arranged to face each other. The length of these gap widths is such that the second arm portion 430 can be displaced with respect to the first arm portion 420, and the first arm portion 420 is displaced relative to the second arm portion 430. As a result, the vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 generated when the drive motor M1 rotates is absorbed. As a result, the vibration transmission efficiency from the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 430 is reduced.

Next, the axial vibration of the transmission shaft rod 461 in the extended state will be described. In the extended state (see FIG. 65), the urging force of the urging spring SP1 is applied to the second arm 430 in the direction of bringing the second arm 430 closer to the first arm 420, which is the same as in the shortened state. However, as the tip adjusting member 462 rotates, the second arm portion 430 moves in a direction away from the first arm portion 420. At this time, since the urging spring SP1 is shortened as compared with the case of the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the urging force is larger than that of the shortened state. Therefore, the positional deviation between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 is less likely to occur, and the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 420 when the first arm portion 420 vibrates along the axial direction of the transmission shaft rod 461. Vibration transmission efficiency to the arm 430 is ensured (increased).

In this way, the urging spring SP1 is used for both the action of returning the operation unit 440 to the shortened state (see FIG. 64) and the adjustment of the vibration transmission efficiency. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts.

Next, the vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 in the extended state will be described. In the extended state (see FIG. 65), the gap between the tip support portion 424 of the first arm portion 420 and the second facing surface 431b of the second arm portion 430 arranged to face each other is extremely small, and the second arm is made extremely small. The gap between the root support portion 434 of the portion 430 and the second facing surface 421b of the first arm portion 420 arranged to face each other is extremely reduced. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate a gap sufficient to absorb the vibration in the rotation direction of the tilting device 12310 generated when the drive motor M1 rotates, and secure the vibration transmission efficiency from the first arm portion 420 to the second arm portion 430. Can (can increase).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the two vibration modes, the vibration transmission efficiency can be reduced in the shortened state, while the vibration transmission efficiency can be increased in the extended state. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the operation unit 440 is separated from the rotation shaft O1 and the vibration given to the player is reduced in a state where the operation unit 440 is easy to operate.

That is, it is desirable to secure a distance between the vibrating device and the operating position from the viewpoint of preventing failure of the vibrating device. If a distance is secured, even when the player operates in a manner of hitting violently, the impact at the time of operation is attenuated before being transmitted to the vibrating device, so that the failure of the vibrating device can be prevented. .. On the other hand, the vibration transmitted to the operation position tends to be smaller as the vibration device and the operation position are separated from each other. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can maintain a feeling of vibration (degree and magnitude of vibration given to a player) while preventing a failure of the vibration device.

In particular, when the operating position moves with respect to the vibrating device as in the present embodiment, the feeling of vibration during operation changes before and after the movement, and in particular, the operating position moves to a position where the player can easily operate. The decrease in the feeling of vibration during operation should be avoided from the viewpoint of enhancing the interest given to the player.

It is clear that it is desirable that the operation position moves so that the player can easily operate the effect as the degree of expectation is higher. In addition, the big hit effect after the operation gives the player a large vibration. This is because it is desirable to be.

In the present embodiment, the operation unit 440 is arranged so as to be easier for the player to operate (the reaction force given to the player is smaller) in the extended state than in the shortened state. The distance between the drive motor M1 and the operation unit 440 is longer in the extended state (difficult to transmit vibration) than in the shortened state, while the vibration transmission efficiency is higher than in the shortened state. The extended state increases (vibration transmission becomes easier). Therefore, by adjusting the vibration transmission efficiency, the difference between the vibration feeling in the shortened state and the vibration feeling in the extended state can be reduced, and the vibration feeling can be leveled.

In the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the distance from the upper cover 12311 of the tilting device 12310 to the drive motor M1 and the distance from the operation unit 440 to the drive motor M1 are almost the same. On the other hand, the upper cover 12311 is fixed to the drive motor M1 without being displaced, but the operation unit 440 is positioned with respect to the drive motor M1 due to the displacement of the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430 from each other. It is possible to shift. In particular, in the shortened state, a gap is formed between the first arm portion 420 and the second arm portion 430.

Therefore, in the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the vibration given to the player should be smaller when the operation is performed by touching the operation unit 440 than when the operation is performed by touching the tilting device 12310. Can be done.

Therefore, for example, when the vibration given to the player who touches the operation unit 440 can be made smaller than the recognizable size, the operation unit 440 dares to be in the production of not wanting to be noticed that the drive motor M1 is being driven. You may give a notification to prompt the operation. As a result, by causing the player to operate the operation unit 440, the tilting device 12310 can be rotated, and the vibration of the tilting device 12310 by the drive motor M1 can be mixed with the rotational operation, so that the tilting device 12310 is in the ascending position. It is possible to make the vibration less noticeable to the player as compared with the case where the vehicle is stopped at.

According to this, by operating the operation unit 440, it also leads to the rotational operation of the tilting device 12310. If the player does not want the player to be aware of the presence or absence of the operation of the drive motor M1, the vibration can be made less noticeable by giving a notification prompting the player to operate the operation unit 440. Even when the operation timing of the player is arbitrarily set, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player who has performed the operation notices the operation (operation vibration, etc.) of the drive motor M1. Thereby, the degree of freedom of operation of the drive motor M1 can be improved.

68 (a) and 68 (b) are side views of the operating device 12300. Note that FIG. 68 (a) shows a shortened state, and FIG. 68 (b) shows an extended state.

This change in state is caused by the rotation of the drive motor 450, and the drive motor 450 is arranged on the side of the first arm portion 420 close to the rotation axis O1. Thereby, the mode years of the drive motor 450 can be lengthened.

That is, since the tilting device 12310 is a device that rotates around the rotation axis O1, even if it moves in the same manner, the position near the rotation axis O1 is compared with the position away from the rotation axis O1. The operating speed becomes smaller. Therefore, the impact generated by the operation of the player is smaller in the vicinity of the rotation axis O1 than in the position away from the rotation axis O1. Therefore, by disposing the drive motor 450 on the side of the first arm portion 420 close to the rotation shaft O1, the mode years of the drive motor 450 can be lengthened.

Further, by arranging the drive motor 450 in the vicinity of the rotation shaft O1, the moment generated at the center of the rotation shaft O1 in the tilting device 12310 due to the weight of the drive motor 450 can be reduced. As a result, the tilting device 12310 can be maintained in the ascending position with a small reaction force, so that the degree of freedom in setting the urging force of the torsion spring 343 can be improved. That is, since the degree of freedom in setting the reaction force returned to the player can be improved, for example, the feeling of repeated hits can be further improved by setting the reaction force.

As shown in FIG. 68 (b), in the extended state, the distance between the operation unit 440 and the rotating shaft O1 is longer than the distance between the curved wall portion 316 of the tilting device 12310 and the rotating shaft O1 as compared with the shortened state. Become. Therefore, the operable range, which is the range in which the player can operate the operating device 12300, is larger than the range from the rotation axis O1 to the curved wall portion 316 in the shortened state. Therefore, in the extended state, the range in which the player can perform the operation is widened, so that the feeling of fatigue during the operation can be reduced.

Further, in the extended state, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit 440 arranged at the outermost side of the operable range is minimized. That is, it is possible to reduce the reaction force applied to the player by operating the operation unit 440 as compared with the case of operating the tilting device 12310. As a result, in the extended state, the stress (fatigue, etc.) felt by the player can be reduced by operating the operation unit 440 as compared with operating the tilting device 12310. Therefore, the player is urged to operate the operation unit 440. Can be facilitated.

In the present embodiment, as described above, a gap is formed between the fastening fixing portion 410 and the branch portion 425. Therefore, even when the operation unit 440 is rapidly pedal-operated, the tilting device 12310 to which the fastening fixing portion 410 is fixed and the operation unit 440 are arranged until a load is applied. Since the position can be displaced in comparison, the load applied to the connection position between the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 from being damaged in the vicinity of the connection position by the operation of the player.

In the present embodiment, in the shortened state (see FIG. 64), the tip adjusting member 462 and the adjusting recess 432 of the second arm portion 430 are engaged even in a direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction (vertical direction of FIG. 64) of the second arm portion 430. On the other hand, in the extended state (see FIG. 65), the tip flat surface 462b of the tip adjusting member 462 stays in contact with the lower side surface of the second arm 430, and the second arm 430 stays in contact with the lower surface. The engagement in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction of the is disengaged (the fitting becomes loose).

As a result, in the extended state, the second arm 430 can be more easily tilted in the direction orthogonal to the expansion / contraction direction of the second arm 430 with respect to the first arm 420 as compared with the shortened state. .. For example, the second arm portion 430 can be easily tilted with respect to the first arm portion 420 about the vicinity of the root support portion 434 of the second arm portion 430 (the second arm portion with respect to the first arm portion 420). The 430 can be made more flexible). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second arm portion 430 from being damaged when the player operates the operation portion 440.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the shortened state, the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 interferes in the operating direction of the tilting device 12310 (for example, the normal direction of a part of the pressing plate portion 312). Therefore, when the player operates the tilting device 12310 in the shortened state, the operation unit 440 can be an obstacle, and the player can feel the difficulty of pushing.

On the other hand, in the extended state, the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 400 does not interfere in the operating direction of the tilting device 12310 (the normal direction of a part of the pressing plate unit 312), so that the game is played without being disturbed by the operating unit 440. The person can pedal the tilting device 12310.

Further, the direction of the normal line of the outer surface of the pressing plate portion 312 when the tilting device 12310 is started to operate the pedal in the extended state and faces the player is the operation starting direction of the second tilting device 400 (rotation axis O1). Since the tilt angle with respect to the vertical direction is smaller (in the direction of looking upward) than in the tangential direction of the circle circumscribing the operation unit 440 around the center, the tilting device 400 is compared with the case of operating the tilting device 400. It is possible to reduce the stress felt by the player during the pushing operation (the pushing operation becomes easier).

In the present embodiment, the distance between the axis center of the operation unit 440 and the rotating shaft O1 in the extended state is about 1.25 times the distance between the axis center of the operating unit 440 and the rotating shaft O1 in the shortened state.

As shown in FIG. 68, the operation unit 440 moves in the radial direction of the circle about the rotation axis O1 (the direction orthogonal to the operation direction of the tilting device 12310). Therefore, it is possible to maximize the amount of change in the load given to the player who operates the operation unit 440 with respect to the movement distance of the operation unit 440.

Further, according to the present embodiment, for example, the operating speed of the drive motor 450 during the operation instruction period, which is the period for instructing the pushing operation of the tilting device 12310 on the third symbol display device 81 or the like, and the pushing of the player. The difference from the operation speed can be given to the player as the difference in reaction force.

That is, for example, when the drive motor 450 is gradually operated from the extended state to the shortened state during the operation instruction period, it changes to the shortened state as compared with the case where the pushing operation is completed before the shortened state is completely changed. The load (reaction force) given to the player is smaller when the pushing operation is completed after the pushing operation is completed.

Therefore, for example, by starting the operation of the drive motor 450 after the operation of the player is detected by the sensors S1 to S3, whether or not the pushing operation can be completed before the shortened state is completely changed is determined by the player. It can be associated with the operation speed. Therefore, the reaction force applied to the player can be changed according to the change in the operation speed of the player.

In the present embodiment, when the second tilting device 400 vibrates due to the driving force of the drive motor M1 transmitted via the vibration transmission member 470, the first arm portion 420 accommodating the vibration transmission member 470, the drive motor 450, and the transmission The device 460 vibrates integrally. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems such as an increase in transmission resistance due to axial misalignment between the drive motor 450 and the transmission device 460 due to vibration.

In the present embodiment, the longer the operation unit 440 is extended and becomes easier to perform the tilting operation, the shorter the distance from the operation unit 440 to the game board 13 along the straight line connecting the operation unit 440 and the rotation axis O1. (The swing width of the player's fingers when pushing the operation unit 440 toward the rotation axis O1 side is shortened).

Therefore, when the player mistakenly moves the operation unit 440 toward the rotation axis O1, the acceleration that can be applied by the player can be reduced in the extended state where the acceleration tends to be large and the speed is most likely to be large (of the fingers). The swing width can be shortened), and the speed of the final operation unit 440 can be reduced. As a result, the impact when the operation unit 440 moves toward the rotation shaft O1 and reaches the end can be suppressed. That is, by reducing the acceleration generated by the player's operation (acceleration expected from the swing width of the fingers) in advance, the impact when the operation unit 440 reaches the terminal position (shortened state) is suppressed. Can be done.

Next, the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the surfaces of the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 facing the player are different has been described, but the operation device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment is the second tilting device 13400 and the tilting device 13310. The surfaces facing the player are regarded as substantially the same surface. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

69 (a) and 69 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 13300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIG. 69 (a) shows a shortened state of the second tilting device 13400, and FIG. 69 (b) shows an extended state of the second tilting device 13400. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper end position of the tilting device 13310 is recessed downward, and the operation unit 440 can be arranged in the recessed portion.

The second tilting device 13400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 12400 of the twelfth embodiment, and differs only in the fixing angle of the fastening fixing portion 410 from the tilting device 13310. That is, as shown in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b), the operation unit 440 expands and contracts in the direction SD1 along the surface of the tilting device 13310 facing the player.

As a result, in the shortened state, the same operation feeling as that of the tilting device 310 described above in the first embodiment can be exhibited, and in the extended state, the change of the surface (operation surface) facing the player is suppressed. When the operation unit 440 is operated, it is given to the player via the tilting device 13310 by extending the maximum distance from the rotation axis O1 of the portion that can be operated by the player while preventing the operation feeling from being significantly changed. The maximum value of the applied load (reaction force) can be reduced.

In the extended state, the relationship between the moments centered on the rotation axis O1 changes as compared with the shortened state, and the time until the tilting device 13310 and the second tilting device 13400 return to the posture before pushing in becomes longer. .. Therefore, by changing the second tilting device 13400 to the extended state after the tilting device 13310 is pushed to the descending position, it is possible to reduce the return speed of the tilting device 13310 and the second tilting device 13400. ..

Next, the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the surfaces of the second tilting device 13400 and the tilting device 13310 facing the player are substantially the same surface has been described, but the operation device 14300 in the fourteenth embodiment is the second tilting device 14400. The tilt angle of the surface facing the player (the surface formed when the operation unit 14400 changes between the shortened state and the extended state) is larger than the tilt angle of the surface of the tilting device 14310 facing the player. Is also set shallowly. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

70 (a) and 70 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 14300 in the 14th embodiment. Note that FIG. 70 (a) shows a shortened state of the second tilting device 14400, and FIG. 70 (b) shows an extended state of the second tilting device 14400. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper end position of the tilting device 14310 is recessed downward, and the operation unit 14440 can be arranged in the recessed portion.

The second tilting device 14400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 13400 of the thirteenth embodiment, and only the aspect of the operation unit 14440 is different. That is, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the operation unit 14400 is. The second tilting device 14400 is sliced at equal intervals on a plane parallel to the expansion and contraction direction, and is wound with a rubber-like protective film (not shown) to maintain a cylindrical shape.

The operation unit 14440 is directly opposite to the proximity portion 14441, which is placed closest to the surface facing the player most of the members sliced at equal intervals and is engaged and fixed to the tilting device 14310, and the proximity portion 14441. It is arranged between the tip fixing portion 14442 that is arranged and fixed to the second arm portion 430, the proximity portion 14441 and the tip fixing portion 14442, and is connected to each other so as to be relatively movable with respect to the adjacent member. It mainly includes an intermediate interlocking unit 14443.

As shown in FIG. 70 (a), in the shortened state, the proximity portion 14441 and the tip fixing portion 14442 coincide with each other in the direction intersecting the upper surface of the tilting device 14310, the amount of elongation of the protective film is minimized, and the intermediate interlocking portion. The operation unit 14440 including 14443 has a cylindrical shape. In this state, there is no change from the shortened state of the thirteenth embodiment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the extended state, the proximity portion 14441 and the tip fixing portion 14442 are displaced in the direction intersecting the upper surface of the tilting device 14310, and the elongation amount of the protective film is maximized. The intermediate interlocking portion 14443 moves due to the tension of the protective film. As a result, the operation unit 14440 including the intermediate interlocking unit 14443 extends along the direction SD2 in which the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal direction is smaller than the inclination angle of the upper surface of the tilting device 14310 with respect to the horizontal direction. It becomes a shape.

As a result, in the shortened state, the same operation feeling as that of the tilting device 310 described above in the first embodiment can be exhibited, and in the extended state, the change in the height of the upper end position of the tilting device 14310 is suppressed. Even when the second tilting device 14400 is driven at the timing when the player tries to start the operation, the player feels a sense of discomfort while reducing the discomfort given to the player as compared with the case where the height of the operation position suddenly changes. By extending the maximum distance from the rotation axis O1 of the operable portion, the maximum value of the load (reaction force) given to the player via the tilting device 14310 when operating the operation unit 14440 can be reduced. can.

In the extended state, the relationship between the moments centered on the rotation axis O1 changes as compared with the shortened state, and the time until the tilting device 14310 and the second tilting device 14400 return to the posture before pushing in becomes longer. .. Therefore, by changing the second tilting device 14400 to the extended state after the tilting device 14310 is pushed to the lowered position, it is possible to reduce the return speed of the tilting device 14310 and the second tilting device 14400. ..

Next, the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the second tilting device 400 and the tilting device 12310 are always interlocked when the second tilting device 400 is operated by the pedal has been described, but the operation device 15300 in the fifteenth embodiment has the second tilting device 15300. The device 15400 is supported by the lower case 15360 and the upper case 15370 in such a manner that it can rotate relative to the tilting device 310. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

71 (a) and 71 (b) are side views of the operation device 15300 according to the fifteenth embodiment. In addition, FIG. 71 (a) shows a shortened state of the second tilting device 15400, and FIG. 71 (b) shows an extended state of the second tilting device 15400, and the tilting device 310 is pushed in. The state is illustrated.

The second tilting device 15400 has substantially the same configuration as the second tilting device 12400 of the twelfth embodiment, while the lower case 15360 and the upper case 15370 are located at the lower end position of the first arm portion 15420 instead of the fastening fixing portion 410. It also includes a shafted branch 15410 that is rotatably supported. The shaft-mounted support portion 15410 is rotatably supported coaxially with the rotation shaft O1 of the tilting device 310.

The first arm portion 15420 is substantially the same as the first arm portion 420 in the twelfth embodiment, except that the branch portion 425 is not formed, the vibration transmission member 470 does not overhang, and the detection section 15426 is extended from the lower surface. It has the configuration of. That is, it is provided with a drive motor 450 and a transmission device 460 inside, and is connected to the second arm portion 430 so as to be expandable and contractible.

With such a configuration, the second tilting device 15400 can operate independently of the tilting device 310. A configuration for independently detecting the operation of the second tilting device 15400 will be described. The upper case 15370 is supported by the upper case 15370 in a manner of being sandwiched between the upper case 15370 and the upper case 15370 near the root of the second tilting member 15400, and the second tilting device 15400 is returned to the initial posture (see FIG. 71 (a)). The torsion spring 15371 that generates the urging force of the above, the detection sensor 15372 that is arranged so that the tilt of the first arm portion 15420 can be recognized by detecting the position of the detection section 15426, and the lower surface of the first arm portion 15420 are in contact with each other. It mainly comprises a contact upper surface 15373 which is arranged so as to be possible.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed in, no load is applied to the second tilting device 15400, and the second tilting device 15400 works in such a manner that the urging force of the torsion spring 15371 is maintained in the initial posture. The device 15400 is maintained in the initial position. That is, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the return speed of the tilting device 310 is not affected by the moment generated from the second tilting device 15400, so that the tilting device 310 returns regardless of the state of the second tilting device 15400. You can set the speed.

Therefore, since the return mode of the tilting device 310 does not change depending on the state of the second tilting device 15400, an appropriate load can be applied to the player regardless of the state of the second tilting device 15400. For example, when the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, an appropriate feeling of repeated hits can be given.

As shown in FIG. 71 (b), in the extended state of the second tilting device 15400, the operation unit 440 is arranged outside the arc R12. Therefore, when the player grips the operation unit 440 and pushes the second tilting device 15400, the pushing operation can be completed without touching the tilting device 310. That is, either the second tilting device 15400 or the tilting device 310 can be pushed in independently.

At this time, in the tilting posture (see FIG. 72 (b)) in which the tilting of the second tilting device 15400 is completed, the detection section 15426 is inserted into the detection groove of the detection sensor 15372 and a signal is output from the detection sensor 15372. As a result, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) can be made to recognize that the second tilting device 15400 has been pushed in. That is, the detection sensor 15373 functions as a sensor for detecting the operation of the second tilting device 15400.

72 (a) and 72 (b) are side views of the operating device 15300. Note that FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b) show a shortened state of the second tilting device 15400. Further, in FIG. 72 (a), a state in which the second tilting device 15400 is tilted from FIG. 71 (a) and the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 15400 starts to come into contact with the upper cover 311 of the tilting device 310 is shown. In FIG. 72 (b), the second tilting device 15400 is further tilted from the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), and the operating unit 440 abuts on the tilting device 310 to push the tilting device 310 and the second tilting device. The state in which the 15400 is in the tilted posture is illustrated.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed by the operation unit 440 and the tilting device 310 is tilted when the second tilting device 15400 is tilted to the tilted posture, the tilting device 310 is tilted as shown in FIG. 72 (b). It does not reach the descending position (it stays between the ascending and descending positions). The tiltable angle of the second tilting device 15400 is set to the same angle (about 21 degrees) as that of the tilting device 310.

According to the present embodiment, even if the second tilting device 15400 is in the shortened state, the tilting device 310 alone can be pushed to the pushing completion position. On the other hand, when the second tilting device 15400 is in the shortened state and the operation unit 440 is gripped and pushed independently, the state shown in FIG. 71 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 72 (a) is the second. The two tilting device 15400 can be pushed in independently, and thereafter (see FIG. 72 (b)), the tilting device 310 is also pushed in as the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in. That is, it is impossible to push the second tilting device 15400 alone to the pushing completion position (tilting posture).

Therefore, it is easier to understand the change in the reaction force given to the player when the operation unit 440 of the second tilting device 15400 is gripped and pushed in as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 is operated by pushing it with a finger. be able to. That is, by increasing the number of objects pushed by the operation from only the second tilting device 15400 (see FIG. 72 (a)) to the second tilting device 15400 and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 72 (b)), the player becomes a player. It is possible to visually grasp the change in reaction force.

In the shortened state, whether the operation unit 440 is gripped and operated or the tilting device 310 is operated by pushing it with a finger is determined by determining the input from each sensor S1 to S3, 15372 to the MPU 201. can do.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the second tilting device 15400 is maintained in the initial posture, so that there is no input from the detection sensor 15372 to the MPU 201, but the tilting device 310 changes its posture. Input to the MPU 201 is generated from the detection sensors S1 to S3.

On the other hand, for example, when the player operates the second tilting device 15400, an input from the detection sensor 15372 to the MPU 201 occurs as the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in.

As described above, although the second tilting device 15400 and the tilting device 310 are operating members that move in the same direction at the same time in a part of the range, it is possible to determine which one is being operated. Thereby, for example, it can be determined whether or not the player is operating the operation target as notified by the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, since the vibration transmission member 470 (see FIG. 64) is not arranged, the vibration of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the second tilting device 15400 only through the tilting device 310. That is, when the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in, the transmission of the vibration of the drive motor M1 is cut off in the states from FIGS. 71 (a) to 72 (a), and FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (b) are shown. In the above state, the vibration of the drive motor M1 is transmitted to the player via the contact position of the tilting device 310 and the operation unit 440.

Next, the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the moving end member 10362d is pushed into the tilting device 310 and descends has been described, but the operation device 16300 in the sixteenth embodiment has the moving end member 10362d regardless of the posture change of the tilting device 310. It is equipped with a lowering device 16362 g that automatically lowers. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

73 (a) and 73 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 16300 according to the sixteenth embodiment. It should be noted that FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated and the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end portion of the piston member 362a. FIG. 73 (b) shows FIG. 73 (a). The state in which the moving end member 10362d is lowered by the lowering device 16362g by a length of 1/3 of the movable length is shown. Further, in FIG. 73 (a), a state in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 73 (a), first position) is shown, and in FIG. 73 (b), the stepped member 10362f is on the rear side. (Fig. 73 (b) right side, second position) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 73A, the operation device 16300 has the tilting device 310 described above and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and is tilted. A tilting member between the lower case 16360 forming the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 16360 having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and is arranged facing the lower case 16360. The tilting device 310 is fixed to the lower case 16360 in a manner in which the 310 is arranged, and the tilting device 310 is abutted against the tilting device 310 to determine the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is abutted on the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). It mainly includes an upper case 370 (see FIG. 9).

The lower case 16360 will be described. The lower case 16360 is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper side open, and is movably supported in the vertical direction (FIG. 73 (a) vertical direction). Mainly includes an urging device 16362 having a piston member 362a, and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged.

The urging device 16362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 through the acting claw portion 332, and is a bottomed cylinder that is operably supported in the vertical direction inside the tubular receiving portion 361c and is opened downward. The shape of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and the lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361, and the moving end, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the coil spring 362b from the lower end side and is supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A return spring 16362e arranged between the member 10362d, the moving end member 10362d and the bottom lid member 362c and urging the moving end member 10362d upward, and a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d ( A stepped member 10362f that is movable between a first position near the moving end member 10362d and a second position far from the moving end member 10362d from the front-rear direction (FIG. 51 (a) left-right direction), and a bottom support. A drive solenoid SOL10 that is fastened and fixed to the member 361 and drives the stepped member 10362f along a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, and a downward load is applied in a manner of riding on the moving end member 10362d. It mainly includes a lowering device 16362 g configured so that the vertical position of the moving end member 10362d can be changed.

In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b has a natural length in the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). That is, the state in which the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position is defined as the natural length of the coil spring 362b.

The return spring 16362e is formed of a spring member having an elastic modulus equivalent to that of the coil spring 362b. That is, the return spring 16362e and the coil spring 362b have the same displacement required to generate the same reaction force. Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 73B), the piston member 362a is pushed by the tilting device 310, and the displacement amount when the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e expand and contract. Is 1 to 1 (displacement amount of coil spring 362b: displacement amount of return spring 16362e = 1: 1).

The lowering device 16362g is a moving member 16362g1 arranged at a position overlapping the moving end member 10362d in a vertical direction, and a rod member inserted through the moving member 16362g1 and having an outer shape formed into a male screw shape. A drive motor 16362 g3 that rotates the screw rod 16362 g2 and is fixed to the bottom lid member 362c or the pachinko machine 10, and a moving member that extends parallel to the extension direction of the screw rod 16362 g2 from the side wall of the drive motor 16362 g3. It mainly includes a rotation prevention plate 16362g4 that comes into contact with the side surface of 16362g1 and prevents the moving member 16362g1 from rotating.

According to the present embodiment, the moving end member 10362d can be lowered by an arbitrary amount in advance by the lowering device 16362g, and then the position of the moving end member 10362d is changed by arranging the stepped member 10362f at the first position. Can be made to. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 can be changed according to the arrangement of the tilting device 310.

The moving member 16362g1 is provided with a through hole penetrating along the vertical direction, and a female screw shape is formed in the through hole. The female screw shape and the male screw shape of the screw rod 16362 g are formed so as to be screwable with a slight gap. When the drive motor 16362g3 is driven and the screw rod 16362g2 is rotated, the moving member 16362g1 moves up and down by the so-called ball screw mechanism.

In the state shown in FIG. 73A, the moving member 16362g1 of the lowering device 16362g is arranged at the upper end position of the moving range, and the stepped member 16362f is arranged at the first position. Even if the tilting device 310 is pedaled in this state, the moving end member 10362d is supported by the stepped member 10362f, so that the moving end member 10362d is prevented from descending from the upper end position. Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the player by the operation of the tilting device 310 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 73B, the stepped member 16362f is arranged at the second position so that the moving end member 10362d can move up and down, and the moving member 16362g1 of the lowering device 16362g is lowered to move the moving end member 10362d. Is placed between the top and bottom positions. As described above, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d can be changed in advance before the tilting device 310 is operated by the pedal.

As shown in FIG. 73B, when the moving end member 10362d is lowered in advance, the piston member 362a is also lowered in the same manner, so that the contact timing between the action claw portion 332 of the tilting device 310 and the piston member 362a Can be delayed. That is, the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 from the ascending position of the tilting device 310 at the timing when the reaction force generated by the urging device 16362 is applied to the reaction force applied to the player who pedals the tilting device 310 (the angle corresponding to the posture change). ) Becomes larger.

This makes it possible to give the player a different feeling of operation. That is, the player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually remembers how much the tilting device 310 should be pushed in and how much reaction force is generated by each operation, for example, changing the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual.

Therefore, by driving and controlling the lowering device 16362 g by associating the difference in the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur with the difference in the jackpot expectation (for example, when the jackpot expectation is large, the moving member 16362 g1 is lowered more significantly). Since the discomfort given to the player and the difference in the jackpot expectation can be associated with each other, it is possible to promote the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 for one purpose of confirming whether or not the discomfort occurs. ..

A case where the tilting device 310 is pedaled to the lowered position in the state shown in FIG. 73B will be described. Since the return spring 16362e is already displaced, the urging force corresponding to it is applied upward to the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, even if the acting claw portion 332 pushes down the piston member 362a, the moving end member 10362d is maintained at the upper end position when the downward urging force generated from the coil spring 362b is less than the urging force of the return spring 16362e.

On the other hand, after the downward urging force generated from the coil spring 362b reaches the urging force of the return spring 16362e, that is, after the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b reaches the displacement amount of the return spring 16362e, the urging forces of each other are caught. In the matching mode, the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e both contract, so that the moving end member 10362d descends and separates from the moving member 16362g1.

In this case, the final arrangement of the piston member 362a and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e are the same, that is, the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d is provided. This is the same as the case where the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated in the state of being arranged at the upper end position (the state in which the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position from the state shown in FIG. 73A).

Therefore, there are cases where the tilting device 310 is pedaled while the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position and the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position, and cases where the tilting device 310 is in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). The load (reaction force) applied to the player immediately after pedaling the tilting device 310 to the descending position does not change depending on the pedal operation.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the player immediately after the end of the pedal operation can be made equal while changing the generation timing of the load (reaction force) applied to the player who operates the pedal of the tilting device 310.

This makes it possible to give the player a different feeling of operation. That is, the player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually remembers how much the tilting device 310 should be pushed in and how much reaction force is generated by each operation, for example, changing the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual. Similarly, by changing the reaction force returned immediately after the end of the pedal operation, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual.

Therefore, the lowering device 16362 g is driven and controlled by associating the combination of the difference in the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur, the difference in the reaction force returned immediately after the end of the pedal operation, and the difference in the jackpot expectation degree (for example, the jackpot expectation degree). When the reaction force is large, the timing of the reaction force generation is delayed and the reaction force immediately after the end of the pedal operation is changed), so that the discomfort given to the player can be associated with the difference in the jackpot expectation. It is possible to promote the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 for one purpose of confirming whether or not the tilting device 310 occurs.

When the player pedals the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 73 (b), the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position at the timing of generating the reaction force from the urging device 16362 (see FIG. 73 (a)). Since the stepped member 10362f is slower than when it is placed in the second position, it gives the player a sense of discomfort that the expectation of a big hit is high (Ikki), while the player is given a feeling immediately after the end of the pedal operation. Since the applied reaction force is the same as when the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 73A) and the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position, it can be expected that the jackpot expectation is high. No sense of incongruity is given (Ikyuu). That is, the player can be overwhelmed by the reaction force given by the tilting device 310 in the process of pushing the tilting device 310.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the player who pedals the tilting device 310 is notified of the jackpot expectation due to the difference in the reaction force generation timing in one pushing process. , It is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by the difference in the reaction force immediately after the end of pushing. Therefore, the player can be notified of the jackpot expectation due to the difference in reaction force multiple times in different time zones in one pushing process.

As a result, the degree of attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 can be concentrated from the start to the completion of the operation.

74 (a) and 74 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 16300. Note that FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which the stepped member 10362f is rearranged from the state shown in FIG. 73 (b) to the first position, and FIG. 74 (b) shows the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). The state in which the moving member 16362g1 is lowered from the state by a length of 1/3 of the movable length of the moving end member 10362d is shown.

In the state shown in FIG. 74 (a), the arrangement of the piston member 362a is the same as in FIG. 73 (b), but unlike the state shown in FIG. 73 (b), the vertical movement of the moving end member 10362d is stepped. It is regulated by member 10362f. Therefore, when the player operates the pedal of the tilting device 310, the timing at which the reaction force of the urging device 10362 is generated is the same as the case where the pedal is operated in the state shown in FIG. 73B, and the pedal operation is completed. The magnitude of the load (reaction force) applied to the player immediately afterwards can be made different from the case where the pedal operation is performed in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b).

That is, by restricting the lowering of the moving end member 10362d, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b becomes larger (about 4/3 times) as compared with the case where the pedal is operated in the state shown in FIG. 73 (b). Become).

This makes it possible to give the player a different feeling of operation. That is, the player who operates the tilting device 310 gradually remembers how much the tilting device 310 should be pushed in and how much reaction force is generated by each operation, for example, changing the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur. This can give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual. Similarly, by changing the reaction force returned immediately after the end of the pedal operation, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the situation is different from usual.

Therefore, the lowering device 16362 g is driven and controlled by associating the combination of the difference in the timing at which the reaction force starts to occur, the difference in the reaction force returned immediately after the end of the pedal operation, and the difference in the jackpot expectation degree (for example, the jackpot expectation degree). When the reaction force is large, the timing of the reaction force generation is delayed and the reaction force immediately after the end of the pedal operation is changed), so that the discomfort given to the player can be associated with the difference in the jackpot expectation. It is possible to promote the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 for one purpose of confirming whether or not the tilting device 310 occurs.

When the player pedals the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 74 (a), the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position at the timing of generating the reaction force from the urging device 16362 (see FIG. 73 (a)). Since the stepped member 10362f is slower than when it is placed in the second position, it gives the player a sense of discomfort that the expectation of a big hit is high, and the reaction force given to the player immediately after the end of the pedal operation is the piston. Since the member 362a is arranged at the upper end position (see FIG. 73 (a)) and the stepped member 10362f is larger than the case where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position, it is expected that the jackpot expectation is high. Can be given. That is, the player can repeatedly confirm the magnitude of the jackpot expectation depending on the generation timing and magnitude of the reaction force applied from the tilting device 310 in the pushing process of the tilting device 310.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the player who pedals the tilting device 310 is notified of the jackpot expectation due to the difference in the reaction force generation timing in one pushing process. , It is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by the difference in the reaction force immediately after the end of pushing. Therefore, the player can be notified of the jackpot expectation due to the difference in reaction force multiple times in different time zones in one pushing process.

As a result, the degree of attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 can be concentrated from the start to the completion of the operation.

In the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), the arrangement of the piston member 362a is lowered as compared with the state shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (a). Therefore, the generation timing of the load (reaction force) generated from the urging device 16362 and applied to the player who operates the tilting device 310 is set later than the state shown in FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (a). To.

In the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), the moving end member 10362d is arranged at a position 2/3 from the top of the moving range. Here, in order to pedal the tilting device 310 with the moving end member 10362d lowered to displace the return spring 16362e, it is necessary to displace the coil spring 362b by the same amount as the return spring 16362e. In the state shown in 74 (b), the maximum allowable displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is set to 1/3 of the moving range of the moving end member 10362d. Therefore, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b cannot be made equal to the displacement amount of the return spring 16362e.

Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pedaled from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) to the descending position, the moving end member 10362d is maintained in the state shown in FIG. 74 (b). That is, in the state shown in FIG. 74 (b), the arrangement of the stepped member 10362f cannot be determined from the reaction force applied to the player via the tilting device 310.

Here, when it is necessary to arrange the stepped member 10362f at the first position in order to maintain the arrangement of the moving end member 10362d, for example, the moving end member 10362d is immediately moved after detecting the operation of the player. Even if control is to be performed, it is necessary to intervene an operation of retracting the stepped member 10362f to the second position, so that the moving end member 10362d and the stepped member 10362f may collide with each other, resulting in a desired operation. There was a problem that it was difficult to make it.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) of the present embodiment, the position of the moving end member 10362d is maintained with respect to the operation of the tilting device 310 in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to quickly move the moving member 16362g1 up and down immediately after pedaling the tilting device 310.

For example, when the moving member 16362g1 is rapidly raised, the moving end member 10362d is raised by the urging force of the return spring 16362e. More specifically, it rises by 1/6 of the moving range of the moving end member 10362d. As a result, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b changes 1.5 times, so that the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 increases about 1.5 times. Therefore, by raising the moving member 16362g1 immediately after the player pedals the tilting device 310 to the lowering position, the load given to the player can be immediately increased by 1.5 times. The increase in load can give a sense of discomfort.

Further, for example, a case where the moving member 16362 g1 is rapidly lowered will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a partial cross-sectional view taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19A of the operating device 16300. In addition, in FIG. 75, a state in which the moving end member 10362d is lowered from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) to the lower end position of the movable range of the moving end member 10362d is shown, and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362 is 0 ( The state of natural length) is shown in the figure.

When the moving member 16362g1 is suddenly lowered from the state shown in FIG. 74 (b) toward the state shown in FIG. 75, the moving end member 10362d is also suddenly lowered, and the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b is reduced. Then, in the state shown in FIG. 75, the displacement amount of the coil spring 362b becomes 0, and the load applied from the urging device 16362 to the tilting device 310 becomes 0.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 is reduced. By lowering the moving member 16362g1 immediately after the player pedals the tilting device 310 to the lowering position, the load given to the player can be immediately reduced and eventually reduced to 0, so that the load is applied to the player. It is possible to give a sense of discomfort due to the decrease in.

In the present embodiment, as described above, by arranging the moving member 16362g1, the moving end member 10362d functions as the fixed end of the coil spring 362b, and the moving end member 10362d is used as the moving end (coil spring 362d and return spring 16362e). It is possible to limit both the case of functioning as an intermediate position (the end moving in the direction in which the springs are in series) and the case of functioning as an intermediate position.

Next, the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the shape-invariant moving end member 10362d is pushed into the tilting device 310 and descends has been described, but the operation device 17300 in the seventeenth embodiment includes the shape-variable moving end member 17362d. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 76 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 17300 according to the 17th embodiment in the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a), and FIG. 76 (b) is a portion of the modified rotating member 17362 g1. It is a perspective view, and FIG. 77 is a developed view of the outer peripheral surface of the deformed rotating member 17362g1. Note that FIG. 76A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pedal-operated and the acting claw portion 332 starts to come into contact with the end portion of the piston member 362a, and FIG. 77 shows a developed view for a center angle of 360 degrees. Illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the operation device 17300 has the above-mentioned tilting device 310 and the recessed bearing portion 361a (see FIG. 9) that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below, and is tilted. The tilting member is between the lower case 17360 forming the push-in end of the device 310 and the lower case 17360 having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and is arranged facing the lower case 17360. The tilting device 310 is fixed to the lower case 17360 in a manner in which the 310 is arranged, and the tilting device 310 is in contact with the tilting device 310 to determine the ascending position of the tilting device 310 (the tilting device 310 is in contact with the inner peripheral edge of the U-shaped frame). It mainly includes an upper case 370 (see FIG. 9).

The lower case 17360 will be described. The lower case 17360 is assembled from below to the bottom receiving member 361 formed in a dish shape with the upper side open, and is movably supported in the vertical direction (FIG. 76 (a) vertical direction). It mainly includes an urging device 17362 having a piston member 362a, and a power acting device 363 in which members fixed to the upper side of the bottom receiving member 361 and to which electric power is supplied are collectively arranged.

The urging device 17362 is a device that applies an urging force to the tilting device 310 through the acting claw portion 332, and is a bottomed cylinder that is operably supported in the vertical direction inside the tubular receiving portion 361c and is opened downward. The shape of the piston member 362a, the coil spring 362b accommodated in the piston member 362a from the open end of the piston member 362a, and the lid on the lower opening of the cylindrical receiving portion 361c made of a highly rigid material such as metal. The bottom lid member 362c, which is fastened and fixed to the bottom receiving member 361, and the moving end, which is arranged so as to be in contact with the coil spring 362b from the lower end side and is supported by the bottom receiving member 361 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The return spring 17362e disposed between the member 17362d, the moving end member 17362d, and the bottom lid member 362c and urging the moving end member 10362d upward, and the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 17362d ( A stepped member 10362f capable of moving between a first position near the moving end member 17362d and a second position far from the moving end member 17362d from the front-back direction (FIG. 76 (a) left-right direction), and a bottom support. The drive solenoid SOL10, which is fastened and fixed to the member 361 and drives the stepped member 10362f along the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, engages with the moving end member 17362d and moves up and down together with the moving end member 17362d. Mainly includes a member deforming device 17362g having a deformed rotating member 17362g1.

In the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b has a natural length in the state shown in FIG. 73 (a). That is, the state in which the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end position is defined as the natural length of the coil spring 362b.

The moving end member 17362d is arranged above the plate-shaped intermediate plate member 17362d1 on which the locked portion 10362d1 is formed and the intermediate plate member 17362d1 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1. The upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 which are arranged below the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and are capable of sliding in the vertical direction with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 are mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), since the moving end member 17362d is sandwiched between the coil spring 362b and the return spring 17362e at the top and bottom, the members 17362d1 to 17362d3 should be separated from each other unless there is a special load from others. It does not overlap and moves up and down.

The return spring 17362e is formed of a spring member having an elastic modulus equivalent to that of the coil spring 362b. That is, the return spring 17362e and the coil spring 362b have the same displacement required to generate the same reaction force. Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position (see FIG. 76B), the piston member 362a is pushed by the tilting device 310, and the displacement amount when the coil spring 362b and the return spring 17362e expand and contract. Is 1 to 1 (displacement amount of coil spring 362b: displacement amount of return spring 17362e = 1: 1).

The member deforming device 17362g has a deformed rotating member 17362g1 arranged at a position where it interferes with the front side end of the moving end member 17362d in a vertical direction, and a D-shaped cross section inserted into the deformed rotating member 17362g1 so as to be relatively non-rotatable. Mainly includes a rod-shaped rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 and a drive motor 17362 g3 for rotating the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2.

As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is formed of a pair of upper and lower cylindrical bodies UT and BT.

The upper cylindrical body UT forming the upper side of the modified rotating member 17362g1 is a member sandwiched between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the upper plate member 17362d2, and has an insertion hole UT0 having a D-shaped cross section and 1 / of the center angle. A first upper surface UT1 forming 4 (90 degrees) and a second upper surface UT2 adjacent to the first upper surface UT1 in the clockwise direction of the upper surface and forming 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle. The third upper surface UT3 is adjacent to the second upper surface UT2 in the clockwise direction of the upper surface to form a 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle, and the third upper surface UT3 is adjacent to the third upper surface UT3 in the clockwise direction of the upper surface. It mainly includes a fourth upper surface UT4 that forms 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle.

Similarly, the lower cylindrical body BT forming the lower side of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is a member sandwiched between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the lower plate member 17362d3, and coincides with the insertion hole UT0 in the vertical direction. The first lower surface BT1 that is arranged at the position and forms a D-shaped insertion hole and 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle, and the first lower surface BT1 are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction of the lower surface. The second lower surface BT2 that forms 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle and the second lower surface BT2 that are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction of the lower surface to form 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle. The third lower surface BT3 and the fourth lower surface BT4 which are adjacent to each other in the counterclockwise direction of the lower surface of the third lower surface BT3 and form 1/4 (90 degrees) of the center angle are mainly provided.

The insertion hole of the upper cylindrical body UT and the insertion hole of the lower tubular body BT are formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2. That is, the upper tubular body UT and the lower tubular body BT are pivotally supported by the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 in a state in which they cannot rotate relative to the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 and are movable in the vertical direction (FIG. 76 (FIG. 76). a) See).

As a result, when the coil spring 362b is lowered after the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is also lowered along the rotating slide shaft rod 17362g2 as the moving end member 17362d is lowered.

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the present embodiment, the intermediate plate member 17362d1 of the moving end member 17362d is sandwiched between the upper cylindrical body UT and the lower tubular body BT, and is formed by the upper cylindrical body UT. The upper plate member 17362d2 is arranged further above, and the lower plate member 17362d3 is arranged further below the lower cylindrical body BT. Then, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 rotates, and the vertical dimension of the portion of the tubular body UT and BT facing the moving end member 17362d changes, so that the upper plate member 173621d2 is arranged with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 or the intermediate plate. The arrangement of the lower plate member 173621d3 with respect to the member 17362d1 can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 77, on the upper surface of the upper cylindrical body UT of the deformed rotating member 17362g1, a moving upper end Uh1 which is the upper end position of the moving range and a moving lower end Uh0 which is the lower end position of the moving range are set. On the lower surface of the side cylindrical body BT, a moving upper end Bh0 which is the upper end position of the moving range and a moving lower end Bh1 which is the lower end position of the moving range are set.

The upper surface of the upper cylindrical body UT and the lower surface of the lower tubular body BT of the deformed rotating member 17362 g1 change their states (position change in the vertical direction with respect to the rotation of the drive motor 17362 g3) at an angular interval of 90 degrees.

For example, when the initial phase θ0, which is an angular position of one of the deformed rotating members 17362g1, is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d (see FIG. 76A), the drive motor 17362g3 is driven and the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is on the upper surface. When rotating counterclockwise, the phase arranged to face the moving end member 17362d shifts to the first phase θ1.

Meanwhile, since the first upper surface UT1 of the upper tubular body UT is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d, the upper plate member 17362d2 stops at the moving lower end Uh0 with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1, while the lower tubular body BT Since the first lower surface BT1 is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d, the lower plate member 17362d3 is displaced with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 from the moving upper end Bh0 toward the moving lower end Bh1 (see FIG. 78 (a)). By rotating the deformed rotating member 17362g1 in this way, the shape of the moving end member 17362d can be changed.

78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), FIG. 79 (a) and FIG. 79 (b) are partial cross-sectional views taken along the line corresponding to the XIXb-XIXb line of FIG. 19 (a) of the operating device 17300. In FIG. 78 (a), from FIG. 76 (a), the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the first phase θ1 of the deformed rotating member 17362 g1 is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d. In FIG. 78 (b), the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 is further rotated in the same direction, and the second phase θ2 of the deformed rotary member 17362 g1 is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d (a). Then, the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 further rotates in the same direction, and the third phase θ3 of the deformed rotary member 17362 g1 is arranged to face the moving end member 17362d. In FIG. 79 (b), the rotary slide shaft rod 17362 g2 is the same. The state in which the intermediate position between the third phase θ3 and the initial phase θ0 of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is further rotated in the direction is arranged facing the moving end member 17362d is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, according to the present embodiment, the coil spring 362b or the return spring 17362e can be preliminarily contracted in a state where the moving end member 17362d is arranged at the upper end position. Thereby, the load (reaction force) given to the player can be changed.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 78 (a), the state of the coil spring 362b is the same as the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), while the return spring 17362e is pre-contracted. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 78 (a)) is shown in FIG. 76 (a). It does not change compared to the indicated state (in the comparison of the tilting device 310 tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) given to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position when the pedal operation is completed is shown in FIG. 76 (a). ) Is larger than the state shown in).

Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 78 (a), as compared with the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position, the tilting device 310 is used. The load given to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position after completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 while equalizing the load (reaction force) given to the player. (Reaction force) can be increased. This makes it possible to notify the player of the stepwise change.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 78 (b), the state of the coil spring 362b is preliminarily contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a), while the state of the return spring 17362e does not change. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 78 (b)) is shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 76 (a). It is larger than the state shown in FIG. 78 (a) (in the comparison of the state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) given to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position when the pedal operation is completed is shown in FIG. 76 (a). ), It becomes larger than the state shown in FIG. 78 (a), and it becomes the same as compared with the state shown in FIG. 78 (a).

Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position as compared with the state shown in FIGS. 76 (a) and 78 (a). When the stepped member 10362f is arranged in the second position after completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 while increasing the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 is used. The load (reaction force) applied to the player can be made larger than that shown in FIG. 76 (a) and can be made equivalent to the state shown in FIG. 78 (a). This makes it possible to notify the player of the stepwise change.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), the state of the coil spring 362b is pre-contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a), and the state of the return spring 17362e is pre-contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a). .. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 79 (a)) is shown in FIG. 78 (b). It is equivalent to the state shown (in the comparison of the state in which the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) given to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position when the pedal operation is completed is shown in FIG. 78 (b). ) (It becomes larger than the state shown in FIG. 76 (a) and FIG. 78 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 79 (a), the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position is shown in FIG. 78. A load (anti-load) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position after the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed, which is equivalent to the state shown in (b). The force) can be increased as compared with the states shown in FIGS. 76 (a), 78 (a) and 78 (b). This makes it possible to notify the player of the stepwise change.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 79 (b), the state of the coil spring 362b is pre-contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a), and the state of the return spring 17362e is pre-contracted as compared with FIG. 76 (a). .. The amount of shrinkage is smaller than the amount of shrinkage shown in FIG. 79 (a). Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player when the tilting device 310 is pedaled in the state where the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position (see FIG. 79 (b)) is shown in FIG. 79 (a). It is smaller than the indicated state (in the comparison of the tilting device 310 tilted at the same angle). On the other hand, the load (reaction force) given to the player when the excitation of the drive solenoid SOL10 is released and the stepped member 10362f is moved to the second position when the pedal operation is completed is shown in FIG. 79 (a). ) Is smaller than the state shown in).

Therefore, in the state of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 shown in FIG. 79 (b), the load (reaction force) applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the first position is shown in FIG. 79. A load applied to the player via the tilting device 310 when the stepped member 10362f is arranged at the second position after completing the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 while being smaller than the state shown in (a). The reaction force) can be made smaller than that shown in FIG. 79 (a). This makes it possible to notify the player of the stepwise change.

Further, the state shown in FIG. 79B is a state in which the fourth upper surface UT4 and the fourth lower surface BT4 are arranged to face the moving end member 17362d, and the rotary slide shaft rod 17362g2 is rotated by a predetermined angle to rotate the deformed rotary member 17362g1. By changing the portion facing the moving end member 17362d between the third phase θ3 and the initial phase θ0, the amount of movement (separation width) of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 with respect to the intermediate plate member 17362d1 can be reduced. It can be changed continuously.

According to the present embodiment, since the deformable portion of the moving end member 17362d and the stepped member 10362f do not interfere with each other, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 can be rotated at an arbitrary timing. For example, after the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 is completed, after notifying that the tilting device 310 is continuously pushed in, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is rotated to change the state of the moving end member 17362d and tilted. The load (reaction force) applied to the player via the device 310 can be changed.

For example, by rotating the deformed rotating member 17362g1 by 90 degrees clockwise from the top view from the state shown in FIG. 76 (a), the state of FIG. 79 (a) is reached via the state of FIG. 79 (b). From there, the deformed rotating member 17362g1 is further rotated 90 degrees in the opposite direction. In this way, by repeatedly reversing the direction and rotating the tilting device 310 by 90 degrees, it is possible to change the strength of the load given to the player who maintains the pushing of the tilting device 310.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the lower end surface 2332b of the acting claw portion 2332 has a shape for keeping the load felt by the player constant, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape behind the switching point 2332c may be recessed in a direction further separated from the piston member 2362a. As a result, after the switching point 2332c and the piston member 2362a are released from contact with each other (when the rotation angle of the tilting device 2310 becomes larger), the load applied from the piston member 2362a to the tilting device 2310 is reduced, so that the game can be played. It can be used for directing to reduce the load on the person.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the load applied to the tilting device 4310 continues to increase immediately after the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the position where the tilting device 4310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position (the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation), the area of the magnets overlapping in the radial direction of the circle centered on the rotation axis O1 is set to zero. The load applied to the tilting device 4310 may be set to the minimum value at a position rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In this case, it is possible to facilitate the player to determine the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 are not in contact with each other until the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the tilting device 5310 and the rotating roller 5381 may be configured to be in contact with each other until the tilting device 5310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In this case, for example, the operating resistance when the tilting device 5310 is pushed can be changed by manually changing the tightness of the torsion spring 5383 that applies the urging force to the rotating roller 5381.

In the sixth embodiment, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 of the tilting device 6310 is such that the rotating shaft O1 is set with reference to the contact point J1 between the tilting device 6310 and the rotating member 6381 in the state where the tilting device 6310 is arranged in the raised position. Although the case of entering the inside from the centered arc C6 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the range from the contact point J1 to 3 ° upward, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 is formed along the arc C6, and in the range from 3 ° upward from the contact point J1, the shape of the curved wall portion 6316 is formed. May be formed so as to enter inward from the arc C6. In this case, in the range from the state where the tilting device 6310 is arranged in the ascending position to the rotation of 3 ° (the range of the push operation), the rotating member 6381 is prevented from being separated from the tilting device 6310 due to the operating speed of the tilting device 6310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the resistance given to the player from changing due to the displacement speed of the tilting device 6310 within the range of the push operation.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the fixed magnet Ma2 and the moving magnet Ma7 are attracted within the range of the pedal operation of the tilting device 7310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fixed magnet Ma2 and the moving magnet Ma7 may be attracted by a push operation. In this case, the moving resistance of the tilting device 7310 changes depending on the displacement speed of the tilting device 7310 during the push operation (for example, if the tilting device 7310 is pushed vigorously, the return becomes slow), so that an appropriate repeated striking operation can be performed. The permissible range of the displacement speed of the tilting device 7310 that can be made is narrowed. As a result, the mode of continuous striking when the player repeatedly strikes can be moved to the uniform side, and the tilting device 7310 is prevented from being damaged by an unexpected operation (operation in which the continuous striking speed is excessively increased, etc.). be able to.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the locking member 7318 is manually moved has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the locking member 7318 may be urged by a dashpot toward the back, and the locking member 7318 and the upper surface portion of the power acting member 363 may be inclined at a sliding angle. In this case, when the speed at which the tilting device 7310 is rotated is high, the locking member 7318 is powered by the load in the rotational direction before the locking member 7318 is moved toward the front side against the urging force of the dashpot. When the tilting device 7310 is pressed against the 363 and the tilting device 7310 is stopped, when the speed at which the tilting device 7310 is rotated is low, the locking member 7318 is moved toward the front before the force for pressing the locking member 7318 against the power acting member 363 increases. Can be moved to the side. Therefore, the locking member 7318 can be automatically moved only when the operation speed is low.

In the seventh embodiment, when the tilting device 7310 is stopped in the middle of rotation, the tilting device 7310 can be further rotated by moving the locking member 7318a in a direction different from the rotation direction. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, a member that stops the rotation of the tilting device 7310 is configured to be retractable by a notch mechanism, and the notch mechanism is switched by one step by operating the tilting device 7310 in the pushing direction. In the state, the configuration may be such that the rotation can be partitioned up to the descending position. In this case, the tilting device 7310 can be stopped in the middle of rotation by operating in the same direction as the tilting device 7310 is pushed in.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82 can be attracted from the state where the tilting device 8310 is arranged in the ascending position has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82 may be configured to be attractable from a position where the tilting device 8310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In this case, when the tilting device 8310 is rotated in a state where the displacement speed of the tilting device 8310 is small (a state in which the inertial acting member 7319c stops relative to the upper cover 8311), the tilting device 8310 is operated by the urging device 362. The timing at which the displacement resistance of the tilting device 8310 increases and the timing at which the displacement resistance of the tilting device 8310 increases due to the attraction between the fixed magnet Ma81 and the moving magnet Ma82 can be matched, and the tilting device 8310 is rotated by 3 ° from the ascending position. In some cases, the amount of increase in the load applied to the tilting device 8310 can be increased. This makes it easier for the player to determine the boundary between the push operation and the pedal operation.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the stepped member 10362f moves in and out along the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the stepped member 10362f that moves in and out, it is a member that rotates on a rotation axis parallel to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d, and the distance between the moving end member 10362d and the moving end member 10362d is continuous or discontinuous depending on the phase. You may use the phase change member which changes to.

The phase change member is formed from a so-called spiral shape, and interferes with the moving end member 10362d in the vertical direction (moving direction of the moving end member 10362d) at the maximum diameter portion, and interferes with the moving end member 10362d at the minimum diameter portion in the vertical direction. It is said that the shape is not. Further, the change in the radial length of the phase changing member occurs continuously.

According to this, if the large-diameter portion of the phase changing member is arranged on the moving end member 10362d side, the phase changing member and the moving end member 10362d may collide (the stepped member 10362f is in the first position). If the small diameter portion of the phase changing member is arranged on the moving end member 10362d side (corresponding to the arranged state), the phase changing member and the moving end member 10362d do not collide (the stepped member 10362f is the second). Corresponds to the state of being placed in position).

Similar to the case where the stepped member 10362f appears and disappears in a constant motion in the tenth embodiment, if the change in the diameter length of the phase changing member is designed according to the conditions, the same embodiment (of the phase changing member) is provided. The stop position of the moving end member 10362d can be controlled in the mode of continuing constant velocity rotation).

In this case, when the phase changing member approaches and collides with the moving end member 10362d, the direction of the load applied from the phase changing member to the moving end member 10362d has components in the rotation direction and the rotation axis direction of the phase changing member. It is in the direction of inclination. Further, the large diameter portion of the phase changing member gradually approaches the moving end member 10362d along the rotation direction of the phase changing member.

Therefore, when the stepped member 10362f moves in and out perpendicularly to the moving direction of the moving end member 10362d and applies a load orthogonal to the moving direction to the moving end member 10362d (when a large load is momentarily applied to the moving end member 10362d). ), The change in the magnitude of the load applied to the moving end member 10362d can be made more gradual. This makes it possible to improve the durability of the moving end member 10362d and the phase changing member.

In the tenth embodiment, the description focuses on one pedal operation of the tilting device 310, but the description is not limited to this. For example, the tilting device 310 may be divided into a plurality of times to perform a notification (continuous striking, sequential pushing, etc.) to operate the pedal. In this case, while the stepped member 10362f is operating constantly, the lowered moving end member 10362d does not rise due to the pedal operation of the tilting device 310 (the stepped member 10362f is placed in the first position before restoration). Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the player via the tilting device 310 can be reduced as the pushing opportunity on the side where the number of pushing times is large.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the stepped member 10362f basically operates constantly from the power-on is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the operation of the stepped member 10362f may be set to start when the operation of the tilting device 310 is detected. In this case, since the drive solenoid SOL10 that drives the stepped member 10362f does not operate before the operation of the tilting device 310, the operation pattern of the stepped member 10362f is grasped by the sound generated during driving and the vibration generated during driving. This can be prevented, and the player's motivation to participate in the game can be improved by operating the tilting device 310.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the urging force of the return spring 10362e is extremely small as compared with the coil spring 362b has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be designed to generate an urging force equivalent to that of the coil spring 362b.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the second tilting device 400 is arranged so as to straddle the tilting device 12310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a lever shape (a shape in which the tilting device 400 is divided into left and right at the center of the left and right) which is fastened and fixed to one of the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 and bent into an L shape. In particular, when the tilting device 310 is fastened and fixed to the left side of the front view, it can be easily operated with the left hand and can be arranged avoiding the range where the wiring on the launching device side is crowded.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the second arm portion 430 of the second tilting device 400 is supported so as to be repositionably changeable by engaging with the tip adjusting member 462 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a female screw shape may be formed on the second arm portion 430, and a male screw shape may be formed on the tip adjusting arm portion 462 so that they can be loosely fitted. In this case, since the position of the second arm portion 430 changes due to the screw-shaped loose fitting, it is necessary to prevent the contact area between the second arm portion 430 and the tip adjusting member 462 from being reduced by the position of the second arm portion 430. Can be done.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 does not reach the descending position even if the second tilting device 15400 is pushed in is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the tilting device 310 may be formed so as to reach the descending position by pushing the second tilting device 15400.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the spring coefficients of the coil spring 362b and the return spring 16362e are set to be the same has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the spring coefficient of the coil spring 362b may be set to half the spring coefficient of the return spring 16362e, or vice versa. In this case, it is possible to prevent the space for arranging the coil spring 362b or the return spring 16362e from being limited.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the moving end member 10362d is supported by the lowering device 16362g has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lowering device 16362 g and the moving end member 10362d may be connected. In this case, it is possible to prevent the lowering device 16362 g and the moving end member 10362d from being separated from each other when the operation amount of the tilting device 310 becomes large. Further, this connection may be formed so as to be dissociable. In this case, it is possible to allow the lowering device 16362g and the moving end member 10362d to separate from each other only at the time of release.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the coil spring 362b is set to the natural length when the moving end member 10362d is arranged at the upper end position and the piston member 362a is arranged at the upper end of the moving range has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be shrunk in advance from the natural length. In this case, even if the moving end member 10362d is lowered by the action of the lowering device 16362g, the lowered portion can be compensated by the restoration of the coil spring 362d, and the piston member 362a is maintained at the upper end position of the moving range. Can be done. Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the player can be changed without changing the contact start timing between the tilting device 310 and the piston member 362a.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the moving end member 17362d expands and contracts due to the movement of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 with the rotation of the deformed rotating member 17362g1 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not. For example, between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the upper plate member 17362d2, or between the intermediate plate member 17362d1 and the lower plate member 17362d3, a thick plate can be inserted or pulled out at an arbitrary timing. A plugging device may be provided. In this case, the moving end member 17362d can be expanded and contracted depending on the number of plates to be inserted.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the driving force for moving the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 is generated by the single drive motor 17362g3 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a dedicated drive means may be provided for each of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3. In this case, it is possible to easily drive each of the upper plate member 17362d2 and the lower plate member 17362d3 independently.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the tilting device 310 is exposed to the front surface has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with a protective cover that protects the rotation axis O1 of the tilting device 310. In this case, since the protective cover can prevent the player from applying a load around the rotating shaft O1 of the tilting device 310, the portion around the rotating shaft O1 of the tilting device 310 (including the drive motor M1) is damaged. It can be prevented.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the lower end of the coil spring 362b is dammed by the bottom lid member 362c of the lower case 360 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bottom lid member 362c is movable along the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the coil spring 362b, and the bottom lid member 362c is configured to move (descend) with the tilting device 310. Is also good. In this case, even when the tilting device 310 is tilted at the same angle from the ascending position, a region where the displacement of the coil spring 362b can be reduced can be arbitrarily set as compared with the case where the bottom wall member 362c is fixed. can.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the tilting device 310 is constantly urged toward the ascending position by an urging member such as a torsion spring 343 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the torsion spring 343 may not be disposed, but another drive device (such as an air ejection device or a one-way drive device) that returns to the initial position may be disposed. In this case, the operation of the tilting device 310 after the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 310 during the operation can be arbitrarily set.

For example, in the case of applying rotational resistance to the tilting device 310 by magnetic force, if the hand is released at a position less than a predetermined angle from the ascending position, the tilting device 310 stays in place while staying at a predetermined angle or more from the ascending position. When the hand is released at the position of (for example, depending on the arrangement of the center of gravity), it can be configured to continuously operate to the descending position. As a result, the tilting device 310 can be operated in an unexpected operation mode, and the interest of the player can be improved.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the shape of the weight member M1a has a substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the circumferential direction and the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the axial direction is formed from a fan shape having the rotation axis as the apex has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the circumferential direction of the weight member M1a may be an elliptical shape. In this case, since the portion closest to the weight members M1a arranged opposite to each other can be brought closer to the rotation axis, the possibility that the weight members M1a come into contact with each other when the drive motors M1 are arranged close to each other can be reduced. Can be done.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operating means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls can be solved.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<An example of a technical concept that suppresses changes in the operating feeling of a tilting device with respect to the operating angle>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means includes an operated means to be input-operated by the player and an adjusting means for adjusting a load received by the player who has performed the input operation. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the adjusting means suppresses an increase in a load received by a player who has performed an input operation, at least in a part of the moving range of the operated means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for a player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the urging force for returning the operated means to an initial position increases in response to the pushing amount of the operated means. There are gaming machines (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-014571). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to deal with a case where the moving distance of the operated means becomes long. That is, in order to improve the operational feeling felt by the player, it is desirable to increase the rate of increase in the urging force with respect to the moving distance of the operated means from the initial position, but when the moving distance of the operated means becomes long, the game There is a problem that the load received by the person becomes excessive and the player performing the operation becomes tired, so that the pushing of the operated means is stopped during the game.

In this case, it becomes impossible to show the player the effect of changing the state of the liquid crystal display device by pushing the operated means, and the player's interest may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the adjusting means suppresses an increase in the load received by the player who has performed the input operation, at least in a part of the moving range of the operated means, so that the load received by the player is received. It is possible to suppress the increase in the number of players and prevent the player from getting tired.

When the moving distance of the operated means becomes long, for example, when the pushing amount of the operated means is detected and reflected in the operation, or when the operated means is an arc orbit (not a straight orbit) or a zigzag orbit. An example is the case where the operation is performed with.

For example, when the push-in amount is detected and reflected in the operation, it is easier to maintain the target push-in amount by lengthening the detection boundary, and it is possible to promote comfortable playing of the game. There is a high possibility that the moving distance of the operating means will be long.

The gaming machine A1 includes a urging means for generating an urging force for moving the operated means toward an initial position, and the urging means has a first elasticity that causes displacement along the moving path of the operated means. The gaming machine A2, which is composed of a spring member, is characterized in that the adjusting means suppresses a load received by a player within a range after the operated means has moved from an initial position by a predetermined distance.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the urging means is composed of a first elastic spring member that causes displacement along the movement path of the operated means, and the operated means is moved from the initial position. Since the load received by the player is suppressed within the range after the movement is performed by a predetermined distance, the load felt by the player is increased in proportion to the distance by which the operated means is moved, thereby giving the player a feeling of operation. It is possible to make the player recognize the point where the increase rate of the load given to the player is switched (for example, the point where the proportionality constant is changed) in the range after moving from the initial position by a predetermined distance.

Thereby, by using the change point of the load applied to the player as a mark, it is possible to easily move the operated means to an arbitrary point in the moving range of the operated means.

As the first elastic spring member, when the operated means rotates around a predetermined rotation axis, a torsion spring centered on the rotation axis or an arc centered on the rotation axis of the operated means. An example is a coil spring or the like that is curved and arranged along a wall portion of a shape, and an example is a coil spring that is arranged along the moving direction of the operated means when the operated means operates in translation. To.

In the game machine A2, the operated means is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis, and the adjusting means includes a second elastic spring member that applies a load to the operated means from the circumferential direction, and the second elastic spring thereof. The member is arranged to face the operated means and is configured to give an urging force to the operated means by abutting against the operated means while the operated means is moving, and the direction of displacement of the second elastic spring member is the said. A game machine A3 characterized in that it follows the tangential direction of an arbitrary arc centered on a rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the operated means is rotated about a predetermined rotation axis, and the second elastic spring member abuts during the movement of the operated means to exert an urging force. Since the direction of the displacement is along the tangential direction of an arbitrary arc centered on the rotation axis, after the operated means and the second elastic spring member come into contact with each other, the contact point is set as the rotation angle of the operated means. The displacement of the second elastic spring member can be changed in a direction different from the rate of change in the angle of the operated means. Therefore, the load applied from the second elastic spring member to the operated means can be arbitrarily set by variously changing the shape of the contact point of the operated means.

In the game machine A3, the operated means is provided with a contact portion which is arranged to face the second elastic spring member and is configured to be in contact with the second elastic spring member, and the contact portion is the subject. The elastic spring member comes into contact with the second elastic spring member in the first state in which the operating means is moved from the initial position by a predetermined distance, and in the second state in which the operating means is further moved in the same direction from the first state. The second contact point is provided with a second contact point that comes into contact with the first contact point, and the second contact point is the initial stage of the operated means rather than the straight line passing through the rotation axis and the first contact point. A game machine A4 characterized by being arranged on the position side.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the second contact point is more than the first contact point of the contact portion, and the operated means is more than the straight line passing through the rotation axis and the first contact point. Since it is arranged on the initial position side of, for example, as compared with the case where the second contact point is arranged on a straight line passing through the first contact point and the rotation axis, the operated means from the first state to the second state. It is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the second elastic spring member rather than the distance at which the portion in the vicinity of contact with the second elastic spring member is displaced when the second elastic spring member is rotated. As a result, the load applied to the operated means by the second elastic spring member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A4, the shape of the second contact point is set in such a manner that the displacement amount of the second elastic spring member is reduced in the second state as compared with the first state. The gaming machine A5.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the shape of the second contact point is set in such a manner that the displacement amount of the second elastic spring member is reduced in the second state as compared with the first state. Therefore, the load applied to the operated means by the second elastic spring member in the second state can be reduced as compared with the load applied to the operated means by the second elastic spring member in the first state. Therefore, the urging force of the first elastic spring member that rises due to the movement of the operated means from the first state to the second state is partially offset by the decrease in the load applied to the operated means by the second elastic spring member. can do.

In any of the game machines A3 to A5, the second elastic spring member is configured so that the posture can be changed, and the direction of the posture change is such that the displacement amount of the first elastic spring member becomes larger, the second elastic spring member is said. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the angle between the moving direction of the moving direction and the moving direction of the operated means is set to be large.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A5, the second elastic spring member is configured so that the posture can be changed, and the direction of the posture change is the displacement amount of the first elastic spring member. As the size increases, the angle formed by the moving direction of the second elastic spring member and the moving direction of the operated means becomes larger. Therefore, as the urging force of the first elastic spring member increases, the second elastic spring member becomes larger. Among the urging forces of, the component loaded on the operated means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load felt by the player.

In the gaming machine A6, by connecting the second elastic spring member to the operated means, the relationship between the posture of the second elastic spring member and the posture of the operated means is associated one-to-one. A featured gaming machine A7.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the relationship between the posture of the second elastic spring member and the posture of the operated means is one-to-one by connecting the second elastic spring member to the operated means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second elastic spring member from changing its posture in an unexpected direction due to a sudden load applied to the operated means.

<Example of technical concept to change the rate of change of rotational resistance of tilting device>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means changes the rate of change between the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the load given to the player by the operated means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by providing means and means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for the player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There are gaming machines that are controlled (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-024322). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is difficult for the player to recognize the pushing amount, so that it is necessary to separately provide a scale on the liquid crystal display device in order for the player to grasp the pushing amount. There was a point.

In this case, even if the effect of specifying the pushing amount is performed, it is necessary to operate the operated means while paying attention to the scale, so that other parts of the board surface of the game board (for example, the flow of the fired ball). There was a problem that he could not send his eyes to the game and could not play the game as he wanted.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the changing means for changing the change rate of the load given to the player from the operated means is provided, the operated means is placed at a predetermined position on the player by using the change in the load as a mark. It is possible to grasp that it has been pushed to. As a result, the player can grasp that the operated means has been pushed to a predetermined position without looking at the scale, so that the player can operate the operated means at any position on the board of the game board. You can pay attention to it.

In the gaming machine B1, the changing means is arranged face-to-face with the operating portion of the operated means in a state where the operated means is arranged at a start position separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance, and in that state, the operated means is operated. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that it is configured in such a manner that a load is started to be applied to the player via means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the changing means is arranged face-to-face with the operating portion of the operated means in a state where the operated means is arranged at a start position separated from the initial position by a predetermined distance. In that state, since the load is started to be applied to the player via the operated means, the operated means is arranged at the start position to receive the load felt by the player from the operated means without separately providing the driving means. Can be changed at the boundary.

As a result, the load applied to the player can be reliably changed at the start position without being affected by poor control, and the change can be used as a marker for the player to grasp the amount of pushing of the operated means. can do.

In the gaming machine B2, the changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that applies a load in the moving direction of the operated means, and the elastic spring member is initially before being brought into contact with the acting portion of the operated means. A gaming machine B3 characterized in that it is arranged in a state of being displaced from its natural length by a predetermined distance.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that applies a load in the moving direction of the operated means, and the elastic spring member hits the acting portion of the operated means. Since it is arranged in a state of being displaced by a predetermined distance from the natural length in the initial state before being touched, the elastic spring member is attached to the operated means immediately before and immediately after the operated means is brought into contact with the elastic spring member. Since the elastic force corresponding to the displacement of is applied at one time, the load applied to the player can be changed rapidly. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the operated means has passed through the state of being arranged at a predetermined position from the change in the load given by the operated means.

In the game machine B3, when the contact point between the acting portion and the elastic spring member changes with the movement of the operated means, the acting portion is a section that first abuts on the elastic spring member. The first contact section of the working portion and the elastic spring member are provided with one contact section and a second contact section which is a section that comes into contact with the elastic spring member after the first contact section. The operated means moves by a predetermined amount in a state where the second contact section of the acting portion and the elastic spring member are in contact with each other, as compared with the case where the operated means moves by a predetermined amount in a state of contact with the elastic spring member. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the amount of increase in the load given to the player is smaller in the case of doing so.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the first hit is compared with the case where the operating portion moves a predetermined amount while contacting the elastic spring member in the first contact section. Since the increase in the load given to the player is smaller when the operated means is moved by a predetermined amount while contacting the elastic spring member in the second contact section where the push-in amount is larger than the contact section. It is possible to prevent the load felt by the player after the operated means has passed the predetermined position from becoming excessive while maintaining the effect of facilitating the recognition that the operated means is arranged at the predetermined position.

In the gaming machine B2, the acting portion is configured to include a magnetic material, and the changing means is composed of a magnetic load member arranged to face a part of the moving path of the acting portion, and the magnetic load member is composed of a magnetic load member. The gaming machine B5 is characterized by having magnetism that produces an attractive force with respect to the magnetic material constituting the acting portion.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the change in the load applied to the operated means is generated by the magnetic force (adsorption force) generated between the acting portion and the magnetic load member, so that the acting portion It is possible to make it easier for the player to feel the change in load between the case where the magnetic load member and the magnetic load member are close to each other and the case where the magnetic load member is far away.

Although the load when the player pushes the operated means increases, when the player performs the maintenance operation, the acting portion is attracted to the magnetic load member, so that the operated portion is given to the player. The load is reduced. Therefore, compared to the case where the load applied to the operated means is increased by the urging force of the elastic spring, the force required for the player to maintain the position of the operated means becomes smaller, and the player feels tired. Can be mitigated.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the operated means includes a moving means configured to be relatively movable with respect to the operated means and a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the moving member. The moving member can be configured with a first state and a second state after moving from the first state to a different position, and at least the moving member has the first state and the second state. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the load given to the player when it changes with and is configured to be variable.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the load given to the player can be changed by changing the state of the moving means, so that the operated means is arranged at a predetermined position. By operating the driving means when it is detected, the load given to the player can be changed, and the player can be made to recognize the current pushing position of the operated means.

In the gaming machine B6, when the driving means is composed of a rotary motor and the rotary motor rotates in the forward direction, the moving member is relatively moved with respect to the operated means, and when the rotary motor rotates in the reverse direction. The gaming machine B7, wherein the moving member stops relative to the operated means.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, it is possible to configure a case where the load applied to the gaming machine changes depending on the rotation direction of the rotary motor and a case where the load does not change. Therefore, for example, operate the operated means. By confirming the vibration transmitted to a part of the gaming machine without checking the internal state, it is possible to suppress the game method and enhance the significance of operating the operated means. As a result, the operated means can be effectively utilized.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the input means can be moved in a direction intersecting the input direction of the operated means and the vibrating means for vibrating the operated means, and the operated means can be moved to the operated means. The changing means includes an operation unit that is arranged and can be operated by the player, and the changing means transmits the operation driving means that generates the driving force for moving the operation unit and the driving force of the operation driving means to the operation unit. When the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is far, the input means is provided with a transmission means for the operation unit and the input means is provided with a transmission means. B8 is a gaming machine B8 comprising a switching means for increasing the vibration transmission efficiency of the vibrating means to the operated means.

Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibrating means, it is better to bring the vibrating means closer to the part operated by the player, which is the vibration given to the player when the player operates. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation site is located at the position where the impact during operation is the largest, if the vibrating means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during operation. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a feeling of vibration and to secure a long service life of the vibrating means at the same time.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to secure the distance between the vibrating means and the operation unit, and prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance is long.

In addition, the operation target is enlarged by separating the operation unit from the operated means, and the operation of the input means by the player is facilitated, while the vibration feeling is reduced by the player's fingers moving away from the vibrating means. As a result, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to secure (level) the vibration given to the player who touches the input means.

As a result, the operation unit is separated from the operated means and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation (so-called “super hot” situation) that makes us feel that the degree of expectation is high in appearance. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the extremely weak feeling.

The degree of expectation includes the degree of expectation of reach development and the degree of expectation of big hit occurrence. Here, the reach development expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of developing to reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of jackpot occurrence.

The vibration sensation includes a sensation that the player who touches the member receives through the member, and a sensation that the player receives the vibration by another sensation (for example, visual sense) without touching the member (for example, the member's sensation). The feeling of vibrating by seeing an afterimage in the vicinity) is included.

The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, and the operation driving means is arranged on the side where the speed of the operated means is low. Game machine B9.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, when a violent operation such as hitting the operated means is performed, the impact given to the operation driving means is applied while maintaining the intensity of the operation. It can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as an operation mode in which the operation speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported by an axis and rotates in the circumferential direction of a circle about the axis, or the axis is not supported. In addition, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

In the gaming machine B8 or B9, the operating unit is separated from the operated means by the driving force of the operating driving means, and the switching means changes means to the extent that the operated means and the operating unit can be connected. The means for changing the degree thereof generates an urging force for moving the operating portion in a direction close to the operated means, and the urging force is the distance between the operated means and the operating portion. The gaming machine B10 is characterized in that it rises as the length increases.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8 or B9, the operating unit can be maintained on the side close to the operated means by generating an urging force whose degree changing means varies, and the operated means can be operated. Adjust the buffering action of vibration transmission between the machine and the operating unit (keep the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating unit are placed close to each other, and reduce the buffering action when placed at a distance. )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

The mode of the degree changing means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be formed from an elastic spring made of metal, or it may be formed from an air spring.

In any of the gaming machines B8 to B10, the switching means approaches the vibrating means in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means as the operating unit moves away from the operated means, and at least the said. The displacement means includes a second transmission means that can come into contact with the vibrating means when the operating unit is most distant from the operated means, and the displacement means attaches the operating unit to the operated means. The gaming machine B11 is provided with a connecting means for operably connecting along a direction intersecting with the moving direction of the machine.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B8 to B10, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means. Since the vibration along the line is transmitted to the operation unit, it is possible to easily give the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means to the player who touches the operation unit.

For example, when the operation mode of the operated means during operation is a rotational operation about a predetermined axis, the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, the vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is generated. Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because it is not related to the moment), it is possible to secure a large vibration transmitted to the player even when the operating portion is separated from the operated means.

It is possible to change the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit. As a result, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed, so that various vibration effects can be performed. Can be achieved.

In addition, for example, by accommodating the operation driving means, the transmitting means, and the second transmitting means in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the driving force transmission path changes due to the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance increases. Can be prevented from doing so.

In any of the gaming machines B8 to B11, the transmission means includes a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation drive means. Game machine B12.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B8 to B11, the operation driving means is overloaded due to the player operating the operation unit by an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent problems such as failure of the slingshot. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the operation of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines B8 to B12, the operated means is rotatably supported along the input direction, and the operated portion is separated from the rotating axis of the operated means. A gaming machine B13 characterized by moving away from the means.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B8 to B12, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is due to the movement of the operating portion by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit can be changed according to the movement amount of the operation unit.

Further, when the operation unit is the farthest from the operated means, that is, when the operation target becomes the largest (the operable range becomes the largest and the operation becomes easier), the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation. As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the changing means includes an urging means that generates an urging force along the operation direction of the operated means, and the urging means is accompanied by the movement of the operated means. The first state, which is configured to be deformable and maintains the same amount of movement of the operated means from the predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the urging means, and the amount of deformation of the urging means from the predetermined state. The gaming machine B14 is characterized in that it can be switched between a second state in which the movement amount of the operated means is less than the movement amount.

According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves by a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state. Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control to change the elastic modulus of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed according to the operation timing.

The mode of change of the load with respect to the amount of deformation is not limited at all. For example, it may be a linear change mode (elastic spring or the like) or a non-linear deformation mode.

In the gaming machine B14, the changing means is arranged on the operating side portion which is arranged in the urging means and comes into contact with the operated means, and is arranged on the opposite side of the operating side portion of the urging means to the gaming machine main body. At least one of the contact position between the supported main body side portion and the operated means and the operation side portion, or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion can be changed during the input operation. The gaming machine B15 is characterized by comprising a position changing means.

According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B14, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operating length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the urging means during the input operation. , The rate of change in the load given to the player as a reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

In the gaming machine B15, the position changing means has a first state in which the state is fixed in close proximity to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the urging means, and a first state in which the state is released from the fixed state. It is characterized by comprising a moving means capable of switching between two states by movement, a moving driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a control means for controlling a driving mode of the moving driving means. Game machine B16.

According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B15, it is possible to control the support position by the position changing means by driving the moving driving means based on the control means. Therefore, the load applied to the player via the urging means can be changed by control.

It should be noted that the support of either end of the urging means may be released. When releasing the support point on the pedal side, it is essential to move along the peripheral surface (not in a mode of being pushed by the operation tip surface).

When the moving direction of the pedal and the moving direction of the moving means are orthogonal to each other, it is possible to suppress the reaction force applied to the player during the operation from changing to the driving timing of the moving means.

In the gaming machine B15 or B16, a change in at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operated side portion or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is an operation of the operated means. The gaming machine B17, which is characterized by the execution of.

According to the gaming machine B17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B15 or B16, a change in the urging force (degree of change) of the urging means occurs when the player operates the operated means (that is, attached). Since the state of the urging means is not changed in advance), it is possible to prevent the urging force of the urging means from being noticed from the state of the operated means (for example, the appearance) before the operation. It is possible to promote the operation of the operated means.

Further, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, it is possible to easily change the changing mode of the urging force depending on the operation mode.

<An example of a technical idea in which the load received by the player is large when the rotation speed of the tilting device is high>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies a load as a movement resistance to the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the operated means, and the load can be changed. When the operated means is displaceable at a first speed and a second speed larger than the first speed, the load changing means comprises the configured means for changing the load. The load given to the operated means by the load changing means when displaced at the second speed as compared with the load given to the operated means by the load changing means when displaced at the first speed. The gaming machine C1 characterized by being enlarged.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for the player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There are gaming machines that are controlled (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-024322). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operation of moving the operated means to a predetermined position is performed, the operation period is lengthened by operating the machine to be operated at a slightly slower speed in order to prevent the machine from passing through the predetermined position. For example, when it is noticed that the operation is requested just before the end of the operable period, there is a problem that the operation may not be in time.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the load changing means is subject to the displacement when the operated means is displaced at the second speed, which is larger than the first speed, as compared with the case where the operated means is displaced at the first speed. Since the load given to the operating means as resistance is large, the operated means is operated with a strong force (large acceleration), and even if the speed of the operated means increases, the operated means is released after the operating force is released. The distance required before it is stopped can be shortened. As a result, it is not necessary to slow down the speed of the operated means to operate the operated means, and the operation period of the operated means can be shortened. Therefore, I noticed that the operation is required just before the end of the operable period. Even in that case, the operation can be made in time.

The load changing means is not particularly limited, and for example, a commercially available product such as a rotary damper that changes the load with respect to the displacement speed of the working part can be arbitrarily selected and used. .. The feature of this gaming machine C1 is that the load changing means is arranged in the gaming machine even if the player is late in noticing that the gaming machine is requested to push and operate the operated means. Therefore, it is possible to immediately operate the operated means to the target position.

In the gaming machine C1, the mode of input of the operated means is changed between at least the first input and the second input depending on the displacement amount, and the load change in the range where the first input is performed. The gaming machine C2, characterized in that changes in the load given by the means are suppressed.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the input mode is changed between the first input and the second input depending on the displacement amount of the operated means, and in the range where the first input is performed. Since the change in the load given by the load changing means is suppressed, it is possible to cope with the case where the function of the load changing means becomes an obstacle depending on the mode of input.

For example, the operated means is configured by performing a button pressing operation including a continuous striking operation at the first input and a pedal pressing operation for detecting the displacement amount at the second input, and the button is the first input. If the displacement resistance of the operated means increases by vigorously pressing the button, the returning of the operated means may be delayed by vigorously pressing the button, which may interfere with the repeated striking operation (operated). You can only press after waiting for the means to return to the original position, which may make it difficult to hit repeatedly).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, since the displacement resistance of the operated means is suppressed from being increased by the load changing means in the range where the first input is performed, the operated means at the time of performing the button pressing operation. It is possible to prevent the return of the operated means from being delayed due to the displacement speed of the above, and it is possible to easily perform the continuous striking operation.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the load changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that can be displaced by a load transmitted from the operated means, and the operated means is a portion that is arranged to face the elastic spring member. The load is not transmitted between the first portion that is in contact with the elastic spring member and the load can be transmitted between the elastic spring member and the elastic spring member that is different from the first portion. The gaming machine C3 comprises, and is characterized in that the second portion is arranged at least between a pair of the first portions.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the load changing means is composed of an elastic spring member that can be displaced by the load transmitted from the operated means, and the operated means is elastic. Between the first part, which is arranged to face the spring member and is in contact with the elastic spring member so that the load can be transmitted, and the part different from the first part, which is different from the elastic spring member. The load is non-transmitted in the second portion, and at least the second portion is arranged between the pair of first portions, so that the second portion passes through the portion facing the operated means. The load applied to the operated means can be adjusted according to the length of the above.

That is, the period during which the operated means passes while the second portion between the pair of first portions is arranged to face the elastic spring member is shorter than the period until the displacement given to the elastic spring member is completely returned. For example, the displacement given to the elastic spring member due to the contact movement of the first portion after passing through the second portion is applied to the remaining displacement of the elastic spring member, so that the elastic spring member has returned completely. The load applied to the operated means is larger than that in the case of displacing the elastic spring member.

On the other hand, the period during which the operated means passes while the second portion between the pair of first portions is arranged to face the elastic spring member is longer than the period until the displacement given to the elastic spring member is completely returned. If it is long, the displacement given to the elastic spring member by the contact movement of the first portion after passing through the second portion becomes the displacement from the natural length, so that the load applied to the operated means becomes small. Thereby, the load applied to the operated means by the elastic spring member can be adjusted by the magnitude of the speed at which the operated means moves while arranging the second portion facing the elastic spring member.

In the gaming machine C3, a plurality of the first portions are arranged and the second portion is arranged between the first portions, and the length of the first portion along the moving direction of the operated means is the said. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, when the means to be operated moves from the initial position, the portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member later is longer than the portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member first.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C3, a plurality of first parts are arranged and a second part is arranged between the first parts, and the moving direction of the operated means of the first part is arranged. When the means to be operated moves from the initial position, the length along the line is longer in the portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member later than in the portion that comes into contact with the elastic spring member first. It is possible to secure a wide range in which the first portion of 1 gives an elastic load to the operated means at a position far from the initial position where the deviation of the operated means from the target position tends to be large due to the excessive movement of the means. If the operating force is released after moving the operated means too much, it can be easily returned to the target position with an elastic load, and the part near the initial position where the speed is unlikely to become excessive and the elasticity. It is possible to prevent the player from being easily tired due to an excessive load due to the contact with the spring member.

In the game machine C3 or C4, when the first portion abuts on the elastic spring member and moves while the operated means moves away from the initial position, the elastic spring moves to the operated means. When the elastic load of the member is transmitted, while the first portion moves in contact with the elastic spring member while the operated means moves toward the initial position, the operated means is operated. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that an elastic load due to the elastic spring member is not transmitted to the means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3 or C4, whether or not an elastic load is transmitted from the elastic spring member to the operated means changes depending on the direction in which the operated means moves. The degree of deceleration when the operated means moves with the first portion in contact with the elastic spring member can be changed depending on the moving direction.

That is, when the operated means moves in a direction away from the initial position, it is possible to suppress the increase in the moving speed by giving an elastically increasing load as a resistance, while the operated means is initially used. When moving toward the position, the resistance is suppressed and the movement speed can be suppressed from slowing down.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the load applied from the load changing means to the operated means becomes excessive, the blocking means for blocking the transmission of the load from the load changing means to the operated means. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, when the load given to the operated means by the load changing means becomes excessive, the load from the load changing means to the operated means is applied. Since the blocking means for blocking the transmission of the slingshot is provided, the upper limit of the load given to the player via the operated means can be set. As a result, the load applied to the player by the operated means becomes excessive, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the operation load of the player.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the fixed wall attached to the operated means along the moving path of the operated means and the fixed wall that is close to and separated from the fixed wall and can be moved and the operated means. The auxiliary operating member is provided with the auxiliary operating member, and the auxiliary operating member is arranged at a position away from the fixed wall when the operated means is operated at the first speed, and is arranged at a position away from the fixed wall. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that when the operating means is operated at the second speed, the operating means is moved close to the fixed wall so as to be able to come into contact with the fixed wall.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, a fixed wall is provided along the movement path of the operated means, and an auxiliary operating member arranged in the operated means is a fixed wall. Since it is configured to change whether or not to abut with the operation means depending on the magnitude of the displacement speed of the operated means, the friction caused by the movement of the operated means while the auxiliary operating member and the fixed wall are in contact with each other. The load applied to the player via the operated means can be changed by the amount of the force.

When the operated means is moved at the first speed, the auxiliary operating member and the fixed wall do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the operated means is moved at the first speed, it is possible to prevent a slight increase or decrease in the load.

As the movement mode of the auxiliary operating member, the method of directly moving in the direction close to the fixed wall by the inertial force (centrifugal force) at the time of movement of the operated means, or the movement of the operated means by the inertial force (centrifugal force). An embodiment in which another member that moves relative to each other along the direction is provided, the fixing mechanism is released by the movement of the other member, and the member moves in a direction close to the fixed wall is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the input means can be moved in a direction intersecting the input direction of the operated means and the vibrating means for vibrating the operated means, and the operated means can be moved to the operated means. The changing means includes an operation unit that is arranged and can be operated by the player, and the changing means transmits the operation driving means that generates the driving force for moving the operation unit and the driving force of the operation driving means to the operation unit. When the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is far, the input means is provided with a transmission means for the operation unit and the input means is provided with a transmission means. C8 is a gaming machine C8 comprising a switching means for increasing the vibration transmission efficiency of the vibrating means to the operated means.

Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibrating means, it is better to bring the vibrating means closer to the part operated by the player, which is the vibration given to the player when the player operates. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation site is located at the position where the impact during operation is the largest, if the vibrating means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during operation. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a feeling of vibration and to secure a long service life of the vibrating means at the same time.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to secure the distance between the vibrating means and the operation unit, and prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance is long.

In addition, the operation target is enlarged by separating the operation unit from the operated means, and the operation of the input means by the player is facilitated, while the vibration feeling is reduced by the player's fingers moving away from the vibrating means. As a result, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to secure (level) the vibration given to the player who touches the input means.

As a result, the operation unit is separated from the operated means and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation (so-called “super hot” situation) that makes us feel that the degree of expectation is high in appearance. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the extremely weak feeling.

The degree of expectation includes the degree of expectation of reach development and the degree of expectation of big hit occurrence. Here, the reach development expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of developing to reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of jackpot occurrence.

The vibration sensation includes a sensation that the player who touches the member receives through the member, and a sensation that the player receives the vibration by another sensation (for example, visual sense) without touching the member (for example, the member's sensation). The feeling of vibrating by seeing an afterimage in the vicinity) is included.

The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, and the operation driving means is arranged on the side where the speed of the operated means is low. Game machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, when a violent operation such as hitting the operated means is performed, the impact given to the operation driving means is applied while maintaining the intensity of the operation. It can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as an operation mode in which the operation speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported by an axis and rotates in the circumferential direction of a circle about the axis, or the axis is not supported. In addition, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the operating unit is separated from the operated means by the driving force of the operating driving means, and the switching means changes means to the extent that the operated means and the operating unit can be connected. The means for changing the degree thereof generates an urging force for moving the operating portion in a direction close to the operated means, and the urging force is the distance between the operated means and the operating portion. The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that it rises as the length increases.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the operating unit can be maintained on the side close to the operated means by generating a urging force in which the degree changing means varies, and the operated means can be operated. Adjust the buffering action of vibration transmission between the machine and the operating unit (keep the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating unit are placed close to each other, and reduce the buffering action when placed at a distance. )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

The mode of the degree changing means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be formed from an elastic spring made of metal, or it may be formed from an air spring.

In any of the gaming machines C8 to C10, the switching means approaches the vibrating means in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means as the operating unit moves away from the operated means, and at least the said. The displacement means includes a second transmission means that can come into contact with the vibrating means when the operating unit is most distant from the operated means, and the displacement means attaches the operating unit to the operated means. The gaming machine C11 is provided with a connecting means for operably connecting along a direction intersecting with the moving direction of the machine.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C8 to C10, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means. Since the vibration along the line is transmitted to the operation unit, it is possible to easily give the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means to the player who touches the operation unit.

For example, when the operation mode of the operated means during operation is a rotational operation about a predetermined axis, the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, the vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is generated. Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because it is not related to the moment), it is possible to secure a large vibration transmitted to the player even when the operating portion is separated from the operated means.

It is possible to change the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit. As a result, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed, so that various vibration effects can be performed. Can be achieved.

In addition, for example, by accommodating the operation driving means, the transmitting means, and the second transmitting means in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the driving force transmission path changes due to the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance increases. Can be prevented from doing so.

In any of the gaming machines C8 to C11, the transmission means includes a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation drive means. Game machine C12.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C8 to C11, the operation driving means is overloaded due to the player operating the operation unit by an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent problems such as failure of the slingshot. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the operation of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines C8 to C12, the operated means is rotatably supported along the input direction, and the operated portion is separated from the rotating axis of the operated means. A gaming machine C13 characterized by moving away from the means.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C8 to C12, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is due to the movement of the operating portion by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit can be changed according to the movement amount of the operation unit.

Further, when the operation unit is the farthest from the operated means, that is, when the operation target becomes the largest (the operable range becomes the largest and the operation becomes easier), the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation. As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the load changing means includes a urging means that generates an urging force along the operation direction of the operated means, and the urging means moves the operated means. A first state that is configured to be deformable and maintains the same amount of movement of the operated means from a predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the urging means, and a deformation amount of the urging means from the predetermined state. The gaming machine C14 is characterized in that it can be switched to a second state in which the movement amount of the operated means is less than the movement amount of the operated means.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves by a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state. Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control to change the elastic modulus of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed according to the operation timing.

The mode of change of the load with respect to the amount of deformation is not limited at all. For example, it may be a linear change mode (elastic spring or the like) or a non-linear deformation mode.

In the gaming machine C14, the load changing means is arranged on the opposite side of the operating side portion arranged in the urging means and in contact with the operated means and the operating side portion of the urging means, and the gaming machine main body. During the input operation, at least one of the contact position between the main body side portion supported by the pachinko and pachislot machine and the contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is described. A gaming machine C15 comprising: a position changing means capable of changing to a side where the urging force of the urging means is weakened.

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C14, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operating length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the urging means during the input operation. , The rate of change in the load given to the player as a reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

In the gaming machine C15, the position changing means has a first state in which the state is fixed in close proximity to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the urging means, and a first state in which the state is released from the fixed state. The control means includes a moving means capable of switching between two states by movement, a moving driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a control means for controlling the driving mode of the moving driving means. The gaming machine C16 is characterized in that the moving means is maintained in the first state for a time required to complete the operation when the operated means is operated at least at the second speed.

According to the gaming machine C16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C15, when the operated means is operated at the second speed, the contact position between the operated means and the operated side portion, and the gaming machine main body and the main body side. It is possible to have the possibility of completing the operation without changing both the support position and the portion. In this case, it is possible to secure the load given to the player as a reaction force of the urging means.

In the gaming machine C16, the position changing means can change at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion in a plurality of steps. The control means moves the moving means in a manner in which the contact position and the support position cannot be changed in a plurality of stages while the position changing means is maintained in the second state. Characteristic gaming machine C17.

According to the gaming machine C17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C16, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is changed in a plurality of stages. Since it is prevented that a change in a plurality of stages occurs while the moving means is maintained in the second state, the hand and the operated means can be operated as compared with the case where the operated means is operated at the second speed. When operated at the first speed, the amount of change in the load given to the player can be increased.

In the gaming machine C17, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion changes at a predetermined stage, whereby the attachment is made. The gaming machine C18, characterized in that the urging force generated from the force means toward the operated means disappears.

According to the gaming machine C18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C17, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is at a predetermined stage. When the change occurs, of the reaction forces given to the player who operates the operated means, the reaction force generated by the urging means disappears, so that the player can easily notice the change in the reaction force.

In any of the gaming machines C16 to C18, a change in at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operated side portion or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is the operation to be performed. A gaming machine C19, characterized in that it is generated by performing an operation of a means.

According to the gaming machine C19, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C16 to C18, the change in the urging force (degree of change) of the urging means occurs when the player operates the operated means (). That is, since the state of the urging means is not changed in advance), it is necessary to prevent the urging force of the urging means from being noticed from the state (for example, appearance) of the operated means before the operation. It is possible to promote the operation of the operated means.

Further, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, it is easy to make the urging force (that is, the reaction force given to the player) different depending on the operation mode. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines C15 to C19, the notification means for notifying the player for a predetermined period for prompting the player to operate the input means is provided, and the load changing means is provided in the first period before the end of the notification by the notifying means. A gaming machine C20 characterized by operating.

According to the gaming machine C20, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C15 to C19, by keeping the period for increasing the load on the operation to the minimum necessary, the feeling of fatigue given to the player by the operation of the input means can be felt. Can be reduced. As a result, the stress given to the player when operating the input means can be reduced, and the possibility (or probability) that the player operates the input means to participate in the game can be increased.

<An example of the technical idea that the load on the player is small when the rotation speed of the tilting device is high>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies a load as a movement resistance to the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the operated means, and changes the load. The operated means is provided with a load changing means, and when the operated means is displaced at a first speed and a second speed larger than the first speed, the operated means is subjected to the displacement at the first speed. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that, when displaced at the second speed, the load given to the operated means by the load changing means is smaller than the load given by the load changing means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for the player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There are gaming machines that are controlled (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-024322). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when it is required to move and maintain the operated means to the middle of the moving range and to push it all at once to the end, it is possible to apply resistance suitable for both of them. There was a problem that it was difficult.

That is, when the operated means is moved and maintained halfway in the moving range, the larger the moving resistance of the operated means, the easier it is to adjust the force of the player who gives a load to the operated means. When the operation of pushing to the end at once is performed, the smaller the movement resistance is, the more comfortable the operation can be performed, so that there is a problem that contradictory performance is required.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, a load changing means for applying a load as a moving resistance to the operated means and changing the load is provided, and the moving speed of the operated means is set to the first speed. Then, when the operated means moves at a second speed larger than the first speed, the load given by the load changing means is smaller, so that when the operated means is displaced at the first speed, the operated means is displaced. The position of the operated means can be easily maintained, and when the operated means is displaced at the second speed, the operated means can be easily pushed in at once.

In the gaming machine D1, the load changing means includes a braking assisting member that moves in a direction close to the operated means by an urging force, and the braking assisting member comes into contact with the operated means to become the operated means. It is configured such that the contact position between the braking assisting member and the operated means moves away from the initial position of the braking assisting member so that a load as a movement resistance is applied and the operated means moves away from the initial position. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the braking assisting member that gives a load as a movement resistance to the operated means by coming into contact with the operated means is directed so that the operated means moves away from the initial position. As the brake assisting member moves, the contact position between the braking assisting member and the operated means is configured to move away from the initial position of the braking assisting member. Further, by moving the operated means at a speed at which the operated means is moved, it is possible to suppress the transmission of the load as the movement resistance from the braking assisting member to the operated means.

In the gaming machine D2, the operated means is configured to rotate about a predetermined rotation axis, the braking assisting member is brought into contact with a side wall portion along a movement path of the operated means, and the side wall portion is initially set. Compared to the first contact point that first contacts the braking assisting member when the operated means moves from the position, the second contact point that subsequently contacts the braking assisting member is the first contact point. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is arranged inside a circle centered on the predetermined rotation axis passing through a contact point.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, a point at which the braking assisting member can be contacted after the first contact point passes through the first contact point and is a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis. Since it is arranged inside, the arm of the moment generated by the load applied from the braking assist member to the operated means can be shortened as the operated means moves from the initial position, and the rotational resistance of the operated means can be reduced. Can be reduced.

The gaming machine D1 includes a fixed wall provided along the movement path of the operated means, and the load changing means includes an inertial member elastically supported by the operated means and the inertial member thereof. When the inertial member is relatively stopped with respect to the operating means, it is in contact with the fixed wall, while when the inertial member moves relative to the operated means, it is separated from the fixed wall. A gaming machine D4 comprising an auxiliary operating member to be provided.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the load changing means has an inertial member elastically supported by the operated means and a fixed wall according to the movement of the inertial member with respect to the operated means. The auxiliary operating member is the same as the operated means because the auxiliary operating member is provided with an auxiliary operating member that abuts or separates from the fixed wall when the inertial member moves relative to the operated means. Easy to move at high speed While it is easy to apply a load as a moving resistance when moving at a low speed, it is possible to reduce the load as a moving resistance at high speed where the auxiliary operating member is easy to be placed on the operated means. can.

In the game machine D4, the operated means is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis, and the inertial member moves along a rotation locus at an end of the operated means on the opposite side of the rotation axis. A game machine D5 characterized by being supported.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, when the operated means is rotated around a predetermined rotation axis and the operated means is moved at high speed, the operated means is among the operated means. An inertial member is placed at the end on the opposite side of the rotation axis where the movement distance is the largest, and the inertial member is supported so that it can move along a path along the rotation trajectory where the movement distance can be most effectively utilized. It can be effectively used to facilitate the relative movement of the inertial member with respect to the operated means.

In the game machine D4 or D5, a magnetic material is disposed in a part of the fixed wall, and the auxiliary operating member contains a magnetic material having a polarity opposite to that of the magnetic material disposed on the fixed wall, and the said. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it can be attracted by magnetic force when the auxiliary operating member and the fixed wall come into contact with each other.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4 or D5, a magnetic material is disposed on a part of the fixed wall, and when the auxiliary operating member and the fixed wall come into contact with each other, they can be attracted by magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to change the arrangement of the auxiliary operating member when the operated means is moved at the same speed between the portion where the attraction due to the magnetic force is generated and the portion where the attraction due to the magnetic force is not generated. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the operated means in the portion where the adsorption due to the magnetic force occurs.

In any of the game machines D1 to D6, the input means is movable in a direction intersecting the vibration means for vibrating the operated means and the input direction of the operated means, and the operated means is used. The changing means includes an operation unit that is arranged and can be operated by the player, and the changing means transmits the operation driving means that generates the driving force for moving the operation unit and the driving force of the operation driving means to the operation unit. When the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is longer than when the distance between the operation unit and the operated means is short. D7 is a gaming machine D7 comprising a switching means for increasing the vibration transmission efficiency of the vibrating means to the operated means.

Here, when the input means that can be operated by the player is spontaneously vibrated by the vibrating means, it is better to bring the vibrating means closer to the part operated by the player, which is the vibration given to the player when the player operates. Can be increased. On the other hand, since the operation site is located at the position where the impact during operation is the largest, if the vibrating means is arranged at that position, there is a risk of failure due to the impact during operation. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a feeling of vibration and to secure a long service life of the vibrating means at the same time.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the vibration transmission efficiency is adjusted by the switching means. Therefore, it is possible to secure the distance between the vibrating means and the operation unit, and prevent the feeling of vibration given to the player from being reduced even if the distance is long.

In addition, the operation target is enlarged by separating the operation unit from the operated means, and the operation of the input means by the player is facilitated, while the vibration feeling is reduced by the player's fingers moving away from the vibrating means. As a result, by increasing the vibration transmission efficiency by the switching means, it is possible to secure (level) the vibration given to the player who touches the input means.

As a result, the operation unit is separated from the operated means and the operation target becomes large, so that the vibration given to the player in a situation (so-called “super hot” situation) that makes us feel that the degree of expectation is high in appearance. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the extremely weak feeling.

The degree of expectation includes the degree of expectation of reach development and the degree of expectation of big hit occurrence. Here, the reach development expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of developing to reach, and the jackpot occurrence expectation is the rate, possibility or expectation of jackpot occurrence.

The vibration sensation includes a sensation that the player who touches the member receives through the member, and a sensation that the player receives the vibration by another sensation (for example, visual sense) without touching the member (for example, the member's sensation). The feeling of vibrating by seeing an afterimage in the vicinity) is included.

The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the operated means operates in an operation mode in which the operating speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, and the operation driving means is arranged on the side where the speed of the operated means is low. Game machine D8.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, when a violent operation such as hitting the operated means is performed, the impact given to the operation driving means is applied while maintaining the intensity of the operation. It can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as an operation mode in which the operation speed is increased or decreased depending on the location, for example, the operated means is rotatably supported by an axis and rotates in the circumferential direction of a circle about the axis, or the axis is not supported. In addition, an operation mode of tilting with a part such as an end as a base point is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D7 or D8, the operating unit is separated from the operated means by the driving force of the operating driving means, and the switching means changes means to the extent that the operated means and the operating unit can be connected. The means for changing the degree thereof generates an urging force for moving the operating portion in a direction close to the operated means, and the urging force is the distance between the operated means and the operating portion. D9 is a gaming machine characterized in that it rises as the length increases.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7 or D8, the operating unit can be maintained on the side close to the operated means by generating a urging force in which the degree changing means varies, and the operated means can be operated. Adjust the buffering action of vibration transmission between the machine and the operating unit (keep the buffering action large when the operated means and the operating unit are placed close to each other, and reduce the buffering action when placed at a distance. )be able to. That is, the degree changing means can have a plurality of functions, and the number of members can be reduced.

The mode of the degree changing means is not particularly limited. For example, it may be formed from an elastic spring made of metal, or it may be formed from an air spring.

In any of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the switching means approaches the vibrating means in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means as the operating unit moves away from the operated means, and at least the said. The displacement means includes a second transmission means that can come into contact with the vibrating means when the operating unit is most distant from the operated means, and the displacement means attaches the operating unit to the operated means. D10 is a gaming machine D10 comprising a connecting means for operably connecting along a direction intersecting with a moving direction of the machine.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D7 to D9, the vibration of the vibrating means is transmitted to the connecting means by the contact between the second transmitting means and the vibrating means, and the operating direction of the connecting means. Since the vibration along the line is transmitted to the operation unit, it is possible to easily give the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means to the player who touches the operation unit.

For example, when the operation mode of the operated means during operation is a rotational operation about a predetermined axis, the vibration in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the operated means (that is, the vibration in the radial direction of the predetermined axis) is generated. Since it does not fluctuate depending on the length of the rotating arm (because it is not related to the moment), it is possible to secure a large vibration transmitted to the player even when the operating portion is separated from the operated means.

It is possible to change the vibration felt by the player touching the operated means and the vibration felt by the player touching the operation unit. As a result, while using a common vibration means, the mode of vibration transmitted by the part operated by the player can be changed, and different vibration effects (vibration transmission) can be performed, so that various vibration effects can be performed. Can be achieved.

In addition, for example, by accommodating the operation driving means, the transmitting means, and the second transmitting means in the connecting means, there arises a problem that the state of the driving force transmission path changes due to the vibration of the connecting means and the transmission resistance increases. It can be prevented from doing so.

In any of the gaming machines D7 to D10, the transmission means includes a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force when an overload occurs between the operation unit and the operation drive means. Game machine D11.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D7 to D10, the operation driving means is overloaded due to the player operating the operation unit by an unexpected operation method, and the operation driving means. It is possible to prevent problems such as failure of the slingshot. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the operation of the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines D7 to D11, the operated means is rotatably supported along the input direction, and the operated portion is separated from the rotating axis of the operated means. A gaming machine D12 characterized by moving away from the means.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D7 to D11, the arm length of rotation about the rotation axis of the operated means is due to the movement of the operating unit by the driving force of the operating driving means. Since it changes, the reaction force applied to the player who operates the operation unit can be changed according to the movement amount of the operation unit.

Further, when the operation unit is the farthest from the operated means, that is, when the operation target becomes the largest (the operable range becomes the largest and the operation becomes easier), the reaction force given to the player who operates the operation unit is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue accumulated in the player during operation. As a result, the player can be urged to operate the operation unit.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the load changing means includes a urging means that generates an urging force along the operation direction of the operated means, and the urging means moves the operated means. A first state, which is configured to be deformable and maintains the same amount of movement of the operated means from a predetermined state and the amount of deformation of the urging means, and a deformation amount of the urging means from the predetermined state. The gaming machine D13 is characterized in that it can be switched to a second state in which the movement amount of the operated means is less than the movement amount of the operated means.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the amount of deformation of the urging means when the operated means moves by a predetermined amount by switching between the first state and the second state. Can be switched. Thereby, even if the elastic modulus of the urging means is the same, the load applied to the player who operates the operated means by a predetermined amount can be changed between the first state and the second state. Therefore, it is not necessary to control to change the elastic modulus of the urging means in advance, and the reaction force generated from the urging means can be changed according to the operation timing.

The mode of change of the load with respect to the amount of deformation is not limited at all. For example, it may be a linear change mode (elastic spring or the like) or a non-linear deformation mode.

In the gaming machine D13, the load changing means is arranged on the opposite side of the operation side portion arranged in the urging means and in contact with the operated means and the operation side portion of the urging means, and the gaming machine main body. During the input operation, at least one of the contact position between the main body side portion supported by the pachinko and pachislot machine and the contact position between the operated means and the operation side portion, or the support position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is described. The gaming machine D14 comprising: a position changing means capable of changing to a side where the urging force of the urging means is weakened.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D13, the position changing means can break the correspondence between the operating length of the operated means and the displacement amount of the urging means during the input operation. , The rate of change in the load given to the player as a reaction force of the urging means can be changed during the input operation.

In the gaming machine D14, the position changing means has a first state in which the state is fixed in close proximity to the operation side portion or the main body side portion of the urging means, and a first state in which the state is released from the fixed state. The moving means includes a moving means capable of switching between two states by movement, a moving driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means, and a control means for controlling the driving mode of the moving driving means. The second invariant range includes a first invariant range and a second invariant range as a range in which the load applied to the player is maintained even if the position is displaced from the operated means in the second state, and each of these invariant ranges is the operated. A gaming machine characterized in that it is arranged in order from the movement base end side along the movement direction of the means, and the length of the second invariant range is longer than the length of the first invariant range. D15.

According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D14, the second invariant range arranged on the moving tip side is longer than the first invariant range arranged on the moving base end side. As the operating speed of the operated means increases, the invariant range in which the moving means is supported moves to the moving tip side of the operated means (the support position of the moving means moves to the moving tip side of the operated means). Therefore, the load given to the player can be reduced in the case of operating at the second speed as compared with the case of operating at the first speed.

It should be noted that the support of either end of the urging means may be released. When releasing the support point on the pedal side, it is essential to move along the peripheral surface (not in a mode of being pushed by the operation tip surface).

When the moving direction of the pedal and the moving direction of the moving means are orthogonal to each other, it is possible to suppress the reaction force applied to the player during the operation from changing to the driving timing of the moving means.

In the gaming machine D14 or D15, the control means puts the moving means into the first state and the second state in a time shorter than the time required for the operated means to move completely in the moving range at the second speed. The gaming machine D16 characterized by being controlled in a switching mode.

According to the gaming machine D16, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D14 or D15, it is possible to prevent the operation of the operated means from being completed while the moving means is maintained in the first state. This makes it possible to prevent the load applied to the player when operating at the second speed from becoming larger than the load applied to the player when operating at the first speed.

Control can be performed to change the support position by the position changing means by driving the moving driving means based on the control means. Therefore, the load applied to the player via the urging means can be changed by control.

In the gaming machine D16, the position changing means can change at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion in a plurality of steps. The control means moves the moving means in a manner in which the contact position and the support position cannot be changed in a plurality of stages while the position changing means is maintained in the second state. Characteristic gaming machine D17.

According to the gaming machine D17, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D16, depending on the number of times the moving means is maintained in the second state, the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion, or the gaming machine main body. It is possible to specify the maximum number of times that at least one of the support positions with the main body side portion changes. This makes it possible to prevent the above-mentioned contact position or support position from changing too much regardless of the speed at which the operated means is operated.

In the gaming machine D17, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion changes at a predetermined stage, whereby the attachment is made. The gaming machine D18, characterized in that the urging force generated from the force means toward the operated means disappears.

According to the gaming machine D18, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D18, at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is at a predetermined stage. When the change occurs, of the reaction force given to the player who operates the operated means, the reaction force generated by the urging means disappears, so that the player can easily notice the change in the reaction force.

In any of the gaming machines D15 to D18, a change in at least one of the contact position between the operated means and the operating side portion or the supporting position between the gaming machine main body and the main body side portion is the operation to be performed. The gaming machine D19, which is generated by executing the operation of the means.

According to the gaming machine D19, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D15 to D18, the change in the urging force (degree of change) of the urging means occurs when the player operates the operated means ( That is, since the state of the urging means is not changed in advance), it is necessary to prevent the urging force of the urging means from being noticed from the state (for example, appearance) of the operated means before the operation. It is possible to promote the operation of the operated means.

Further, since the urging force of the urging means changes as the player operates the operated means, it is possible to easily change the changing mode of the urging force depending on the operation mode.

In any of the gaming machines D14 to D19, a notification means for notifying the player for a predetermined period for prompting the player to operate the input means is provided, and the notification by the notification means prompts the operation by the first speed. In addition, the gaming machine D20 characterized in that the load changing means functions.

According to the gaming machine D20, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D14 to D19, by operating the input means by preventing the load on the operation from becoming large even at the time of the production in which the operation timing is not specified in detail. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue given to the player. As a result, the stress given to the player when operating the input means can be reduced, and the possibility (or probability) that the player operates the input means to participate in the game can be increased.

<An example of the technical idea that the tilting device is locked at the position where the type of operation changes>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means includes an operated means to be input-operated by the player and a locking means for locking the movement of the operated means. The operated means can change the mode of input between at least the first input and the second input depending on the operation amount, and is locked to the locking means at a locking position where the second input is not performed. The gaming machine E1 characterized by being played.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for a player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input mode is changed according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine to be used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-024322). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to pay attention to the posture of the operated means in order to plan the timing of changing the input mode, or the pushing amount is adjusted by the load given to the player by the operated means. There is a problem that it is difficult to stop the operated means at the timing when the input mode is changed.

Therefore, for example, there is a problem that the continuous striking operation may not be recognized while entering the range of the pushing operation without recognizing the boundary between the continuous striking operation and the pushing operation that changes the pushing amount, and the game may not be comfortable. there were.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the operated means is locked to the locking means at a position where the second input of the operated means is not performed, so that the position where the operated means is second input is performed. It can be reliably stopped before it invades. Therefore, the operation of the operated means can be completed within the first input range, and the comfort of the game can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the moving speed of the operated means becomes excessive as compared with the case where the moving range is moved and partitioned without being locked in the middle. This makes it possible to prevent damage to the operated means.

The mode of the locking means is not particularly limited, and various modes can be adopted. For example, the member that locks the operated means may be displaced close to the operated means by a solenoid or a spring by detecting that the operated means is arranged at the locked position, or the operated means may be displaced. A fixed magnet that attracts the means while being arranged at a predetermined position may be provided and locked by the adsorption. Further, when the operated means rotates, it may be locked in relation to the shape of the shaft rod that pivotally supports the operated means and the shape of the shaft hole that supports the shaft rod.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with an urging means for generating an urging force for moving the operated means toward an initial position, and the locked means to be operated by the locking means is locked up to the locked position. The gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is released by the operation of the second stage started after moving the means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the unlocking of the operated means by the locking means moves the operated means to the locking position against the urging force of the urging means. Since it is released by the operation of the second stage which is started after that, it is possible to suppress the operation after the locked position vigorously. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operation of moving the operated means from the state in which the operated means is arranged at the initial position to the end of the movement at once.

The second stage operation started after moving the operated means to the locked position is, for example, when the operated means is pushed in, it is pushed in the same direction again at the locked position. Examples include an operation, an operation of being pushed in a direction different from the direction of being pushed up to the locking position, an operation of arranging a trigger member in a manner imitating a trigger on the operated means, and pulling the trigger member. To.

In the gaming machine E2, the operating direction of the operation in the second stage is different from the operating direction of the operation performed from the state where the operated means is arranged at the initial position. ..

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the operation direction of the operation in the second stage is different from the operation direction of the operation performed from the state where the operated means is arranged at the initial position. Therefore, for example, when a continuous striking operation is requested in a state where the operated means is arranged between the initial position and the locked position, the operated means is mistakenly arranged in the locked position. Even if the operation of pressing the operating means is performed, the locked state of the operated means is not released, so that the continuous striking operation can be continued. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from unexpectedly erroneously operating the operated means.

In the game machine E2, the operated means is configured to be rotatable, and the rotation axis of the operated means is a first axis which is a rotation center in a state where the operated means is arranged at an initial position, and a first axis thereof. It is possible to move between a second axis different from the one axis, and the rotation axis can be started to move while the operated means is arranged at the locking position. When the operated means rotates about the first axis, the contact locking member which comes into contact with the operated means in the circumferential direction is provided, and when the operated means rotates around the second axis, the said The gaming machine E4 characterized in that the contact between the operated means and the contact locking member is released.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, whether or not the operated means comes into contact with the abutting locking member of the abutting means is determined by the operated means rotating about the first rotation axis. Since it changes depending on whether it rotates about the second rotation axis, it is possible to lock the operated means and release the lock without adding another movable member. This makes it possible to reduce the number of members.

When it is possible to start the movement of the rotating shaft while the operated means is arranged at the locked position, the shape of the rotating shaft of the operated means is not a perfect circle shape and is incomplete with a notch. When the shaft hole is composed of a circle and the shaft hole through which the rotating shaft is inserted is not a perfect circle but is composed of a shape having a convex portion, the notch and the convex are formed with the operated means arranged at the locking position. An example is a case where the rotating shaft and the shaft hole are formed in a shape in which the portions are brought into contact with each other and the rotating shaft can move from the first position to the second position along the shaft hole in that posture. ..

The relationship between the shape of the rotating shaft and the shaft hole is not limited, and the rotating shaft and the shaft hole may be composed of a cylindrical rotating shaft and a long hole-shaped shaft hole, and both the rotating shaft and the shaft hole have irregularities. It may be configured in a deformed shape having.

In the gaming machine E4, the urging force generated by the urging means has a direction of returning the rotation of the operated means to the initial position side and a direction of returning the rotation axis of the operated means to the first axis side. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being hung in both directions.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, the urging force generated by the urging means returns the rotation of the operated means to the initial position side and the rotation axis of the operated means is the first axis. Since it can be applied in both directions of returning to the side, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of urging means arranged as the moving direction of the operated means increases.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the rotation operation of the operated means from the initial position is a pushing operation performed from the front to the back with the player playing the operated means as a reference, and the first axis is , The gaming machine E6 characterized in that it is arranged on the front side of the second axis.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of the game machine E4 or E5, the rotation operation from the initial position of the operated means is pushed from the front to the back with the player playing the operated means as a reference. It is an operation, and since the first axis is arranged on the front side of the second axis, the player can call the operated means when the rotation axis of the operated means is moved from the first axis to the second axis. The angle between the direction of the load and the direction of the load applied by the player when the operated means is rotated is reduced, and the rotation axis of the operated means is smoothly moved from the operation of rotating the operated means. You can move on to the operation.

<Minimum configuration is the top of gaming machines C, and some restrictions are the top of gaming machines A and E>
In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies a load to the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the operated means in the opposite direction of the input operation, and also applies the load. A load changing means configured to be changeable is provided, and the load changing means is the opposite of the first urging means for transmitting an urging force to the operated means and the operated means for the first urging means. The second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the side, and the first urging means arranged between the first urging means and the second urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. A gaming machine F1 comprising: an urging means and an urging force changing means formed so as to be able to change the urging force generated by the second urging means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operated means for the player to perform a pushing operation is provided, and the input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There are gaming machines that are controlled (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-252949). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the urging means for applying the urging force to the operated means is formed by a single coil spring, the player can make a difference in the reaction force from the stage where the operating width of the operated means is small. There was a problem that the sense of presence at the time of operation was insufficient because it could be recognized. That is, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to cause a change in reaction force only when the pushing width becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the first urging means for applying the urging force to the operated means by the urging force changing means and the second urging means connected in series with the first urging means. Since the deformation mode can be adjusted, for example, the reaction force can be changed while the operation amount of the operated member is small, while the reaction force can be changed after the operated means is sufficiently operated. .. This makes it possible to increase the sense of presence during operation.

The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the urging force changing means is provided with a load generating means formed so as to be able to apply a load in a direction along the operating direction of the operated means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, by applying a load to the urging force changing means by the load generating means, the urging force of the first urging means and the second attachment to the arrangement of the operated means. It is possible to change the relationship between the force and the force of the force.

The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the load from the load generating means is formed in such a manner that the load is eliminated when the operating amount of the operated means exceeds a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the load from the load generating means disappears when the operating amount of the operated means exceeds a predetermined amount. It is possible to continuously set the range of the operation amount in which the load is generated from the load generating means and the range of the operation amount in which the load is not generated from the load generating means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the urging force changing means includes an interlocking means that moves with the movement of the operated means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, it is impossible to grasp the change in the load given to the player via the operated means before the operation of the operated means. Can be.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the urging force changing means includes a stretching means that expands and contracts along a direction in which the first urging means and the second urging means are arranged in series. Machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, at least one of the first urging means and the second urging means is preliminarily contracted while the position of the operated means is maintained. By setting it, the reaction force with respect to the arrangement of the operated means can be changed.

The mode of expansion and contraction of the expansion and contraction means is not limited at all. For example, the upper plate and the lower plate may be driven to change the interval, or an arbitrary number of plates may be inserted between the upper plate and the lower plate, and the plate may expand and contract by the thickness of the inserted plates. good.

In the gaming machine F5, the expanding / contracting means is formed so as to be able to expand / contract to one side of the first urging means side or the second urging means side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, the urging force generated with respect to the arrangement of the operated means of the first urging means or the second urging means can be changed independently.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the expanding / contracting means is expanded / contracted by the driving force of a single driving means.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5 or F6, the expansion / contraction means can be expanded / contracted by a single driving means, so that the number of arranged driving means can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the urging force changing means includes an intermediate means movably arranged between the first urging means and the second urging means, and the first urging means and the first urging means. 2. The gaming machine F8 comprising: regulating means configured to be able to regulate the movement of the intermediate means in the direction in which the urging means are connected in series.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the first urging means and the first urging means and the first urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means depending on whether the movement of the intermediate means is permitted or restricted. 2 The urging force generated by the urging means can be switched.

In the gaming machine F8, the regulating means includes a plurality of contacting means formed so as to be able to come into contact with the intermediate means.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, the movement of the intermediate means can be regulated by a plurality of contact means. Therefore, it is possible to regulate the movement of the intermediate means at a plurality of positions while using a single regulating means.

In the gaming machine F9, the plurality of contacting means are formed by making the lengths of the facing arrangement surfaces facing the intermediate means different in the moving direction of the intermediate means.

According to the gaming machine F10, since the lengths of the intermediate means of the facing arrangement surfaces of the plurality of contact means are formed differently in the moving direction, each contact means is made to correspond to various operation modes of the intermediate means. Can be done.

The gaming machine Z1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B17, C1 to C20, D1 to D20, E1 to E6, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The featured gaming machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a means to be operated by a player to perform a pushing operation, and is controlled in such a manner that input is switched according to the pushing amount (displacement, speed, strength, etc.) of the operated means. There is a gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 1: 2010-252949).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the reaction force generated when the operating member is operated. The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine having a good reaction force generated when operating an operating member.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a gaming machine provided with an input means for the player to perform an input operation, and the input means is an operated means to be input-operated by the player and a subject thereof. The operating means is provided with a load changing means that applies a load in the opposite direction of the input operation and is configured to be able to change the load, and the load changing means is a first urging force that transmits an urging force to the operated means. Between the means and the second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the opposite side of the operated means with respect to the first urging means, and between the first urging means and the second urging means. The urging force changing means, which is arranged in the above and is formed so as to be able to change the urging force generated by the first urging means and the second urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. The means includes telescopic means that expand and contract along the direction in which the first urging means and the second urging means are arranged in series.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the telescopic means is formed so as to be able to expand and contract to one side of the first urging means side or the second urging means side.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the expanding / contracting means expands / contracts by the driving force of a single driving means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the reaction force at the time of operating the operating member can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, a plurality of types of reaction force change modes can be provided.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the number of drive means arranged can be reduced.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
81 Third symbol display device (notification means)
201 MPU (control means)
300-17300 Operation device (input means)
310, 2310, 3310, 4310, 5310, 6310, 7310, 8310, 9310, 12310, 13310, 14310 Tilt device (operated means)
332 Acting claw part (acting part)
332b Lower end surface (contact part)
332d Front arc part (part of the first contact section)
332e Rear arc part (part of the second contact section)
343 Torsion spring (urging means, first elastic spring member)
362 Bouncer (part of adjustment means, part of change means)
362a Piston member (part of the second elastic spring member, part of the elastic spring member, operation side)
362b Coil spring (part of second elastic spring member, part of elastic spring member, part of urging means, first urging means)
410 Fastening fixing part (part of connecting means)
420, 15420 1st arm (part of connecting means)
440, 14440 Operation unit 450 Drive motor (operation drive means)
451 1st cam (part of release means)
460 transmission device (transmission means)
464 2nd cam (part of release means)
470 Vibration transmission member (part of switching means, second transmission means)
2326 Switching operation member (moving member)
5372 escape hole (part of blocking means)
5380 Third urging device (part of load changing means)
5383 Torsion spring (part of elastic spring member)
6316 Curved wall part (side wall part)
6380 4th urging device (part of load changing means)
6381 Rotating member (braking auxiliary member)
7318 Slide device (part of locking means)
7319a Acting member (part of auxiliary operating member)
7319c Inertial action member (inertial member)
8319a Acting member (part of auxiliary operating member)
9343 Torsion spring (part of urging means)
9361i Locking rubber member (part of abutment locking member)
9371a Locking plane (part of abutment locking member)
10362, 11362, 16362, 17362 Bouncer (part of load changing means)
10362d Moving end member (main body side, part of interlocking means, part of intermediate means)
10362e, 16362e, 17362e Return spring (second urging means)
10362f Stepped member (moving means, part of position changing means, part of urging force changing means, regulating means)
11362f Stepped member (moving means, part of position changing means, part of urging force changing means, regulating means)
16362g lowering device (part of urging force changing means, part of load generating means)
17362d Moving end member (part of telescopic means, part of intermediate means)
17362g Member deformation device (part of urging force changing means, part of expansion / contraction means)
17362g3 Drive motor (drive means)
M1 drive motor (rotary motor, drive means, part of vibration means)
M1a weight member (part of vibration means)
Ma1 moving magnet (part of the working part)
Ma2 fixed magnet (magnetic load member)
Ma81 fixed magnet (part of fixed wall)
MT1, MT2, MT3 protrusions (part of contact means)
MT1a, MT2a, MT3a Locking surface (part of facing arrangement surface)
MTU, MTB protrusion (part of contact means)
N1 straight line O1 rotation axis SP1 spring (part of switching means, degree changing means)
SOL10, SOL11 drive solenoid (drive means, part of position change means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine provided with an input means for a player to perform an input operation, the input means applies a load to the operated means to be input-operated by the player and the operated means in the opposite direction of the input operation, and also applies the load. Equipped with a load changing means that can be changed,
The load changing means includes a first urging means for transmitting an urging force to the operated means and a first urging means.
A second urging means arranged in series with the first urging means on the opposite side of the operated means with respect to the first urging means.
It is arranged between the first urging means and the second urging means, and is formed so as to be able to change the urging force generated by the first urging means and the second urging means with respect to the arrangement of the operated means. Equipped with a means of changing the force of force
The gaming machine characterized in that the urging force changing means includes a stretching means that expands and contracts along a direction in which the first urging means and the second urging means are arranged in series. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the telescopic means is formed so as to be able to expand and contract to one side of the first urging means side or the second urging means side. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the telescopic means expands and contracts by the driving force of a single driving means.

Images